hoUr s PHYSICS XI (Subjective) 1

Chapter 1

MEASUREMENTS

|Learning Objectives|
i. Understand what is Physics?
2. Understand that all physical quantities consist of a numerical magnit
3- Recall the base quantities and their units.
4- Describe and use base, supplementary and derived units.
5 - Understand and use the scientific notation.
6. Use the standard prefixes and their symbols to in -
sub multiples or multiples to both
base and derived units.
7. Understand and use the conventions for indicating units.
8. Understand the distinction between systematic errors and random errors.
.
9 - Understand and use the significant
between
figures
precision and accuracy.
10 . Understand the distinction
In a derived quantity by simple addition of actual, fractional or percentage
ii- Assess the uncertainty
uncertainties.
, number of significant figures and units on all
12. Quote answers with correct scientific notation
numerical and prac* cal w ;rk.
homogeneity of physical equations.
Use dim. ' ;iona » to check the
13

*4*
-
Der*
_ rm.
'
ie in simple cases
.
using dimensions
 CONCEPT MAP
Measurement
T
i i 1 I
Physics Physical
Quantities
Scientific
Notation Prefixes
Conventions for
indicating Units
ignincant
Figures
Prcctt% or
and accuracy
O
1 o
•
• Importance of
Physics
Random Rrror &

Base Units Derived Units

z
o
Dimension of
Physical quantity ^

Checking the Derivation

homogeneity of of possible formula
physical equation O

i J I la
-L J
* S(.hobr ’ * PHYSICS XI fSi» bJ« < tivi j 3

I ,
-tried
A m <» f > ha , always wanted to observe, think and reason aboutthe world around
to find ways to organic the disorder in the observed facts about
For Your Information
Science is the knowledge
h rri Man
the natural phenomena and material things in orderly manner which results for of logical reasoning.
the single discipline of toi*n< <>, railed natural philosophy
Q j How ran we classify the study of nature ?

Areas of Physics
Mechanics
Classification of the Study of Nature Heat & Therma ynamics

The study of nature may be clarified into two branches: Electromagnets

Optics
1. Biological Science
Sound
The science of living things is called Biological science. Hydrodynamics
2. Physical Science General relativity
The science of non-living things is called Physical science Quantum mechanics
Atomic physics
Q,2 What it physics ? Molecular physics
n.Mv,4 Nuclear physics
Physics Solid-state physics
'' n
Physics the branch of science concerned with the properties of matte SKF' ' Particle physics
r and
energy and the relationships between them. Super conductivity

In other words, physics is basically the study of how objects behave.

Physics is an important and the basic part of physicalI science.
It is the experimental science. Interdisciplinary Areas
of Physics
0,3 Describe the main frontiers of fundamental science . •Astrophysics
• B»opnys»cs
• Chemical Physics
• Engineering Physics
• Geophysics
Main Frontiers of Fundamental Science • Medical Pnysics
• Physical Oceanograpn>
There are three mam frontiers c ! fundarm ntal s ence
1) The world of extremely larg e . universe
.
2) The world of the ext <. efy sma . . e particles such as electrons, protons,
neutrons, meson' 'ndo> «v
3) The world of . lidr' ed things ( from molecule at one extreme to the
*
-
Earth 3t th ® othe It i tne world of complex matter
04 Dev H * som. new branches of physics. Also describe the role of
Pbytfcs developing technology.

Bf »r . ,s
^ .
hy'ici
&V the T of HT century many physicists started believing that every thing
' ^ &*f - " has beeo discovered However, about the beginning of the 20
'*' Corrpixer chips are made trom
,
n
irrwt " * w e / per . mental farrs revealed that the laws formulated by •vUws ot vw metakoxJ stacon
the
<si
' vest .gators nv- ed modification a senconduaor
 C hapter I [M 4Murem ntl
4 * Si holm * n I’llYHICK
^ MuhJi' Hvi )
l( i'

( i ) NIK lent Phyilf * ;; ;h

,.T ,
.. - * ^ “*• •*
1
rn /i Ml 1 . nllml MM , h I h\ «
1 hi’ hi am Iml phyvli % whli h Jr <ih wllh ah null <
„, r M - md
' v ^ lly intluifri « tfrellcuUr hunch of N lam •or phyil,,
( ) i* «itkl<! rhy »ic %
*he hi mu h
lull «*<»<!» |Mt »Vl l n mum H| '
'

""" •
1 i » i phyih whU 1 I * »m ’
hml leu k i i »in|ni% t» cl h i . > IIIMI pm 11» I*
( i) MelatlvUtlc Mo * h§nl< *
’
i i l |U - | will )
'
•
Ihr ultlnuitr funiltlr % of whlih

"
^ ’ 7" '

,
' 0

f lub ' ' ritalnhin Inti HO,I 0 11 |0,

f
. ,. , ,." 101« . Hi CM ,,,, „,,, ,, „„„yM„
, ' "
‘" . a |m
, , apprChuhlhK thdl Hwhl If. .
Urn pionume I « nun IH'gljglblp llurnbti I 11 mi Hr , m l #) -. rpSlo’9 III,' pUma < |, 1 nlly Hflin llv h Hi ,1 il oi . . ,
.
. , I ilddln wllh volt) Ulna ol " , "
the hi am h of | I » VV ‘
» b u |ii
, ,
al iiMitniniie il flalrls I’luMim , ll «tort» ha pr «i|t»iUcUJl ll « ur > llk »?H,„„, ,f l|cb, - „ , ' '"
L

. "
. '|iuniU Klrunyly m
f h’ , n I .fm -, .111 1 I * » ,» fi %|iln( ml ,1 , ll- t II it , M 4lr < of

.- , * - .„
pr
" , * " * i
„** -
(

i .died iVhillvhth mm liflhli % ' ' '

(

( 4) Solid Statu Phyllis

uniim
, ,,
Ilk *,K « s
. *!« « hew
,
iWlfrlt
,( f l n, {ii ll fldltl 11 limy filml Mm linn MI I <n ftlrimaiil , l„* , n and iluul lo laytrs
MUKMIM'J bviil 'jllvnamlu IMIIOJ Magnate) flul l < lynm lM „
, * >b
.
»
. „* . , „ -.
M • -
i deflnll
* voliiiiin IIMIQII Bp
r l yil ,, maM 0llr % I Ilm 1,1.11,, I, „
d In
, ommun |)I VIM it
,
unllk
* ,
„„, 1
undtt th « Influ nc*

•
Ihd branch » » phyklis whlih I* * «^n* ^rnorl wllh the structure and properties of
Stub’ physli *.
nln tilt ally » ofidn* tlntf Ihiltl* l Minp|u » „1 »U( li Hulth l»filnd« rilliimat, llnulil motaU, m l «1 w lor , Iht word nn gn io hytfrudyimmki
(MMD ) I ilorlvad from in» «lu „ ,i„ „ „ - „ „
„.- , „
,
lloUl, « <l hydro m« Aitl R liquid, « id ,lyn«micMTu, irtg mov mtnt rh« ld«a of „
. .
..
f phyilu whirl Ituitl»« th« ilyrtoirtlu „ f

p
k 10II1K h 1 alhul
Oth# r broncho of bhy ^ lc *. for Yum lllfulllhlliun
* * .,. ,
k
. . „, ,
MW!11# tlml nmHiiutk lioldh « nn huh mr - In l vli||c nfidu IVP fluid, whli h • irotr l o on th» fluid, and Uo r.ha|* iho
, .. , ,
lli’liI lit,nil II I ,<l« i Mtiwn » *, M » » p | hb ,m iihyfth - li In Hie ‘
.
Mi . ( , , ( „ - ,
*
„
.linly n| |ilir nnn limy m , in n ,|ui „lly In ilm uitlvnriu ll h » fiinrl,„MprU d pan
. .
*
.
,nl,
I'hynli \ 1 nunl funclfliiionldl * » f . 01 iclencd ). irul pfdVldt» » othfi hr .im:h « v of « i,| dm itiuily
" I ’ pmmi . Ihr , Jhtl Inv
. . lull 'll
' * .
ill( i|,‘mil only In Uiitloi • . l aittlliiK ilm milvtol -
’ o, Iml ulm U, pint Hi cl mvoiy day 111«,
It t lit , IIIm ill" 1 | "Mill n n| MimiiUiMludilunn « id WwolliPi •uiitilllcws . 11 h iml,|UP hum ulluti llnlil’, ,,( « dinpliys|r *. whlih sUidy ilmlUii
, , ,
%

prlruiplg and lunddmunul law \ Ihb tivml«p|) lnH of phyMml arul

. ., . •
|ii tiit »ii, In 11 ml |i 1, nhy’ i • mill / . miv-ivuifinniiU Iron high » tll M ndn mi keh and ’inn o, lofl
, , . , .
fei IPHC v knit )

other field # dvrr lllrlh to n» W hi ,m, hos • l » hnrin

‘ "
,: um.'ilhllllUv h I - ' - I " m m 'ii *, In whlili iln- niaiitu ImlirtVttH III", 0 Mulct wlllmui Vlgcunlly ml. will Infinite thniTinl , nudu, ilvliy Ilm .
.
10
* . ' , . .
1

© Mili- lkiiu will, I • 1,ml" Ill n it |l,|,il l, will Mow urn nnlmlUihly, ami >ibu will Im „
. . ,m< - i uni( > t!iaiuiu HnouijhuMl Ih&ll
Itatwurria | ,’K n Hy dm ‘ .

Imlirtvlitiii ub» i voil In lli|iild helium „

1

Mole of Phy «k % In lechnolOKV n , -

1 ipnippraUifpi near absolute / am ( * C, o
• l-'hyik * « 1 %, » pluy. an Important role In the development of technology
to •• ‘>,,*| i )
iMiit
4
ifluidity
f« /
ih
, mill ( U w
Hii Hunlnv
" . |H !y m* »a In,Ilm fill
"
fl « > w
)’
mfi
.
ullmr rNttii
llunlri . '
"
Imlirtvluiu ul elm Itoiin In d IU| III nudu, HUH *,nlld
, „ .. , .
, , . , .
- lidl inaterhiK
•juui idi ' lutaclly mm Wlilil m In l elnw chdi icimlMlc mppr itur«i
and angloiroilnH.
SB
, , dlyUV
,
.
.
(
It
' , " " alrrt
Ml| » Miiulnci ' lly •> .1 | liPi (fkiy oni i nhsnrvBil In ‘ ,
/
, ,
rplhtmu . i ?

.
nl
,
<
, t \ U
'! i ln
overnl nirldh and rnramlc 1 mleriaU When lhoi« rndtprlflK me cooltd m lonipriatUro»
, .
i '

.
• „
• , u and iruhnoloKV are a vital force for change in the outlook ol 10» ‘ '
» dr oluu . -
. ( o deRK - K « Mn , -• degiewi ( ulftluti) to tlquhl nlUogan timip«r iiurpi ( 11 K, mi, C), their pUnii il
ion
mankind A/dUMir
V' O< V« M*I
.
faititlMK
1 f lilrtiu'
1

"
n
* '
limps, With .1 lump down to / cm.
tom
^ /

.
whlili »l«u trk al rashtauce Is zero I*- i«lled ( lie rrlttr al lcniper»Ui»e ( ( , ) end vnrle* wllh the Individual matoii*! lor . .
,U’* I hr HMinmMtiim
, -
• the Information motfla and the fa ^ t munm « »l communication * have
brought all parti « »! tin- world in close enntac 1 wllh one anothur
M
W
^ . u,
*CM
,
* *» »
IMMI 1
H>

c
»*
fHfUtiiel 1 " iir -

,
> rrltlirtl lemptudiure -. . ,i «L rtdiloved
. hy 1 oollOB niHlorlaU
mulertub luiV« Hu uli-i tiltel 1 tnUttince, meenlng elm iroiv can imvel Himuid lliiun Ireuly, lhoy < ,m 1 any Ur'Ke aniuunt * nl rlettrU il current
, ,
fill long pe luds ,f II nr without losing runny a,* heat . Superconducting loop ol wlm have been shown to tarty electrical currents fur
,
wllh olthu liquid helium or liquid
. nltrugan .
.
IltK 4U%r thr m

livenh In one part of the world Immediately reverh»*rate round the globe 10 * $W si’ Vi i il yom *
,
( • wllh tin me c n , . ..
ililu - luss
,
ltd , 'pinpedy has Inlplli allnns , In ,*
oUsclil al |iuWi * i trwnsrnlsfilun , II tiansmlsslon lines , an he made of

till aI slur ,,|{ e dftvli CS .

UdMy
» Wrs > ir t» living the age of Information technology . iii|in 1 ondui Hi ip , I ainli and h >
' 1«
"
It is til Inmi\ h LI| phyvlts which Involves the betuivlur and pmperile * ol Unlit, Including Its Interaoloris with mallei and
du-
• the computer networks are product * of (. trips developed from the basic 10» m ,
** r
1! ' "
* *
construction of Instruments that use or deled It Optics usually descrlbtl the behavior ol visible, ultraviolet , and Infrared light
Ideas of phytic * Ihe ( hips are made of silicon Silicon can be obtained , fluids , especially Incompressible fluids , In motion it Is concerned
Qrder for m. ,golludiof iftmi dynamics
ttvdlfillvilioikl " Ih I am Ii of sclent that deals with the of ,

,
with ho me hmdi il properties fluids .
)

of
" It inll . that how quickly 0 object tan imvel In 0 Hold ( aemple a person swimming In water .
from tand dhl nu n
(
, . , weak
. sandi astle the
the Into action , intriaiuuu
UcatVMhlKmalvm U 1» ne I > f the four fundarnmUel Inlerectlons
) In nature The other throe strong
It It up tO Ul whether we make 1 of a ( ompuler out of It . and gravitation I lectromegnellsm 1» the force that causes the* Interaction between electrically charged panicles , the areas In which ihK

dJpqptiyilil ( he hifliK I , ill physici r oou' fiiml wllh Urn physli id and , hmoli nl properties, origin, am solution of Ih
'
hu.ila ioi f 1 ,
happi.Mis me . II 1 I I - , .. ., , , . , , , , ,
AHI - iI I - l Is I I tmnuKnnthm Is I " | KHIMM
,. lor |
" m Hi ally . , 11 H „ - ph . - mmu - n ., encountered In dally Ilf . W 1\
* ,
. , "
1

,, forces between Individual molecules In matte

liUgf&dJit II , e bifloch nl phyih s whir h deals will the s lerdlfl ,
study of biologic al prot • ,
* «
' » ol
' lie laws of 1 1 l * f » yv i s I e the PHCeptlon of gravity . Ordinary matter takes Its form « a
I In, iromagiielltiTl Is also Ihd force whuh holds electrons end protons together Inilde
s result of inter molecular
atoms , .
which a , * the building blocks of mo
I chulor etlpO In toils, stre » se » m ,d .Ooln . In cbeletal and muse uhu nlror lures ,
, Itudy of 4 , . . between the HI I , . „ui KMMM
tht
^
Include ! This governs il pro( MW Involved in chemistry, which nlsr from IntiMactions '
^
, and other
.
of lr I
Aeilrdvoarnik! Tfin hranth of physics whirl deals with the study of the movement *
, , , « *• b !li .
, .
IntarirtlOili of air with moving fd ) *i u , sur h ai planes, and of Ihn
. ,
elf
" Is of moving
Lywt jlOr. fh» l omch of physl » wldi l d nls will , l ) r hi lmvlo ol Ih luntnlai urdv
, , , ,
air
<
on
In ll «
slaflonat
nlln lv
y olijnr
II h
U
ihoone
» u h
of
"widest so
'
» ^^ . " ^ Wh
it . ? physical
art quantities ? Discuss its different types and way to
' maasura tha bast quantltlai.
tf *
spaifrorn nl physics —

thyikMl CilimflWV ff ,« brefrf I, III 11, ,- rnlvlr y that ic i on, eined will, the physic a ! stro tore of r hemli al < urn|iO
, mU , the mn , unit nl enefl
,.
th * y have, the way they react writ , other romponmls , „,d Ihr bonds that hold Iheli atoms t ogrllmr
'
" ,
. „
Mwliat ULUIUlMIMiU I b ft r Muriy nl irh / sl ol loniHrlt,, . ,d pliy - l1 > 1 / i n u t t t n wllhln ihr o min,
, , , npoclelly the motion * «!
* " PhV9(

- * Physical Quantities
. .. . . .
proper ru . nl u i Pun water s
. , , .
(onfollU II / » .* (

• / (A .. W ».' ,
,
MlJn il Lh / iUi If Is Ih* appllf lor of phytic t lo medkln* It gmarally » one or » s phytlr s as applied to mndfrel
lu< > th h p of th
end redlolhnrepy
r h, It ,* , , All thou quantities In - .
of uuhlrh
terms af laUU
which law * pnys ! can be described aru called
of DhvilC
-
magnruf foldt>> fl / narnlr . hi M ,e I mil , a , whottt and ul
* . romporn „t puts, the I wtlV Inlemal IlfUtfure, CdfnpOlltlori
* , , .
plty U t » l qUdntlllf '..
. * ,
j
th* gpiipminn of vtilrunlsm and > • , . .
forn ion, tr r» t / rirolf t • >l ry » 1« Inrlorling snow end lie wl fl 6P ‘ u ’ 1,1
^ p(fv Types of Phyilcal Qugntltlil
.* .
«1moH» t ,*ro, I0004pt m, rn*g/ ,eto »ph« rr and o>lar rrrestrlal rti idoM, and analogous problem etfeOClfted Hh the mod
* ^ " Phyilul quantities dtd divided Into
Darlvad Quantities
 Chapter 1 [Measurements]
Scholar s PHYSICS - \1 (Subjective) 7

Base Quantities ( t) Meter The distance traveled

( v) Temperature
physical quantities in terms of which other bv light in vacuum during a T kelvin K
The mini* number fifths
.
ptopkmlf nttes can be defined are called base quantities time of V 299.7924.58 second,
(h ) Kilogram It is defined ss the
( vi) Light intensity L candela cd 1
E«mD*es mass of 5 Platinum (.50%) and
Amount of substance
•re um (ioK) ailov cylinder, 3 g _ ( \ ii) n mole mol.
^'' zr' “ ass -
t “ c etc.
cm in diameter and 3.9 cm in
:e - ice =- -
; height kept at the ( 2) Supplementary Units
definitions are based on other physical quantities are International Bureau of The units which are neither base units nor derived units are called
fiuxir~a
-
Weights and Measures fn
cJied denied qi+ma&s * Prance. Th s mass standard was
supplementary units and are oftenly used for geometrical quantities. They are:
estah' shed in root . (0 Plane angle (ii) The solid angle

accelerator -norserr-m force etc.

(5i) Second The duration in
>£ cr Standard Definitions of Supplementary Units
which the outer most electron
Measurement of Base Quantities of the cesium. 133 atoms make (i) Radian
nea»^e e-: rase Quantities -ivoK'es two steps:
- .
.^
9 2,631.770 vibrations. It is the plane angle between two radii of a circle which cut off on the
( v) Kelvin It is the fraction
* circumference an arc equal in length to the radius of the circle. It is shown in
Vi The dv>ce of the standard V 273.16 of the therimotfynam<
~- e c ^ccedufe temoer3ture of the triple point figure.
comcar - zrs quantity to ce measured with the
of water . (ii) Steradian /
Standard. (v) Ampere The unit of electric k
current is ampere. It is that
It is the solid angle (th ree dimensional angle ) subtended at the center of sphere
Properties o * an ce= Standard
constant - current which if by an area of surface equal to square the radius of the sphere. It is shown in
- - rea standard - as: , c prince al characteristics; maintained in two straight figure .
•s access: e ft is invariable. cars; s conductors of infinite
' '

0 length of regig c12 circular Physical Quantity SI Unit Symbol

~~ £ Tv.: -e: e“ e'3 ‘
cS - = £ often ncompatible and compromise has to be
*
cross-section and placed 3
“ ade between trem. - meter of length
( vi )Candela The unit of
. Plane angle
Solid angle
Radian
Steradian
rad
sr
0,6 W is numatiora system of units? Discuss the units upon which it is -.
!u -: ous intervsrty is candela, it
bu?t up. is defined as the (urncr«oc :
intensity in the perpendicular (3 ) Derived Units
direction of surface of
1/60000 sc uere meter of a
The SI units for measuring all other physical quantities are derived from the base
black body 'adiator at the and supplementary units., such units are called derived units .
International System of Units solidification temperature of
Physical Quantity Unit Symbol In terms of base units
" ’ roC a - ntem3dor’ 2 con- - nee agreed on a platinum under standard
1 set of definitions and standard ' 2
atmospheric pres s c e
Force Newton N kg ms
to describe : e p- s cs quantities. The system that was established is called the
*

(vfi) Mole The mcle is the 2 " 2

system ntematiioral ( S l amount of substance of a Work Joule J Nm = kg m s
system which contains as many Js = kgmV ’
"
"

-
he system ntematjona is formed from three kinds of units:
elementary ert ties as there Power Watt W
'l

("I Base un t ( 2)
'

Derived units ( 3) Supplementary units are atoms in 0.012 kg if carbon Pa Nm ~ = kg m s

Pascal
(1) Base Units .
12. Or p mole of any substance
Pressure
contains 6.022s * ion entities. C As
Charge Coulomb
Tra'& 3 re seven base units fior different physical quantities.
ength , ^ ass. t me, temperature, electric current, luminous intensity, amount of
' Q.7 Write down the conventions for indicating the units. What 3 re scientific
substance.
No . Physical Quantity
1 // -
Symbol of quantity
^SI Unit Symbol of unit
notation ? —
(» > Length l metre m
(ii) Mass
Conventions for Indicating the Units
M kilogram kg more particularly In writing
Use of SI units requires special care,
(m) Time . second s prefixes : .
) Electric Current
ampere A
 Chapter 1 [ Monturomonti
8
Scholar ’ * PHYSICS XI Subjects#)
Full name of the unit does not being with » .
capital letter SI I SI FACTOR
FACTOR
' 9
Prolix Symbol JPowr) (Languago ) l The uncertainty Is usually described as an error in
even If named
after scientist O K , newton. •pet
id

A
l
1’
io
10"
- Wntlliio
WHlrWlon
,, Types of Errors
There are two major types of errors
measurement.

I
UO The symbol of units after a scientist has Initial capital such l«fS T 10" trillion
as N for newton . G 10* billion .
1 Random error
( HI) The prefix should be* written before the unit without any
‘.
U U *»
m#Qi M 10' million 2. Systematic error

space, such as
kilo k 10' thoutsnd Random Error
htteto h 10' bmulroii Random error is said to take place when repeated measurements of the
1 x 10 ‘
m is written as imm . tloca da 10' Ion
quantity, gives different values under the same conditions.
Civ) A combination of base units Is written each with one space d cl
* d 10 tenth
Causes
apart .
coiUl c 10 ' hundredth N
mllll in 10 ' thouMndth It is due to some unknown reasons.
'«
*
For example, newton meter Is written as Nm. micro l> 10 * millionth Reduction of random Error
( v) .
Compound prefixes are not allowed For example ippF nano n 10
’ billionth The ranuum error can be reduced by taking several readings of same quantity
may be written as ipF . pIco
lomto
P
t
10 "
10 "
trllllonth
quidrllllonth
and then taking their mean value .
( Vi) A number such as 5.0 * 104 cm may be expressed in alto a 10 " qulntllllonlh
Systematic Error L
Systematic error occurs when all the measurements of particular quantity are
scientific notation as
affected equally, these give consistent difference in the readings.
5.0 x 10* m. Causes
( vii) When a multiple of a base unit is raised to a power, the power applies 0
The systematic error may occur due to
to the whole multiple and not the base unit alone, Thus, (0 Zero error in measuring instrument
2 2 ( 2
1km =i( km) = 1 x io ‘m (ii) Poor calibration of instrument
(viii) Measurement In practical work should be recorded immediately in the most convenient unit , e .g., •••
( ) Incorrect calibration on the measuring instruments
Reduc tion of Systematic Error
Micrometer screw gauges measurement in mm, and the mass of calorimeter in grams. But before
Systematic error can be reduced by comparing the instrument with another
calculation for the result, all measurements must be converted to the appropriate SI base unit.
instrument which Is known to be more accurate. Thus, systematic error Is
Q.8

. JtA m
What is scientific notation? reduced by applying a correction factor to all the reading taken on an
instrument.
Q.10 What are scientific figures? How can we estimate the number of
!
Scientific Notation significant figure In the physical measurement and explain the way to
Numbers are expressed in standard form culled scientific notation , w hich rounding off data .
employs power of ten.
W The internationally accepted practice is that there should be only one non zero
* digit left of decimal. Thus the number 1347 should be written as 1.347 x 103 and For Your Information Significant Figures
.0023 should be expressed as 2.3 x to"3 . Interval ( s)
In any measurement , the accurately known digits and the first doubtful digit are
Q.9 What are the sources of errors In the measurement of a physical
Ayfi of ihc universe
Ape of the earth
called significant figures OR .
quantity ? What are the types of errors ? How can we reduce the error ( >ne year 3 2 x 10’ In other words, a significant figure is the one which is known to be reasonably
K.6 XI 04
( >nc day
.
any measurement ?
^ Time between
normal heartbeats
Period of audible
H jc IQ

1 X 10’
'1
reliable
How to Increase the number of significant figures
We can Increase the number of significant figures in a measurement by
sound waves
Errors and Uncertainties improving the quality of our measuring instrument.
Period of typical 1 x 10 «
.
All physical measurements are uncertain and imprecise to some limit There are radio waves
Period of vibration
General Rules for deciding number of significant figures
three sources of errors of nn atom In u solid
I X 10 ” (1) Digits
sources of errors Period of visible W , , , 6, ,
All digits 1,2 3 4 5 7 98, are significant.
2 x IO ”
'
/

(Ij Negligence or Inexperience of . person ,

light waves
HD Zeros may or not be significant.
Approximate Valuos of Some Rujes
hi)
( Hi)
faulty apparatus Time Interval
* (I)
^ jef 0S

A zero between two significant figures is Itself significant.

Inappropriate method or technlqUP.
 Chapter 1 [ Measurements
10 Scholar s PHYSICS — XI (Subjective)
Interesting Information 11
significant figures are not significant .
(ii ) Zeros to the left of tMmm (kg)
10-» - In case (i) 72.1 have the smallest number of decimal places
• E!®ctron , thus the answer is
For example, O Proton rounded off to the same position which is 75.5m.
None of the zeros in 0.0046 or 02.59 is significant . 10 -» - Uranium atom
In case (ii) the number 4.10 has the smallest number of
decimal position ) decimal places and
( Note : these zeros are used only to locate 10-» - ] DNA mciocui* hence, the answer is rounded off to the same decimal positions which Is
be significant . then
(iii) Zeros to the right of significant figure may or may not
10 -1« - 9 Cell 8.13 m.
In decimal fraction , zeros to the right of significant figure are significant .
( iv ) 10- 10 Q.11 Describe the rules for rounding of data up to appropriate precision.
For example
All the zeros in 3.570 or 7.4000 are signifreant . However , in integers such as 8000
10-«
it
10« iBook
kg, the number of significant zeros is determined by the accuracy of the
Rounding Off Data
Cor
10«
measuring instrument .
The non-significant figures should be deleted by using the following rules:
If the measuring scale has a least count of 1 kg then there are four 10
' 0
Oitonkor 1. If the first digit dropped is less than 5, the last digit retained should
significant figures written in scientific notation as 8.000 * 103 kg. 10« remain unchanged.
If the least count of the scale is 10 kg, then the number of significant 10 »
Moon Evorwt
* 2. If the first digit dropped is more than 5, the digit to be retained is
figures will be 3 written in scientific notation as 8.00 * 103 kg.
*
increased by one.

-
10» - Earth
If the least count of the scale is 100 kg, then the number of significant 3- If the digit to be dropped is 5, the previous digit which is to be retained is
figures will be 2 written in scientific notation as 8.0 x 103 kg. io»
increased by one, if it is odd and retained as such if it is even. For
If the least count of the scale is 1000 kg, then the number of significant Order of magnitude of some example the following numbers are rounded off to three significant
masses.
figures will be 1 written in scientific notation as 8 x 103 kg. figures as follows;
( v ) When the measurement is recorded in scientific notation or standard form, -
43 75 is rounded off as 43 - 8
the figures other than the powers of ten are significant figures. Do You Know ? 56.8546 is rounded off as 56.9
Mass can be thought of as a 73.650 is rounded off as 73 6 -
For example, form of energy In effect, the .
A measurement recorded as 8.70 x 10 kg has three significant figures.
1 *
mass is highly concentrated 64.350 is rounded off as 64.4
form of energy . Einstein' s Q.12 What do understand by the terms precision and accuracy?
( 2 ) Multiplication and division of Numbers .
famou equation
1
-
In multiplying or dividing number, keep a number of significant figures in the E = me means Wc use many devices to
product or quotient not more than that contained in the least accurate factor . ener gy = mass x (speed of measure physical
light)Y Precision quantities, such as
:x
5.348 x 10 3.64 x 10*
= l.45768982 xl 03
According to this equution 1
kg mass is actually 9 * 1016 J . Precision means how close the measured values are to each other . length, time
temperature They ill
and

A precise measurement Is the one which has less absolute uncertainty. The
'
1.336 have some limit of
As the factor 3.64 x 104, the least accurate in the above calculation had three
EXPLANATION!
If m » lkg then . precision of a measurement Is determined by the Instrument or device being precision.
significant figures, the answer should be written to three significant figures only . EXPLANATION:
,
Energy me * lkg x ( 3 »
2
used Each device for
( 3) 0* ms ) * 9 x 1016 J
*1 *
The precision of a measurement depends upon the size of the unit you use to
Addition or Subtraction of Numbers measurement hat soma
make a measurement . The smaller the unit, the more precise the measurement least count The
In adding or subtracting number, the number of decimal places in the answer
The precision of a measurement describes the units you used to measure precision of the dev ,c«
should be equal to the smallest number of decimal places in any of the depends on m least
quantities being added or subtracted , something. count therefore* all
For example, you might describe your height as ' about 6 feet ’. That wou dn t 0 « devices have some limit
m this case , the number of significant figures is not Important, inches tall , that wou e of precis100.
very precise. If however you said that you were '74
it is the position of decimal that matters .
more precise .
For example Accuracy
Suppose we w sh to add the following quantities e pr ssed in rr ters.
72.1
3 42
0 . QQ 3
*
00 2.7543
4

im
Accuracy means how dose a measured
value.
The accuracy of a mtMurtfnrrt I th
and the accepted correct aniwtr. Tha
your measurement . An accurate
..
dHtennc
bigg
measurement
® f tha
is
b
*« w n
difference
one which
,
has
.
value (result) Is to the

the
Its
*
leal
actual (true)

eccurata
fractional 0
'
75 523 h 1273
 Chnptor 1 [ Mnnuuromontaj
Siliolut Vn PHYSICS
12 ^ I (Nuhjetiivc )

.
pen iwit iKi
percentage
error
1 llw .K uiii

1unu*rt «ilnfy In
(

tli il .
nu' ,
( y ol . iniM '.mi ' lm ' iit
i

isurii* nu'nl
.
depends on t » » « • fr u uon.d or

.md
# . 10 .', I 0.1 . in , ,
< nil ill p Irillllji ii '. i ) u . 1 hm
lllill/ f . 1 yin,
'
13
,
Example
" iii ' i ) nijt

Vi ll W / id M T In p / < idu< *
"
. rod having smallest x, 26.8 I 0.1 c m " " ‘ "
When the objft t Is riMonled as 25.5 cm by using meter i ili« ' * fiiir * iunj/ c nt lohmrn ,
division In
.

millimeter , it t .
* the dlffeieme of
single reading as
two ridding
discussed
of the
before
initial
is taken
and
as
I hi * difference x between them Is recorded as
x x, x,
All III' Clll llll ‘ III llllB IMMa
.
li iv l,
"
' i

made himi |u >l

ii
-
The uncertainty In the lliuflo him i ol* »i i "
position *
i .died .ibsolule urn ertalnly equal to 10 I <m ICXI’LANAIJONi
double and ( > 6.8 I 0.1) ( lO. yjn
tO . OS ( m which is now
of the measuring . ,
Any t olmif i in l n produ «•»!
Absolute ufucitalnty, In effect , Is equal to I he least count
•16.3 1 0.2 cm i *
Iiy it Ulllillilr 1 i iiII11111ii11< >ii ui
instrument , lids is c ailed precision : In Case of Multiplication and Division V 1 . .
od M H ' I I III«I Mil' minim
I Wll toif III!-*i Will ll pioduic
Case ( I ) Percentage uncertainties are added. '
whin* lijdil, when mixed nr*
ertalnly ( least t onnt ) 10.1 cm 1 lin d il'i inm|)lrilK |||,H
Precision or absolute uiu Tor example ' ' ' 7
0.1 cm "' .
limn Ii h found IIMI
Fractional uncertainty 0.004 I be maximum possible value of resistance R of conductor yellow mid him*, or jm* cri mid
25.5 cm determined Irom the earn .
nts o btenti.il difference V and resulting magenta, or ted mid peacock

Percentage uncertainty
0 l t m 100 0 1
I) b . 1 urrent How T by using IK Is nd as follows; blue
i- olimif »
me
.
cMinpIcmmUiiy
I In* appeal ail : td
25 5 cm 100 loo V colours h ii procni ol "
Case ( ii ) Mibiimilvr nuluro. lied glaix
0.8 /1 I O. OjjA
Another measurement taken
recoded as 0.45 cm . It has
by vernier calipers with least count as 00A
;e unceri for V B
jOO ®h ut 2%
nluiorbit »11 oilier culoun
isxceplmg Ilie it l 1 lue . blue . '

°
3
n wllllc inixiure ol green mid
) 0.01 cm 5.2 100 red. The coloim obtained
Precision or absolute uncertainty ( least count
' age ftQinty for / SPJJ 5
X
100 a about 6%
with paints nml inks result
finrn II subtractive pmi es
0.01cm 0.S4 100
Fractional uncertainty - 0.02 rtalnty in the value of resistance R when V is divided by I is 8% F8? Y8iir Information
0.45 cm
0.1cm 100 2.0 5.2 V ~
Percentage uncertainty *
lie result Is thus given as R = 6.19 V / A
0.45 cm 100 100 0.84 A
although less precise but is more = 6.19 ohms with %age uncertainty of 8%
So the reading 25.5 cm taken by meter rule is
because % uncertainty for V is 2 % and for I is 6% . So,
accurate having less percentage uncertainty or error .
Total uncertainty = 2% + 6 % = 8%
Whereas the reading 0.45cm taken relative, measurement which important . The
smaller a physical quantity , the more precise instrument should be used . Here Hence R = 6.2 ± 8% ohms | ATOMIC C LOC K
flic cesium atomic frequency
the measurement 0.45 cm demands that a more precise instrument , such as R = 6.2 ± 0.5 ohms [ 8% of 6.2 = 8/100 * 6.2 = 0.5 ] standard at the Nations!
micrometer screw gauge , with least count 0.001 cm , should have been used . These .
ire not decoration
glass bui ure ihe
In Case of Power Factor Institute of Standard and
Technology in Colorado
How can you assess the total uncertainty In the final result ? pieces ol
Q.13 Multiply the percentage uncertainty by that power . ( USA ), .ii Is the primary
curliest known exquisite standard for the unit of time
and sensitive For example
EXPLANATION:
thermometers, built by the In the calculation of the volume of a sphere using V = 4/ 3 ( 7tr ) To meet the n*n1 for n K»-ncr .

Accadomiu del Cincmonto Jock

( 1057- 1(,(,7 ) in .Florence.
standard of i' w, '

Assessment of Total Uncertainty in the Final Result . % age uncertainty in V =3x% age uncertainty in radius r. has been developed. In this
Every measurement has a degree of uncertainty associated with it . They contained alcohol, When the uncertainty is multiplied by power factor, then it increases the the frequencies
some limes, coloured red associated with certain atomic
The uncertainty derives from the measuring device and from the skill of the for easier reading.
precision demand of measurement. If the radius of a small sphere is measure as
transitions can be measured
person doing the measuring. The total uncertainty in the final result can be 2.25cm by a vernier calipers with least count 0.01 cm. then the precisely. In l% 7 . the SI unit
found as follows recorded as r = 2.25 ± 0.01 cm of time, the SECOND, was
redefined by I Hh Ciencrnl
In Case of Addition and Subtraction Absolute uncertainty in r = Least count = ±0.01 cm Conference on Weights and
Measures.
Absolute uncertainties are added O.Olcm 100
x— =^ using characteristic frequency
%age uncertainty in r 0.4%
For example 2.25cm 100 of cesium 135
According to this standard
-
atom

The distance Y found by the difference between two separate position Total percentage uncertainty in V = 3 x 0.4 = 1- 2%
measurements
 14

( id
(Hi)
The six
wire in
Thus volume

Hence the result shou

In Case of Average
(ij Find the avera
Find deviation
The

mm
mean
readi ng
are;
of
devia
the
1.20

Then Average =
,
ld

valu
ge
of

1.22
be

each
tion
micro
,
reco
V = 47.7z 0.6 cm '
of
value

is

1.23

= 1.21 mm
V = 4/ 3 ( nr )

of
mea
the
mete
,
= /
4

rded

Many
mea
3
= 47.689

unce
r
1.19,
as

Mea
sure
sure d
*
cm
(3

rtaint
screw
1.22 ,
}

-
with

sure
d

y
14

in
gaug
1.21
)
1.2

men
values.
value from
*
%

the
2
(

t
2.25
unce

the
avera

1.20 + 1.22 + 1.23 + 1.19 + 1.22 + 1.21

6
)
rtaint

aver
ge
age
y

valu
valu
e .
e .

e to measure the diameters of a

.

The deviation of the readings, which are the differences with out regards to the
sign, between each reading and average values are 0.01, 0.01, 0.02 0.02 , 0.01,
Chapter 1 [ Measuremp

INTRUSTING INFORMATION

3000
-
c
A
out
* part m Mn \ &
M)
^
Scholar '

( i )Speed
s

( iii )Force
As
PHY SICS

As speed

( jj ) Acceleration
- XI ( Subjective)

As acceleration

Dimension of

Uses of Dimensions
Length
Time

Dimension of acceleration

, 3
Dimension of length
Dimension of speed = [ v ] = Dimension of time

^
l= [-
Velocity
Time

ML
Tl f Tlin

forces mass x acceleration

force = dime nsion

[ F ] = [ MLT ]
2
[ F ] = [ M ] [ LT ]
2
of
ML

mass x
r

dime
2

nsion of
]
"

acce
jlj
(T) =

Dimension of velocity
- ( a ) = Dimension of time

lerati on
_r
^ ' 1
For Your In fro motion

Dimensional variables
— > Force, velocity etc
Non - Dimensional van es
— > Plane angle, solid angl . etc
Dimensional constants
.
- g, G k etc
*
Non - Dimensional con « nts
— > Reflective index , dicla ic
constant etc

For Your Information

Dimensional

quantities in
analysis
deals with the physical

qualitative meaning
their
.

-
>800
called the dime nsion al analy sis; we can chec k
0.00 j Using the method of dimensions
tooo
• the correctness of a given form ula or an equa tion and can also deriv e it.
0.01+0.01+0.02 +0.02+0.01 +0.00 •
oo
oo
Mean of deviation = foo
equa tion
6 \0T (i) Chec king the homo gene ity of the phys ical
we are to show that dime nsi '.

—
VJO
In order to check the correctness of an equa tion, Eacap«
= 0.01 mm ective of th »
*00
of the quantities on both sides if the equa tion is the same , irresp
In Case of timing experiment 300
princ iple of homo gene ity of dime nsion s .
form of the formulas. This is calle d the
The uncertainty in the time period is found by dividing the least count of timing 700
( ii )Deriving the possible formula PMnduKjm
-
V
measurement instrument by the number of vibrations.
(M»gulpnrtq cko iowi
lOO
*. The success of this method for deriv ing a relat ion for a phys ical quan tity depe nd ^ Tl id* (JiiVICO « nOf f
’
. «* I
For example o
1»

.
'

on the correct guessing of vario us facto rs on whic h the phys ical quant
’
11 -irtuii -' *
* ehv .- :
^
The time of 30 vibrations of a simple pendulum recorded by a stop watch depends.
accurately up to one tenth of second is 54.65. Thus, the time period is given by
T = 54.6 / 30 = 1.82 s
Ix'iisi count
Uncertainty in time period -
Nuol vibrations
Thus, time period T is written as T = ( 1.82 ± 0.003)s

Q. 14 What do you understand by dimensions of physical quantities ? Lxplain

with examples . Also write its uses.

For Your Information

Dimensions of Physical Quantities I ho pull ill | II;IIIIIIH > I
,

„
I hi - ( I tin elisions of physical quantity represents nature of that physical || i \ r sill IU* illllli - |lMt H ‘> '
quantity
,, ,
•
W Oils ll » H|IU
,

.' I' llv III

'
. ,.
in inv nli in
,J,I bi i c phvslCt l
'
mipiilr '
Quantity teprt . nrited is by i , ciflc symbol with in square \ niii ilm maim 1
' ium

. ...
.

L
'.
I ' hliulvk * niiiHiiinl
fcnackHs . ii ,
. C . ms . •I iu linn 11
'
1

r hw dimensions ot length . mass and hm . |l |, |M| and | I | respei lively

’ an ; i nit i
•
u > l> M I l k '
 r

Mk
St holm W 1*1 1 Y HIC.H \ | ( Mulipu Ilv < )
1/

IMNNONMH I HVSK AI IAN 11 1 II >

Wm idcngll
Slrrw
. x ~ v /r
» - I7 A 1/n.
HI

T
Fl 7
Unit Dlmcmloii ' l* » - |MI , |
PNytfecil tymb#) or Mlmin », - AV/ V IIOlii Hour

Formula IhiMliC nindnliu „ /i; 7

1' I* # - N |M 1.11 |
-
Ouontity
am |MI “ r ' l - i M i Focal length
w F
i .i
'
HI
N\
" !
(M I I '! - H I
•
1

l eugth 1 > Uivi ~ lipfnidlve N flout mint

IMHTTI - rn M
\
time
ckKU> . speed
XecvkraiKm 4
-
> At
-
(

At
second
m
in/ s
\

.
|M l '
l | [M
|M"l \ | |l I |
--
'l
hide
*
Multiple Choice Questions
'
\
\
Vrv4
olULUC \ .3
|M"l T“| - n ’l Four possihh' answer,s to each statement are Riven below. Tick ( S) / lie correct answer:
IVlINlty -
p uv A kg< III
f
[ Ml . V | |M1 , | ’
F »1114 N = kgms * |MLT *|
Force 1. The main frontiers of fundamental sciences are
Pressure ¥ =K \ l* a N / m- [ Ml . 1 |
' (b ) Two
(a) One
Mom entu m , P * niv Ns "kgms
1
IMi .r 'i (c ) Three ( d) Four
Impu lse I »Ap 2. The bianch of physics which deals with the ultimate particles of which the matter is composed is
Nm |M L- r | *

Torque, \> ork . i * IF called physics

Fncrgy W = Fd J = Nm - kgm \s * ( a) Plasma (b ) Nuclear
Po \> cr P = W /t W = J/s lMi / r'| (c ) Particle ( d) Solid state
radian none 3. Which one of the following is not a unit of energy ?
Angular 0
displacement (a) Kilowatt (b ) Erg
Angular to •AO / At rad/s rn (c) Joule (d ) Kilowatt hour
\ elocitv 4. Steradian is the unit of
rad /s’ in (a ) Plane angle (b ) Solid angle
Angular u = Au> / Al
(c ) Temperature (d ) Intensity of light
acceleration
Angular L = mvr Js =kg m“ s 5. Which one of the following is a base quantity ?
(a ) Area (b ) Charge
momentum
Moment of 1 = mr *
Kg m TivuTl (c ) Current (d ) Force

inertia 6. If p is the momentum of an object of mass m, the expression has base units identical to
:/ :
( » r;n itational
‘
(. '
» = Fr /ni|ni 2
*
Nm kg
(a) Energy (b ) Force
constant Velocity
- (c ) (d)
Acceleration g = \\ 7m m/ s 2
\ v r \ Power
the erro r in mea sure men t :
7. By increasing the number of observations In an expe rime nt,
due to gravity ( b ) Decr ease s
(a) Increases
Time period r see |Tj
( d ) Non e of thes e
(c ) Remains same
Frequency, f = 1 /T Hz = cydes/sec rn l. How many significant zeros are ther e in 0.00 0501 0 ?
angular to 53
2 rcf (b) 4
(a) 3
.frequency
(c )
(d ) 6
Coefficient of q « l'7(mn Ns/rn kg 111 s '
|M L T T | The erro r in the calc ulat ed valu e of its volume Is:

viscosity
Error In the measurement of radius of sphe re Is 1
*
( b) 5 %
(a ) 7 »
 V

Chapter 1 [Measurements Scho la r ’ s PH YS IC S - XI ( Subjective) 19

18

(c ) 3% *
( d ) 1%
an d % an d 3 % re sp ec tiv ely. Tf y
Short Questions of Exercise
th e me as ur em en t of ma ss an d sp ee d 2 #

10. The percentage er rors in

maximum error in th e ca lcu lat ion of K. E. wi ll be Name the several repetitive phenomenon occurring in nature which serve as reasonable time
Q.1.1
(b ) 5 % , 2010, Lhr 2011)
(a) 1% standard ? J
]
}
( \' jJ / ( Lhr 200 5, Bw p 200 6 -200 8 , Mtn 200 9 Lhr
( d) 11% ph en om enon tha t rep ea ts its elf aft er certa in int erv als of tim e is ca lle d rep etit ive ph en om en on ,
( c) 8% Ans. The
11. Ho w many significant ze ro s ar e there in 5.0 0 x 10
3
? which can serve as reasonable time standard. .
(b ) 4 Examples:
( a) 3
(c ) 2
(d ) 6 (i) lattice vibrations in a crystal.
12. Zero error is the example of (ii) the rotation moon around the earth.
(3) Personal error (b ) Random error ( iii ) the rotation of Earth about its own axis.
(c ) Systematic error ( d) All of these ( iv ) sunrise and sunset .
Poor calibration is the example of ( v ) change of weathers. / fV p
13. of pe nd ulu m as tim e sta nd ard s?
(a ) Personal error (b) Random error .
Q 1.2 Give the drawbacks to us e the pe rio d
( Grw 2003 - 2008, Rwp 2005, Mtn 200 6, Bw p 200 8, Lhr 200 9,Grw 201 0 -11)

( c) Systematic error ( d) None of these sim ple pe nd ulu m ca n be ex pre ss ed as ;

Ans. As the time period of the
t
14 . has the dimensions of
I
T = 2R
S
rea so na ble tim e sla nd ere d du e to se ve ral rea so ns.
(a) velocity (b ) Acceleration but this time pe rio d ca n no t se rve d as
> •
(c) Momentum ( d) None of these Reasons: wi th alt itu de . UL* sl
sim ple pe nd ulu m va rie s wi th Q an d g va rie s
(i ) time pe rio d of the
15. The unit of energy is and its unit symbol is: y ch an ge wi th tem pe rat ure (in win ter or su m m er )
( ii ) The length of pe nd ulu m ma
(a) Joule, j (b ) joule, J
of su bs tan ce , the kilo gra m an d mo le ?
( c) Joule, J (d) joule, j un its for the am ou nt
Q 1 3 Whv do we find it useful to have two
(Mtn 2003 , Mir Pur 200 6 , D.G .Xh an 2006, Mir Pur 2009
16. The dimension of light year are
( a) [LT ]1 (b ) [M°L°T] Ans. Reason: us e mo le as the un it of am ou nt o
nu mb er of pa rtic les the n we
(c) [ ML r ]
2 2 (d ) [M°LT°] When we are
be ca
co
us
nc
e
er
on e
ne
mo
d wi
le
th
of a subs tan ce co nta ins the eq
^

ua l nu mb er of pa rtic les (i.e .

, NA = 6.0 22 -
su bs tan ce
17. Which one of the following is not dimensionally correct equation
( a) E = me
2
(b ) vf = V| + at
1 23 ).
°
But in case when we
Q.1.4 Three students measured a
are co nc er ne d qu an tjty Lm att e we us e the
^
uni t kilogram
^ a scale on which the minimum d v s on s 1 mm an
length of needle with
.
... .
( c) S = vt
2
(d) s = ?t 2

recorded as (Grw 2008]

rd is co rrect an d wh y .

—
( ii ) m ( iii ) 0.2 14 m which re co
( i ) 0.2145m 0.2 1

—
18. The gravitational constant G has dimensions
[ M°L°T ] Ans. 0.214 is correct record.
(a ) [ML’Vj (b )
length can t

=
0.001m So

-
t mm or
(c) [ ML r ]
2 2
(d ) 1
[ M L T°] *

ThfTcorrect record is 0,214, be ca use th e lea st co un t of th e sc ale is

;i: p
19. Which of the following has the same dimensions as that of momentum
fa )
(c )
Force
stress
(b )
(d )
Energy
Impulse
Q ,,
you ma ke re ga rding to ex pe rim enta l data
r;
us ed In co mp uta tio n ?
•
20 . SI un it of lig ht year is Ans. Analogous statement:
( a) candela (b ) Meter an alo go us stat em en t is readin g in ex pe rim en
Its rate as its lea st accurat e
da ta is only as much accu
(c) Second (d ) None of these "A re su lt of ex pe rim en ta l
ANSWERS data."

2. c .
3 a 4. b 5. c 6. 7. b 8. c 9. c 10. c

12. c 13. c 14. a I S. 16. d 17. c 18. a 19. 20. b ^

 Chapter 1 [ Measurements]
20
Scholar’ s PHYSICS XI (Subjective ) — 21
. of er ro rs is po ss ibl e in tin
Q.l
16 .
t Th
rne
* period?
of
nuduu
perio
e pe sim rple pe
" nd ulu m is n as ured by
^
a sto p wa tch W ha t typ e
(Mir Pur 2004, Lhr 2006, Fsd 2008) * ;Solved Examples
Ex am ple 1.1 : |
Ans. Possible Errors
es of po ss ibl e errors : Th e len gth br ea dt h an d th ick ne ss of a sh ee t ar e 3.2 33 m , 2.1 05 m an d 1.0 5 cm resp ectiv ely . Calcu lat e
There are two typ
( zero error ma y pre sen t or the ca lib ra tio n is inc or re ct ) .
Sto p wa tch ma y be fau lty th e vo lum e of th e sh ee t corre ct up to th e ap pr op ria te signif ica nt dig its .
(i) Systematic error: person of ( the tim e to sta rt or sto p the stopwatch \
gli ge nc e an d ine xp eri en ce of G iv en Da ta :
(ii) Random error: Ne ra nd om er ro r ch an ge s for ev er y
m ain s fixed for an ins trume nt wh ile Le ng th of sh ee t = t = 3.2 33 m
Note: Systematic error re
Breadth of sheet = b = 2.105m
observation.
analysis give any inf or m at ion on co ns tan t of pr op or tio na lity tha t ma y ap pe ar s in Thickness of sheet = h = 1.05cm
.
Q 1.7 Does a dimensional
Ex plain. = 1.0 10 m
5 x 2 “

algebraic ex pr es sio n ?
(Federal 2003- 2005, Grw 2005 - 2008) To Find :
pr ov ide an y so rt of inf or m at ion ab ou t the va lue of co ns tan t of Vo lum e of the sh ee t = V = ?
m en sio na l an aly sis do es no t
Ans. Di sis ca n pr ov ide the
ca n be de ter mi ne d by ex pe rim en t . Bu t dim en sio na l an aly Calcu la tio ns :
proportionality, it
on ),
dim en sio na l co ns tan ts lik e g ( gr av ita tio na l ac ce ler ati G Vo lum e = ( len gth ) x ( bre ad th ) x ( thi ck ne ss )
information about the units of the
(universal gravitatio na l co ns tan t), k ( sp rin g co ns tan t ) etc . V = t x b x h
2 3
e pe rio d of sim ple pe nd ulu m V = 3.2 33 x 2.1 05 x 1.0 5 x
”

10 m
For example: For tim ~2 3

T = 2n
=
V 7.14573825 x 10 m
sig nif ica nt fig ure s eq ua l to thr ee. Th ere fo re vo lum e
As the factor 1.05 cm has the minimum number of
n ou t the t 2 rc . rec or de d up to 3 sig nif ica nt fig ure s .
where dimensiona l an alysis pr ov ide s no inf or ma tio ab co ns tan
2 3
an d de ns ity ? V = 7.1 5 x 10
"
m
Q.1.8 W ha t are the dim en sio ns of pre ss ure
( Rwp 2003, Bwp 2004, Mtn 2004 - 2005, D.G Khan 2005, . As the factor 1.05 cm has minimum number of sig 3
V = 7.1 5 m
nif
.
ica nt fig ures eq ua l to thr ee , the ref or e , vo lum e is
Grw 200 5 - 200 6 - 200 9, Fe der al 200 6, Lhr 200 9, Lhr 201 0 - 20 11 )
recorded up to 3 sig nif ica nt fig ure s , he nc e ,
Ans. ( i ) Dimensions of pressure:
IF ] [ma ] [ M ][ ir ]
2 _ Example 1.2
Th e ma ss of a m eta l bo x m ea su re d by a lev er ba lan ce is 2.2 kg . Tw o sil ve r co ins of ma sse
of
s 10
the
.01
bo
g
x
= [ ML r ] ta l ss
1 2 w th e to ma
(Pressure) = [P] = 7M = [a] = ( L* j .02 g m ea su re d by a be am ba lan ce ar e ad de d to it . W ha t is no
and 10
co rr ec t up to th e ap propriate precision?
(ii) Dimensions of density:
[m] (M) Gi ve n Da ta :
-3
= mi = 2.2 kg
[ Density ] = [p] = [ ML ] Mass of the metal box
[ Lf M as s of fir st sil ve r co in = m = 10 .0 1 g = 0.0 10 01 kg
en cy '
'/ • kn ow ing tha t [ X ] = [ L ], [ v ] = 2
.1.9 The wave length depends on speed V of wave and its frequ Mas of se
s co nd sil ve r co in = m 3 = 10 .02 g = 0.0 10 02 kg
( Mt n 2 >05 , Gr w 20 09 )
] and [ f] = [ T ]. Decide which one is correct (i) / = vA (ii) / = To Find :
l 1

Total mass of the box = m = ?

(i) For f = v >. 1
Calculation:
Dimensions of LH.S. = [ f ] = [T ] _ .. ( 1)
•
Total mass when silver coins are added to box
. 1 1
Dimensions of R.H S. = [vX] = [LT ][L] = [ CT ] — ( 2) m = mi + m2 + m3
As from (1) and (2) m = 2.2 + 0.01001 + 0.01002
LH.S. 5= R .H.S. m = 2.22003 kg be on e de cimal pl ac e
de cim al pl ac e , he nc e to tal m as s sh ou ld to
So. the equation is not dimensionally correct. Since least precise is 2.2 kg, ha vin g on e
v which is the appropriate precision. Thus
(ii) For f = r- Total mass = m = 2.2 kg
Cimensions of LH. S. =[f ) = [r ! 1
~( D the he lp of ve rni er ca lip ers of lea st
cy lin de r m ea su re d wi th
_ M = (LT ] The diameter and length of a metal vo lu m e V of the cy lin de r an d un ce rta inty in
Dimensions of R.H.S. cm . Ca lcu lat e the
count 0.01 cm arc 1.22 cm and 5.35
~ "

W [L ]
1
.42 ) it.
= (T ]
From equations (1 ) and (2 Given Data:
ca lip er = 0.0 1 cm
LH.S . = R .H.S. Least count of vernier
.
So, tr e equation is dimensional ^ correct.
 Chapter 1 [Measureme
22
^
Scholar’s PHYSICS - XI (Subjective) 23
Diameter of metal cylinder * d = 1.22 cm
length of metal cylinder = 5 35 cm i

To Find:
Volume of the cylinder * V » V

Uncertainly in the volume = ?

Calculations:
Absolute uncertainty in length
7
0.01 cm
0.01 tin 100
0 2%
As ' dimension ofL.H S . . ^dimensions .H.S.
% age uncertainty in length x
5.53 cm too So that equation is dimensionally Correa
fa
0.01 cm a 100 or * Derive a relation for the timic
^
period of sample pendulum (Fjg. 1.2) using dimensional analysis.
Absolute uncertainty in diameter 100
1.22 cm
The various possible facton on which the lime period T may depend arc:
As volume V - ndU'
4
.
.
.< )
. - . »n U npth )
( liven Data:

.
(i) Ungihof the pendulum ( f ).
(ii) M wVllicb ,h (i»). A
Total uncertainly in volume 2(% age uncertainty in d * m 1
r 1 • t i w
*
(in) Angle 0 wtudi ihStfuc ) makes with the vertical,
- 2 (0.8%) f 0 2% *
- 1.8%
Putting these values in cqu ( 1 )
To Find:
( iv ) Aetderation doc to gravity (g).

KjcloUonJbr the tune penod of simple pendulurn T 7

/ / / / / // / / / / /

V
1 14 ^ ’
6 , .
Ji i • . oUint * ,
Calculation :
of the form,

.
4 US reUfcon for the time penod T will be
lH
6 7509070 0I
T •
x f x t f x g* 0 \
( as 1.8% of 6.2509070 a
100 constant m * t 0‘ gd . (I)
1 Taking dimensions on both sides, we get
l bus
1
V •(6.2i 0.1) (cm)
Where 6.2 cm is calculated volume uni 0 I m
(WTnHTWn
( ) . 1
. < > ; in i * As
Or
S-e - -
rO

r
Check the correctness of the relation v
, \*t
where % i
* he speed of Thus 0
So equation I becomes,
L - !
.
ll
1 m
A
stretched string of tensiun F, length ( xml -
in Is > iu in b 1 c
(T) * constant (M) * |L ] (I L ) (FT V
Given Data: Comparing the dimensions on both sides
I .’quat ion m* im “
IM|° - (Ml*»
To Find:
To check the eoneelness of that equation -
IF ° It
)
I quoting powei
-
) b

*
c- 6*4
on both sides, we gel
Culcuhilions:
-2d -1 or d
- 1
--
a
-- -
1
M d 0orb ~dorb ' -
I

-
uid 0 Fl Y iL -'
Substituting the value * of a
i
b
°r
, c mid d.in cqu
i
.(1)
i

constant x m °* f1 * 1*8 1

i i

I - constant K (J xg *
 /

24 Chapter 1 [Measurements] Scho lar's PHYSICS - X I (Subjective ) 25

Or S= ct
t
or T = constant putting values, we get
g •
S= 3.0 X 10RX 3.153 6 X 10
The numer ical value of the constant canno t be determ ined by dimen sional analysis , howev er it can be 5
S= 9.5 xl 0' m
found by experiments. 1.2 (a ) How many seconds are there in a
( b) How many nano seconds in r?
Find the dimensions and hence, the SI units of coefficient of viscosity' r\ in the relation of Stokes lav ( c) How many year in 1 second
for the drag forces F for a spherical object of radius r moving with velocity v given as F = 6 rcr|rv. Given Data :
Given Data: 1 year = 365 days
Stokes law F = 671 r|rv To find ;
Where F = drag force, ( a ) Seconds in 1 year 9

r = radius, ( b) Nano seconds in 1 9

(c ) Years in 1 secon d 9
And r\ = co-efficient of viscosity. UT y

To Find: Calcu lation s:

(a ) As 1 ye ; 365days
(i ) Dimension of co-efficient of viscosity = ?
1 365 x 24 hours
-
(ii) SI unit of co efficient of viscosity = ?
1 year = 365 x 24 x 60 minutes
Calculations: 1 year = 365 x 24 x 60 x 60 sec
CO As F = 6 Tv Tjrv 1 year = 31536000 sec
6TI is a number having no dimension, so it is not taken in dimensional analysis. 1 year = 3.1536 x 107 sec
Thus As 1 year = 3.1536 x 107 sec
[F] = [1J1V] and 1 second = 109 nano second
IF ] So 1 year = 3.1536 x I 07 x 109 ns
or M = DIM 1 year = 3.1536 IO ns
x 16

Putting the dimensions of F , r and v in R.H .S., we get 1 year = 3.1536 x 107 sec
~2 1
1MLT ] 1 second T year
In) = ’1 3.1536 x 10
MILT ] Or 1 second = 3.17 10 years
x ' 8

hi = [ML 'r ]
- 1
to be 15.3 cm and 12.80 cm , respec tively.
- 1 1 1.3 The length and width of rectangular plate are measured
(ii ) Thus Sf unit of co-efficient of viscosity is kg m s
Find the area of the plate.
Given Data :
Exercise Problems Length of rectangular plate - £ 15.3 cm -
Width of rectangular plate = W =12.80 cm
To find :
.
A light year b the distance light travels in one year How many meters are there? Area of rectangular plate =A=?
Given Data: Calculations:
Time * t = 1 year As Area = length * width
t “ 365 days A = £ xW
* 365 x 4 hours
t £ putting values, we get
= 15.3 x 12.802
t 365 x 24 x 60 minutes A
t 365 x 24 x 60 x 60 second , *
A = 195.84 ( cm2
)

t 31536000 sccor i Or A - 196 ( cm ) . 2.189 , 0.089, 11.8 and 5.32.

B
kg upto appro priate precis ion
t
7
3.1536 JO second
x 1.4 Add the following musses given in
y
v c 3.0 10 / * 1 Given Data:
Speed of light nj
2.189 kg
To find: 0.089kg
Distance S 7
( akufotion
*:
 mmmmm m A
W
Measurement*
Chapter 1 [
r’‘_ Eri- '

f
MM
Scholar’ s PHYSICS - XI (Subjective ) 27
m 3 = 11.8kg
m 4 = 5.32 kg
To ftnd :
Add these masses up to appropriate precision
Uncertainty in time measurement
=
no. of vibrations 20
0.005 1
0.1
=
least count
0.005 .v —
Calculations: Percentage uncertainty in time 0.25%
Total mass = m = mi + m2 + m 3 + ITM 2 01
m = 2.189 +0.089+ 11.8 + 5.32 Total uncertainty in g = % uncertainty in Jen :c uncertainty in time period )
m = 19.398kg = 0.1 %+2x 0.25%
As in the given masses , 11.8kg is the mass of least precision, having one'decimal place, which is
tl = 0.1 % 10.5%
appropriate precision. = 0.6% 2
Hence Total mass = 19.4 kg So g = 9.76 cm with

1.5 Find the value of g and its uncertainly using T = 2n —g from the following (As 0.6% of 9.76 *

Measurements made during an experiment

Length of simple pendulum = t 100 cm
Time for 20 vibrations = t = 40.2 s
= 1.6
Hence
—
g = ( 9.76 ±
What are the dimensions and
.. \
^ is of gravitational constant G in the formula F = G

Given Data:
Length w as measured by a metre scale of accuracy upto 1 mm and time by stop watch of accurac m , m 1.
upto 0.1 s. Gravitational force = F -= G
r2
Given Data: To find:
Length of simple pendulum = t = 100 cm = lm Dimension of G =?
Time for 20 vibration s = t = 42.2 s SI unit of G =?
I t 42.2 Calculation:
Time period = 2.01s
20 20 m, m 2
F= G
Least count of meter rod = 1 mm = 0.001 m
Least count of stop watch = 0.1s
To find:
Acceleration due to gravity = g = ? fTijITl -j
2
Calculations: _ (Dimensions of force ) xj Dimension of length )

--
As time period of simple pendulum is given by Dimension of G
( Dimension of ma .\s) x ( Dimension ol mass )

T = 2n fMLT lL ]
Squaring both sides , we get 3 2
ML! "

~:
= [ tvrVT ]
Or g = 4*‘ -
{ T 72 As SI units of force, length anJ mass are Newton meter and kilogram respectively
,
. So
Putting values . we have Nm 2
-
4 x (3. l 4 ) 2 xl
SI units of G =
kg
— or Nm kg
2 2

g=
( 201) 2
Show' that the expression v , - v » 0 is
1 is dimensionally correct, where vi is the velocity at / -0 , a1
velocity « ( ri 11 1
g = 9.76 ms 2
'
acceleration and Vfis the *

Calculation for uncertaintv: Given Data:

First equation of nation is v . = v -1- at
To show :
The equation v , - v , .
i-al is din eniioaally cart*** -
 -rjilt u
^
%Msm
"
.
X V'l /
•
ggrasHfigMawg
.
28 Chapter 1 [Measurement
Scholar’s PHYSICS XI (Subjective)
29
Proof: [Mf = [[Mr*
Dimensions of L . H.S of the equation [vr ]=[LT ]
'

’ i
[ ] = [r ‘]
'
i 3o
'

A
Dimension of R.H.S of the equation = [v +at] (
[ rr = [7T2‘
1

R.H.S = [v. ] +[a][t] Equation powers on bolh sides, we get

-1 2 a + b = 0 or a = -b. . .(2)
R.H.S = [LT ] + [LT ][T] "

1
R.H.S = [LT ]+ [LT ]
" 1 and -3a - b = 1 ...(3)
1
R.HS = 2[ LT ' ] and -2 b = -1 or b = L - ( 4 )
5
"

As 2 has no dimension being a number , so subslituting value of b in cqiRation ( 2) we get

1
R.H.S. = [LT ] 1
a
Thus R.H.S. = L.H.S 2
Hence the equation is dimensionally correct . Now pulling values of ‘a’ and ‘b’ in equation ( 1 ), wc get
1.8 The speed v of sound waves through a medium may be assumed to depend on ( a ) the density p i
the medium and ( b) its modulus of elasticity E which is the ratio of stress to slain . Deduce by ll v = constant
ant p 2E2

method of dimensions, the formula for the speed of sound. i

Given Data:
Speed of sound depends on
Density of medium = p
Modulus of elasticity = E
v = constant

fit
Show that the famous “ Einstein equation ” E = me is dimensionally consistent.
2
To find : 1.9
Formula for speed of sound v dimensionally Given Data :
Calculations: Einstein equation E - me 2

As speed of sound depends on the following factors To prove:

2
v cc p° and vec Eb Einstein equation E = me is dimensionally consistent
On combining, we get Calculations :
2
v oc p Eb
* As E = me
Where E is the energy in joules
Or v = constant p° Eb (1 ) 2 2
Dimensions of L.H.S of equation = E = ( ML! ] . ..0 )
Where wc have to Find the values of powers a and b .( I )
As the dimensions of
( As E = W = Fd ) - 2
Dimensions of R!LS of equation = me = [ M ][ LT )
Velocity = v = [ LT‘ ]
[ ML r ]
2 2 . . . (2)
mass of both sides ol equations arc same
Density = p = = [ ML ] 3 *
Since the dimensions
volume Thus L . H.S.= R. H .S.
Elastic modulus -= E *= stress
-[ML *T 2 ]
" Hence, the equation is
, dimensionally consistent or correct .
cirHv
^radio , r with uniform
'v' d'clcrminc the
/
Because,
dimensions of stress =|ML ! ) 1
strain

2'
( Asslress -
F
A ^
1 0 Suppose , wc arc told dial the acceleration of a particlc ovvnt

Given
speed v is proportional to some po* cr of r
powers of r and v ?
Data :
in
}

circle
> 1

depend
^ ^^
inj

on
v say

Acceleration of a purticlc moving

Strain is dimension less, because it is rai io
Now, writing the dimensions of bolh sides equation ( 1 ) Radius of the circle • r
.
( LT ] * Constant [ML HML r ]
" 1 2 b
To find:
The uniform speed v
a
Or ILJfr ) =
|M * ][ L^ 3
* in 2
ki powers of r and v i .c., n « ?, m ?
comparing the dimensions on both sides, /^ c get

I
30 .
Chapter 1 [Measurers
; Scholar ' s PHYSICS - XI (Subjective) 31
( alculations:
As given
a * r" Chapter 2
a « vm
on combining wc get
,

a a. r " \' n

a = constant r" vm
VECTORS AND EQUILIBRIUM
writing the dimension of both sides, we gel
n m
2
ILT ] = Constant * [L] ,* [LT ] '
' 2
IL] [ T] = Constant * [ L]" [ T]
' m m '
ing Objectives
comparing the dimensions on both sides, wc get
n* m
[ L ]' = [ L ]
IT ]
2
= nr 1. Understand and use rectangular coordinate system.
Equation powers on both sides , wc get
2. Understand the idea of unit vector, null vector and position vector.
n + m *1 -( I ) . .
-m = -2 > 3- Represent a vector as two perpendicular components known as rectangular components
m =2 ... (2 )
4- Understand the rule of vector addition and extend It to add vectors using rectangular components .
putting value of m ’ in equation ( 1 ) , we g e t
4

n+ 2 = 1 5. Understand multiplication of vectors and solve problems .

Or n = -1 6. Define the moment of force or torque.
7. Appreciate the use of the torque due to a force.
is no resultant force and no resultant torque , a system Is In
Show an understanding that when there
Scholar’ s PHYSICS (Objective ) F.Sc. Part I 8
equilibrium.
are available in market 9. Appreciate the applications of the principle of moments.
By the Same Authors 10. Apply the knowledge gained to solve problems on statics.
Conceptual M.C.Q’ s Answers with Hints, Past Papers,
Short Questions & MCQ’s
U
*
Scholar ’ s PHYSICS — XI (Subjective)
33

Physical Quantities
Quantities which can be observed as well as measured are called physical quantities.
OR
Quantities in terms of which all the laws of physics can be expressed are called physical quantities.
Types of Physical quantities
(i) Scalars (ii) Vectors
(i)Scalar
A physical quantity which has magnitude only is called scalar quantity.
Examples 'S
Time, distance, mass, temperature, speed, energy, work, volume, area, electric charge etc.
( ii ) Vector
A physical quantity which has both magnitude and direction is called vector quantity.
Examples
Force, velocity, displacement, torque, momentum, acceleration, weight, angular velocity, electric
intensity etc.
Q.1 How is a vector represented ?

Vector Representation
A vector is represented in two ways.
(i ) Symbolic representation (ii ) Graphical representation
Symbolic Representation
It is represented by bold face letter such as A, d, r and v etc . It can be also be
represented by a letter with an arrow placed above or below the letter such
-*
as A or A
Graphical Representation
It is represented by a straight line with an arrow head at its one end. The
length of line represents magnitude of vector (according to suitable
scale ) . Arrow head represents the direction of vector.
Note:
Representation of magnitude of vector
represented by light face letter such as A, d , r
The magnitude of vector is
and v etc or by the modulus of a vector such as A , v etc.

Q- 2 What is rectangular coordinate system?

‘O '7.
)
Rectangular Coordinate SYStem/(Cartesian Co- ordinate System
lines intersecting at a
The set of two or three mutually perpendicular
point is called rectangular coordinate system .
The lines are called coordinate axes. One of these lines is called -X axis (or
axis The line perpendicular
-
horizontal axis ) The other is called y axis or ve rtical .
called on fn
to both and y -axes Is called.,
Is &
- The point of Intersection
*
 Chapter 2 [Vectors And Egad ,
U ^ Scholjr s PHYSICS — \ 1 tSuhjectixc )
35

Two dimensional coordinate system (Plane )

dimension This Ime gives the magnitude of resultant vector R The direction of
if the system consists of fn-o perpendicular lines then it » s called two
* *

coordinate system. resultant vector is from tail of vector A to the head of vectorB
,
For Your In for math,
Direction of a vector in plane
It is represented by the angle
axis in anti -clock wise direction.
which the vector makes with po$ , iive x -
'
in pu «»1

vhik
*
reared lo reprevw a \ cc
a space
^
required to represent a ve
*
Commutative Property
throe angles I from figure it , is dear that either we add \ to R or

\ -B -
B A
resultant is same ie,

Y It mfins that when vectors are added; the fLutt thlsa

is e for order of addition.
Hence, vector addition is commutative ^
_
x* X Q4 Eiplain the following terms:
O
ID Resultant vector ( jj) Vector subtraction K
For Your Information
ulijfH » *l iw <
he rnj \ imum when ihc> jrc
.' wili
(iii) Multiplication of vector by a scalar .
il* »ny flu.* .imc dirtvtuut jrui
+ (iv ) Unit vector (v) Null vector AIII he minimum when lhc >
v arc in dirccii< >n
( vi) Equal vectors

Three dimensional co- ordinate systems ( Space) ( i ) Resultant Vector

if tne system consists of three perpendicular lines, then it » s ca ed tnree l hu h liu % thi %ume rffret u\ I hr
> 1 1 tor M cum hi inti iff ret of nil the Melon to
6 r- ensjona ) co-ordinate systems. hr uihh ai % t ailed rnultaot vector.
Direction of a vector In spate (ii) Vectors Subtraction
tt is represented by three angles which the vector ma « es w. th i , and :
*
The subtraction of a vector » s equivalent to the addition of \nnn vt i > » nh if \
" *
1

axei dire* tott mrru J

Explanation

Consider two vector \ and B To subtract B from vector A First , take the

negative of vector B Add ( B ) into vector A graphically as shown in fig So

0, V

A B « A M B)
..
n
Vcv’Mf uhll.lvUoM 1.1' v
.
. IV » t
» ibo IHI* oroiuui iim itw
.

1
( iii ) Multiplication of a vector by a scalar
A vector can be multiplied by
dl Oevcribe the addition of vectors by head to tail rule . .
Ffir Vvur Idlur lu iliun 1 a positive number
r *t reverse pftx.ru of verier
*
addition h called resolution
2 a negative number
1 a scalar with dimension
of vector
1. Multiplication with positive number
Head to tail rule
When a vector \ » s multiplied by a positive number fl (I n > 0) Then the*
»t is a graphical method to add two or more vectors ,
Explanation product vector will h #ve magnitude equal ion A and
* .
direction as th it of II .
vi iiuf

inimbi i rf iilu i
\ i

.,
. multiplied i

. > |*UI IUM «

I I
B
'

fm •
*
rKgiimv il ' . Muyniiudi nl
0raw ttuf representative lines of vectors A \
Mid li Job ‘he tall of new \ cv t < < K • II \
<
2. Multiplication with negative number
vector B , with the head of vector A In • tail ot » ector A with head
**
multiplied by a negative* number n (i e n < 0 ). then th * * product vector will have
of vector B ,
Whon ,i vector A is

to that of A .
magnitude equal ton V but direction '/ 7 * ‘ »
" <
 Chapter 2 [Vectors And Equity
36 Scholar .s PHYSICS — XI ( Subjective )

Multiplication with scalar quantity

3. Q5 What is meant by component of vector and what are
a scalar quantity n, then the product vector will be a new physical quant , rectangular components ?
When a vector A is multiplied by (i) Find rectangular components of vector.
dimensions of n and A (H) How can we determine a vector from its rectangular
whose dimensions are equal to the product of components?

Examples . yy
velocity v is momentum! p = m v ]
V Product of mass m and
—»
_ Components of a vector
,
> Product of mass m and acceleration a is force ! F = ma ) For Your Information I The effective value of a vector in a Kiva direction is colled component of a vector
Resultant of unit vectors i A vector may split up into two or more than two parts these parts are known as
impulse [ I = Fx t ]
> Product of force F time t
and j is /2
N components ol vector.
(iv) Unit vector ' Rectangular Components of Vector
magnitude is equal to one with no units in a given direction is Jhe components of f vector which ore perpendicular to each oilier are called
A vector whose
called unit vector.
It is represented by a letter with a cap or hat on it .
rectangular campon ruts.
Explanation ft Y
Mathematical Form t
Consider a vector A which makes an angle 0 with x - axis as shown in figure .
— *
— A

If A is a vector with magnitude A, then A = A A OM is projection of vec tor A on x - axis and ON is projection of vector A on y - \

axis M
OR *A= A k
\
By head to tail rule \
A
o. OP = OM + MP [ As ON =MP ]
Examples A A A
1 J H
> Direction along x , y and z- axes are represented by unit vectors i, j,k
X ( > \ \!
OR A = AJ + AJ • (1) 1
respectively. FIQ. 2 S »)
<
A
1 IU :. < >
> unit vector r represents the direction of r . n Thus Avi and Aj are the components of vectorA . SinceAj and Aj are at
A

> unit vector n represents the direction of normal drawn on a certain surface right angle to each other, so they are called rectangular components .

X - Component of A
(v ) Null or Zero Vector In right angled triangle OPM,
A vector whose magnitude is zero and direction arbitrary is called a null vector. OM
For Your Information = cos 0
— ¥

Posiiion vector of origin is OP

It is represented by 0
null vector.
Example OR — = cos0
The acceleration of a bod) A
moving with uniform velocit)
A Sum of a vectorA and its negative vector (- A ) is a null vector , i. e. OR Ax = A cost) (2)
is null vector.
A + (- A ) = O
*
Vertical velocity
projectile at the
°
highest Y - *
Opponent of A
^ Sum of vectors taken head to tail along the sides of a closed polygon is right angled triangle OPM ,

—
point is null vector In
null vector '
= sin( >
( M \ ) Equal Vectors OP
Tie vectors are said to be equal vectors if y Pave same magnitude and same For Your Information A,
direction regardless of the position of their initial points. Two like parallel vectors of OR — = sinU
equal A
Example equal magnitudes arc
Hie*
— vectors.
A = A sin 0
*
Two parallel vector A and of sa ne mag . ide add direction are equal vectors. (3 )
Ay = A sin ()
 Chapter 2 [Vector And
*
Scholar s PHYSICS — XI ( Subjecthe )
39
Vector A iro~ its rectangular components

W =r twde of A
Q.7 Describe the method of addition of vectors by r . ; ular components.

r = * err ? e >M
Vector Addition by Rectangular Components
1' *V-V Consider two vectors A 3nd B representedb / tHe lines CM an ’ < as Sro / /r
A =, > A A/ (4)
m figure. By head to tail rule the resuJtjflPaf these two vectors is #= A + B
“

' D 'ec! on o * A Resolve the vectors A , B and R i their rectangular components.

' ' ' er * « r ec •' 3'ge OPV
*

"SB £ 3
OM
rf' n
-
pr —— % «»« S«m »
T>< proceM by h h a vector ia
* *
>
*
t>c obtained from iu recurtptb
A, cofT onenu i» called compotHm
C ^
* of 9 vector
" ,

• A
-4
rA
* «U
* A, (S)
/

0. 6 bef r
* poprhon vector . «
FI . ? o

X - Component of Resultant
Portion Vector •
9

OQ is Magnitude of x component of vector A , MS is the magnitude of * -

The vector whkh represent the posit ton of a point or a particle with respect to ' '
* *«
component of vector |i and OK is the magnitude of x component of vector K
fir id origin n tailed position vet tor . It is
-

denoted by r
I xpUnJtiOO f r o m figure
OR 00 « m
f
- dimere nmol inordinate
f' o system (plane ), tho position of a point P ( a , b ) is
Or OR v 00 » MS ( since OR MS )
fi pr «/ ,
* f » U' d by
*
| * r a bj ] R, A,
* B, (D
I
fh« mtgnitud* ol tint position v « » t o r i s This shows that the sum of magnitudes of x components of A and H is equal
r Je b' i
to the magnitude of x component of resultant vet lot U . I ho Own * 1' .u iukils ill
.
v
.
e< .b)
Y Component of Resultant

OM Is the magnitude of y component of vector A ,5P Is the magnitude of y

llm incredible b ihukiw
•id art -
i. xn ANARION:
in equilibrium

-
Ihe ('him e <iuobuh .uc
.

nt Htablt equilibrium
1< .iii' *. the Imr through
component
I rum figure
of VIM. tor It and UP is the magnitude of y component of vet lor lu » v

the ventre of nuw prnsc *

Ihrough rtic , twvo
. .
nv t It
o RP AS+SP itic It tv ( alts in or

»* II a
X
HP QM SP IvInccRS • QM| ouiviUc tin- IMU iiva
.
-.
* •»
( then the <utoh iL\ MII not
. '
In thru dimensional inordinate system (ipat* ) , th » - position • * f .« point P (a , b, c) be m qylUlmum
U rtprttonud by [ R» A> + B>
‘ 1 U)
•
i
*
it i i b | ck
, » m
This shows that the sum of magnitudes of y components of \ and It is equal

and Ms magnitude is to the magnitude of y component of resultant vcvtoi K

i /*
sa i h u'
;
 Chapter 2 [Vectors Ami Equity
40 Scholar ’s PHYSICS - XI ( Subjective)
41
.
m

and Rxj
m

are the rectangular components of resultant vector R , hence

Since Rxi Q.8 How can Y 0U determine the angle 0 of the vector R by its rectangular
components
R = R ,i + Ryj
Putting values of R » and Rv from equation (1) and ( 2 ) we get, Table 2.1
Determination of Angle (9) II Y
R = ( A, + )i + ( Ay + By ) j
1) First find <f> by the following relation.
—* R. - R + .
Magnitude of Resultant Vector R 4> = tan'
1 [— \ A
i R + R,
* X
K ) X
The magnitude of resultant vector R is R . - R.
= the angle which R makes with nearest x - axis
R= V' R«
!
+R>
i
Where
^the
signs of Rxand Ry find the quadrant in which R lies as follows:
R . ~
* ~

2 ) By III Y'
/
IV
|ft = ( 3) If both R, and Ry are positive, the resultant lies in the 1st quadrant 1st quadrant
Fo ** Your information and its direction is 0=
Direction of Resultant Vector R If R is ihc resultant of vectors A
o=t
Y
*
—»
The direction of the resultant vector R is given by and B then us magnitude is If R . is - ve and Ry is +ve, the resultant lies in 2
nd
quadrant and its
x
tan0= — •
R yj\* n 2AUcos 0
Special Cases:
:4
direction is
0 = 180’ - <J). 2nd quadrant

Or
-
If 0 0°
R ,* A +B 0 =180 -*
Rv If 0 * 180°
- If both R and Ry are -ve , the resultant lies in 3°d quadrant and its
0 = tan
1
Rm», A D - *
direction is
'
x * (1
0
X
If 0 0°
°R
0 tan
» - t
A , + B,
( 4) - VA * +BJ 0 = 180*+ 4> .
th
If Rv is + ve and Ry is -ve, the resultant lies in 4 quadrant and its
In General direction is
Do You Know ?
For any number of coplanar vectors
*
A , B C,D, . we can write .
I hc sum > f vector Inch forms the
"
0 = 360 * - <j>
sides of open polyi on is not ero. MULTIPLICATION OF TWO VECTORS

And
R=
NK .
+ B + CX + ) J
+ LA,+ BV + C, + )!

y' „
.' c
Vectors can be multiplied in two ways:
III Scalar Product

* Vector Product

^
- By
1 + C\
A>+ 4
0 - tan
, Aj + fC, + A
Q- 9 Define scalar product of two vectors. Give examples.
Summary
•
() find the x and y-components of all given vectors.
00 Add x-componcnts of all the vectors to find the x -component Rx of the resultant vector.
Scalar Product ( Dot Product )
(hi) Add y-components of all the vectors to find the y -component Rv of the resultant vector.
(lv ) Find the magnitude of resultant vector R by usinj;
 Chapter 2 [Vectors Anti Kquili
42

Where A and B are the magnitudes of vectors A

B SthoUr ’ s PHYSICS - XI fSuhi,
- ,
43

and B and 0 is the angle between them. B . A = ABcosO

( 2 ) ( since AB = BA ] B
Physical meaning From equations (1) and ( 2 )

Dot product of two vectors is equals product of magnitude

to of one vector and ,° 8 Cos 0 A . B = B. A <6
. N

the component of the second vector in the direction of first vector . Fig . 2.10 (a) V*
\N
(ii) Perpendicular vectors \
From figure 0 \
B
-* -* ^ -»
A . B = A (projection of B on A )
- \
If two vectors are mutually perpendicula
scalar product is zero . i. e.
-* B
Fig. 2.10 (b) A
*
-• -« 1
<5> N
A . B - ABcos 90°
Or A .B = A (magnitude of component of B along A ) \

s
0
s
N
A.B = AB ( o )
* A . B = A (B cost ) )
Similarly A A .B = 0
Fig 2.10 (b)
A
In case of unlits vectors,
B . A = B (Projection of A on B ) 0 = 90"
j = ( » ) (1) cos =o
-* -
4
-
t
' - -
B . A = B ( magnitude of j . k = 0 and k
component of A along B ) k
Similarly i=0
—i . j— j—. k— —
•

A
B . A = B ( A cosO ) Thus = = k i =0
B
Examples »e
( ill) Parallel and anti- vectors 0=0
1) Work is scalar product of force and displacement If two vectors are parallel ( 0 = 0° ) to each other then their scalar product
is equal A
to the product of their magnitudes. I. e .
[ W = Fd ] *
2 ) Power Is scalar product of force and velocity A , D = ABcosO0 = AB (1) = AB B
«
This Is the positive maximum value of scalar product.
-
(P F v ]
3 ) Electric flux is scalar product of electric intensity and vector area
If two vectors are anti-parallel ( 0 = i8 o°) then their
e= 180°
scalar product Is negative .

-
E A] A . B = AB cos 180° * AB (- 1) = - AB Do You Know ?
4 ) Magnetic flux Is scalar product of magnetic field strength and vector area This is the negative maximum value of scalar product.
Magnitude of a vector A is v A.A
(Iv) Self Scalar product
(4 , l A]
&1Q Write down the
* a

characteristics of scalar product of two vectors.

The self product of a vector is equal to square of Its magnitude I. e.,
0 2
For Your Information
A.A = AA cosO = A (1) = A 2 Why K.E is scalar quantity even
In case of unit vectors, through velocity is a vector.
1 . 1
Characteristics of Scalar Product i .i = (i) (i) cosO0 = (1) (1) (1) = 1 -
KB - mv * —2m ( V . v)

(i) Commutative property B Similarly

Scalar product of two vectors is commutati t j . j= land k . k = 1
A A A

If A and B be two vectors and 0 is the angle be veen them. Then Thus h ., ij = j . j= k .k = 1

and A . B = ABcobO
e B Cose
M
F»Q. 2.10 (a)
OP B A = ABAcosG
44

. Sea s' proc jet n terras rectan. g- yiar components

Scholars PHYSICS - XI (Subjective )
45
Cy :
- .
oer two ’erto' A and B in scace then .
fingers o* the right nsnd in the director
of 'ttati - Erect thumj

A = A l + Ajj* A k ad B = BJi B„ j B k
^ . - -.
"epre>s" the c 'ectior tr AxB

Examples
^

- 3 = -. — — A. j - B _ - B. i
A. i B, ~ orc e
- ‘
ts the vector cro6ixt of ooscs : -'orcer e

- -
,
5'

[ r = r *F ]
= AB . .Gi) A B,(Lj> A.BlfLk )
- ^. *
¥
2) Force or = n*-:ng charged csrt*de

-
3 f : is tor : y..r. r
A,B,(
^-
ArBt<ki> AJB, -
i -
(k i) AA <ki) Yew fedTag off the edge
. e odtj of changed partide ard - eghetiefie -Aike. [ F VXB ]
mor-ecrur ,s . rI
;

= A .-
B P) AA<« \
~ n - :
V*tf

FYPLAVATIOV-
-
>:> 3a 10 i' < id 3. Angu s'

momentum p e- ( L = rujp )
^ .c .
-
product of positicr sector r r: .r
' '

A . B, c - A /5 . -. A B, •
v

a hoAag a *3.7
- -. 5 '
- 5 -- r teak as ^ nr
- .
0,12 Wrrte down the characteristics o' vector c^oc c: of two vector .
* -
- B = A B - v 3 - .VE. -
A* i ic£ 3 ' A sar

. ^
; ir
»5 I** IStK
CG
Characteristics of Vector Product £G«I SET
- «!» A. ffiul

-
3C£I £TC2.
**cas? = V B,*A (
badl (1) Voituc - of Commutative law
E* SJSii = AA AJB AA - . =
rr cr*:r s fflcTsr* — •<; 5>£sr
^ "
e cr: : s croc : : vector A = : 3 is 'ct sc
"
— JfcstTve Z5r& jeL
*3

- :i:
A,3 - A 3. - \J, • A = :: : t
'

_
>.c r:: r - rr :5>
•
- r *' r — '
e
*

AB - = A -mr r w
_ .

ns acusecr or -a
re sec ri ~ r c
r » JZ: : -
*

' ~ y& XH: irc

*r prw. -; *
r
- 3
r '

3' A A3s«8
A = - A. sash

= -aj 2 c -:S i3 = = i
. r~ - ecjatons
ed:':*OCJC2
Iiicr
>:<i : ::.
tfl usaxrr a- X
- At* 3
r: (2]
- -3 * A
0® A* 3 * B x A Acr
»
: •** .- ~i ; -. i
— * - - 3 < - t
^ ZZZrS A 3TC i S I *'' A A1 1) Perpendicular Vectors

L
_= 3sia -
l
'
'
A cross product of two perpeiwiciPar 8 = 90 ' 3~~

-
*

' err:
•
icc 2 .: T IGC 1
_
is — e r '
ecccr -
~ 2 grc ce. ie.
7
AxB = A3s3nW c 43 7T
=
: ^ ' c r rc2 r . -r : ire 12
.A* 3 = A3 3 a
Ii c: = '
of prxc »ct - _
-— -r : c c _c _ Ax 3 = A3 n
;
' e. lirecsicr
grt 'arc
cr ,' r; , A* 3 C3r 1 : *
cy ' "
= c -e.
~
-
* • case & ts vectors
i= W W W k - k
- Ci - s. is zr - e r - c ^ ecicrs c ier “ e
*
= - 2 ;* - ecrc i zc ^.2 i ixj = (i) {iJsin 90'

-
*

.
- '
. ’
s - any
*

h*c:zr K -
r rc 2 r rc^ gr 5ns " cr t -: pant e -«-ges. Cun
j x k=i aod k <i = j
A A JB
 /
46 Chapter 2 [Vectors A EquiiM

Hence A Scholar’ s PHYSICS

— XI (Subjective)
47

Note:- i X j=k j xk =i kxi =j + AyB» ( j i) + AyBy ( jxj) + AyB,( jxk)

B *
j x i =-k k x j =- i i x k =- j + AxBx (kxi) + A By (kx ]) + AxBx (kxk)
2
0 *i
(iii) Parallel and Anti-parallel Vectors
= AxB, (0) + AxBy (k) + AxB,(-j)
The cross product of two parallel ( 0 = o°) or two anti parallel ( 0 = i8o°) vectors is A
• a null vector , i.e
. + AyBx (-k) + AyBy (0) + AyB (i) 2

In case of parallel vectors

B + A2 Bx ( j) + A By (-i ) + A B (0)
x
<r 2 2 2

Ax B = AB sin 0° n = AB ( o ) n = o n = O
= (AyBi - A By )i + (A B„- AxB ) j+ (AxBy - AyBx )k
2 2 2
In case of anti - parallel vectors Why do you keep your legs far
apart when you have to stand it
AxB = AB sin 180° n = AB (o) n = o n = 0 the aisle of a bumpy- riding Ax B = ( AyBx - AxBy )i + ( AXBX - A xB ) j+ ( AxBy - AyBx )k
2

bus?
(iv ) Self Vector product EXPLANATION: This result can be written in determinant form as
When you stand in the aisle of a
The self product of a vector A is null vector. -
bumpy riding bus, you are in i j k
unstable position and you may
fall. To make you stable, you AxB = Ax A, Ax
Ax A = AA sin 0° n = AA ( o ) n = 0 n = O keep your legs far apart, so that B, By
In case of unit vectors, your base area may increase and For Your Information
the line from C.G may pass Cl. -J3 Define and explain the term torque or moment of force.
i xi = (1) (1) sin 0° n =(i) (1) (o ) n = 6 within the base area, so no torque
is produced.
Pivot Point or Axis of
Rotation is the point or
Similarly
Torque axis about which an
j xj= kxk = O object rotates. Torque is
Definition
the tendency of force to
So, The turning effect of force produced in a body about an axis is called produce a rotation
torque.
i xi = 0 j * j= o kxk = 0 OR
( v) Area of Parade ogram The product of magnitude of force and the perpendicular distance from
The magnitude of cross product of two vectors represents the area of axis of rotation to line of action of force is called torque . turning
point
OR
parallelogram formed with these vectors taken as its two adjacent sides. force can also be defined as the vector product of the
The moment of e
Area of parallelogram = (length ) (height) radius vector from the axis of rotation to the point of application of the Ths nut Is stay to turn with « spanner.

n7
O
* ( A ) ( B sln0 ) force and the force vector.
AB sin 0
b
Mathematical Form 3 -

* magnitude of ( Ax B ) s
•
r - tF It Is easier still « the spanner has a
to

JAXBJ
0 long handle.
Area of parallelogram Where £ >= perpendicular distance.
T* And F * Magnitude of applied force
%
[ v\ ) Vector product in Rectangular component Form
Dependence of torque
Cornier two vector A and B In space, tn * - r Torque depends on the following factors;
1 ) Magnitude of fora
A ' A ,i A , j + A,k and B •Bfi 4 By j + line of action of force
Bfk 2) Perpendicular distance from axis of rotation to

called moment arm.

AxB * (A 41 4 A j t A/ j/ /
f l S f : B j B,k)
Unit
- + A ,B / i /j; Atha0* i )
 Chapter 2 [ Vectors And Kgu
48

j J
^^
For Your Informal!
Scholar * PHYSICS - XI

The SI - unit of

Examples of torque
torque is newton me ter ( Nm ) and its dim ensio n is M
^L T Torque is important ;
the operation of electrv
motor which is used
vacuum cleaner
,
,
t r = (r sinO )F
r = r FsinO
in vector form,
wi th a sp an ner ( wr en ch ). dishwashers, compi
• Tightening of a nut im ba lan ce ^
on an d of f the gr ou nd du e to tor qu e printers, videocassot r = r FsinO n
• A seesaw rot ate s **—
rig id bo dy . recorders, watt
fo rc e ac tin g on a
Q.14 Calculate the torque due pumping stations etc.
r = rxF

Torque in a rigid body Direction of torque

bo dy as sh ow n in fig ur e . Le t Fis the force acting on the Where n represents
Consider a rigid
——a

r of P wi th res pe ct to piv ot 0 an d 0 is
' containing r and F . It can be fo title Of poo picked
body at point P . r is position ve cto
Aguiaii
UK
w»U
*
Con >vu
Important Note *
ihe other leg ude ways? If not.
the angle between F and r . then why not?
Torque is the counter pc rce for rotational motion.
EXPLAIN ATW) :
Resolution of force F Torque plays the same role in angular motion as force plays in linear *
You cannot raise the other leg
Resolving the for ce into its rec tan gu lar co mp on en ts we ha ve motion. lick wayv betauje m O&wg
— so, your bait ur J will
Torque determines angular acceleration as force determines linear decrease and you will he to
FsinO = component of force perpendicular to r acceleration. mutable equilibruim ind > O«J
of force along the direction of r Anti-dock wise torque is taken positive and clockwise torque is taken
may Call down be
* . to .

FcosO = component
•
.
line from C H vnj|.fill
negative . the hue area.
Torque due to force about 0
throu gh po int 0 so th e tor qu e du e
As the line of action of FcosB pa ss es ,
Interesting Application
to this component is zero . He nc e tor qu e due to force F is eq ua l to the Q.15 What is value of torque if the body is at rest or rotating with uniform
angular velocity?
torque produced due to FsinO and is given by
r = r ( Fsin 0)
OR z - r Fsm9 Torque acting on the body will be zero,
In vector form, / Reason
In this case angular acceleration is zero, so torque will be
r = r FsinO n
r = Ia ( 2nd law for rotational motion)
OR r = r *F
r = l(0) = 0

Alternatively - pS /
Qi6 What Is equilibrium ? Give Its types.
nt
am ba m
Resolving me position vector r m r 0 fts components we have
Equilibrium EXPLANATION
r «,« nO & component of r perpendicular to F A body is said to be in equilibrium if it is ai rest or moving wuk umfi
velocity under the action of a number offeree* .
m
r cosO - component of r along the r ®CtlO * fi Types of equilibrium Tto
• »
1
*
.a
There are two types of equilibrium. tw
Torque due to force F 1 . Static equilibrium be by
In this case the torque is given by
If a body is at rest , It Is said to be in static 1
r* / F Examples to
Where t * r sinU = moment a* Book lying on a table
Fus
 > - 1 - *• *

BE SN »

2. Dynamic equilibrium
If a body is moving with uniform velocity. it is said to be in dynamic
Chapter 2 [Vectors And Equilibri
^
Scholar’ s PHYSICS - XI (Subjective

Note
1
'*
H

m 51
equilibrium .
Examples
1. We will apply the
conditions of equilibri um to
forces are coplanar. situations in which all the
A car moving with uniform linear velocity 2. To calculate to torque we
• A body is rotating with uniform angular velocity choose an axis .The position of
3. A most suitable place is
one through which line of axis is arbitrary,
Motion of a paratrooper pass. action of many forces
Q.17 State the two conditions of equilibrium.
Do you think the rider in
Point to ponder
persons below were the figure is really in dangeT? What
removed? if
EXPLANATION:
First condition of equilibrium (equilibrium of forces) The rider in the above figure
is not in danger because
through the C.G passes through the line'
The vector sum of all the forces acting on a body must be null vector. in danger when the people the base area. The rider will be
below
the line from C.G may fall out are removed because, now,
j. e. L? = o (1) Alternate:
If the persons are removed
of the base area.

In case of coplanar force , 1st condition can be expressed as: then effective center of gravity will

z .-
raised so the raider is im more unstable
condition.
? 3 (2)
Can You Do?
And £ h =o (3)
Where A
FORMULAE
y FK = sum of x-directed forces
— *

£ F = sum of y-directed forces

?
Commutative law for vector
addition
Note Subtraction of vectors
If the rightward forces are taken as positive then leftward forces
Vector representation
taken as negative.
If upward forces are taken as positive, then downward forces are taker? With your nose touching the
end of the door, put your 4 Unit vector
as negative. feet astride the door and try
Forces which lie in a common plane are said to be coplanar. to rise up on your toes.
Second Condition of equilibrium (equilibrium of torques) EXPLANATION: 5 Null vector
The vector sum of all the torques acting on the body about an axis must be null When you try to rise up on
your toes the line of C.G
vector . will fall outside the base 6 Vector in terms of
i.e.

.
Q 18
5> o-
Under what conditions the body Is said to be in complete equilibrium ?
area and you may fall.
Also in this case, line of
action of our weight passes
7
rectangular components

x-component of a vector A
through the axis of rotation. 8 *

Moment arm is zero, torque y-component of a vector A •

will also be zero. So we can

9 Magnitude of vector A
Translational equilibrium not rise.
When first condition is satisfied, the linea ccelerabon
body is said to be in translational equilibrium
0' body is zero and the
Direction of vector A — *

Rotational equilibrium Position vector of a point

When second condition is satisfied , angular srcelerc ten of body is zero and the P( a, b) In plane
oody is said to be in rotational c libri n. Position vector of a point
Thus for a body to be in complete
’ « ibrium , be
conditions must be satisfied , P(a, b, c) In space
i.e . both linear acceleration and angu. accelera on must be zero.
 Chapter 2 [ Vector And K
* iSibn
l '
Scholar * PHY 81C3 - XI Suhjecth'
( t)
53

,
^
2
R = .J( A
J
Magnitude of resultant ( R ) + B,) + ( A + Ry )
13
I of vectors - A and B
Ay By 4*
31
Self Vector product of unit
vectors i jandk. i i
* - O * .
l* i m
*

°
•
knk
- O i
14
Direction of resultant
of vectors A and B
(Rl 0 = tan (
l

Ax -fB x 32
Vector product In terms of
rectangular components
Ai' B
- rAyB / ,
* A,B )U ( A,B .- A,B,) j ( A,B -
* , Ay Bt i
)

15 I Scalar product of two vectors AB = ABcosG ?

A B
Angle between two vectors *
l Scalar product of two AB = 0 33 sin - i

A andB AB
| perpendicular vectors
Scalar product of unit vectors
i* j = 0 j k =0 k i=0
17
.
i jandk 34
Area of a parallelogram and
vector product
Area of a parallelogram A•
Bj * AHs . nO
I Scalar product of two
AB = AB
^ paraHel vectors 35 Torque TWF t •r * F T •rFfinOn
Scalar product of two anti
^ 1 parallel vectors
-
AB = -AB 36 1" condition of equilibrium I F =0 I? .- 0
- IF, - 0

20
Self dot product of vector A
Self scalar product of unit
A A =A
2
A= 37 2
nd
condition of equilibrium I* - ®

i i =l jj = i k -k = l
21
vectors i. jandk
* •

I rectangular components
^
Scalar product in erms of
,
A - B = A B 4 AyB y + Ajp Bj
^
„
23
Angle between two vectors
0 * cos “
‘
AB
AB
0 ® cos
'
-i «A B 4 Ay By 4 AZ B

AB
/

)
A andB

1 4 | Projection of vector A on B AcosO ®

AB
B
A cos 0
- A B

AB *
B cos 0 » A • B
25 Projection of vector B on A BcosO ®
A
Vector product of two *
vector Ax b AllsinBn
*
Vector product of two
11 B ABn

rr
er

MM
Vector product of unit
vectors l jandh.
Vector product of two
\* ) * k *
H
<

- *
i k *i j

* 9 parallel or anti paraHel

cross product vectr

AxB
- O

»0 • i

A
An A 4* 0
 Chapim J [ \ m x n And \
M
s 4 holm ' « PNYAICA \ | ( Si»h|i « Uvr , 55

Multiple Ch oice Qu es tio ns (t ) pit »Hn « l MI fuui \

%h V \

. If iTt «i»liinl*» of scalar and v #,!of

Id) M » * A »nata » t •
ol pal lUitog» ant
.
-
It pfftduHl o| t wo vectors ara tema than
angla between them It
rei arr ,» * M *\ IM ( ) / A « cVrrwr uw .iHvr:
( )
a 7 »» >
*r awtan h» nn 4
•
* * (b )
(t ) 60* ( d)
» 7. Reverse proton of vector addition 1% called
t‘ ftdk out the walat quantity negative of
* vector
.
( ,« ) A
BCt un of a victor
(6) torque '
< •» (c ) resolution of a vector /. ( d) * >!» • at ion of a vector
KJ momentum (d ) Impulse
II When a voctor It multiplied by a negative numl»*r , lt idir action ^
*
> I Add«t n of VWCtOri Ob#V
* *
(b) distributive law
(a) Does not » hang# (b )
V
Cha rggi bvW
commutative law (c) Change by 270° (d ) Change \ by 1 0 '
<* )
(d) .01 of these 14 . Tho minimum number of vectors of un aqual magnitudes , whose vector sum can ba « aro it
*
(0 avKKMttva law
(a) l (b ) 2
i I. Mat m mbe ol components of a vector may be;
(bl two (0 3 ( d) 4
Ia) one
15 . Two forces act togctl tha magnitude of thalr ratultant It maximum whan the angla
tc) three ( d) infinite
batwean the forces Is
* 1 Two Kvcof act together on an ob| ct . Tha magnitude of their
act at
* resultant force Is minimum when th#
(a ) 0° (b ) 904
270 °
(c) iso' (d )
taj 1BQ' ( b) 90**
6. If AxR points along * aids then the vector A and B must be In
tc ) 45 * (d) 0° xylano (b ) yi * plana
(a)
V S. Megmtucie of resultant vector of t>N and 8N which are perpendicular to each other Is: ( d) All of these
(c) <4 plane
fa) 14 N (b) 10 N A vector In space has rectangular components

(V A.
k)
Two
20 N

are A » 3i - 2 j- k. B * - At - i j a k, then
(d)

(b )
2N

B Is negative vector of
a

\
* 18.
.
( 1)
(c )
one
three
(b )
( d)

What Is tha angle that the given vector makes with y- aali? A
60°
two
Infinite
2i • v l:J
( a) B © Hi pyillgl to A r| (a ) 30°
A
(b)
* (c ) 90° (d ) 120“
(c| Both a 4 b B is perpendicular to A
(d)
•f a force trlSNb applied parallel to moment arm of 5m, then torque Is
19 . If for -
two non tero vectors A and B ,A , B 0
*
the vectors will be:

(a ) parallel (b ) perpendicular
( a) 25 Nm (b ) 5 Nm
(c ) anti- parallel ( d ) ft •60°
(C ) 10 Nm (d) 0 Nm
20. Which pair contains one vector and one scalar?
g lf A B * 0 then A> B * (I) Displacement; Acceleration (II) force. Kinetic energy
( Hi ) Momentum , Velocity ( Iv ) Power ; Speed
(4) 0 (b)
(a) only (l) (b ) only (t ) »
(c ) Ari (d )
(c ) both (II) and (ill ) (d) only (Iv )

^ 9. W H' l - P i - . than angle between vectors Is: ANSW1M

ik A
la) 0* (b ) .
1a .
2 d JLd 4. a .
5 b ii 7.4
.
3d A

(c) 120* ( d| II b . 12 c. .
13 d .
14 c 15. A lb b . II? C Ik A 19 A

^ 10. The magnitude of product vtdor f Lt^ A> L r Ii equal to:

*
(a) sum of adjacent U<k >f p# aeiog. area of parallelogram
 Scholar *! PHYSICS - XI (Suhjn,jve )
57
of Exerci se

-
Short Questio ns

Q 2\
s ^
X - r
0 — Ax d

Ant.
ID Unit Vector
A vector who %t rngnitud with no
*
i\ ont units In .
1 given direction Is called unit vector.
* (II) If the vector lies In i
— .
"
QIJ' quadrant bqth ofIt , ; rectangular comoonents will hjv« opposite signs.
» with cap or hat on it . I
ffpft>fnitd bv lctte
*Form * [ >

Mathematical
-
*
it \ u vector * th magnitude A. then A
-* *
AA
#1
r- 1 x
A
Y' Y"
0
* .
Q 2.4 If one of the rectaAguiar components of a vector Is not zero, can Its magnitude be iero? Upleln
( O.G - Khjn 2004 MV Pur 2004,Uv 200 IV WO, Grw ion). .
(n ) Aov^tion Vector
or a particle with respect to fixed origin is cal .
Ans. No its magnitude can not be zero . *
' He vectv w*ch rec
> *esents the ooiiton of point M
-* Reason
A is demoted by t . The magnitude of a A is given by
Jitwo c er uona<
»
* -
ctxyc
'nate system (plane) , the position of a point P ( a .b) is represented by
A= yjAt :
+ A / + A*
r » n * bj of u
P ( , b, c ) is represented by This equation shows that magnitude of the vector will be zero only wh * n
* i i ".‘angular
m three ;
dawensicn cooro natt system ispace) . the position of a point a
* components are zero.

\ x « ai - bj ^ ck | Q.2.5 Can a vector has components greater than the vector's magnitude?
«. Lhr 2004. Mir Pur »0 . fin* *OOfi kV *tml .
(MI) Components of a vector .
( Rwp 200
The rectangular component of a vector can never be greater than the vector' s magn r ;, : •* .* *
mffitXft &
- • 3 .
ector -ag »
^
.
direction is called component of a vector A vector iay
Ans
to vector's magnitude. The component of a vector other than maybe
*
Pwn the
c magnitude of the vector.
* the possible or entation of
can be
-
CU 2 TH
* *
of three sectors fives a xero resultant What Explanation

(D.G ^an :006, hd 2 The magnitude of the vector A is given by

are "eprvsenttd by the sides of tnonoie joined by head to tail rule, their sum * A=
OR A
2

- A,
^V
=> A,
A
2
OR 3
AJ Ay *
, B ar d C as srown »n figure it is
# e’ ear tha : sum of the
, vectors is
* =>A i A, OR AiA ,
tai c the rst vector coincides erth the head of the la sf vector.
' ' The shows that the magnitude of rectangular component can be equal or
Q 2- 6 Can the magnitude of a vector have a negative value ?
A B *C « 0 Ans. No, It can never be negative.
Reason
By definition the magnitude of J vector quantity

can
«s a K er|
*
be oegatnr
* a A
{As it is measured by the length of the vector which Hf »
*tr
*
Oxi . edor A >> it on nu
* will both th rect nful»r comport
>n
* *
li,
A»
Iti </v ponenu new opposite signs?
C. »> e vector +* tr r . '/ its rt^erguler components win be negative In this case, we always take the
 of v cto« 7
ScholarPHYSICS ~ XI ( Subjectiw
i
- 59
.
Q 2.7 If A B* 0 , Wha
* t can you »ay abou t the comp onen ts two
* (0
Explanation

will be null vtCtQ

JlJS
Ans. Sum of their resp ectiv e comp onen ts also f
Explanation
If A = Ati + Ayj ancj .
B* B i Brj Ans, Consider two vectors A and
B as shi
Then A +B 0
( A ,i + Atj
-) ( .i Brj)
> fl + « 0i 4 oj
As A = B and angle
By using head to tall rule .
betwec
in figure
o vector Is 90°. [Given]

OR . , Bf ) j OUOj
( A fB,)i+(A 4 . Proof
H = A and R' = A -B
Comparing the coefficient of i and j on both sides, we have
A, + B, * o| and Magnitude of R
In vector form
.
and
A + B» » 0 A, B, «0
Q.2.8 Under what circumstances would a vector has components that ere equal in magnitude ?
( 2 ), it is clear
Ans . It is possible only when the vector makes an angle ofi ndlhion
Proof ^ ( 3) / * K
. 45

Let A and Av be the rectangular components of vector A 45" B

* A?
"

if Ay * A, o \
OR From figure
A sln0 * A cos0 45“
OR sin0 » cos0 ZLOM * ZNOM = 45°
4>
OR

OR
sinO
cosO
tan0
1
1
- Therefore,
ZION «Z10M ZNOM » 45* 45 90
°* °
-B

OR
=0
-
8 Un (l)
6 A5 l
'
So R and R * are perpendicular
Hence proved.
to each other . N

.
Q 2.9 Is It possible to add a vector quantity to a scalar quantity ? Explain . < w 1005, •* »OOt . MWl Alternate Method
.
Ans Ate, It is not possible.
Angle between R- end R
« q -4#

‘
Reason
Both physical quantities are dlffinnt In their physical nature, scalars have magnitude only t (b) ( A c B) (A . - B)

algebra ).
vectors have magnitudes as well as direction.
Scalars can be added by simple arithmetic rules while the vectors can be added by special rules (
*
.. -A
4 -4
.B . -
A - -A
4 - -• -*
B A
-B* , B“

Qxio,Can you add zero to a null vector ? (Grw 200$, »wv loot, Lhr loot, thr 200% Grv
. A - A . 5 * A . B - BJ
2
I. '' A, B 3 B,A ]
.
Ans £te/ it is not possible.
-B
.
3 3 (vA .B =0
=A as A IB)
Reason
Both lero and null vector are two vent hysica quan ibes one is scalar and the other is vectc
A3 -A 3
[ V A B]
•we can not add «0
' zero Into a null vector .
I 02.11 Two vectors have unequal magnitudes, u their sum e equal
to zero ? Explain. So -R
4

is perpendicular to R
^
.
Ans flte their sum can not bt
/ ro.
-
(Sfdaoo& Mfrftjr joot aoo
' -' *
& MmaooS lhrao O Jon,
 Vector Ami

Scholar * PHYBIC & [ 1

'bjattrvfj
A
Id
Magnitude of K and K • ; W, , . r
» •'* .- ,«- .i VWM,
I
" *, * *
«
,o * v
•
( ) 9 $' ' >*
fanfcc ),
' « i4rt
* i 1
,
5 v
**« »' % :
• ' **
'
'
• •
' :
- V" > :
• •
* *> jr

* » • „• • ;
,

As R * R .R
0,2.15 SMPPOM! the iUUn of d^ j W &r
^ '*
. £$ v. * :* ae .; Y * o.-
vectors ? ' *** «
*
R =
^^
R = ( A + B).(A + B)
/. - -* -*
- -* * -
A . A + A . B + B. A + B . B
•
Am . The sum of theve / ectors wdJ te
Reason
In this case, the head of the \cSi .Or r, ’ , t'
• ir tfci o '." e i' s* esr.v a: vow . .
y
* it |r*
„

^ P
the resultant is zero.
R = A + 2 A .B + B
2 2

(v A .B = 0 o r A l B) D+ E+
/
R * A +B
^
2 2
(!)
D
And R ' * JR ' . R' E C

R' = / - B .
\ (A ) (A - B)
F B

' JA
1 A
R= . -
- A B B . A+ B
az.16 (a) traveling in different directions at equal speeds. The actual direction o f
2 2 motlo “i of X is due north but to an observer on Y, the apparent direction of motion of X lies north-
R ’ = >JA - 2 A .B +B east. The actual direction of motion of Y as observed from the shore will be
( c ) South-East ( d) South West. -
R' =
> 2
+JBi
From (1) and ( 2) it is clear that
£ (2) (v A .B = 0 05 A J_ B)
Ans.
( a ) East ( b ) West
(b) The actual direction of motion will be due west .
Explanation
R = R'
v * = velocity of ship X
(Federal 2003, D.G.Khan 2005, Fsd
Let

*
* — f
A B
sam e magnitu de hav e to be orie nted, if the were to be com bi ’ vy = velocity of ship Y
Q^.13 How would the two vectors of the ,

to give the resu ltan t equ al to a vector of the sam e mag nitu de ? \ 7 - \T
nral 2£ v
* - vy = velocity of ship X relative to ship Y
W - 0
E
~

Ans. It is possible only when the angle between two vectors is 120° „
Or
0A + AB = 0B
6 (T
Explanation
ateral
V, -hAB S V i - V y s
repr esen ted by two side s of an equil B
If the two vectors are R
triangle, then the third side represents their resultant such that
angl e betw een two
Or AB =a — Vy
=
*
A B
= = R as show n in figur e. In this case the =a
This shows that vy is directed opposite to AB
. 6 0' ( )C 1201
vectors is 120°. 60’
^ l . e . due west
A

Q.2-14 The two vect

given below
ors
and
to be
tell
com
why it
bine
is
d
the
hav
only
e mag
one
nitu
of
des
the
60
thre
N
e
and
that
35
is
N.
corr
Pick
ect.
the corr ect ans wer from tb
..
Q a 16 ( b) A horliontal forct F Is applied to a small
at an angle 0 to tha horlion tal as sho wn In
obje
figu re
ct 9
Tha
of mas
mag
s
nitu
m at
de
rest
of tha
on tha
resu
smo
ltan t.
oth
force
plan t
actin
Indl
g up
nad
and
(I) 100N (II) 70N (iii) 20N along tha aurfaca of tha plana, on tha object Is
Ans. the correct answer is 70 N (a) -
Fcoa8 mgiln0 ?
jfeason
JJjm of two vectors is maximum, if they are parallel to each other.
‘
(b)
(c)
-
F sln0 mg cos0
Fcoa0 + mgcos0
j.e 60 N 35 N = 95ft
SAn of two vectors is minimum , if they are opposite to each other .
(d)
(a)
-
FilnB mgilnB
mgtanO
.
Fig 2 22

i.e 6oN + (- 35 ) N = 25N

 Scholar ’s PHYSICS ~ XJ (Subjective
An
* la ) Fcos 9 •mg sin6 .
Explanation
/ J k
Resolving F and W into rectangular components along perpendicular the inclined plane, we haVe
Then, ty x X
~
=
F cos0 - mg sinG = net force acting up along the plane.
2
AiX A,y A,z
A x A 2y A Z
* 2

when components are

reversed i e

Q.2.17 If all the components of the vectors A and A were reversed, how ,
2 would this alter A , x ?
(Mir Pur 200S, Lhr 2006, Bwp 2007, Grw it
Ans. / It would not change in this case .
\ Explanation

\ we know that direction of A , x A ? is perpendicular to the plane containing

A , and A , as show
figure ( a )

A, x A , ( A ) * ( A)

A, x A , * A,' x A,'
AT Q.2.18 Name the three different conditions that could make A , xA » 0 ?
2
•+ -* -*
(Mtn 2006, Bwp 2006)
0
Figure (a ) A.
Ans. ,
If A , and A are two vectors then
Figure ) ) x Aj AiA2 sin On .
Conditions
Now, If all the components of vectors A , and A are reversed ( l. e. If we take negative of vfd -•
,
*
; A x A , Is zero if

A , and A ), then again the direction of ( - A , ) x ( - A , ) remains the same as shown In figure ( b ) .
J 1) ,
A orA 2 is a null vector .
•
* •*
-> . -K . 2) A , and A . are parallel |U* ., 0 = 0UJ .
l. e A, X A2 a
-
( At ) X (- A , ) • : B) A , and are anti - parallel [ i. e., 0 = i8o° ]
Alternate Method Aa
It would not change In this case
Q.2.19 Identify true or false statements and explain the reason
Explanation
(• ) A body equilib rium Implies that It Is neither moving nor rotating.
A A
* In
then the body Is said to be In equilibr ium
I A
If coplanar forces acting on a body form a closed polygon,
A, A,yj ( h)
.

let A,0 / • A,|k

A
Ans. (a) This statement Is feist ,
A A
and A ^ 1 AJIMI A ^yj 1
AJ k#

-
 Chapter 2 [ Vector And Equjiih
,

Scholar’ 5 PHYSICS - XI (Subjective)

Reason
Because in dynamic equilibrium body ma v mnvr or rotate with uniform velocity

IF % simple 2.1
Solved Examples
true
( b) The second statement
is
' '
fromPan originCKn kn as^showi'aia ] ^ ' tan are represented by two points A (2,3,4) a
Reason said to be in transla
condition cf equilibrium is satisfied and the body is ( i ) What ^
are their position vectors?
in th s case lr
'

( ii ) Calculate the dista n een the

equ ibr jm
'

the configuration of the Data :

' tv' o aeroplanes.
is
Q.2-20 A picture is
suspended from a wall by two strings . Show by diagram * Givcn
be minimum . A ( 2 , 3 , 4) . - •

which the tension in the string will .

for B ( 5 ,6 ,7 ) ,
figure . Resolve the tension in
Ans. Let the p cture s suspended from wall by two strings , as shown in * To Find : 4
,
rectargui 3 ‘components . .. A
T T on of first aeroplane
t 0 ) = FA = ?
Ogives = !
<r
if
Position of second
l T CO* •* T co *
vector aeroplane = r5 = ?
TsmO TsmO = W
tarn tween the two aeroplane = r = ?
(ii )
2T sm 0 = : Calculation
\v
- 2sm0
; (i )
-v
As position vector r in three dimensional space is given by

”
ersor
r LS
A I be mi* — urn fsinOis max mum Ti *
*
T K r = a/ + bj + ck
Thus position vector of first aeroplane A is

Sr 7 =1 OA 3j =rA = 2i * T 4k

e = 9cr and position vector of second aeroplane B is

i
A OB = r. = 5i + 6 j + 7k
Sc
(ii) According to head - to tail rule,
A OA + AB = OB
"
=T or
—
> * —
AB = OB - OA
SV ngj a 'e vertical
4
= AB = rs - rA
- r
'
or
T i l: I s i i
•

Hen 2 X 3 V MC -
4
-
:s center c' g'a Try se' the action
2005 2 XS
o Its we
.
» *?

§wp 20C4, l 2306

*r Fid 2001, Lhr.2009 .Gr
* l
7 = ( 5i - -
6 j 7k ) - ( 2i - 3 j - 4k )
t rr. 3«» : t r = 5/ - 6 j - 7 k - 2 / - 3 j
^
ftusor
- f i un : * * i t' z 3 - y ‘o M
' R * • ? ** * i through Divot OOlnt (Cfrtttr of gravity ) 10* .
^ *»giiiiudc of vector AB is
the
r
disianct
= 3 / - 3 j ^ 3k
between the positions of two acropUne, ihereto e
- .

fit
P
r = A3 = jof Of - Of
-
« v 27
r=
49+9 + 9
So t* :r :t f »0)

0* t• o *w making angU W
on a body in direction*
ION » cl
- rtf tn# tysvl * MO o« i
i -
£ jd forces of magnitude
-
10
r* pectivcly with x axi * . Find
N and
( he rc ^ u llani
force .
- 49
brt of '
'
‘+p ’ •s ts'T, V0 i
r> a
* fadL paMeJ Vto * f' '* r

^
0
fo
' Y -
* "
 Chapter 2 [ VtUor And Fguititir
^ ,
Scholar PHYS»C
^ ^
M ' ci (Su v
y ^ 67
< # iv«rn Data:
ION p, f ^^ 0 tan 1 *

Magnitude* of In si farce
~

18 66
Magnitude of sec on d for ce = P 2 = 20 N
An gle of find forc e 0 » 30" , 0 ctan (l.l96) '

'
* b = 5oH
Angle of c< ond force - 0, 60''
To Find:
«
Find the* angle between two force of equal
magni
, when the magnitude of their resultant is
l‘*
->

Resultant force 7 alio equal to the magnitude of either of thee forces.

Given D« »:
( akululions: *-
Step (I): ; d arc the given force, and R , their resultant.
Ut F and j
x-component*
Ihe x component of first force Pi
* * = Fi cot 0 , iF I . -IFJJptffM
Let angle of I* force * * 0°
= 10 co» 30” * 10 x 0 866 « 8.66 N
t
Jk
The x - component of second force I I co \ 0 Angle *of for ce «
02 ^ 0 —
* , To Find: F
20 x 0.5 * 10 N
.
* 20 x co 60° a
Angle between forces * 0 = 7
y- components
Calcula ion:
The y - component of the first force * Fi, * Fi inn 0
The x -component of the resultant is:

The y component of the tecond force l;

jy - I vm 0.
= 10 X tin 30° = 10 x 0.5 = 5 N .-
F Fn + Fz,
? m FjCOs0| + F2CO502
= 20 x sin 60° = 20 , 0 866 = 17 ^ 2 N
%

or Ft = F|CosO° + F2cos0
Step (Ilf : or -
F, F| F2co$8
Similarly y-componcnt of the resultant is:
I . I 1. I . .
The magnitude of x component I , of the resultant force F
-
Fy F|y + F2?

Step (Hi ):
.
F *= 8.66 10 = 18.66N
Fy =" F , sin0 | + F 2 sin b
Fy Fjs
= inO 0
FisinO
As sinO° = 0
Fy •F2 sin0
Now the magnitude of the resultant is:
component l \ of the resultant force
The magnitude of y
Fy * F|y Fjy
F, = 5 17.32 = 22 32 N
R
putting values
- y / Fx 1
Fy 3

Step ( lv ): R -V ^
( F F:C0S ) + (FjSinO )
2 0) 2 °
2

As R = Fi = F2 - F
2

The magnitude 1 of the resultant force K is given by . Or F * (F + F cos0) + (F sin

2
2 20

I
.2
F F - 2
+ F2
cos
2
20
F * F + 2F2 cos + 2
2 2 0
+ 2
F2
F2

(
cos
sin
0
20
+
+
F sin
cos20 )
As sin20 + cos20 - 1
( 22 32 ) a
Thus F F + 2F cos02 + F
1« 2
I* = [y a&M )2 -
0 2FJcos0 + F
2 2
I* - y / 'M 8.2 498 2 Or 2F COS0 * - F
1
I V 848 4 Or cose - - -
f-
[; 2W \ Or cos0 0 (- 0.5)
Step ( v >: Or 0 = cos 0.5 )
Direction of the resultant ton
-4
given by L us
^
^
P \ 20°\
angle between two equ al forc e1
. is 120°.
$8 Chapter 2 [Vector And Equilibn,

Scholar * 8 PHYSICS - XI (Subjective!

69
*
A force F =2 i + 3 j units, has its point of application moved from point A( l , 3) to the point 8(5, 7
T-
> IT*
A .B
, = 26
Find the work done. Magnitude of vector Q is:
Given Data :
* *
V
B = (3)2 + ( 4)2 + (
- )
12 2
-
Force = F = 2 i + 3 j units B = i/9 + 16 + 144
First point = A(1 ,3)
Second point = B(5 ,7 )
B = /169
B = 13
- "

To Find: Putting values of A^ . B^ and B is equ . ( 1 ),

Work done =W=? we get,
y
Calculation: Projection of A on B^ = A cos 0 = —
13
The position vector for point A is: rA = i +3j |A cos e = 2I

The position vector for point B is: rB = 5 i + 7 j

The line of action 01 a force F passes through a point P of a bo
Now , d = rB rA “
»

- *
— * A
dy whose position vector in meters
is i 2 j + l . I f F = 2i - 3 j + 4k ( newton ), determine the torque about the
^A

point ‘A’ whose position

» A
vector ( meter) is 2 i - j + k .
A

? = (5 i + 7 j ) - ( i + 3 j )
Given Data:
d = 5i + 7 j — i -3 j Force = F = 21 - 3 j + 4k
d = 4i + 4 j
Thus,
Work done =W = F* . d
The position vector of point A = 7
The position vector of point P = r 2 ^ = 2i + j + k
= i -2 j + k
To Find:
W = (2 i + 3 j ). (4 i + 4 j )
Torque about point A = r = ?
W = 8 + 12 Calculation:
/ mi
W = 20 units The position vector of P relative to A is
r*
AP = r = r 2 - r ,
Find the projection of vector A = 2 i 8 j + k in the directio of the ve
— n ctor B = 3 i - 4 j - 1 2 k . 7* = ( i - 2 j + k ) - (2 i + j + k )
Given Data :
-
7* = i +2j + k -2 i -j-k
A* = 2 i 8 j + k r* = i - -3 j
i? = 3 i - 4 j - 12 k Now,
The torque about point A is:
To Find:
= r* * F
Projection of A* on B = A cos0 = ? *
putting values, we get
Calculation: 7 = (- i - 3 j ) x (2 i - 3 j + 4 k )
Let 0 is the angle between A* and B* then , 1 j k
A* . B* = AB cos0 I = -1 -3 01

A.B
2 -3 4
Or A cos 0 = (i)
B 7 = ( 12 - 0-
) 1 + (0 + 4) j -*- (3 + 6) k
Now A* • B — (2 i 8 j + k ). (3 i - 4 j - 12k ) 7 = (-12 i + 4 j + 9k ) N m
A* . B* = 6 + 3 2 - 1 2
 Chapter 2 [Vector And Equin
70
^ i Scholar’ s PHYSICS - XI SubierH, ^
( ,

71
A load is susp ended by two cord s as show n in Fig . Dete rmin e the To Find :
susp ende d P , if max imum brea king Distance covered by the man = d
maximum load that can be at =9
stress of the cord used is 50N. Calculation :
Let beam can rotate about point A.
Given Data :
Maximum breaking stress of the cord = Ti = 50N
Angles made by the cord are
0 i = 60° and 02 = 20°
w

Fig. 2.15
By applying second
i .e. ST - 0
6 x 400 - 400 x d -
condit *
200 ^ ^
x 3=0
' .
ahou tpo nt A
400 N
To Find : 2400 = 400 d + 600 A
Maximum load at P - W - ? 400 d = 2400 - 600
Calculation: 400 d = 1800
Resolve Tj and T2 into rectangular components. 1800 A
Applying the first condition of equilibrium for x -components. d- — 3.0 m ••••>
IFjr= 0 gives ‘
400
d = 4.5 m
<
1
T2 cos20° - TI cos 60° = 0 The man can walk a distance 4.5 m fn point A.
T,

t
Putting values , we get T, Example 2.9 *400 N
T2 * 0.94 - T , x 0.5 = 0 T, Sin 60*
60*,
I, Sin 20* A boy weighing 300N is standing at the edge of a
uniform diving
20*
0.5 T|= 0.94 T2 board 4 m in length . The weight of the board is 200N (Fig).
T, Cos 60* T, Cos 20* Find the
0.94 T2 forces exerted by pedestals on the board.
Tl = 0.5 Given Data :
T, = 1.88 T2 Weight of the boy = 300 N A D
(1 )
w Weight of the board = 200 N
As Ti = 50 N, then from equation (1 ) Length of the diving board = 4 m
1' .
T2 =
1.88 Fig. 220(a )
To Find:
T2 = — Force exerted by the pedestals on the board = ?
1.88
T2 = 26.6 N . Calculations:
Now applying First condition of equilibrium for y-component. Let R| and R2 are the reaction forces exerted by the pedestals.
C is the centre of gravity at which the weight of the board acts.
ZFT °= 8>ves> Applying first condition of equilibrium A" .
Ti sin 60° + T2 sin20° - W = 0 As IFX = 0 gives no information because there is no force acting along x -
Putting values, we get
50 x 0.866 + 26.6 x 0.34 = W
axis
Now EFy = 0 gives
,4 so

Or 43.3 4- 9.04 = W
Or W = 52.34 N
1
,
or R + R2 = 500 N
-
Ri + R2 - 200 300 = 0
(1)
300 N

^
SOON
Or jW = 52 N , a JOfU)

Applying second condition of equilibrium consider the point D as an axis of rotation. ]T t = 0

MBBBB
I A uniform beam of 200 N is supported horizontally as show n. If
the breaking tension of the rope is 400 N , how far c n the man of
weight 400N walk from point A on the beam as show^n in Fig.?
Given Data:
-R > x AD - 300 x DB - 200 x DC = 0
- -
-
-Ri x 1 300 x 3 - 200 x 1 = 0
Ri 900 - 200 = 0
-
~ Ri 1100 = 0

Weight of the man = Wj = 400 N

-
Ri = 1100 N
Putting the value of Ri inequ. ( 1 )
6.0m
Weight f the beam = W 2 = 200 N - 1100 + R2 = 500
Breaking stress of the rope = 400 N
Length of the beam = t - 6 m
•
^ 2 = 1600 N|
,
Negative sign of R shows that it is direc ted dow nwar d .
n

Given Data

To find:

Calculation :
.

Distance

Position
Point
Point

Position
P
Q
(
(
-
3
2
,9
,-3
)

between points

vector
vector
of

of
point

point
P
)
'

=
and

r,
Q

=
r

- -
0*
ExerciseProblenns

-
r2
—
*
2i 3 J
3i + 9 j
*
\ has its tail
ai
2 rV'cctor And Equilibria
grholar

2.3
Given
s PHYSICS - XI ( Subjective!

Data :

To find :
Unit vector = A * ?
Calculations :
By definition

Where A is the
A -4 i +3 j

A=
A
A
A

mai
—
Vl
wi

W hat is the unit vector in the direction of the vector A =4 i + 3 j ?

—
.which is given by
i

73

pulling v
point P to point 0 * r * r 2 • ri +9 = V25 = 5
DisplaCement vector from
l Thus
! 7= *
(3i + 9 j ) - ( ~ 2 i '

7 = 3/ + 9} + 2 / + 3}
-r
4 * ~ r* o particles
= 5i +
Distance between
I 2y
points P and
y
Q Magnitude

fHi
of r
- .4
•4

,
-
*
vector r - r> an d its orientation with respect to the x - axIs.

So , r =N 2
r = N/ 25 + \ 44
r = N/169
^ inacc
Given data:
Location of first particle
Location of second panicle * rj 2 l
-
\ *3
+3 j
i +7

- «
j

(T= T3 unitsJ system Kan

coo rdinatc
in meterv To find:
rx - 0 " •
2.2 <4 *
*

i
is sitting on an
what is distance Of the insect from this corner of the rocm Magnitude of (
and orientation (direction ) --
0 7
Given Data:
The position of
of
insect
origin =
from
0
corner
(0, 03
p ( 2, n
- Calculations!
As relative position vector
Coordinate
To find: r - ?
Distance of insect from corner putting value , we get
Calculations:
As the position vector of insect with respect to origin is
7 (-2i + v tf
«
75) ) - +

r = 2i + j
—==
r
f
_ 2
7 - -
. 21 + 3J iM?
Magnitude of r r V *^ + )'

J
r = (2 f +
= %/ 4 + 1
= V5
Hence pT24 1 ^
h
 rhapter 2 [Vgctor AnJ grholar’ s PHYSICS - XI (Subjective
r 75

74 -
B = 3i 4 j
To find:
r =,/ 25+16 (a ) C = A + B
Magnitude and direction of
r = >/41 (6) D = 3 A- 2
E 53
(direction) « Calculations:
Orientation ( y-
cp = tan
' 1
(a ) C = A + B
x Putting the value, we get
4
tp = tan 1 7 "
C = (2/ + 3/

q> = tan (0.8 )-1

C = 5/ -}
cp = 38.6° . .
the resu Hant lies in 3 quadrant so rd direction is Now magnitude of C is C = - J (5) 2 + (- l ) 2
As
9 =180° + <P
9 = \ 80° + 38.6° '
= V26
0 = 218.6°
~ =5.09
7 2T9° Appr°*l
f from A the ren C = 5.1 units
the result is 6 - + ] . if B is subtracted
added to vector A ,
If a vector B is
2.5 Direction of C
_ 4 i + 7] . What is magnitude of vector A ?
cp = tan -
\ ' 1
f

Given Data: v*
(0 <p = 11°
A+B = 6i + j •
, vector lies in 4th
quadrant, so
is + ive and y -component is -ive
is so
(2) As x-component
A -5 = - 4i +7 j
0 = 36O° (p -
To find:
Magnitude of A -A 7 0 =360° 11° -
0 =349°
Calculations ; ~ ~
Adding equation (1) and
(
(A + B) + A- B) = 6/ + } - 4i + 7 J
(2)

(b)
Hence
D = 3 A - 25
[Q = 349
^
2 A = 2i + 8 j putting the value , we get
-
A = i + 4; D= 3(2 +
/ 3}) 2(3/ 4;-
)
A
_
-
A

D = 6? + 9 j fy +
— A— (4)

—
Magnitude 0f A Y ( 1)

- —
= yfrTIe D = 17;
= Jn

Give* « X li - .
A= 4.1 units

W - M .
- B *• “ d” 8
" * f =
‘ A t B andlW
Now magnitude of D is D =

As x-component
E
is zero so
3the vector lies
y. axis i .c - 0 s
along -axis

w.M
>
-
x axi5
»
 Chapter 2 [Vector And Egllt|.
76 Scholars PHYSIC S - xijSubject
, and B = 2 i + 4 .
j
^ 77
Find the angle between the two vectors =A 5 i + j
2.7
* -
d = /• >•„
Given Data:
d = (6i + 4 j ) ~ ( 2i - j )
A = Si + j 4
d = 6i + 4y - 2i + ) '

B = 2/ + 4 /
Calculation: 3 = 4/ 4- 5 j A

As A . B = AB cos # -> ->

Now work done = W = F. d
A .B Putting value, we get
Thus cos 6 - AB
(1)
W=(3i +2 j).(4i+5 j)
Now W=(3)(4)+(2)(5)
A . B = (5/ + /).(2; + 4 j ) \V = 12 +10

A . B = (5)( 2) + (1)( 4 ) W = 22 units|

A . B = 10 + 4 2.9 Show that the three vector / + j+ k , 2 /- 3 j+ k and 4 / + j- 5 k are mutually perpendicular.
Given Da
A . B = 14
A = / + j+ k
The magnitude of vector A is
B = 2i - 3 j + k
J 2
A = (5 ) +( l )= V25 + 1 = V26 = 5.09
2
A A A

C = 4/ + j - 5 k
5 = V(2) + (4) = V4 + 16 = V20 =4.47
2 2

To find:
Putting value is * equ \ . ..( l ) To prove, these three vector are mutually perpendicular.
14
cos 0=( Criteria:

- 5.09 x 4.47
cos 0 0.164
1
© cos (0.614)
* Calculations:
These three vectors will be mutually perpendicular if A . B = 0, 5 . C = Oand C .A =*X)

-
0 52° A .5 = (/ +}+ £).(2/ 3}+ £) -

» 2.8
Hence
Find the work done when the point of application of the force 3/ + 2 j moves in a straight line 1

Given Dalis
-
the point ( 2, l ) to the point (6, 4)

Force F* 3/ + 2J
-
. A . 5 2 3+1

A .5 0-
This shows that A and
-
A . 5 = ( l )(2)+( 1)( 3)+(1)(1)

--
B are mutually perpendicular
Point A (2 , 1 )
und Point B ( 6 , 4) B . C --
(2l 3 j-
+ k ).(4i + j 5 k ) -
To find ;

Calculations;
work done W« ?
- B.C ( 2) (4 )+ (

B . C = 8 - 3 -5
-> -*
-3)( l )+ ( l )(*5)

The position vector of point A( 2 , - ! ) » rA » 2/ - ) B.C 0 -

Thi position vector of point 1; (6,4) r „ « 6/ + 4 j
't
* tk

If displacement between point , and 1 is d , them

V
 1

'
Chapter 2 [Vector And Equine
78 , s PH YS ICS ~ XI (Sub ject ive
Cch ol » r !
•4 -
r. A
« «

« ( 4 / + y - 5 A ).( / +; + )
*
» * " »
79

-
C . A (4)(l) + (l)(l) + ( 5)(l )
C. A = 4 + I 5 -
- To find :
C = 8 units east

(a) A x B (b) Axe (c) B * C

N

B C
C.A = 0 Calculation: W -E

(a) Ax B = ABsin0 n
This shows that C and A are mutually perpendicular
Kcault: the ir mu tual scal ar pro ducts As angle between A and B (i .c noi
Thus all thes e thre e vector arc mu tual ly per pen dic ular , bec ause arc s
zero. AxB = ADsin 90° n
:

_
2.10 Given that A » I - 2 » 3 A and B
Given Data:
>-
^
- »

31 4 A: , find the projection of A on B .

—
•
putting values, we get
Ax B = 4 x 3 (1 ) n 1° =!
* *
-
A = / 2 j + 3A
* *

Direction :
B * 3i 4k
a

- A

According to right Hand rule, direction of Ax B ( i.e. n ) is vertically upward .

To find:
Projection of A on B - - A cos t ) c ? |AXB =12 units upward
Calculation:
(b) Ax C = AC sin 6 n
Let 0 is the angle betw een A ^ and B^ then , .
> * As angle between A and C is 90°
A . B AB cosO •
A.B AxC =4 x 8sin90° n
or A cos 0 * (1)
B
AxC =32( I )n
Now
AxC =32 n
* - -
A . B = ( / - 2} + 3 ).(3/ 0y 4 )
* Direction:
Ai = (l)(3) + (-2)(0) + (3)(-4) According to right hand rule, direction of AxC (i.e. n ) is vert ical ly downwa rd.
A . B = 3 + 0 -12
I -4 •
—
I Ax C =32 units downward
l A . B = -9
And B = 7(3) + (4) = /9 + 16 = V25 =5
J 2
>
(c) BxC =BCsin0 n
As angle between B and C is 180°
Putting values in eq (1), we get
Acos0=
91 -y
This is projection of A on B . - BxC =3*8sinl 80° n
BxC =3 x8(0)n
t and 8 units east, respectively. Describe car e full y
2.11 Vectors A , B a n d C are 4 units north , 3 units we Bx C =0 n I

(a ) A ^ B (b) A x C (c) B x C BxC = 0

Given Data:
Direction: .
A = 4 units north so it has arbinary dire ctio n
As Bx C results into a null vec tor
B = 3 units west
 Chapter 2 [Vector And Eg pHYSlCS - XI (Subjective)

2.12 The torque or ini

turning ' _
effect
_ of force about a given point is given by rx
-
F where r is
„
-Fr . Consider a force F = -3 /+ j+ S k
*
jk
^ A A
^ ^^ t
^
i
r = 0 -1
j k
1
81

from the given point

A
to the
A A
point of application of
N m about the origin ?
^ 1 -2 0

acting on the point 7 , + 3 i + ( m ) . What

* is the torque in
in
r = i (0 + 2) -}(0 - l )+ i
Given Data:
r = 2i + j+k
F =( -3; + j + 5 k ) ( newton)
(b) in this case
r = ( 7i -3 j+ k ) ( meter)
r, -i+k
To find:
r = rxF = V
Calculation ^:
As r rxF =
putting values, we get
-
r = r2 r{ = -i - j
r = (7i+3 j + i)x (-3i -t- j + 5k )
the cross product as, Now using the formula
In determinant form we can write
r ' = rxF
i j it '
t = 7 3 1| ? = ( -/ -; ) x(/ - 2;)
H
I
1 “ & ) *
r' = -1 - 1 0
r = i(l 5 - 1) - }(35 + 3) + £(7 + 9) 1 -2 0

r = 14 / - 38}> 16 fc ?= /(0 - 0) -}(0 - 0) + F(2 + 1)

-
point whose position vetf
2.13 The line of action of force, F = i 2 j , passes through the -
- k; Find '* aj the moment of F about the origin , fb) the moment of F about the poir r' = 3 * vector are 6 /3 and 6 respectively. Find the angle
\ of two >

wkxh the position vector is i * k

A- *
-
2 14 The magnitude of dot and
between the vectors.
cross products

-
Given data:
vectors.
r -
i 2j Let A and B be two given

?3fl&oa vector : -- • #

^
A

c of dot product
Magnitude
of two vectors

vectors
of cross product of two
cf F v* or. gm -
r ?
To find:
Magnitude

(bjxnnm &l ? MoutfeepoiaJ <rf » nthepoBi /. n vector it i k •f'" "

tv/o vectors
The angle between
Calculation:
% VXZM fix t oi r j bout v gin

r * r/ F
 U Chapter 2 Rector Aadr.

AB sin # =6 <2 )
Scholar’ s PHYSICS xi fSub j, ectivc -
)

Given data: 83
!> riding equ. f 2; by cqua ' ion (1 ) we gel Weight of the tractor = W
ABsin 6
ABcot 0 6V 3
stnd 1
6 Weight of the Bridge
Length of Bridge * 21.0 m
Length of Bridge span
= 15000 M
-
between SuPP rting ends 20
coid ° * mj

^- sW-
Weight, from wheels = =
! Wr * W* 5000 N
3
Weight on the rear wheel =
* A
= W W = 1SOOWOOO = -
,
- Distance between front v4k,a and • , 000 N

^
t a o V- 1 rear =
O To find :
3m *
Forces on the Br;
=7
2.15 A toad «f 104 « suspended from a ctothea line. Thu diatom the

Orvea data ;
*.
the h' rr/Aotal at each cad. Find the teuton in the etothea
line Ki that it make* an i»
line.
Calculi tiom:
F2

—
J
FfeZ22
- -lf .-o
condition of equiJibri jm .
-
f /wd W IQK f
5'
f * I? ,i /rce along x axis- J 7*
*«

r
• doth i » 7e * T

Apja /,«g #K firtt un/iAxm of eqv l, bru n

- . -
T i//* ; j* 7 c/ * IJ* 0
*
.
,

.
?

ffev/towsg ' Kr.i.s r, into rta fectangnfar torr prynenu

- 0
.
Mow applying
v
£ F, 0

*
F, *F3
F, + F
-
-, - - -
-.
F, F - W - W,.W 0
3

F, Fj -1000-1 OMlC-5000
23000 0
23000
(
-
(I;
0
V

—
•SflilM
z»

' *
/

-
T <'* » 5* 7 iv/sIS* Now applying second condition of equilibrium Zr * 0
-
- I et A i the axis of rotation.

>
*
*•»
I> F 0 '*> -
F, fABj W,fAC) W, fAC; W, f AD> +F/0r 0
- -
V
7 %m H* * 7 tm
27 am i f •w
if - W -0 ' - -
f-, 20 »000» 10 10000*10-3000 « 7 F 0

Fj *20 -*0000-100000-35000*0 0
*/
-
» 0

'/ r 7
-. * F, *20 215000-

——
2 ?
ml „ 215000
,

* 20
i - iL
2 0 -.
2/ -
p, 10750 N
-
. *L
/
or F, |0 750 * 10* N
T
0 52 pj- io. mfl
Putting value of P * in equation fl >
2U
Tz3Ef % ,
F 10750 23000 --
«i
.
J, s t n c s s a e
-
upperta
- r
, r
„ »„>
,
k*
^
U to r «a w , U
*^ - -^TOl4 lk "
*
J ^ ,-
F 23000 10750
,-
-
F 12250 N
,
F 12.250 * 10* N
\ j ~ 12.250
 Chapter 2 [Vector And Equi ) ;
84

2.17 A spherical hall

the Fig. 2.23.
of weight
Calculate the
SON is to
minimum
be lifted
force
over
needed
the step
just to
as
lift
shown
it
in
above
^ Scholar^ PHYSICS - XI (Subjjective )

,
Apply rsl condition ot equilibriu m alonsj \ -
f
85

the floor.
Given data: F=TSin.W
axisi .e..
—
VF = 0
t 4 V

T 'in 30
Weight of spherical Hal !
Height of the spherical
'
= W = 50 N
- h = 5 cm ^
i S an

Re- 2,23
F=T ( <> ) ?: 5.
jC
Apply first condition of equilibnum alon b b: 8
Radius of the spherical ball = r = 20 cm
To find:
Minimum force required to lift the balls F=?
-
Tcos 30° W = 0

Calculation :
From diagram
T= —cos— —°
30 F

DE = 5cm
CO = CE = 20 cm
and CD = CF. - DE
T =-
^
0.866
T = 11.55;
T sin 30"

|T = \ r. ji
t CD = 2 0 - 5 = 1 5 c m
From the right angle triangle OCD
Or
Putting th uc
2
(OC) = (CD) + (OD)‘ (Pythagorean Theorem)
*

= 11 . w
( OD ) 2 = ( OC) 2 - (CD ) 2
= 5.77
OD = yltnc ? - ( CD ) 7 * 3f
*** * *
x : x x
* * * * >:*

OD = V( 20) - (! 5)
J J
Scholar' s PHYSICS ( Objective )
i OD = V 400 - 225
Part I & II
00 = 75
^
or
OD = 13.2 cm
OD = 13 cm (approx)
Take point ‘O ’ as axis of rotation and apply second condition of
equilibrium i .c.. £ r = 0
F x AO - w x OD 0
F x 25 -50 x 13 = 0
F x 25 = 657)
650
-
W= 50 N
ATP FOR Part 1
Alternative To Practical
On
-
F=
••

25
-
|F ?6 N| PHYSICS, CHE MIST RY,
2.1 R \ uniform sphere of weight I 0.0 N
is held by a string attached
to a frictionlcss wall so that the string
makes an angle of
BIOLOGY
uV’ with the wall as shown in Fig. 2.24.
Find the tens ,on in the &
string and the force exerted on the
Given data :
sphere by the wall.
rnMPUTER SCIENCES
weight of the sphere = W = 10 N tfiimcv I
Angle between string and wall = 0 = 30° New Paper Patten I

To find:
Tension in the string = T = ?
Calculation :
Resolving T into two rectangular components T, and
Tv .
 Chapter 3 [Motion <fc p
s PHYSICS
to

Limitation of average velocity

.
Average velocity docr not tell US that the motion is steady or variabl e and the
^ Acceleration Scholar’

time rate of change of vetoed nrQ

91
The
path is straight or curved
If a squash ball comes Iback to its starting point after bouncing of the wall several Unit
of acceleration is nt /sec> )
'

* body i called
Acceleration.
also its average velocity is zero. SI unit Tf e
mensions of
times, its total displacement is zero and acceleration are
Unit and Direction nymma
Direction
. [ 1
J .It is a vector
M i
Acceleration is also a vector quantaV
SI unit of velocity is ni/.scc (i . e . ms ) Its dimensions are LT
'1 300.000.0X1

(m the directio n of change in velocity ^ the dlrection of

acceleration is along
quantity and its direction is along the direction of displacement .
vtrjwn )

-«3» un Wiv«
210.000
». 00•
f«Ot
•"** u*« * .. Average Acceleration
, For Your Information
„
„ r
f Mtti
. •„
»
Instantaneous Velocity 1.000 Uwn WUU MI f , The ratio of the total change in velar*
MB
>w«a
_ averageacceleration. iT to the total tin
me
taken is called A'
,
L

33.1 r unUt Aj )
^ ^
, as time interval At following the time t , approaches -*
The limiting value of
At
•>-
If •. *
<
' « IT
f eBui «i *
i .«
4
Inn,I ,
Let vI is the Initial velocity of the body which
, 1
Changes t0 the final velocity "
c

; * "«*
tty

zero is called instantaneous velocity . *

t me then he « v
to VelocityM
^
(
HI too
'
Mathematically a
4
ivnti
Munwn n «>ng ,- , 4?
v v = change injj city & A measurement of
A

mass independent

Ad
0 01 (
Mlkinu w»1
-J Then theavera«e ac«!£ o js|
'
^ £ ivenby
of gravity. The unknown mass
a calibrated mass me are
a light weight rod. If the
m and
mounted on
Vln = lim
* At -»0
—At
/
.
3 v =
V?

At
- V, AV
At
equal, the rod will rotate
wobble about its centre.

Do You Know?
masses are
without

Explanation *4
B
Instantaneous Acceleration ?
r 2o
Consider a body is moving along the curve as shown in figure. The body moves i |15
Av
— »
from point A to point B in time A . Let r, is the position vector of point A and
/
r/if /imams' va/«e of — as the lime
intervals , following the time t, f 10

x approaches to zero is called instantaneous

o acceleration. J0
r2 position vector of point B then displacement of the body during this short Mathematically 1 2 3 4
•
time ( )
time interval is How the displacement of a vertically
Av thrown ball varies with time ?
auu = lim —
Arf =r,-r, 51 0- At
EXPLANATION:
If value of A/ is small, the value of Ad will also become smaller When . for Your Information
Positive acceleration
If the velocity of a body
The variation of displacement
with time Is parabolic .
Is increasingjts acceleration Is positive.
Ad The Change n velocity miy Negative acceleration
A/ approaches to zero the point A approaches point B In this case . —At- be due to change In the velocity of a body is decreasing, its acceleration is
approaches to a limiting value called instantaneous velocity. I) magnitude negatlve
negative. The
„ federation is also called retardation or deceleration.
Note il) direction Edition for uniform acceleration
.or a body moving
The average velocity of the body may be zero even though its instantaneous III) In both of above
^ with uniform acceleration, Its average and Instantaneous acceleration are equal
velocity Is not zero .
ll What are velocity time graphs ? Discuss.
Uniform velocity -
If the body covers equal displacements in equal intervals of time, the body is
said to be moving with uniform velocity. Velocity Time Graph
Non-uniform velocity
If the body covers unequal displacements in equal intervals ( time,
The graph which represen
graph .
r ,
ts the variation of velocity
» .
nritv with time is called velocity-time
body is *
said to be moving with noti -uniform velocity.
Condition for uniform velocity
Let us consider
the case of a body moving along a straight path. t • •
\
1 nfi
if the average and instantaneous velocity When the body moves
of a body are equal the body is moving velocity, v time graph Is a horizontal t
with uniform velocity. with uniform
straight lin
Sh0Wn ln figure -
>T
OK
instantaneous velocity does not change, the body
^istanee ref
ered by the body = Area of rectangle Flo.3.4

^ is saiettb be moving with

 Chapter 3 [M linH „
92
SeboUr’* PHYSIO - XI (SMbjettiv .>
= ( length ] ( wdth) . ,,
= vt
=s
t
v

•
-
A native sign j pptt
oppos te to that of inrtial
The above equations
^ ^ ^ those quantities
vetocitv
'

can also be applied

to free
direction Is Do You Know ?

Case II
When the body moves With uniformly releasing velocity (i.e . with uniform
as
. V bodies by replacing a by g.
About acceleration due to Gravity (g)
motion of

a t on , the vfc oot time .

Cr 9c h is a inclined .
straight line with time axis
m absence of air all bodies fall frufy '
aether * ,

* the
Z caAl<
*
shown m f gjre FKH5 the action of gravity with uniform accelrr
^ wider

^ *
oody « Area of triangle occeler due to
Distance covered by the gravity It is denoted by g.
= i- (base) (height) Its average value near the surface of SL L f
measure of strength of gravitation eid Jf , * 9Jm/u4
^* is a
I
2
= vy , r
* I v~
0 v
2
I
2
v
i

F «
‘
s
n
maximum value at the
pofKJ
^
n 1 tw.
The value of g decreases with height as well
, «
per unit mass f l.c. gravitational field strength % * — )
Al of m
m

*S fW
Case HI
- body moves wit r .
^ r iforrni / mcreas velocity (i.e, with
- ng
DO VOU KNOW?
Velocity time graph »
04 Discuss Newton's lav, of motion briefly .
When r
* tXFLANATMJrt
;
«
.

form ecoilenfoo^ i • *
' -
vt 'ooty nm < .- .
graph r <i < / / /w as shown never perpendicular to ,
axis an n represent ir. fi ,KBR>
\txwOm% to
*• !««
o f«g vrt
*Note accelcniUnn
About Newton's Law of Motion
at trw
* body Ulk
• alfkmUMh rw
' - . - to TI .I- slop -*
. * 4' \ # * o > s of the ? % e
'« '. d <A- e iu Sir lsa » c Newton published his empirical laws of motion
* f
m « »;' •
ir T jtiori s # j ;
his famous in
m c«lM .
tangent *• tf f pOtf *
*
' book
"prlndplo* in i$87.These laws hold food for bodies moving with .
Vifr hcanc* of veiouty - time graphs . 20
-
imaller spe W as compare to the speed of light
§pamby
W g*
• ' v «dor * / * rr , e gt pi •
. tou.
* to average act elerution 10 For fast moving objects such as atomic particles in accelerators ,
LA (tauo
* 14«I w

• +< ’
!
gr . . p » to distance co / « - r - d h / relat vistic mechanics developed by Ablert tInstein is applicable i
’ i .
*
i
; .

j
the body
Write Q' jdtf . t
' • vatlom of motion for uniformly accelerated bodies ? 20l

'..
\
. ,
'-
Newton's First Law of Motion / Law of Inertia
Statement
* A

. of a yfi
I i

IhroWfl I l »i llm#> A body wilt remain al rest and a body moving with un form
at rest Au
w«rd«*
/

V Iwily la velocity will continue to do to, unless unbalanced external force eu i w»

* ii|

* «
4
Equation of Mot , on for Uniformly Accelerated Bodies It
. .

-- -
tiruiunoN
lht \ Is alto known as law of inertia
•
Cwdtv r ody n mov r|with ur form et': <deration along n straight line if Its
Ir • # v * 0' *7 s ^ * n4 h * r t re. # interval its final / elocity become wthgn
^
toed

* EXPLANATION:

^
e a>
(•) v » r,
* §?

,
4
M
, tCil
vl * K II
i t (he fini half off
"
vclotlly goo « on decf
and thun bttomci ie
maximum hi nfht
^
Inertial frame of reference
The frame of reference In which Newton’s first law holds * ca ed *****
frame of reference, for example earth Is approitmatefy an
" ji fir m#
* 0 0
or «f
a
•a We
(hi) / as *v/ - V
1
M
2 I the hall move# In lie*
illrecllon with IsM*
of reference
ea
«eu * *r>
N

How to apply Iheat equations In problems vilotlly, till K Newton'i Second Law of Motion
• These eeiuatons are usef ^i o v <'> linear r eu- with | tinning point Jlglffcft ttittment
' uniform jn
I ( tarfi /ig point, th#
vr’
Wen a force
acceleration is applied on a bod) , U prod****
| •' " J
1

•
'inea oguai w direct
• When tha ebjact moves a org a ilralghl line , the direction of U upward Initial direction. The magnitude of aueUmium fc
n t on does nut change ‘ IQfx
* and inversely proportional to its **** *
^
Kkiacaiars
in suci t <isei all v« »r « * an be treated
Mathematically, it is expressed as
• lit prupian,! vecto - cen be tn tied F =ma
like scalers, the
0< initial velocity poslll
** Where F - applied force on body
m = mass of body
a = acceleration produced
 GbapUt 3
* y

*
'4

1
— -P UJI
"1
^ V 3 I C S - X I ( Subjective )

95
Do you wear seat belt
J
1
Newton' s Third Law of Motion
!hen
1 it is
Statement ( hrswr Ny
•
f lion and reaction
( are eijuu l m ma gni tud e and opp osit e in dire non *
r
.
I4MM In t ' < mm p4rii
U *«*
* * * * -•
t»<4 ixmt Kr
*
— fX
.*.
C l j r i y, when twobodies of different masses
mo vin g with same

. . ' •! i « .
• i M»
Explanation
•

» dif fic ult to stop the ma xslv e one . 1 :ities

bod ies intt r ct with eac h oth er the n, acti on and reaction EXPLANAllON:
then it
sho
*
ws tha t the moving body has a q
Wh n two This
. to which it. exe .

e rts a force on When a moving car stops

A forw I ll feppltal Ail (he f . tig
nth
gj it . The qujfoty 0 f movri

^^ ^ ^
Irxcc . art for the « urn len gth oft irr e The y nev e c am * * jn /thing that
tnes to stop quickly, the passengers
fey flUl ft ' JB ( A Use f « Md Afvari «v y which describes the
but always act on different bodies ihnr^tv A> A t <i» iiti|i ,i i*im- 1 »,ij ,
, , t y of motion is called momentum. move forward toward the
IT. windscreen. Seat belts
Id Uft I
**
** in
4M«cttkW U ttu ir. m n tftvhr Q. 7 Show that N s is equiv . ms 'change the forces of
Q,3 What is inertia ? Explain. *( *h lh< N.-tfi,
>. f /ftt - f H
' * motion and prevent the
fwrfcncd H‘ b# b< » tod Uf« bm passengers from moving
. * (

itttuv r * uu?- »r J fiwti ht«t

* *
Proof f Thus the chance of injury is
greatly reduced.
\
EXPLANATION:
Inertia N S = A# •— • In » kg.
'

* * kg ms ’ ( v W = i kgUL When you fall towards

The property of a hody due to which it tends to maintain its state of rest
For Your Informulinr
.
Aci cn ArtJ re action ^ •
3
1 forward direction, you
or uniform motion Is called inertia. b l«kcc
* each ixhei Q.8 How force ar d momentum are related to each other ? State Newton apply force on the belt. As

Explanation J. second law in tirmj of momentum

's a reaction the belt applies
force on you in back
It Is a natural resistance to acceleration that all objects have . The greater uint In I’ ifi lc I
1‘ .. direction and thus you are

.** . * *
4
A car «ccckr 4 » Along a KM saved from injury.
the object ' s mass, the greater this resistance . So ,
VO (art CIMU> )
The mass of the object is u quantitative measure of its inertia Momentum and Newton' s Second Law of Motion
Examples E X PLA % A TKW* Point to Ponder
f' t , \ttuc ro«d >
Consider a > ody of mass m moving with velocity v , . A force F is applied on
When you make a turn while driving a car , you move the opposite
way in which the car turns the corner . CA
* 0 \
« of he .v jimr
but does n move ii.
7 *
:H
° 0G ,
t i o r time t and its velocity changes to vf
Acceleration produced by the force is
• You get pressed back In your seat when an airplane takes off.
-
Your face Is smashed against the windshield if your car suddenly
stops against a brick wall. ns Firil
ZX&
..
of motion gives tH
- -*
a = —v f
- v,
t
4

1
M
definition of force w He sec or According to Newton's second law of motion
Q. 6 Define and explain linear momentum.
taw give the measurement c'
* H
force.
,
J U in F-ma
«Quation (1) in ( 2), we have
(2)

Momentum
POINT TO PONDEK
What is the effefl on ihc speed of A
*
- V,
The product of mass and velocity
Mathematically
of moving body is called linear momentum.
fighter plane chising another* wh
it opens fire ? What happens to ll
speed of pursued plane hCI\
*
*
F=m
^ t

returns the fire?

* OK mv. - mv
F= : (3) Which hurt you In the
p = mv EXPLANATION: t above situations (a) or (b)
When the fighter plane opens fire. Where and think why?
Where p = the momentum of the body its momentum will be in *ck
m = mass of the body direction due to reaction force * v, = n tial momentum of body *»" •'
EXPLANATION:
The time of collision at In
backward direction and therefore !® ? ”
case ( a ) is smaller and
v = velocity of the body speed will decrease When ti = final omentum body
^ of * * vr therefore, the impulsive
Direction pursued plane opens fire in b 2nd
direction , die momentum will &clor‘ ' n of momentum
* , terms
force F will be greater
which may hurt you.
Since v is a vector quantity, so
having same direction is same
momenta n is also a vector qua
as that of veioc ?/ .
ntity ter " zsxssfr h
therefore its speed will increase
,
>+
* ‘
V
*
\
 XI (Subjective)
Chapter 3
PHYS |C
^ ~

serva tlon of Momentum 97

This i« morr K «*IUMJI fo« vn of Nowton' s second law of motion. Because it can f Con
*
family be applicable for the rises when mass Is changing. .^
p E is more Itcncrji
[Poo You Know 7]
Which will be more
;

_
Al
for tMample effective in knocking s bear
form of force than F k
"
As rocket acceletales, It loses mass because Its fuel is burnt and ejected to proof system of two smooth clown.
provide greater thrust. ^
er an isolate
^ moving with velocities Al i.

.
a rubber bullet or
Opn
v , and
.
ii

.<“
a lead bullet of the
1
Q. 9 Define Impulse how It Is related to momentum? and
V » tl» an, „„m h
same momentum
* r

r m Your hair acts like

crumple (soft) rone on y
J »« The »
“ «
** « n J B n;
v k EXPLANATION:
For knocking the bear
impulse = Fxt acts on the
, ^
1
skull A force of « N might . Let
Utopolst
be enough to fracture you,
/,
jnd vi respect ively bear. In using the rubber .
ft *
bullet, the time of collision t
» When large force acts on a hotly for a very short internal of time, then the naked skull ( cranium I f = force exerted on m, by m2 will be smaller (due to
product of force and time for which the force acts , is called impulse offorce . bony part ), but with a * bouncing) and impulsive

•
Mathematically .
covering of skin and hak j
force of soN would bt
rr\ 2 by m,
j = force exerted on
:
According to Newton' s second law of motion
force F will be larger hut in
case of lead bullet, the time
i 1_ (U -»
Unit
1 =F l
* needed Why It Is so ?
EXPLANATION:
The hair on the skull act <$
- ,
-
m vj - m v
#

I
, ,
of collision t will be greater
(due to penetration) and
the impulsive force F will be
/
St unit Of impulse is kg-m/scc or N-acc . It is same as that of linear momentum. smaller. Therefore, the
The dimensions of impulse are (MIT It Is a vector quantity.
a soft tone. For naked skuS
So the change in momentum of mass m is , rubber bullet will be more
a force of 5 N is sufficient -» - -* effective, to knock down the
Relation between Impulse and momentum to fracture because in tha
case time of collision at a
OR ,
m vj- m v = F x t ,, (1) bear.
According to Newton's second law of motion
r smaller and the Impulsive Similarly
— *
p _ mv, - mv, ,. ,,
force F will be more -*
( 2) _ m v' -m v
t effective rn case of the
, P Do You Know ?
Using equation ( 2 ) in (1), we have covered skull and hair, atb t 1
greater and the force F So the change in momentum of mass m 2 is
-» -* t
so effective. Tc
r
<
Tl = m v r - m v i not
OR
xt produce the fracture, m2 v'j- m, v 2 = Fxt (2) <
t *
| force SON instead of $
* Adding equations (1) and ( 2), we have
OR I = m Vf -m V i ( 3) will be required. -* -* -*
mi vj- m, v, + m2 v' - m2 v 2 = F x t + F x t
^ 1
Thus, impulse = change in momentum o the body

*
Instantaneous change in momentum of body due to impulsive force is called A motor bicycle's :safety
impulse.
Concept of Impulse Does a moving object have
OR
v
^ , m v -m
^ ,,
V + pjxt. (3)
helmet is padded so as to
extend the time of any
collision to prevent serious
Some times the applied force is not constant and it acts for
short time. e.g. when
impulse ? Wording to Newton's third law action and reaction are always equal but injury.
•
1
*
. a hat hits a cricket ball the ball force varies from instant to
collision. In such cases it is more suitable to deal with force
instant during
No, When the body is
moving uniform velocity °
PPosite in direction. So, EXPLANATION:
The impulse is the product
and time (i.e. then F = 0 so impulse Is of F and t. 'Hie padded
impulse ) instead of either quantity alone . 2 ero.
F =- F
helmet will increase the
Impulsive Force When the body Is moving =5 -
* time of collision t and thus
^ Force acting on a body for very short internal of time is called impulsive force with variable velocity then
Wns
F+ F* = 0 ( 4) the impulsive force F is
decreased.
force is acting continuously - equati00 ( )
4 in ( 3), we have
b.10 What is an isolated system? State and explain the law of Hence no impulse is
oMinear momentum. conservation produced because no fort
* =0
acts for short Interval of
\4 OR
time.
mi v,+ m2 v2 = m, vj + m2 v 2
abated system \
6 System on which no external agency exerts any force
. vfii1
>sth at: = final momentum of system
T
Chapter 3 r », 1

98 » fl PHYSICS — XI (Subjective)
Scho|
Define elastic a nd Inelastic
collision? ^ , - ', Kv, + ', _ V ) ( v 'i ~ V;)( V '; + V > )
99

i
Q.11

Comm ons(ot
(V V

.
(v - v ' ) ,
V ,+ V 1 = V 2 + Vj
(v' - v ), ,
d mcns
\ \ OR ,4
I Elastic and Inelastic Collision oua\e\asijc
\
V- v 2 = v 2-v '1
/

r coWtsion OR
(3 )
- V2 = ~ (v

.
* SmoothawAV . v 2 )|
Elastic Collision
is conserved, is
V 1~
called OR A)
* >iou- TOtatm
»/
'*' ^
^^*
The collision , in which Where
elastic collision. * \mpactparang (v . V )
, = magnitude velocity of first bail reiative to second baH before the col ision.

I
t
Example
Bouncing back of a hard ball from
collision.
a marble floor is approximately an elastic
zero. (Head
on
Hence
^
(v ',-v 'i) = magnitude of velocity of second ball relative to fin ball after the collision;

Relative speed of approach = Relative speed of separation

Inelastic Collision
system is not conserved is called
The collision is which the kinetic energy’ of the
inelastic collision. Q.13 Find the expressions for the velocities; of two bodies m, and ma after
Example elastic collision in one dimension.

9 Bouncing back of a hard ball from sandy floor

• Collision of two tennis balls.
Determination of velocities after collision
Note (l |
Momentum and total energy• are conserved in ail types of collision. We can calculate the velocities of the masses after collision by solving equations
(1) / (2) and (3) . * I
I Perfect elastic collision can not be possible.
Q.12 Show that relative speed of approach is equal to relative speed of separation for elastic col Velocity of m iss m, (i e v / ) ..
one dimension. From equation ( 3 ) ,
- vv = v , - v;+ v ', (5 )
Using equation ( 5 ) in (1), we have
Elastic Collision in One Dimension
Consider two smooth, non-rotating hard balls of masses m, and m2 moving in such a way so that theira
, ,
m ( v, - v ') = m2 [ ( v, - v 2 + v 1) - v 2 )

,
ne along the same straight line with initial velocities v and v2 respectively. When they make head oncoi OR , ,
m,v - m v = m2 v - m2 v 2 + m2 v
* -m 2 v2
with each other their velocities becomes v/ and v2' respectively as shown in figure. OR m, v ', + m v ', = m , v, - m v,+ m v + m
3 2 2 2 2 v2
According to law of conservation of linear momentum OR ( m, + m ) Vi, ( m, - m ) v, + 2 m v
7 >
2 2 2
mfvT m2v2= m v i+m2V 2
* ,
OP m,v,-m,Vt = m,v -m,v (m - m7 ) ,
m,( v,- v ',) = m2 ( v '-vj
2 2
.
v1 = v ,1 +
2m 2
OP (1)
2

As collision is perfectly elastic, so K.E. is also

(m ,+m ) 2 (m , +m ) ;
V2 (6)

conserved i.e
1 t j
, .
I , Before cOlll on ,» Velocity of mass m 2(i.e. v / )
—. m,v, m2 2 =r m,v ,AJ
v - >
+ - m2 v 2 1
Using equation (6) in ( ), we
2 2 2 5 have
J
-
1 1
- m,v C = m v /a 2* 1 m2Vl 2
7
,
= - v2 +
v
( fflt ~ m )
2
v. +
2 m ,
2 *
1 v
, , ,
1
.
- m fv, - v ', ) =
1 J 1
2
V ,
,
(m + in2) (m + m )

^ * , ,
m v 1- v 'J) m 2(v j v 1)
Diaiding equation ( 2 ) by (1)
2
-' ,
m,
ffli
v' «

v2a
L On , + m 2 )
lmi + m / ) + ( m| ~ m 3 )
,
J
.
Vi I
2mfr
.
(m + m,)
.1
J
2 mi - ( rn, m )
| n> U
' 4
in
nyv / ) After c olll * ° (m , m j)
v ,i i
( m F m;), vi

;
,
m ( v, -, v' ) ®i( v 2 - I FIB 39

. 9'
*
 Chapter
100 ^ 2S .
* ’s PHYSICS
- XI (Subjective) 101

2m, 2 m2
- m 2 ) V.
v a*
(m, + m 2 )
v, +
(m + m )
Vj
, , ( L
V ^ ) "i+
( m, + m2 )
v2 - case ( li )
‘ (m, + 2
2 nl v =0

vi = ; r
(m + m 2 )
2m
v
,
, +
,
(m , +<nj)
(7)
v =
‘(m + m )
vi +
( m
2m
+ m )
(0) . oom m

vI -0 O+O Before collision

v' = v =0 v = v.

.
'
Q.14

<®
and
2m , .
v! +
(m2 - m )
(m , +m )
,
2
v
,
oo m m

2m V, (m - m) (0)
Case I v2 "
( m + m)
+
(m + m) . After collision

F g. 3.11
f
\
• When m, and m2 are equal i e. m, = m2 = m (say) .
In this case, equations (6 ) and (7) become,
V
2
= 22Lv .i + o
2m
v:I = i - m2 ) V,
2m 2
I+
V2
(m + m 2 ), (m, + m2 ) '=
V2 VI

Result -
, mass mi comes to rest and m2 moves with the velocity of mi .
v =
, (m - m)
(m + m)
.
vi +
2m
(m + m)
v2
V,
case (I)
V ,
After collision
Case III
V.1 =
2m
0
V.
1+
2m
2m
V,
99m, m,
When lighter mass mi collides
t.e.mi«m2 or mi * 0 & v2=0.
, equations ( 6)
with

and (
a

7
massive

) become
body

,
m2 at rest

v| = 0+v 2 Before collision in this case

case (iii)
v; = V2 y _
.
( m, -m )
2
V.I +
2m2
Vi v, = 0
(m, + m,) (m, + m2 )
1

and
, (0- raj)
V.l +
2m2
(0)
o
m. 9
- vi = m
2m (m2 - m,)
99 (0 + m2 ) (0+ m2)

.
Before collision
v -
'
(m, + m2 )
V,! +
(m + m2 )
v2
, m,
-^
<

Vi -
2m (m - m)
After collislc
Fle- l-IS
v
^; - m
v +O
2
v = -v v =0

(m + m)
V,; +
(m + m)
v2
- and
v = V| 9
m 9
After collision

2
2m
1 2 V, =
2m , Vi . + (m, + rrij) Fig 312
2m 2m (m , +m ) 2
2
v; = v, + o

Result
-
v2 = V , 2
2x0
(O + n )
^
vI. +
(m2 - 0)
(0 + m2)
(0)

v' = 0 + 0
The masses m, and m2 exchange their velocities aftfi r collisic
2

v'2 = 0
Case II Result
When mt and m, are equal while the tar et mas. at rest before collision.
After collision mass m remains at rest while mi bounces back with the same spaed as
i.e. v2=0, In this case, e atir s (6) at 7) bee >me, . 2
 Ldue!)
102

. pHVSICS XI ( Subjcclivc)
in..
103
Cas e IV
body nr at rest , change in momentum
When a massive body m, collides
i.e. m1»m 7 or ma acO & va=o.
with a light er
' '

j — ^ time

In this case, equations ( 6) and ( 7 ) become,

. ( »o rn.)
'“ ' , \ tin F =
-m v
( m, m,) -
vi +
2m,
.
V2
ca se ) I*' 0
(|V Mewton ' s third
t
law of motion, a force
= on the wall is equal but opposite. So
\\
( m, + m 5 ) (m + m2 ) , v,= From f -
» N
’

( in
g' S
( 2m; Q
v;i * v,i + (0)
,
( m + 0) (m + 0) , t m
ni t
iHii
Before col||6|0
m,
vj * — v, + 0 t.0 ) - n
L A

m. ( m t- ci ) So,
11 v
>v
ca cul d

0.1 „
vI 5: \' force can be te product of mass of water striking normally per second
I Thus and change in
and velocity.
.

v2 =
2mi
V .+ (m 2 - m ) , v2
fVn, Example
Suppose wat a pipe at 3 kgs
" 1
and its velocity changes from 5 ms 1 to zero on striking the wall,
I (m + m2 ), ,
(m + m2 )
F 3-
After colin
then <63 I
3.13 -V -
'
*
•
*
V, «
2m
V,I +
.» *1' n * iv. / om , r' bne.vm OJ cornoo
l 1

. n yiil. - 0 ) = 15 N
QL -
•
ipujan
(m + 0) , ,
(m + 0) Q.16 Is mor ?ntum conserved, when momentum changes are produced by
, 2m,L * s < m ybca sviwiwr . Hfiw * bilioa. explosive forces ? Explain. E anol is sai&S' n
.
v:
* m V +0 , i F*C

! 0— r v « Explosion is due to the

= 2v,
result of internal forces
v2 Ii "

v 9mO 03 dr • 19 Momentum and Explosive Forces

Total momentum remains same when momentum changes occur due to explosive forces
Result r: within an isolated
system.
After collision, mass m, moves with saute velocity but the mass m moves with 1
2 Examples
the velocity double the speed of m,.
1- Explosion
of a shell or bomb
Q.15 Find the force due to water flow . When a movingc Suppose a bomb is falling, in its way it explodes
into two pieces. The momentum of the oomb fragments
quickly the P- combined by vector addition is equal to the original momentum of falling bomb , as shown in • gu ' e
jiiuve forward W
Force Due to Water Flow . Sc: 2 - Firing of a rifle
windscreen
Suppose water from a horizontal pipe strikes
a wall normally
hen it exerts 3 force on the wall. Let initially the
,
’chan ge the f®3
motion and pfl*
, ,
wnen a bu let of mass m fired is from a
rifle of mass M with a velocity
-*
\ .
water flow is v and on striking the wall,
velocity of
it comes to at
passengers
Thus the
iw ®
chance # ,
Momentum before fire
n{ tja| momentum is
zero as both bullet and rifle are initially at rest.
cO . J =>
is greatly reduce-
rest so final velocity becomes zero.
Thus, X '
EXPLANATION Momentum after fire GJ
^
V-

.
.
initial velocity of water = v = v rn When you 611
1
fonvard IS the velocity of recoil of the rifle.
final velocity of water =
vf = 0 41 SS
55 ; Accord*ing Then - f na
momenturn = m v + M \ '
_v apphes

^
change in velocity of water A v p
-
to the law of conservation of momentu ,
* = v =o v= - - momer> tjm before fire = momentum
m
mass of the water that hits the wall
in tine t = m you
injury
310
. ** after fire qrijfl
change m momei. -> of xter = 0 = Mv‘ )
^ = mA v = -my \

Then according to Newton's st d law of r OR M \ ' = -rn v

;nn,
tfon ?
the tforce F exerted on the water is given bv
 . PHYSICS - XJ Subjcctnt )

=
v
or the rocket t . *
. ne gases s
M y nfie «$ *et> " The fan *
s F=M a
*-
2)
y reo of ^ ^
50

Q. rj-c
— cr 5 tr*e
e . eocr. r ~eco r
*
>
«s • en :~ s
-
? v- express o' for attention
= • se*^
,
^
;
ccs ' ts'
-
ec s masse '
*
'OC« e* s i = accelerator cr *tr
y oateL - V1 = “ h

© 0'
= M '
—
m •~ 3

—
=
locket Propulsion passes - e 2 S i !*'
’

r the - ret tereases to me ?r

—
" "

&ne
* otkmg Principle
PS ** '«ta izzzerz&r i ease:
' -
' ozzr zr r^sec cr re s » y certsesvsoor cr momentum an t fee 1? ir Derive eepreaion kr the
'XR? 3 s c ce-cc e
"

'
. '

^ y s threwr a*. 5r angfe

—
'lector! zlkirs 2, cr near re od {

-—
^Vopuisiec
_
* ocr.ec moves r ejecting 3L .£ gsssec frorr its
-
'csir ts t
*
-
'
engine. A ' r *

-
w

-
~ >e zr o mec c ZJR~s cr rg prsseje gases nese ser c r ~ e t - t 'c ~ t *

er%me »~r er - g i rcr "'

. . -
he nxxet gains rr&tner.-
~_ .
^ ~ e: to /« ^ -- *

il Proj«ctac
gji &ET the convene aettfertfi due * p^nr* c*i
'r .- BTrcr sr eoei-ec gases r- r r opposite iredoc xt?: contir. jes to gair . r*«
21
mere 5 ': ~<re ~ ^ hr »g ac engne of me rocket contrives to expe

voersrong
^ ^ -
girseo Dc re cc ar of nc ec goes cr / versasing as long 2 re engines ie
» Afoccos to.ee c 5 c e r
£
'c " gr
« E . at fees
-
'3
^
r me rocket
t ' re t
err s r: c r
.
r
« on - —
- «r a ^ r o/ er .^
of re y re
eno a ^p«art vm&Lto orerro^e re g^ ty, 5
^ .-
- *.
* * w* ssr *

' «M
«
."4
,
,,

^
1«)
M
L /
- .
t nation
». se

of
.
c-siie f me

pfojectiie
~
c
r ~ 5 mn± r g ter
v c rare'

motion
-
' Horaortak fcorc a
- , , . ..
?
JS . ~ of s t» d

-=
»* o
-^
S
y .^ '
ce ocAet cEr jmer
;
* aw. 1 .W4 kgw cr ^ Foc/ r. e err re err Oj
^ ier '
. . . a imerim. se »ei as - -^ '
-
-^
gese: at tpeeo: J c r The ooc o« tue
^ -6
ktix"

~c
m?roe r c mo: 5£T tV aona c
*
redipr
*
e
ass
= «
^ vx&r ' » •
3 i atoo • •

^ ^-
K axter
*^
** ^ '
y'

se e^a 'or.eu ere rr.ee flgtr/iet r /ngr me of

- fare* ?* <*$. V re ooc 'as * - *^ . -*J *

re
JJ
-
^

A« »erat#m of
^
ritr g'eeur s>eec
t

^
vc//

4ct
» c sce'C e
fifcsr it : : 0 >e tt ^Tucr r >cr.e ro
^
#
*
mx > "«c* er
asceer cr E r
Trajectory
#constat*
,
ro« p
^
*M( w
« net'/
5l

: ce ert rter e
- -
. -
-
'
, r
J3

* v re e/tscet ^ r * *< -
^>e c*r foto vec c . re mtJjett e t ca ec n r
^ -orn rne W?K*^ «f «

* ^ fose# rf gxec 'e^r. efc re

>
xtr e nss *? >*• r t
-
^ .o
'
 106

and
So equ ( 2 ) becomes

-
1
( 2)
Chapter 3 [ \|„
ti n & f. „
pUYSICS - XI

jal vertical
(Subjective)

velocity of projectile = v = v sinO

acceleration = a ¥ = - g *
, • mu (
107
1
V
vertical o' !
'

2
Equation ;i represents the horizontal distance while equation ( 2 ) represents the I 0 Lrtiral velocity at highest point = vN = o
height = y = H = ?
of tne body maximum equation of motion,
0 ding to
3 CC 2 2
Q.19 Oerlve expression for the instantaneous velocity of a projectile thrown fio
* 2 aS = Vf “ vi
at an angle 0 with horizontal.
1
OR 2 ayy = “ VY
' 2 V
A V
2l gt H = o - ( v sinO ) ,
instantaneous Velocity (v j . V r -

-2 gH =
2
sinO
2

Suppose a proper >s Ved with ir inai velocity

* . at an angle i > witn horizontal.
V -ir
'V
H Pr -
v sin O
ig
Let ^ r /. ‘ I
Worijorua ! compo 1«nt 0 mrfjal vekK * ry» v
V *
* * t
= v cmff Tjme
by body to cover rhe distance fr e place of
of nrtia velocit / r v . - v.sinO B i t v t^ e taken
it hits the ground is called the time
where
- the place
(

projection to
Horfaontal component of velocity V
V ce f ere > s rfo horizontal force along horizontal axis so acceleration a, = 0
df flight.
es back totaame level so it covers no
JO. * of / e oc ty a *
ar / instant t is * . im rm t nq
* *
, Information
*
As the body goes up
rtjca ! distance, i. e .
and

y =0 adi 1 i^tun i si tit

v . r t j i i m i c a } velocityf of projectile = v, = v, sinO
*x '
' a 0) *
V
-
r: »
acceleration due to gravity = = -g
a , .. For Your Information
» y c V> .(1) time of fi ght - 1 = ?
. i? ill* . b i c i\ jiizith
1.
/ #r > ws o r«lodty —
* * H = R mJ,x
S = v,t +

^
/e ' 'a ' O" oor - ' of / * v. / v a' / 4
* vw a.t * r <1 1 ,
O | 2) V g ar <f. y - v i «0
* y
y*v t
*
1
“
art wfl n\

'/ / •rxu* y For Your Information

*f *r At/ , d of
* * V. * /
0' ,
o « ( v ainG) i - ~ gt ?
/
* 4 4' / rflsunt ‘ri The factor which remains constant

% < trtOf > tA va Vrfy

*
* If /
MU lath * gt
2

- ( v j 8in 0) t
dufHlg the projectile motion arc
* horizontal velocity
•both x and y components pf
** *' &
'* * * ***** m#4t angfe
*
„ fhfr .n m (

drop
hit
t
- 2 v yin0
(

( 2)
acceleration

* 0 '
>* .
/ »„/ M %
\ rt a
M jrn*«, distance
of projectile
a /irr tjrn
"
t
,/cl i
If
" ( 4/
//(

. *
c , (tuif for,K of pro
which a projectile covers In the horizontal direction is called
.
.- - * )ectlvt

r, A
* rt . ., • , m kir>t * o .*
r 0A
'

f. / PI
i di p ^ rrt<enh »f «

A ' l A l K;*4;
- *• ,
,
ly fr
Vh t 4
I
~ a,t' bdeomes
i 0/ ftb t
' t ’4 \ * 2 v. sinO
Ui Mft . r+ v x *
fr,)
, , ; - .-
- I ' . .ai»»
/ v»
- W V , COftO r 4 0
I fAtUgM hi . v
• /
’l cii r4ttir K
^-
i/ 4 / v r# r » fV . . 4 f 4
^ of# * < 1 tlMI
0> r iJffi ,v)K affi 4 » Ihr UH# ** OR R „y/ (2 >inOcoiO)
Uifir viftK,-*l
»/,y
i'
/t f >H»
,
U+ » « ,»
' .<„, ( 3 ) [ v 2 sin 0 cosO sin 20|
I 1I « g/"* / r r
* > ) M lirjfcHIHil tt<« rnnivnum
I'
' ' nt < * * * •
II

+
J r«
' » of • «/*
 —
108 Chapter 3 [Moti - XI ( Subjective)
PHYSICS

--
s
5choiar 109

-
Maximum Range For Your Information
spherical earth
Tne ^ange of me projectile will be maximum when sin20 has maximum value. for
trajectory will be elliptical > oee pan

„,w
*
Ballistic
i.e.

OR
sm 20 = 1
20 = sin ^ (i) i Uses o
useful
e
*
only for short range
*• «o
,
4 « &B
Actual path
missiles are
1 The ballistic
OR 20 = 90* ranges and greater precision powered annd rerr' ote
OR 0 = 45’
For large ifontrol guided
In the presence of air
missiles are used.
friction, the trajectory
and for long trajectories the air friction is not n
So, equation R=
, v :
sin28
becomes
Water is projected froent
pips at the same speed- ^ *
At high speed
the force of air friction is more than gravih / it , .
e and some of a high speed
projectile fall short of a
g foe * times parabolic path
an angle of 30° and
2 at 60°. Why arc the rangese EXPLANATION:
R
*
=
V; sin2(450) EXPLANATION: ^ „ ." ' ° Due to air friction , the

—
g The range of a projectile is p , for this purpose tho gie f£ pr ectio vertical and horizontal
The air friction creates difficulties So f 6 a
a
>
2
v sin90° R=
V
1
sin 20
*
needs a high degree of precision.
° " velocities decrease and
therefore, ( the height
OR RM = g As
g
sin 20 = sin 2
and range both decrease
sin 60° = 0.866 which make fall short

Note:
E v.2
g
(4) [ v sin 90° = 1]

We can express the range of the projectile in terms of maximum range

And sin 20 = sin 2 60° = a
120° * 0.866
*
Therefore, R is same for boftik
angles.
FORMULAE
of a parabolic
trajectory, as shown in
the Figure.

as
R =RDXJtsm20 For an angle less than 45 * the faq .
reached by the projectile arid ibc ®
Q. 2i Define ballistic flight, ballistic missile and ballistic trajectory. both will be less. When the iqki
projection is larger than 45°, the W
attained will be more but the rr;
again less. Ad
Ballistic Flight EXPLANATION:
I
2 Average velocity Vav =
At
When a projectile is given an initial push and is then allowed to move The range is given by, R = .J_ sini:
g
freely due to inertia and under the action of gravityt then such a flight is
called a ballistic flight
The range depends on sin 20.
=
When 0 45°, the range becomes
maximum that is
3 Instantaneous velocity v a--,
*
Limn
° — At
Ballistic Missile
The un- powered and unguided missile is called ballistic missile.
Ballistic Trajectory
„„ -— v
g
2
sin 90* mZL
g
The values sin 20 for all other angl
v2

. ^ 4 Average acceleration a »v 3
V2
At
- VI Av
At
The path followed by the ballistic missile is called ballistic trajectory. or greater lhan 45° are less than I
therefore, < > » range, regarding
Explanation 4
angles is smaller lhan the range # -
Ballistic missile moves due to the super position of two independent The height h is given as, 7 - M- 0Limit AV
motions:
,

h
_ vf ? jin1 5 Instantaneous acceleration «
* At
g
a straight line inertial flight along the direction of launch angle 8.
• vertical gravity fall.
• The gravity and inertia are responsible for the parabolic path of
renter
-
The height depends
values of 0 ,
on
the height
greater and smaller for smaller
o.
**
^
6 2
nd
law of motion F ma
projectile. 7 Unaar momentum P mv

-
Effect of Inertia
2 nd
law of motion In terms of m v i -m vi
Due to inertia an object should move straight off in the direction in which it is 8 F
momentum t
thrown, at constant speed equal to Its Initial su °x particu! I / In empty space .
Effect of gravity
Due to gravity straight path changes Into a curved i ectory.
for flat earth (For short ranges)
The trajectory of projectile Ispar oli
'
9

10
Impulse
Law of consarvatlon of linear
momentum
-I*
- Fxt

mlvl
•

, nijVj
-
*4
1 o
r*

n v|* m4 v,
“*
Fwf m v r - m v
 Relation between relative velocity
11 of approach and relative velocity of
separation
V|- v2
— ( vi - vi ) Multiple Choice Questions
Velocity of mass m, after collision in , m|! m j 2 m2
12 v, = — - V ,I + V2 possible answers to each statement are given below. I ck ( S) the correct answer :
one dimensional elastic collision m , + m2 m + m2 , four
Velocity of mass m 2 after collision in 2m , m2 m ,
13 V2 = v ,I + V2 of the following can be zero if a body is in motion for some time?
one dimensional elastic collision ,
m + m2 m + m2 , 1.
Which
(b ) Displacement
(a) Speed
14 Force due to water flow v m covered ( d ) None
F=— v (c ) Distance
t displacement covered by body is zero, then what can you say about its distance ?
2. If the
mv ( b ) It may and may not be zero
15 Recoil velocity of a rifle v = ( a ) It is negative
M be zero ( d) It cannot be zero
( c ) It must
16 Acceleration of rocket mv
3- The slope of tje velocit y time graph for retarded motion is:
( b ) Positive
M ( a ) Zero m
Horizontal distance of an object ( cl Negative ( d ) Neutral
17 x = vttt with velocity v. What is relative velocity between them
thrown horizontally from height h Two bodies are moving in opposite direction
4-
( b ) v
18
Vertical distance of an object
y= ,: 1 ( a ) \[iv
2
thrown horizontally from height h ie (c) -
.
( d ) Zero
x- component of instantaneous
5 Area under velocity time graph represents.
19
velocity of a projectile Vf* = V « = V, COS 0 ( b ) Displacement
(a ) Force
y- component of instantaneous (c Distance
) ( d ) Acceleration
20
velocity of a projectile vf> = vi sin 0 — gt
velocities becomes equal if body has •
6. Instantaneous and average
Instantaneous velocity of a ( a ) Zero acceleration ( b ) Uniform acceleration
21
projectile V = T/ Vi + Vft ( c ) Variable acceleration ( d ) Moves in a circle

? 2
v sin 9 Inertia of an object is measure by its
22 Height of projectile H= ( a ) Volume (b ) Density
2g
( c ) Mass ( d) Temperature
2 v, sin 0 8.
23 Time flight of projectile T = 2nd law of motion defines
g (b ) Acceleration
, ( a ) Inertia
vf sin 26 ( d) Both a and b
24 Range of projectile R _ with
g I 9- When a body moves in a straight line then its displacement coincides

Maximum range of projectile R max

v 2 (a ) Distance <>
b Force
25 (dl
T
'
lc) Vel0 ity
1 10. ‘
The rate of change in momentum of a body falling freely is equal to

(a ) K.E. (b ) Momentum
( c) Power (d) Weight the greater
Which vehicle experiences
h, A small sports car collides head-on with a massive truck .
lrnPact force (in magnitude) ?
(a ) ( b ) The truck
The car
( ci ( d ) None of these
They experience the same force ?
U.
in ab ve question, which vehicle experiences the grea er ceieration
° ^
J )
3 The
c ) They
car
experience the same acceleration
tA\ None of these

Lx '

li
 CjjJjOlJJ
. pHYSICS XI (Subjective)
112 Chapter 3 113
peflnitlon of acceleration:
13 . A base ball ol mass m Is thrown upward with some Initial speed. If air resistance is neglect
The time rate of a change of velocity of a body i ,
called acceleration .
force acting on the ball when it reaches Its peak is
Mathematically,
( a ) mg and upward ( b ) mg and downward
(c) Zero ( d ) None of these * Av v , -v
14. A body is moving in a straight line such that the distance covered by it in time t is proporti
square of the time t. The acceleration of the body is:
onal toth . where v , = initial velocity of body
( a ) Constant (b ) Zero
( c ) increasing -
( d ) Decreasing = final velocity of the body
vr
15. SI unit of impulse is equivalent to
—»
( 3 ) Force ( b ) Momentum Av = change in velocity during tirm At
( c ) Acceleration ( d ) None S.l units of Acceleratio n & velocity;

16 . Taking off rocket can be explained by SI unit of velocity is m/ sec.

( a ) 1st law of motion (b ) 2 nd law of motion SI units of acceleration is jft/ sec *
(c ) 3 rd law of motion ( d) None .
Q 3.2 An object is thrown .
vertically upward Discuss the sign of acceleration due to gravity, relative to
17 . Which component of acceleration is zero in projectile motion? velocity, while the object is in air ?
( a ) Horizontal (b ) Vertical .
( Bwp 2003, Mir Pur 2004 Fsd 2008 )
( c ) Both ( d ) None .
Ans Sign of acceleration due to gravity relative to velocity is negative .
18 . A fighter plane drops a bomb when it is at the top of enemies target . Bomb misses the target duetc Explanation: J
( a ) Due to bad weather (b ) Due to action of gravity All those quantities are assigned to be negative sign whose direction is opposite to the direction of
( c ’ Due to horizontal component of velocity ( d ) All of above initial velocity.
19. .
A ball is thrown horizontally from the top of tower What happens to the horizontal componer ' So when the object is thrown upward, the direction of gravitational pull is opposite to the direction of
its velocity ? imtir: , velocity so the sign of acceleration due to gravity relative to velocity is negative.
( a Firs: ncreased then decrease (b ) Increases Q- 33 Can the velocity of an object reverse direction when acceleration is constant ? If so, give an example.
( c ) Remains same , , Lhr 2010- 2011)
(d) None of these (Federal 2003-2005, Lhr 2005 , Sgd 2005 , Grw 2005 - 2010, Fsd 2008 Mir Pur 2009
20 . What is angle of projection, so that the horizontal range is equal to maximum height ? Ans. Yes, it can be possible.
( a ) Tan~1 ( 4) ( b ) Tam (3 )
’ Example:
( c ) Tan- ’ (2 ) -
( d ) Tan i (1) due and becomes
When a body is thrown vertically upward its velocity
zero at the maximum height. After that it will reverse its
goes on decreasing
direction of
to
velocity ,
gravity
hut the acce e.
rat . on

remains constant during whole f ight [ i.e 9.8 m / s ) .

2
ANSWERS Q- 3 - 4 Specify
l. b 2. b .
3 c 4.2) .
5 c 6, a 7 c . .
8 b 9. u ' .
lO d the correct statement:
a* An object can have a constant velocity even its speed is changing,
11 c. 12. a 13. b .
14 a 15 b . .
16 c 17, a 18 c. 19. c 20.1
.
b An object can have a constant speed even its velocity is changing.
c An object can have a zero velocity even its acceleration is not zero.
-
d* An object subjected to a constant acceleration can reverse its velocity.
Short Questions of Exercises Ans.
Statements (b), (c ) and (d) are correct.
of virii*
1 Explanation:
0.3 1 What ii the difference between uniform and variable velocity? From the explanation
velocity, define acceleration, Give SI ur ‘s velocity and acceleration ?
( a) As when speed changes, velocity also changes so it s not ne
^ ^ - J ^ fcr)

A *i.
*»
.. -
wp 2004, D G Khan 2005 2006, Lhr 20
'*
( b)
direction. So it is a true statement velocity become * 1 C TO
Difference between uniform and variable velocity : hard bi . V
te) sudden ‘
when a moving object is stopped oy apply * 'fithe
.
r
• In cast of uniform va ' ocity the body covari taual dltolacemtnti in eauat Inttrvali of tim * ^ s tru£ statement
that instant but acceleration is not So it
case 3
' to e re oc ty ' c in unta ' * dliDiacemt nti in
^ equal Intervals,of Uma

\ • or may chanat
r case o variable vt oc» ty, of both
' * magnitude or direction velocity
f ©'m / e oc t / coth the mag de - J d » recnon mains the fame.
"
 si •

Chapter 3 [Motion\
-
,
1
((
PHYSICS - XI (Subjective)
115
ub|i« ct I?* thrown veilU ally up, After leaching It maximum height, lt % velocity r V(
W \ UM \ A \ \ ^ 11
. ^ l

-* jt «,
1 true stat eme nt .

... » .
,
u\ u « r|iM itlon i amAln » onstnnt (I v 9.8 So 11 is also fruct statement . #
* Af .
A w \ <% w standing on the top ol a tower throws 1 b il! straight up with . . " , bo „„m, „
..
S mo w b nlio
tnltlii) velocity Vi and at the same time throws 1 second ball straight . h WM"
, * .e. *Om/sec th
, „ ,
%
It strikes the ground? Ignore air friction.
*
doth the balls hit the ground with H? /2HL.'»peocl
.
downward with the same speed Which boll will have large speed when lower
2
%
Vp V ,
II
l
V,
• .
Q 38
«» «
constant
find the chan ge In
) throughout tho
(l , l t motion of

momentum for an object

In terms of momentum?
the fcft dy ' * m

tuWjrted
.
to a given force for a given time and state law
«
** «
» « *
% 0| motion
t MpUrtetlon:

.
( Bwp 2004, Federal 200 s, Grw 2008 )
.
the hall whit h is thrown vertically up with velocity v, will have same
voloi lly v, when It reaches hat k to the top of tower . So the two halls have
jonn; downwaid vtloctty at top ol towei ,
%
Z
Ilence they hit the ground with
Z An -.Lct m mas s of the body

Jv*,/ m final velocity ^ 1

,
v a= Initial velocity

ti
%
einterval
I- - applied force

same final volot ny .

-
and acceleration a of . car are;
ft

Xi. 6 f Kpla ln tho < Ircu rmla nces In whic h tho velo city v 1
Then
(I) Parallel f motion,
(II) Anti parallel
(ill) Perpendicular to one another
According, to Newton
-
rI- ma
*

(Iv) v I
ft
* zero but a Is not zero -.
1
Jk
ni

( v ) a Is zero but v h not zero Comparing equations (1) and ( 2 ) we get

(I id 1005, I odof ! iOOS, Mir l*ur
1

* .
2009 Mtn 2009, Grw 200% 2009 2010
)

Ans. ( 1) Parallel;
F v .-v
*

-ft m At
and acceleration > ar
along straight path then velo city v
* -•
-
ll the Velocity ol the car h Incre asing a
m v,r * mv
pat allot . F
At
( ID Anti parallel
final mom entu m. -»
then velocity while m v1 repr esen ts
a straight path whe m v , represents
re the initia l mom entu m
> para llel, lor exam ple when the brakes a Thus we can say
v and a » < deration a are anti
applied to a moving car . Second law in terms of momentum
The time rate of change of momentum of body is equ al to the app lied
(Ill) perpendicular to each other

oath then the velocity v and are mutually

II the tar is moving In a circular
perpendicular . Am. Impulse force and
time then the
^ product of ^
_

for a short Intc rval of

(Iv ) v Is zero but a* Is not zero
ft
When a large force acts on a moving body
4 s called Impulse.
If moving far Is stoo ped bv appl ying sud den hard brak es then at that
.
Insta nt the velo city of tfit
delation '
becomes zero hut the acceleration is not zero

( v)
-aft is zero but v is not zero * F xt I
So
As f rce is m
the time rate of change of momentu
* >
zero but ^a .Is zero. ° -
acceleration.
When car moves with uniform velo city thru v is not tbb 4 4
«

.
aa 7 Motion with constant velocity is a spec ial case of moti on with cons tant
IS
F
- m vf mv, -
statement true ? Discuss . . ** Lhr X 0 9 )
°
t
( Kwp 2005 f
°*'
20
r F x t * m v f * mv,
•
*
°
 PHYSICS - XI (Subjective)
117
flight
- of

.^ ^
1 = m v,i m v ( / = Fx / ) Time
,
n.ghr " ''
So the impulse is equal to the instantaneous cha nge in mo me ntu m of the body .
is called ^ om he place f
Proiection to the place where it Just to
Q- 3-iO State the law of conservation of linear momentum, pointing out the importance of
time Q °
Explain, why under certain conditions, the law is useful even though the
isolat ed
isolated?
system is not
compu ,
= O. If v sin 0 is the

( Mtn 2003, D.G.Khan

2005, G
S = v,t + pt ’ *
Ans: Law of conservation of momentum
Total linear momentum of an isolated system always remains constant

^
1
. O = ( VjS inO ) t - gt
Importance of Isolated system
,
Law of conservation of momentum holds only for
Application for not completely Isolated systems
iso

When the effect of external force ( like frictional and

compared to the forces between the interacting objects,
lated systems otherwise it

gravitational forces ) is ne glig ibly

is not valid

mu
^ gt’
t
g
*
*
(v sin 0) t

2 v, sin0 %
Q.3.11 Explain the difference between elastic and
then this law become applicable * Range of the projectile
.
inelastic collisions Explain how would a
bouncing btf Maximum distan e which & pro * life covers in the horizontal distance is called the range
behave in each case ? Give plausible reasons for the fac
t that K.E is not conserved in most cases? .
If v cosO is horizontal opmponent of initial velocity then range of projectile R for the total
of projectile.

Ans. Difference between elastic and inelastic collision:

- .
(Bwp 2005 2008 Grw 200S thr
2009!. tcan be expressed as
R = vu * t
. time of flight

In case of elastic collision the K . E of the system

is conserved while n case of nelastic collision
the K [ $
putting values , we get #
not conserved.
X
2 v sin G
But the total linear momentum and the
total energy of th ? system remains constant m both typescf g
collision.
,' ( 2 sin0 cos0 ) o
Behoviour of bouncing ball: x*R
g
When a hard ball is dropped onto a marble floor , it _ v sin20
reb ou nds to very nearly the initial height. It loses

) R= —
' • negligible
amount of energy in the collision with the flo
or. Then such collision is appro
elastic collision. * zie ty r
J g
( 2 sin 0 cos 0 = sin 2 0 )

But if the ball is not able to reach the initial Maximum Range
height then there is a loss of kinetic energy and sue?
collision is called inelastic collision. The range of the projectile is maximum when the value of sin20 has maximum value. The maximum
Solid reasons for loss of kinetic energy: value of Sine function is one. Thus
In case of inelastic collision, the loss sin 20 = 1
of kinetic energy is due to
• friction of ball with floor < 20 = sin ’(1)
• friction of ball and air 20 = 90°
• sound 90°
Q.3.12 Explain what is meant by projectile motion? Derive
e = —2
the expression for
a. the time of flight 0 = 45°
b. the range of projectile. So
2
v, sin20
Show that the range of projectile is maxim R
horizontal.
um when projectile is thrown at an angle of 45°
^ 2
g
v, sin2(45° )
(rw JJ 2003, D.G.Khan 2005, Mir Puf 2006- 20 « Rma* =
g
Ans. The two dimensional motion under the const Pit
acceleration due to gravity and inertia is call**’ v, sin90° *
projectile motion.
Examples A foot ball kicked by a pic
A ball thrown b , a cric ;cer.
 mn

118 Chapter 3 [Moti PHYSICS - XI (Subjective)

^
*
,
School 119
Q 3-13 At what point or points in its path does a projec
tile have its minimum speed, its maximum
( Gr
\ foti n
'
The
° g« Ph
fro
0 fear
fur
m
thc
B to C:
r le ls us that he l,^ city of the car
,
Ans: Minimum speed: * the value of acceleration is zero, that is a = 0. °
mains constant from 5 th to h
15 * second, it means
The speed of the ba 1 is minimum at its maximum height because at this point the from C to D :
vertical com Molioo o fea r
of velocity become zero
The ve loc ity de cre as es uniformly i0 zero from
15 to 19 gL
Maximum speed:
The ac ce le ra tio n of the car during last 4 seco
nd is -
" '
“ “ ^
'
He speed of ba . i is maximum at
Av = v 2 - v 0 - 20 ,
>) its oo nt & projection a=
At t2 -t
=
1 9 - 15 , A
) the point just to hit the around (point of landing)
( a ) Afhat is meant by
. -5 9
ballistic trajectory? p negative sign indicates thz velocit
< .
*o owed sr a " :jn- po / / e ^ ed and urgjided project e nc
*
c Co ve red by Ca r :
car decreases during these fou
r seconds.
c '
- e pa * ' fo < owed o / *.re powered and Toul Bis^
dec project Distance covered * Area of AABF +
^ of rectangle BCEF + Area of ACDE
c. 32!" fo oweP 0 /
- fowowed by
- n - po // ered ded projectile

Am:
- 3
a
pat

s the correct ar. swer

powered and gu ded projectile.

0 14 "' ) What happens when

^ *
answer.
a system of two bodies undergoes an elastic collis
ion ? Identify the correci
3535553
5
p *
i
- .
"or end " o* the *> /st changes
'e mor rtturr of the s stem does rot cha
A 1500 kg < arg velocity reduced 20 ms to 15 ms 1
in 3.0 s. How large was the average
^ / nge retarding force.
c ~ ' e 906 « cor e to rest after a> rgon
Given Data:

Am .
d T> cr«rg/ co fervafctf aw s rotate
*
fs rS the correct answer
* d Mm of the car
--
m 1500 kg

'•
/ r
- ' .
O'
-
> r 2004'240t 2009 0 ftJOWl 200
* 200 « Mtn 2004 200)

-
*
Initial velocity * v ( * 20 ms
* 1

* 200) 2008, 8 » 2 '7 2008, Kd

' nal velocity *
vr 15 ms ' 1

Solved Examples f fii» d:

Time - t •3.0 s
* A

r. Average retarding force F ?

The vcfaAtlysate graph of a car mo . mg on a straight roa
*• 3,7. Describe the motion of the
d is
tar and find the
» %
i
•
I ^ oilation;
A,/ , / (Jm
*

Altaic ewvrred. 4 ' g to Newton ' s sound law in term of momentum.

t To
i Lc£!i
M t 0 ' of rar fro r A t o B
* v; I^ hrig
t

.
rig
' valuer we gC|
Vapf
* r>M <>- f Hart / ou rev . 4 . fi vcFiCily intrsswri
V 4f
mmvmipaudwkmm&mkt
%
* - .. v in 5 iecondt. i . L500 * I* - 1500 / 20
3
Av
Af f - 22300 - 30Q00
t
a -
of
h
y - 750
)

^ " GTso,wl
^gaiivr fejjy 5how that the force ii retarding force.
*
tto

> simple 3,3

Chapltf

I wo spherical India of 2.0 kg unci .VO lift masfCi arc: moving towafd* each other with
-^
> (MOUQB 4 y
53
}
scb“!
^
PHY 8IC 8 XI fSubjtttin ,

vilotill tl 007 - 0.14

^ 1
1
1
nu and 4 iiis» respective ly . What must he the velocity of the ftnallci lull aftci colliik v>

^
*

velocity of the bigger ball is 3.0 nit ^^ 0.07 * 0.14

0 07
Given Data: A 9
Mass of smaller ball =* mi 2.0 kg 0 , 21
Mass of bigger ball * m 2 = 3.0 kg vfi ° -3ms
Initial velocity of smaller ball = V| - 6.0 ms i Now
Initial velocity of bigger ball “ v 2 * 4 ms- i
v;' =
2m ,
Final velocity of bigger ball = v' = 3.0 ms i n> , ni 2

To Find : Putting values, we get

Final velocity of smaller ball = v[ ? 2 x 0.07
Calculati on : 0.07 4- 0.14
According to law of conservation of momentum .
*
Momentum before collision = Momentum after collision
mi V|+ m2 v2 = mi v[ + m 2 vj
As both the balls are moving toward one another , so their velocities arc of opposite sign 2HEH5E A .
Let the direction of smaller ball is positive and bigger ball is negative, thus A lOOg golf ball is moving to the right with a velocity of 20 ms 1 . It makes a "

head on collision with

niivi + m 2 (-v 2 ) = nij vj + m2 (- v ' ) an 8 kg steel hall , initially at rest . Compute velocities of the balls after
collision .
Given Data :
putting values, we get
Mass of the golf ball = mi = 1 OOg 0.1 kg =
2 x 6 + 3 x (-4) = 2 x vJ + 3 x (-3 ) Velocity of golf ball before collision = vj = 20 ms " 1

-
1 2 1 2 * 2 vJ - 9 Mass of the steel mass = m 2 = 8 kg
Velocity of the steel ball before collision = v2 = 0
or 2 v[ - 9 = 0 To Find :
or ;
2 v =9 Velocity of golf ball after collision v, ?
v!i = 4.5 ms 1 \ docity of steel ball after collision v
?
"

IMJUMU Calculation:
A 70g ball collides w ith another ball of mass 140 g . The initial velocity of (fie First ball is 9 ms tot
right while the second ball is at rest . If the collision were perfectly elastic, what
velocity of the two balls after the collision?
would be
*
tk
As v /
.-
m

putting values , we^ get

i -m2
. V) +
2m 2
m| * m 2
v 2
m| + m 2 J

Given Data :
Mass of the first ball = ni| * 70g = 0.07 kg vj - 0.1 8 x +-
20 0 (As v 2 0)
Mass of the second ball = m 2 = 140g = 0.14 kg
Velocity of the first ball before collision = Vi
Velocity of the second ball before collision = v 2 = 0
To Find :
= 9 ms- i

Now
vfI
v'
--- 0.1 +8
- 7.9
19.5 ms
x 20
'1

Velocity of first ball after collision * v[ = ?

Velocity of second ball after collision = v: '= ?
v i

Puttin8 values, we get

- 2 m|
i r i| 4 m 2 J
V|+
ro 2 " mi
km|
V:

Calculatio n:
As the collision is perfectly elastic, so
v .i =
ni | - m 2

m! + m 2
vi +
( 2m
\m l +
1
2 J
v;
v:J I «
fa
0.2
» 0.0
x 20 * 0 (A« vj
- 0)

V|
Puitvng values, we get
" Fi * 20
vaf * 0.3 ms '1

-
>.jr* [
i f*NT ''

-
V' &
 122 Chapter 3 [Motion PHYSICS - XI (Subjective)
iWTBWByin
Ar
5a ^
Schol
,=O 123
A hose pipe ejects water at a speed of 0.3 ms through a hole of area 50 cm . If the

is zero after striking.

1 1
water str L
wall normally , calculates the force on the wall , assuming the velocity of the water normal
to th *|*
1

h=
^ ^
0~ ) (sin30 ) 2
~
2* 9 jT
900 x ( Q $ ) 2
,

*a|
Given Data : 19.6
Speed of water = V| = 0.3 ms- i EZ]T 5 m a;
( ii) Time of flight:
Area of the hole of water = A = 50 cm 2 = 0.005 m 2
2 v,sinQ
Speed of water normal to the wall = V 2 = 0 As t=
Density of water = p = 1000 kg m 3
Pulling values, we get
To Find :
Force exerted by water on the wall = F - ?
Calculation:
Volume of water striking the wall per second = rate of flow
= (Arca)(Vclocity)
= 0.005 x 0.3
3
= 0.0015 m Is
Now
Mass volume
Mass of the water striking the wall per second = ~~
-
time
=density x : — time
Pulling values, we get .
2
( 3 ) sin( 2 x 30° )
Q
= 1000 x 0.0015 R=
9.8

j= 1 . 5 kg/s
r*

-n _ 900*sin60°
9.8
Force exerted by water on the wall is 900 x 0.866
R=
F .K
Vt
9.8
R = 79.5 ml
l -"»l le .VHI
F = ( 1.5 ) x (0.3)
F = 0.45 N
^ )

In example 3.7 calculate the maximum range and the height reached by the ball if the angles of
[HHHEHE projection arc (i ) 45° (ii) 60°.
-
A ball is thrown with a speed of 30 ms in a direction 30° above the horizon. Determine
l the heigh
' Gi \ Cn Data:
to which it rises, the time of flight and the horizontal range. Speed of the ball = v , = 30 ms- i
Given Data: Angle = 0 = 45° and 60°
Speed of the ball = v , = 30 ms - i

/ Angle = 0 = 30° with horizontal

Acceleration due to gravity = g = 9.8 ms
To Find:
" 2
T
° find:
(i)
Acceleration due to gravity = g = 9.8 ms

Maxmimum range = R max

r2

For G = 45°
(i ) Height attained by the ball = h = ? Height attained = h = ?
(H)
(ii ) Time of flight = t = ? Maxmimum
( iii ) Horizontal range = R = ?
,,
range = R max
Height attained = h = ?
‘
1 For 0 = 60°
C Cul
Calculation : « < ion:
(1) For height: 0)
v , sin 20 Maximum Range ( For 0 = 45°)
As
^ 2g
R=
‘>
v sin 2 G ’
Putting values, wc get g
 Putting \ alucs, we get

R
Exercise Problems
9.8
V h lu *M
, Uf
•
u Guidi ng verlit ully Ml ih« i t v< u tutgitf *A ! ‘X. >> .
# •'
M
R
900 uin%
9.8
3.1
»
.
,l, r ground i< ‘tone droppid . Ho» |» t
*
*
rttfei
1

Ilf
n
gruei
/' •
* t

del :
900 x I Given *
R
98
,jft ufll velocity ol the helicopter Jg
jk * 91.8 m| vertical <Jistance covered by lfie
Now ( There is negative sign , being site to initial velocity)

Height ( For 0 45°) Acceleration due lo

I ,, find :
2g 11me i

Putting values , we get Cikulation:

nation of motion
(30)W 45"
h*
2 * 9.8
2
900 » ( 0.707 )
h =

F- 22.9 nil
8
19 6
- 1 5 6 8 = 19.61 v 1 (-9.8) I - 7

Maximum Range ( For 0 60° ) - - 156.8 - 4.9 J

-
19.6t
-
( ii ) /

_ -
„ vi* sin 20
K
— —— 4 9/ 1
- 19.6 /
- 4I -
3
156.8 0
32 ) 0 -
Putting values , we get
8

-
4.9( /
/
J
- 4t - 32 - 0

R
_ ( 30 ) > » in( 2 60‘)
9.8
making factors , we get
41 32 0 - --
R
—
„ _ 900* »_ inl _ 20#

9.8
-
l(t 8 ) 4( t- 8 ) 0
( t - 8 Xt 4 ) 0
-
t 8 0, t 8 see
-- -- -
R - 900 x 0.866
9.8 OR t + 4 0, t - 4 sec

Now
|R - 79.3 ml But time cannot be negative , thus
rscs
( i . c time taken by stone )

Height ( For 0 - 60 * )
cruph OP » rtflu ht
- w d of moto rbike.

- veloci ty tln t
v , iln ' 8 the following data , drew » '
h
2g 1 0 10
'
io 20 | 20 20 1 0

f (
Velocity m * )
'

, 180
90 120 150
Putting values, wo get 0 30 60
Time (a)
.
h"
r
( 30 (f / n60 ’
) l the
gruph to calculate
2 x 9.8
the initial acceleration
h -- 900 x 0 866
4 |^ ' he final acceleration and
- 34.4 n
fc ) he total
‘ distance trave led by the moto rcycle
1H
Ch ap ter J
-
v P
« n0 ft
i ak ul at um: ^ I,
sM*L
(
| |» H Y 5 IC H \ l ( Su h ) rit lvr )

f tv ' m th e gi ve n da ta, \ve 03 A 127

ha ve to dr aw gi ap h am i th en fin d , C

-
proton moving
with ipoed < » r i « , ) nlM i
'^
( t Ih r in iti al ac ce le ra tio n
< ), ? tI "10
K |» UM t « |
^
-
Ug h 00 20 i in tli iik lu fl of
O' ) l lu - rtn nl ac ce le ra tio n < i , M iiu tn tc* with a *|» « cd of 2 0 10* « | .
t
Aa iit ito ki ig , , „j r
“ “ * jH» p* r md
(4 h>
kn i thr ou gh In pap ri
( Ou ht all oM , ho d i « tilt ) i tto o Oil
‘ (
* lio n
9
I he total distance covered S ? ( , iv » o l > H «
I to m gr ap h &
w ‘
0 M tf toft u !V1
In iti al pv rd Of pf tJU in ~ v
*

(a ) - In iti al ac ce le ra tio n a , Mi i
Dl iU nu c co ve re d S
slo pe ot th e gr ap h OA
| in al sp ee d of cla
All
OH In fin d:
v .- v Ki iar d dio i .
I in ic tak en
l i, t i
( rtli iih illH i
10 0
‘i. (»0 0
Ulu;g on of mo tio n

20
60
o, 0.3.1ms ‘
j ,
( b) Fi na l uc cc lcn iti on ar - M 01 4
I0
2 - 02 10 1 0
J

'
slope of the graph * CE ’
-
I/I

m
CP a -96 I 012 *
1 0.0 4 ^ 10
DE
- 2400 M 014 mi 2

-.
0- 20 a *
*

U s
IK 0 IS O Or a - 2.4* 10' W ;

m
- 20 .
No w us ing th e eq ua tio n fo r ca lcu lat ing tim e V

Q ,
- 11 )
-0.67 m / '

Ne ga tiv e sig n sh ow s tha t th e ve loc ity de cr ea se s du rin g

las t 30 se co nd s .
v r •v. +ot

Si tin g va lue , we ge t
t
V,
-
a
V,

( c )- Th e To tal Di sta nc e Co ve re d

S
-
I he to tal di sta nc e co ve re d is nu me ric all y eq ua l to th
( Ar ea of AO A 13) 4 ( Ar ea of re cta ng le Al lD ) 4-
-
e are a un de r VCKH ity tim e gr ap h
C ( Ar ea of A CD E)
t
-- 2 10
»

8* 10*>
ft

2. 4* 10'
- l* 1107
s ~ (f M X A n ) 4 ( DD )( A B ) 4 ~ ( D£)( C 77) t“
2. 4 * 10
«
^
|t 3.33* lO n s e e J
S=
2
vo (-)

S 60 0 4 18 00 + 30 0
S » 27 00m
1
x 20 4 9 0 x 3 0 4 - x 3 0 x 2 0
2
1 » tio 0 )
masses
m ( and mj arc initially at rwl
f t lc magnitude of their velocities after the spriug !»
with u ,pri*» K co
•
*
mpr
bee
cM
n
cd bc hv
released
wi .. tlir ni . what is the

Or S » 2.1kni
Fust mass n * i
Second mass mj
-
In iti al ve loc ity of mi " vi *• 0
ln iii iii ve loc ity of m: * v 2 ~ "
^
 *A
-
* *

128 Cha pter 3 PH YS IC S - XI (Subjective)

v ,= 0
Pn. SchoJ
l o find VJ = 0 F = Ma
I :n.il velocity of mr = =? \ F
Or n = —
Final velocity of mj = vj = ? % M
put ting valu es, we get
v'
Ratio of their velocities after release
—
=v
:
=° V,
V, a=
l . Ox 10
l . Ox 10
- I7

12
"

C alcu lati ons: m,

0 = 1.0 10x - 17 * 12
Acc ord ing to law of con serv atio n of mom entu m 5 2
Init ial mom entu m = fina l mom entu m a = 1 . Ox 10 ms " "

;
nijV j + injY j - m , V * ( -m 2 Vj ) ‘

hoy plac es a fire cra cke r of neg ligib le mas s in an emp ty can of 40 g mas s . He plug s the end with
Wh ere neg ativ e sign sho ws tha t V| and v 2 are opp osit e in dir ecti on 3.6 A
a wooden blo ck of mas s 200 g . Afte r igni ting the fire crac ker , he thro ws the can stra ight up . It
ml ( 0 )+ m , ( 0 ) = m , vj + (-m 2 v' ) exp lod es at the top of its path . If the bloc k sho ots out with a spee d of 3.0 1
ms , how fast will the can
'

v
0 = m , v; + ( -m:v 2 ) he going?
& /
Given Data :
m , v; = m 2 v'
Ma ss o f can
i .
— m i = 40 g - 40 x 10 kg '

* V
Mas s of woo den bloc k = - 200g = 200 x 10 ' kg
1
Fin al spe ed of bloc k = v 2 = 3 ms
'

whi ch is the rati o of thei r velo citi es afte r the spri ng has bee n rele ased .
To find :
3.5 An amo eba of mas s l . Ox 10 kg pro pels itse lf thro ugh wate r by blow ing a jet of wate r thro ugh Fin al spe ed of can = vj - ?
tiny orif ice. The amo eba ejec ts wate r with a spee d of l . Ox lO 4 IJ Calculations :
ms and at a rate of 1 .Ox 10 gf '

*
'

Ass ume that the wate r is bein g con tinu ous ly rep leni shed so that the mas s
of the amo eba remain
,
As both can and bloc k arc init ially at rest , so thei r init ial velo citie s arc v = 0 and v: = 0
the sam e . Acc ord ing to law of con serv atio n of mom entu m ,
( a ) if the re w ere no forc e on amo eba oth er than the reac tion Tot al init ial mom entu m = Tot al fina l mom entu m
forc e cau sed by the eme rgin g jet,
wha t wou ld be the acce lera tion of the amo eba ? ,
n v +111 2 =111, vJ +m j V j
( b ) If amo eba mov es with cons tant velo city' thro ugh wat er, wha t is forc e
of surr oun ding wate r
^
mlx 0+m 2 * 0=
^
m 1
v ] - -in v'
* 2 2
( exc lusi vely of jet ) on the amo eba ?
0=m, v|+m 2 v'2
< • i \ cn Dat a : -m:v 2
Ma ss of amo eba \f l . Ox 10 i: A
= = ‘
*
g vi =
mi
Spe ed of ejec ted wate r = v = l . 0 * l 0 Jm s !
‘

.
-200 x 10 3
'
x3
/
V1
Ma ss of wat er ejec ted per seco nd = — = 1.0 xl 0 1 kgs ' '
40 x 10 -3
/
1 » » find : vj = - 15 m / sec
(a) Acc eler atio n of am oeb a = a=? The neg ativ e sign sho ws tha t the can will shoot in the opposite direction to .hat 11 bio
( b ) l urcc of water on amoeba F*? -
< iku fifio n:
1 = mas s per seco nd x spee d of ejec ted wate r
_
3.7. An electron ( m 9.1 xl 0 ' kg ) travelling at 2.0x 10 ms undergoes a
= ~3

hydrogen atom ( m = 1.67 x 10 kg ) which is initially at rc. t.

-77 , Assu ming
head
-i

the colli
on
sion
?
colli
lo
sion
be
with
perf cc .
l
a
v

| IQ
t
< v - f » h cn
clas
data:
tic and a mot ion to be alon g a stra ight line , find the ' cloeih of h > d atom

Futung values, we act Mass of electron = /n, = 9.1 x10 kg 31

F* I 0* 10 ’ * 1.0* 10*
-
-

F I 0 * 10 \
Acc eler atio n of amo eba
Velocity of electron — Vi = 2- Ox 10 ms -
Mass of hydrogen atom - 7h = 1 07 x 10 kg
)
i

Velocity of Hydrogen atom before collision = VJ*0

*
1
Sew ton a seco nd iaw ol lior.
*
 HMMMM
“

»>. - mv *~ r4
m. .
m •V
’
•

-i
1i
I Til
* y,« r •^

*
v
V *• .
'1%
. '
*1
nr
|
. -:
I
'*v i i

130
f PHYSICS - XI (Subjective)
To find:
Velocity of Hydrogen atom after collision = v 2 ?
Sebo
.
3.9
^ Two blocks of masses 2.0 kg and 0.50 kg
arc attachedJ at the two
ends of a compressed spring. The
(
131

Calculat ion : clastic potential energy stored in the spring

is 10J ind the velocities
its energy to the blocks when of the blocks if the spring
As the collision is perfectly clastic, so
delivers released.
data:
v' =
2 m ,I
VI +
[ nym ]
v . , Given Mass of first block = m , = 2.0 kg
K +m,] [m +m 2 ] , Mass of second block = m } = 0.5
putting values, we get Elastic potential energy of spring = P.E =
/
V,
2 x 9. l x l 0 x 2 x l 07
+ "
"
Initial velocity of mass m = ,
i“
‘ 11
9.1 xlO' 1.67 x 10" F
__ 36.4 x 10
” '
+ ° Initial velocity of mass :=0
To find:
-
/
V2
1.67 x 10- ” Final velocity of mi vj ? -
Or
-'
Vj 2.178 x 104 Final velocity of m2 vj2 « ? -
Or v2 - 2.18 x |0W Calculation:
According to law of conservation of momentum
3.8. Initial momentum final momentum
A truck weighing 2500 kg and moving with a velocity of 21 ms 1 collides
weighing 1000 kg. The truck and the car move together after the impact
with itatioun e»
.
, ,
m vl +m v3 = m vj + m 2 Vj ,
velocity . Calculate theirI
come
* Putting values, we get
Given data: 2.G <HO.5 * 0 “ 2.0* vj+ 0.5 * v'
*
Mass of the truck * m 2500 kg
Initial velocity of the truck v 21 ms *
, - ,-
- ;
0 2 v + 0.5 v
-2 v
;
Mass of the car ml 1000 kg
Or v2 ‘=
—0.5 i

Initial velocity of the car v 2 =0 ( 1)

To find: According to law of conservation of energy
common (i- c combined Jvclocity after collisions ?

---
Loss of P.E.

. -inijvJ gain in K..E.

Calculation:
-
l C vj ,'
v v 7 10 - im
2
vf +
:
According to law of conservation of momentum
Initial momentum final momentum
10
- 1
-2 * :4
2 v -
» .
1
2 *0 . 5 * 1
v J
.
m , Vin v,
ni| V | 4
2

m2 vj
-- m( V
iri| V 4
; m ,vj
rn2 v
putting values , we gel
lO v -^ ? v
nr ,,
m v im Vj Cffi
^ - , 4 m )v 2 Or 1
2
20“ 2 v1' +0.5 v1 "
or v miV mivi
111
'

, 4111 , , /J
20“ 2v +(0.5) (4vl )
; /
As Vj - ^
- 4v
- , ,1 >
2O 2 v1 + (0.5) ( 16vl' )
putting values, we get
v
2500 x 2141000 0
250041000
2500 ^ 21
- Before Collision
Or 20-2v' +8v;*

-
iov; 20
’
t

2500+ 1000 V
Or v,' 1
"2
V"
52500 m,+lul Or v;- 1.41m«
:r
3500 After Collision Pu«ing v»lu« of v { In equ. ( 1), we B«>
-
v 15m» 1
v *l - 4 « 1.41
Or vi --5.64 mi
•I

..\ J?
. VJ
.
&
rJ' > x » Ul
 _
1 ftS»|

132
- - ChaPter 3 tMotio
s PHYSICS
- XI (Subjective )

3.10 A Foot ball is thrown upward w ith an angle of 30° with respect to the horizontal.
*

m pass w hat must be the initial speed of the ball ?

To th ro
* » «»
5
|
^ •

1 0 = 0x 1 -*- x9 8 xi —
i

Given Data: '

l 0 = 0+ 4.9 r
^
Angle of Projection with horizontal = 0 = 30° , I0
. jRange of football = R = 40 m i
49
Acceleration due to gravity =g = 9.8ms - l
To find :
i = 2.04
Or [ t = l .42sec.|
Initial speed of football = v / =? Now horizontal distance i
Calculation ; „X l
Using the equation
X = V

D
K
_ vi sin20
2
Putting values, we gel
x 21 x l . 42 =
g V
x = 29 82/ , I
Ryg
or 2
V =
sin 2 0 — x = .Him
f

For Calculating v ( magnitude of resultant velocity )

R x
Putting values, we gel We needv , * and vfy W
40 *9.8
>
*
( As horizontal velocity remains same )
v
Sin 2(30° )
Or 2 40 * 9.8
v. =
sin 60°
2 392
V(v =0+9.8 x 1.42
Or v = 1
' 0.866 vf ) = !4 ms
v ? = 452.65 ( vfx ): + ( vf ):
Or Now resultant velocity = v =
^/ >

—
Or v = 21.27ms-i putting values , we get
i
v = 21.3 ms •

v=> < 2
21 ) +( l4 ) 2

3.11 A ball is throw n horizontally from a height of 10 m w ith velocity of 21 ms \ How for off it hit n
I v = V441 + 196
ground and with what velocity ?
v = >/637
Given Data :
Initial horizontal velocity =vix = 21 ms
Initial vertical velocity
Height from the ground
Acceleration due to gravity
- i

=viy = 0 -
- y - 10 m
= g = 9.8ms " 2
3.12 A W
*.,
300 A:/;I /I-1
(a )
( b)
.
How long was it in air ?
At what distance from the point vertically
Jdropped , did it strike the ground ?
M « • - ,
«*
.below
was

bombe at the instant the bomb was

the bomber
fhe

To find: ^'ven Data:

b
Horizontal distance = x = ? - Height of bomber = = = 490 m
Velocity to hit the ground =v=?
v .= 21 ms
1 y h
300 x 1000 g3 3| - i

Horizontal velocity of bombcr =vtx =300 mh = 60 x 60 = /f v 1

Calculations:
The first thing is to find the lime to reach the ground from vertical
fall,
I
y
Initial vertical velocity of the bomb = v ,y -0
jy .

Using the following equation Acceleration due to gravity = £ -

9.8/iw

^ y
^ t + gt
2
i T
° find:
(a ) Time taken by the bomber = ? in air = r
Putting the values, we get bomb = .
r = ?
( b ) Horizontal distance covered by
M' 134

( altulahon*: S
, pHYSICS — XI ( Subjective )
135
f or calculating time , using the equation,
( A)

T° flD <)
vc hat ra ,
/lge is iame for
Ble of projecti
r %t* T i*
To pf ° ^
is same for angle of projection G 2 * 45° .
45° + 4
* ^ $
Cutting values , we get
490 = 0 xf + i x 9.8 °ICUUWe have to prove that range is same for 4 and 0 - 45'- 4 . As, formula for range is
-
'
/ /
2
v v? sin 2b
2 * R
490 = 4 9/ 5 g
or
,*„490
Cate (i): - »- 5

y
ot
--
:
t 100
1 iOsec
4.9

l v
vf stn 2 ( 45 W )
Ri - »n 2 f 4S’- -9 j
g

fb) Horizontal distance covered = X = VBXf

X t u? Sin (9Qf 2f ) -
x = 83.3 x 10 g
o
Since *in(90 8 j * cos 9
* = % 33m
*

Yes the bomb will hit the ground

313 Find the angle of a projectile for which its maximum height and
R2 =
g ^
cos ( 2<pj

rar. ge remains jnaffec:ed when the angle of projection exceed or fail from 45’ by
Given Data:
horizontal range are equal.
Ma> i iT. j.rr: r:cigh * horizontal range
-

To find: 315 A SLt .

Ifsubmarine Launched ballistic missile ) is fired from a distance of 3000 km. If the Earth b
Angie of projection = 6 a ? considered flat and the angle of launch is 45* with horizontal, find the velocity with which the
Calculi Uoits: : is fired and the time taken by SLBM to hit the target
Cota Data:
As maximum height vWo Range of ballistic missile = R = 3000 km = 3 * 10* m
2 Angle of launch = 0 = 45*
*
v JUR20 * tfmd :
fUngrofprojcctile
i initial velocity of missile =v -?
Accord; sg to g, v«n ctrxfc:. XL Time taken by SLBM to hit the target =t=?
H -R >
^ dculaiioo:
As v :sin20
R=
29 g g
Or
Or
%mb
2
tic# * 4aa8
2stffe0*6 Or
values, we get
v :=
—
Ha
sm29

O v3*
3 MQ* 9 . g 29
y 4Q0 _ f

=4 1
~

-
iiua**? ) «nW
tttoh
Or b* 4 vJ = 2$U*l <f
Or 9=1361 (4) Or vI = 5.42*10W
Or v 5.42kms |
g
'

Tl®« .
b> SLBM L* (tottJ rim* of night )
114
art
ex or fail »hnrt of 45* by equal amount*, th«
^ 1*
2 v. » in0
i
F< V4J uet, we get

.
i
 1
138
PHYSICS - XT (Subjective )
s 137
2 x 5.42 xl 03 xSin 45° SchoJiH.
t=
9.8
Chapter
2 x 5.42 * l 03 x 0.707
t =
9.8
7.66 x 103
t=
9.8
WORK & ENERGY
3
1 =0.78 x 10
t = 780sec.
earn g Objectives
or t=
780 .
60
Y = 13 min
min
^
1 Understand the concept of work in terms of product of force and displacement in the direction of the

* * * * ** * * * * * ** * * force.
Work mgh for work done i a gravitational field near Earth' s
2. Understand and derive the formula = in

surface.

ATP FOR Part - 1 3-

4.

5.
Understand that work can be calculated

Relate power to work done.

Define power as the product of force and
from area

velocity.
under the force

N
- displacement graph.

Alternative To Practical
6 . Quote examples of power from everyday life. .
On 7 Explain the two types of mechanical energy.
PHYSICS, CHEMISTRY, 8 . Understand the work -energy principle .
BIOLOGY 9' Derive an expression for absolute potential energy.
10 * Define escape velocity.
& of poten tial energy of a body is equal to gain In kinetic energy
Understand that in resistive medium loss .
COMPUTER SCIENCES of the body plus work done by the body against friction
! everyday life
[NewPaper Pattern For Intermediate Examination Give examples of conservation of energies from
13.
Edition for 2014 is available in Market
1S! Chipur 4 f\v
orV 4 PHYSICS » XI (Subjective)
s 139

Chapter No. 4 Loduct (i(?rgy

|on
of Object changes if an exchange of energy occurj
etween the object and its environment .
4 L
u
II J i l l
v*
. ^ transfer
tra ^
unrk then •* ,
fer of
can occur due to a force or due to an e ianto of /
energy
transferred
via force is a process called doing work . Doing
energy. Energy transferred
J
.

work Is the act of transferring the energy

to the object is positive work . Energy transferred from
,

I )r,e object is negative work . -

nr * ii « r g I ( S 0 tten
thought in terms of physical or mental effort . In Physics, however, the term involves two things

f [i i u S
farce III) displacement

What do you understand e term work ? Explain .

at
Do You Know ?
I 42? Work has the same dimension as
5 ce that of torque.
Done by Constan
s
-3 . -'
£
s f a 2l ^ - 3i£, I .
nr ii c
I
Work
Work done on a body by a constant force Is defined as the product of
a.
J
3X 7 s* v<.
< *£
< &j y magnitude f
o displacement and the
t component of force in the direction of
displacement.
V
flu
£
< fit — 2
Mathematical form

S s
>
O)
uS
>
E
let

F = constant force applied on a body.

* -$ ,**£ > -v a
m
H UJ
ON * I
!X =| d = d> $place • • of the body Fig. 4.1 *
u
D
C
« 1“ l
I §3
$ y = angle between force and displacement
.
u 1
J3 WOJ JO JUIfl i s
*- jTw Then the v rk done on the body is,
z o V 0*' dtuop jo aicg 3
W = (F cos 9 ) d
o 5 0 x -
u
3 OR W = Fd cos 0
u c*-
c n
=8
l|i *
o
a u
c — OR

I* t W= F. d

t
E
ia l l-i
•
b
Another definition
Work can also be defined as the dot product offorce and displacement.
-2 5
UHn BEECEEEDD
*
Is ,|
X

. ,
Unit of Work
_ 0rk 15 a scalar quantity SI unit of work is Nm called joule.
^
= lr ergs
1 joule <
^
t/i

S IItt g
1=73-,
•
r;
jUnitlon of joule of one
X
k
nsii c one newton force acts on the body and the body
&Wer i the
covers a distance
.
P yo co o 5 i> , the work done is said to be one joule
£c _
-0scs .35 direction offeree
<
. 2; v o it = o Ulmensi n of work
1*1 1 1 ° of

\
*
| 1 Theditension
work is [ MLJTJ]
t sPecial cases
I 1) If 0 <; 90° , work done is positive.
negative.
2) If 90°< 0 180°, work done is

3) If 0 = 90°, no work is done.

is maximum .
4) If 0 = 0 , work done
°

* »

m &S .
 140
HJl ElfLit VorU
Graphical representation of Work
^ ' Scholar * PH YSI
’ CS - Xj

14
Graphically, the area under the force-displacement work done for the first interval is
curve represents the work done So
by force .
If we plot graph between force and I MV, = F , .Ad, = FjcosO,Ad,
displacement then,
Area under the graph = (OP) (OR) B Simila ^ Y /

= Fd 1 AW, = F;.Ad: = F,COS02 Ad3

So =W and up to nth interval
If force F makes an angle 0 with horizonta
l. Then the graph is plotted between F AVVn = Fn .Adn = FucosGr
and d. cosO
Now the total work done in ng the body fi point a to b is.
Q. 2 How much work Is being done by upward W = ( AW,+ AW .+
the pail moving forward?
force when a person holding
W =(F,cosO,
^ >2 Ad/4 ...+ FncosOnAdn)
OR

OR ycosO;
^
In this
case no work is being done i
- L

Reason How to calculate work graphically

-*
because the angle between F and d is 90°. To calculate the work done plot F cosO versus d. Area under the graph is divided
into n rectar , les from a to b. Area of each rectangle represents the
|
So W = Fd cos 90° work done £
-luring that interval. The total work done is equal to sum of areas of all the I
W=o W/W////// rectangles.
r « ««
Q. 3 How much work is being done on the
wall ( shown in figure ) ? * For more accurate calculation of work
The vork done can be calculated more accurately, If we subdivide
the
distance Into a large number of intervals so that each Ad becomes very J
A< 0
Reason
work is being done
**. .
a i.e Ad -» o
• LI
because the displacement of wall is zero. -
W lim tF.cose.Ad,
So W = F (o) c o s O
W=0
In this case the
d graph.
total area of rectangles H equal to area under PcosG verses
Dtipi«c«m nl d
*
Pig. 4.1
—
—
Q .4 HOW can we calculate the work done by variable force ?

v
J
* 5
. ..
con erv tlv field. 0« S h o w
^, ..
gravitational »! >«« 11
• *

—,
W work done In gravitational d
Work Done by a Variable Force 1 0 pathfollow
in many cases, the force is not constant, but it varies In magnitude o?directk>n or
Work dona along a clotart
PBt n1 | ,
u lona|liitfgi
Gr av itatio ^*
In Doth . e g.
Force of gravity acting on a rocket moving away from earth . Tht
na l field
ipace gravit #011 1forci on a body 1
Cq /
fd the
around the $arth Iff
* * * *
• Fo 'ce exerted by spring increases by the amount of stretch.
. Vl 1 gravttatlonaljleld - . ,
..
of xy-plane from oo nt a to b as
- e: us consider
figure ,
the path partic le In
shown In
* convention for wok done in ,r vltatlon«lfid
tl0nii
k u positive
.
D v de. the oath * nto n
-
snor t inter vals .
of displacements Ad AJ; .. . Ad ,.
A particle acted
11MMI
’ displacement It perpar
•
*' " * „
»» > •
«««• *
wQfkl» » <

~ ^ e forces actmg Curing tnt ;e Inttrv a s T p

, F , respect* vtfy. .
yartablf forca
tne pet ano *n
$ \
***iaitro. ^‘ " ”
lcul|f

' 2 fo ce
^5 tz ace'~ J .«
con s
nt.
de 'td to a * projum atF const ant 4
or each interval of
*
to point o

'
V
V
42
- A
HOT9HH

Chapter 4 fw .
rjfr'

PHYSICS - XI (Subjective )
U ; *4

-
r 4

K
i*

- ' i;

Vork Done in Gravitational Field

.et oS consider a body of mass
m .The body is displaced from A to B along
Sch
^ i-
Wv ^ gAy c osISO .
’ + mg
__ +
^
+ mgAy cos18U° .
143

j * e ' ent oaths

*
with constant velocity in gravitational field as shown in figure , =- mgAy , - mgAy , - mgA ... - mgAyn [v 80° - 1) #

-
tat'on a ‘orce acting on the body F =W = mg
OB
= - mg(Ay , + Ay + ^
Ay „)
=

_
2
OB
-
Path 1 (Work done alon path ADB ) & C patn2 OB
Wv = - mgh I v (Ay, + Ay ;
8 w
r done along curved path Is
A O'K cone by gravitational force along path ADB is Thus, the work
i'
CM WAB = W „+ Wv
W ~ VVA-» D + Wo JC I

4
8
\0 \ VA = mguVDWX
j* '
= 0 + (- mgh )
WAB = - mgh
0
D
)
^
* mg )
patnl
A (ij ( ) and ( ) ; t js dea
- mg i AD ) : o
,
''* S / / //;/ / //// / /
aD
7777777777T77 , From equations
followed
, 2
, i.e .
3 t work w* is independent of the
=0 Fig. 4.8 path
\V
WAQ8 = W .CB = WAB = -mgh
/
And = me DB cos!SC
Work done along a closed
= mg ( D8) (-1)
_ [ v cos 8cr*
= -1] Cor^der a closed path ADBA . The body moved from A to D D tto
from B to A. the total work
' 08!
B and then
rh n .
Sc
= -ngU
z ~
[ DB = h ] So.
WA D = mg ( AD)cos90°
^
IK
is equal to sum of work done along these paths.

-
= O +• l -rr &n ) = mg ( AD ) (0) For Your Information
W *c = mgr.
* - (1) =O 1 hp = 746 wall = 550 ft lb -
-
Path 41 (Work cor. e a ong path ACB )
- = : £- = . :r.
v:* W: ~ B = mg ( DB)cosl 80o
• 2~< rms a z ~ z path AC 3 S
= mg ( DB) H)
V> . '
• v
_- = m e AC cos- i SC 3
|
‘ " r
- :ne curved
= -mgh
path
"6

“ s
“ '
- *
= mg (Ay. ) cos0° * mg(Ay2 ) cosO0
= mg( Ay, + Ay2 + + Ays )
-fvcosQ =lJ mg(Ay,, ) cos0°
°
- rn . C3 :P$90°
= [ v (Ay, Ay2 Ay„) h)
=
= -5 - 2 ~
mgh

= WA -- -
D WD^ B + WB - A

r
— r —
“
s

2
= 04 (
A=0
or* done along a closed P lh
mgh ) «• ( mgh )

* **
'
-
=
t; ca s- at* • r< dor.e r/ ; s - . e
pat *

ce t'e : atr -
^rvatlve Field path followed is called
For Your Information
-
? r» jn »TT .rflffiig
Gr» /tta\<r<* ’oc*
tar. 7 lndependent of the
( ' /
0ne U
i': em ca ress .
as r 7 f
? r ?. ******* ** E > o* t »c to' rg ' eye*
&90tflC 10TC0
Non ConBir / tkY * Fpr£ g §
A '/ F m.' » a mg repi frK.tono' fo' en

•m » 'f :
t :: >»
--
* ? «i rep c«» se
*
V ' 7 ' i z“ i ntJtys Sc
*
. ~g
OR
*hich work done along a dosed path it iero
T
, is called conservative
Conservative force
A* r « r »<«nc*
-tor a
Tart#**1 n a itong
jP'WV’*=0O
&
ot B '
W, * 5 kwlMB fewest of •rnensy
/ rr r r t c C ' g ca ittpi -• Utsonil field
V
V'
t
1. Work done by conservative force
independent of path followed .
2. Work done by conservative
is

pV 7 V' t i 7 ' ; < . ~ 7i 2

closed path is zero.
force along a
3. Examples of
conservative force are
gravitational force, elastic spring force and
electric force etc.
* J
f
'
7 '/
 PHYS IC S - XI ( Su bje ctive)
145

Instantan eous power, P = F - v

that
Q.6 Define power and instantaneous power. Give its unit.
'
Power proof
Power is defined as work ( lone per unit time. co ns tan t for« acting on a movines t ya s constant velocity of
ut FIs the
OR bod y
the to the body at any in ant is given by
Power is def ined as the rate of doing work . the po wer de liv er ed
I Then AW
Average Power p = lim
Al -*0 At
It is defined as total work done divided the total time taken.
F - Ad AW = F. Ad )
Mathematically

.
Pv =
AW
OR
-
P = lim
AiQ At

At
OR P =F | I
At -»0
Where
AW = the work done and At = time taken -*
Ad

Instantaneous Power
OR P=F •v [ v lim
A«
-0 At
=v]

AW Another Definition of power

Instantaneou s po we r is def ine d as the lim itin g val ue of — as time At , Power car also bo defined as the scalar product of force and velocity.
Do You Know
. Q-9 Define energy. Give the two types of mechanical energy . It lakes about 10 J to °
following the time t approaches zero make a car and the car then
AW uses about I * I 01' J of
So, ,
P ni = L im
At -» 0 At energy.from petrol in its life
Energy time.
Unit of Power The ability of a body to do work is called energy
.
Power Is a scalar quantity 51 unit of po we r Is Joule /scc on d cal led wa tt . Tvpes of
Me chanical energy
Dimensions of power are [ MLaTJ] 1 For Your Information
Kinetic Energy 2. Potential energy
Approximate Energy Values
Definition of watt . Kinetic Energy
The power Is said to be one watt If one joule of
. en
wo
erg
rk
y
Is do
.
ne In one
j
se co nd

^
I'Juirgy sessed
pos ml
by a body due to its motion is < led kin .
eti c en erg y. Source

-
Bumino 1 Ion Ct lf .’
rncrci ( J >
jn . ui

Q7 Define co mm erc ial un it of electr ica l

thematically __ Burning 1 III/ * peirol
.
K E. of C W a!
5 « 10

-
1t 10*

K .E =
1
— mvJ
Running Person 1

.
Fivtirm of on '»tom
*
lOknih 3 . tG'

of elect ric al energy ’ HW 10 '

Com m er cia l Un it of uf /inuirn

ST ' - * of .vr
o air ynuji C » 10 *
. t.

,
*
The commercial unit of ele ctr ic ! en
* ergy Is kilo w'ott ho ur - APPf ner
* &Y Y be translational rotatio
j2<Ktent a Energy
Kilowatt-hour
ose po we r Is one „ cncrgy'
n ,
osition in aforce field or be ca us e

' "' ^ ’ ^
by ag en cy wh possessed hy a body because f
Kilowatt -hour Is ( he wo rk do ne in one ho ur an
°
'
1E °
condition 15 called potent &v

-
kilowatt

i
sec c o
IOOO W B 6oo '* GC 1000 J /sec * 3600 P o t e n t i a l Energy surface of the earth at a
So ikWh * ne3r the for Vnar Informulion
•36 00 00 0 J energY due t0 6rav
An body tr a> .
c «cm >
without having momentum
» 3.6 x 10 J .
P - F = mgh

IkWh 3.6 M J
 Chapter 4 [\Vt) ru & r PH YS IC S - XI (Subje ctiv e)
147

-
146
^T T ab so lu te^
po ten tia l en erg y. De rive re lat ion for absolute P.E. of body of mass m at distance r
Elastic Potential Energy oT;£
^
nr
*** * - /
The energy stored in a compressed
energy.
l 2
/ stretched spring is calle d ela stic po
then

E
- ^
E is the energy of mau

JL
2m
I

potential Energy
Elastic potential energy = - kx Absolute
/> = 'JlmE
Where k spring constant an d
sa
x is
me
the
as
ex
tho
ten
se
sio
of
n
wo
.
rk . ^
ln t£Z
The units of energy are the
e. Igw
of Absolute P.E
Q.10 State and prove wo rk - en erg y pri nc ipl
Calculation
body of mass m is dis pla ce d in spa ^
ce fro m point 1 to N in the gravitational fie ld . The gra vita tional force
during this displacement.
Tidbits
AH the food you eat in or
LCl
anQl remain co ns
mg
tant
h is on ly ne ar the su rfa ce of the ea rth wh ere gra vita tion al force is con sta nt . As
Work- Energy Principle day ha about the tan * elation P.E = true
rth
* *
energy as 1/3 litre ot octroi
gravitationa l force va rie s inv ers ely to the sq ua re of the dis tan ce from the sur fac e of ea
Statement «

j
.^
ge in its kin eti c energ y .
,tnver |Bl9| B law ,, so it can not be applied in this case.
eq ua l the ch an |
i.c. F «
^
ne on a bo dy is to
Work do
Proof the wo rk do ne by gra vit ati on al for ce, the dis tan ce be tw een to N ,
is div ide d into eq ua l
order to calculate for each .
Let small steps of len gth s Ar , so tha t the va lue of for ce rem ain s co nstan t ste p

i' step (1 to 2)
!
m = mass of body Work do ne du rin g
v, = initial velocity of the body Suppose I^
for ce ap plie d on the bo dy m = mass of the body
= F
M = mass of earth
d = distance covered by the body
body
,
r = distance of point 1 from the center of the earth
V / = final velocity of the
r ,- distance of point i from the center of the earth
The work done on the body is Calcuh on of r

Now,
Work done = F d
ac co rding to eq ua tio n of mo tion
-•
stance between the center of this ste

r=
p an d cen ter of the ea

(1)
rth is
No
2
2 ad = Vf vi
2
- ( as 2
l Also displacement of body from point 1 to 2 is
- v, )! ( 2)
d=
2a Ar = r: - r ,_
(2) 4l

+,_
motion OR (3) 3H
d accord ing to Ne wto n ' s se co nd law of r = Ar r
An 2
2
F= ma ( 3 ) UsinS equation ( ) ( )
3 in 1 1
Using equations ( 2 ) and (3 ) in (1), we get
r= fjjf Ar + r ,

OR
Work done = ma

Work done =
1
, - 2r + Ar . 0

2
r. ,
r

2
. <.E.
—— —
-r = 2rL1 + Ar
OR Work done = fina l K. E. — init ial K E. = change in 2 2
Ar (4 ) 4 V
O
earth
Note
cha ng es its
faringboth sides, we have
art h, the wo rk do ne
If a body is raised from the surface o ’

gravitational P.E.
If a spr ing is a co mp res se d the wor one on it.is eq ua l to the increa se in

elastic potential energv

I
\ **

“’
V
•
:
*
 1
«43
'49

« r -— _

* 4
;lr
G V - 7
-
'

-ce —
«
» c
- *
^ k ,
v' "" v, r s >"• s
-
sr se ?- e erred
^
"'
•
r* ca
— *d *
'

-
'' =c
- i
:

'
- *.ir

j
f % is£5 — ^ ' 'c 5 cca -as
• *
T< Ms
-
sros ^ 5 :- s - as sed
*s
re ~ae r - -
sed
*
I
'

:e e - at
*'
i'
* say
>
= n' -r *

•
* c* w
rec s
j G*r . ra
-re grirTIi*TcrT~rr*'^e r
:
a r e center * this
* q
Do You Know?
* *
U =
-
•
_
- GMm

-CMx
L
r.
‘

r=
GMrr.
— r— : ( 6i
ss
*. acso
r.
; jte - ' 5 / Stationr:i cote' tiai of body at distance r from the center o * the earth s ,

-GMm
^ .

r
, r 2 " - *e - ave = ( 9)
r
GMm
t
r = .(7) Aisoiute P.E on the surface of Earth
-
.vr a bod / lies at the surface of the earth then, r = R . So, equation ( 9 ) becomes
.s the do - e d. - gia step :
' -GMm _
Ur ~ ho )
R
WM2 = FAr There more energy reachr : .< ere R U : rg -j us of the earth and the negative sign represents that gravitational field of eartn for mass m
cosi 8o' ' ‘

= F Ar Earth in 10 days of sunlight

than in all the fossil fuels «3
;
^tractive.
Hcte :
( v F is opposite to A r ) the Earth
, f v r
’ - .ne body moves away from earth s surface
' , r increases, U increases (i e it becomes less
. . negative .)
.)
,

= -FAr ' nen the b dy falls towards the earth's surface, r decreases, U decreases, (i. e . it becomes more negative
°
calculate P.E. choice of zero reference point
=-G“ -0
TJ ^ [ using equations ( 2 ) & (7) ]
, JcCho ,ce of zero point is arbitrary.
infinity as zero P.E reference .
^
Ca e surface of the Earth or the point at
tal< e
Wu2 = -GMm 3 ,T 1

^
drfference f P - E from one point to another is significant
LTih Vi . The °
in P.E as we move a body above the Earth s ' surface will always positive
for escape veioaty ?
Ww = -GMm - - - _ ri r2 .
Tj^meescape velocity and derive the mathematical expression

nd
step ( 2 to 3) %
Work done during 2
W2
_= , -GMm —fl _ ^PeVelocity
finWai velocity of a body with which it goes earth '5 gravitational field is called escape velocity*
*
WJ^
3
0 ut of the
Work done during last step ( N-i to N)

%-, = -
_
For last step work done is,

GMm| N —^-1
J
r
*J
l 'Wien s body is
0rr
'

basing
to
I
the initiai ve
.
-* acting downward thrown upward. it’
, if we ' cr
iocitVrthe
° at
lhe
» »
*ipitia '^
cert3 n ve 0
'
°
!
eaCWnBacerta‘I!
,'
i***££"» *» ethe
,he bod> ,l *'
* ”'
. .

.
eM. That
'

it ja 'smorC
ground -

Total work done from point 1 to N

w
^ \ar
velocity is caiied escape toC fy , .
for escape velocity
Ww 2^ +
+ W -7
WN-I
- N .
^ know that the absolute P F 0f a body 0nlhe
rface of earth is
v
- ° *^ ^
 Mlt
XI ( Swhjiitiw )
1 S0
< (watk 4
r
PHYSICS 151
5
«•* GV. ro
0) * -‘
| jr l **
, s intertonvertlon ol potential energy and kinetic energy '

As t v>cv c. 'r < '.- t o - s

-
v
R
• ' st - o \* * e- G. tL
>
>
L. becomes :oro.
-
Q 11

GMm'i GMm 4UP

Sc =o version of Poten tial Energy and
R inter -con
>
-
grs\ ts::^ 3 field' s
-
the mta \ S. neeced by the body
$ to reach infinity (i. e. out of ic Energy
Kinetic a body is fallinE freely under the action of gravity thr a 5on - P.E
K.R 0
--mfr |
L,
« A
Consider medium Suppose a body of mass m i at rest at height / e tr e r

Init 3 K.E =
GMm
resist '^ , earth. * *
R of
For Your surface
l GMm Information ition A
0« - ® v«a — —R MMiie Escape speeds (KniM
At P 05
potential ener '
gy of the body = mgh
RE = sag (h - )
Where n = the mass of the body ; M = mass of the earth and, R = radius of earth Moon energy of body = o
K E =* rr.£
* h

Mercury 24 Kinetic energy at A is -

* 3
OR
2GM Mars 43 The total t
v . *
50 E /nglt + 0
Venus
^ _ -
Gc
5K
R 10.4 (1 Cb x>
Earth EA - mgh — P.E = 0
K_E = :righ *
112
OR v =
2GM Nepyune 224
Change in P.E. & K .E . when body falls
[

R ~ V ( 2) Uranus
Saturn
254
370 At position B
This is express on for the escape velocity of a body. Jupiter 61
let
Another formula for escape velocity covere d by the body = x
downward distance
As the gravitational force for a mass m placed on the surface height of body from the surface or eart = ( h - x )
of the earth of
mass is Potential energy of the body = mg (h - x ) = mgh - mgx
1
r —
GMm
:— Kinetic energy of body - — mv „ (2 )
R-
Where vfa is the velocity of body at point B.
But F = mg
Calculation of v B
GMm By equation of motion
So mg = 2
R 2 ad = vJ - vj
OR
GM OR. v r2 = 2 a d + v *

g= -g ]
R
:
OR ( v v, = 0, vr = vB , d = xanda
v 2 = 2 gx + 0
2
OR GM= gR OR 2
v n = 2 gx
Thus equation ( 2 ) becomes . Putting this value of v 2
in equation ( 2 ), we have
l
2 gR 2 K.E = - m ( 2gx) =m gx
Vm = R .
s total energy
° at position B
2

OR = V 2gR EG = mg (h - x ) + mg x
ER = mgh - mgx + mgx
Value of escape velocity on Earth ( 3)
EB = mgh
; ,
As g= 9.8m/ sec and R = 6.4
*iOl m
So v« =

=
N/2 X

11.2 x
9 . 8 x 6 . 4 x 1 0*

ioJ m/ sec ^* Position C [Just before hitting the ground]

*,kocty
distance
from the
covered
surface
^oten a energy of the body = o
of
by the
earth =
body
0
= h

OR =11.2
|v> tc =n.2 km/ sec
x 103 m/ sec
Kinetjc ’energy 0f body = mvj ( 4)
OR
 IK
1'> 2 Chapter 4 [Wo
PHYSICS XI ( Subjective ) 153
Where v< K the velocity ol body at point. C .
,
.
enutlcally . .
Calculation of v, total energy * P g. + K . £ COnstant
Energy Sources
. I Kum.- wablu
liy pqu ilion of motion
^ f conservatlon of energy *4
SiKirmewnItU
'

the speCial °C3Se

HydfOoftCftc Coal
2 a d vj - v/ This * I
new sources Wind Natural Gai

OK v; 2 nd i v '
for
Need life we ob5erve manV energy changes fromi one form to another, Tsd »
* .-
Cfeoincffi al"
0.1
Uran urn

OR
-

vf- - 2 gl» » 0 17 v, 0 , V, , d hand a g |

I ln
dally
|| energy transfers heat the environment an
id
.
energy
.
is lost in the
,
Hiomac
ttuultght
j Or! nhaiA
Til i jftd
* . .*
.
Cthrjnol / Mritf liif of *
V l 5 t3 , a -
‘
At * of hrol w hlch Is useless. So, useful enero /
* * '
.' .
Individual fields rn / run off
OR vj » 2 gh form
con served . That Is why we ne er i;//niyii: wfior, made from
*’ f

.
Putting the value of r, In equation ( /1 ), we have
.
•fif ' d' /
is
>
Dio rr ann

eri6fgies *
the different non - conventional energy sources.
KI , m ( zgh) in gh .
Q 15 Discuss
.
So, tol il i - m - iKy .» t position B
it o mg h r ..• ...
I

ional Energy Sources

Non-
i
OR lr rngh ( '> ) Convct
art- not very Cbmmoq these days. Some of them are given
Conclusion i •* • These sources
.
II . t body falls hnm i height h then » t height h, above the surfac ol
„ . below;
loss In IM ( aln In K I . . <> earth v
•• i « »

i
1.Energy from
Gravitational
Tides
force ol the moon produces tides in the sea. The tides raise the I
// |
• •* .—
/ » Ufi>
'"
pf I .
vS?
rfW I •*. * - ** *• ' »

> mgh , rngh,

1
mv, I 1
mv / |
water in the sea roughly twice a day .
2 2
OR mg( bi h) ,
2
m N/ '
v/ )
i
111
Explanation
Water at high tide can be trapped in a basin by constructing a dam .
low
Dam
tide
Is
to
WU
— . «*M -.
*I* * « * •»
»> 11» -— *
vf released in a controlled way at

P I . and K I . are Interconvertible but the total

-
Where v, and v; are the velocItlt s at height h , and h, respectively. T
i
' , filled it high tide. Then
derive the turbines. The
, water
dam Is
Is
filled again for next high tide and the of
fall
. w»r «
— . .
nli w.. 1H > A»»w *******
*’® *"**"•
•
. current • ••• • a **
generate the mio
•
* ' ' /

water also derive the turbines This process

Is used to PI ® . A .< S
energy remains unchanged.

—
*

— —
• In the absence of friction,

—
loss in V E gain in K . E. .

-
produce strong water wives

....
• In the presence of friction,
loss in I 1
I - gain in K E
* work done against friction
Tha anergy of thesa waves can generate electricity. *
. i. p . mgh = — 2
m +fh
v

Q.14. State law of conservation of energy. Why new sources of energy has to
be developed if energy is conserved ?
“ Saltir' s duck.
= , a MSU «Wo
II (TI| J
t or Yo» f Information
.* .
it t Mif) Cl' lumm fnpuUlion
'
lw*|> ti anifuuunnif iwfutil thobervitt
IUUUCVJ
*
AM BJii#lc » iciciy mimniiAS
* f«)uw Mngm/ingil)«u*> af
<33> «VMBSM
U § >
fe an ulwmatodrf
i«ui ciemy by,
omovaibfi

Conservation of Energy (I) rtr /»WJ£ tfiitjltunl

HJflftru
PI
^*
vtm
eUiruil
ml me
toftI lntr >d </
~~

—
Statement
. For Your informatloj ' nifnknvrt t> i / b , xat
Energy cannot be destroyed It can be transformed from one form into Orliilni*1
p) MMfr tmlmH h <i[h > «ng
,
t

_
.
c ur ,ni TOI#M J*

. .
Sourco of *
~
]
another , but the total amount of energy remains constant.
"
If

. ... .
Source 1 (41 JMAg »kn aihnmn
energy
*
Conservation
The K . E and
of mechanical energy

The total mechanical

K . E and . P . E .
P . E are the different
energy of
forms
the
of mechanical energy,

body is equal to the i :m of

.Sourcta
Bio mass
Fossil fuels
Wind
Waves
Hydro electric
Tides
Sun
Sun
Sun
Sun
Sun
Sun
Moon
l!'",
.
1

! ,* ..
Parts (1) Duck float (
W V| n rgy products th mov m nt In
Th f « v
* *' motion of duck float Is us
2)

d
Balance

to run
float
duck
al
.
float
ctrldty
r latlv to balanc float.

change into K .E. Similarly , the K .E may also be Gijolhormni Horth

PE may
.

energy remains constant .

Chang into P.E, but total
w

iJ-*
 154
_Chapter 4 [\\ u - XI (Subjective)
PHYSICS 155
3 - Solar Energy
S< jn ts
- .
the major source of energy on earth
Solar energy at normal incidence
‘
outside the earth s atmosphere per second per unit area is ab R3dio
3
* ive
Decay
of ra di oact iv e ele ments, the energy heating
out 1.4kW / m: ,
'
the ocks is constantly

*
wkick is referred as solar constantWhile passing thr
ough atmosphere, the
total energy is reduced due to reflection, sc
particles, water vapours and oth
attering and absorption by dust c *« UUUQ£
*
11' ' 16
, Heat of the Earth
1

|ResWuane rocks within lOKm of the earth are present

er gases. On a clear day at noon, the solar n form. They
/
/ i Hot >8 °“
energy at the surface of the earth is lkYV 2
Solar energy is used to heat the water by
can also use to generate electrical energ
/m .
solar reflection and thermal absorbers
y. For this purpose, the surface of
collector is blackened to absorb the heat energ the
y. It can heat up the water up to
y ^
dull bUck
^ IlMOO
I
'
- Co
C
rm
nr
or
es
e .

sion
inside
in deep
of Ma
the
ter
ea
a
rth,
l
the compr,
.
{ gnergy from interior part of the earth. The temperature of these

d materials cause for the generation of

70 C.To get higher temperature; we use the
'

heat en er gy ,

reflectors or lens of large size.- wa ter be ne ? ground is in contact with hot rocks
plac
- an d
es, is
Photo voltaic cells m eso m an d pr ssure in form of hot springs, geysers or steam
hig h tem pe rat ure
Sunlight can be converted into electrical raised to
energy by photo voltaic cells . They . Th e ste am produced in s way can run the turbines or for heating
made up of silicon. Electrons in the silico are vents
n gain energy from sunlight to cre purpose.
ate

.
voltage. Solar panels are expensive but of en erg y ma y ca us e ce ho t ge yse r relea sin g wi th an explosive
long life time and have low run Geo th er m al

.
cost. ning
. usually occur in volcanic region and erupt with irregular

—
column int o the air Th ey
For cloudy days or nights, electric energ
y can be stored during the Sun lig
ht in
„
, erv3ls. This extraction of geo thermal seriously disturbs geyser sys V tem bv
by
Nickel cadmium batteries by connecting them to reducing heat flow and aquifer pressure
solar panels. Do You Know ?
They are used to power satellites. Th
weather stations and rain forests comm
ey are also used in remote ground
based
unication and also in solar calculators. Population can te rexiunfif I
( I JPccpk iiscnuss tranquil
**** FORMULAE
»
* **
4- Energy from Biomass (2)UcgccUvnral Solar . .
h\ dcricctricaJ anJ windpwg}
It includes the organic materials such as crop
residue, natural vegetation, trees, alternative fern's of era#
* 1 Work done by constant force W = F. d
animal dung and sewage. Biomass energy refers
to the use of materials as fuel.
Two common methods of conversion of biomass int ga s 2 Work done by variable force W = XF j Ad, co s 0
o fuels are direct combustion i=l
and fermentation.
ir
Direct Combustion Method 3 I Power P= F. V
p= —/
Direct combustion method Is applied to get energy
from waste product p,v AW
commonly known as solid waste and confined it into cham Average Power
ber and ignite it The o
a At
heat produces is then use in a boiler to run the turbine of generator
. e
m nur -
and p,nl = L im
AW
Fermentation Method * *
rott ing pla nts Instantaneous Power AJ -* 0 At
Bio fuel such as ethanol is a replacement of gasoline, which is ob :
tained by 1 K .E = T
P
fermentation of biomass using enzymes and by decomposition through bacterial Kinetic Energy K.E = -2 2m
action in the absence of air. The rotting of biomass in a closed tank called a p.E = mgh
digester produces biogas which can be piped out to use for cooking and heating. Gravitational Potential E
5 . Energy from Waste Products
1
W = mv , -- -2
1 :
v

It is probably the most commonly used conversion process, in which waste

Work Energy Principle
-GMm
^ surface of earth)
material like wood waste, crop residue and municipal solid waste is burnt in a Absolute P.E U= r
r
confined container. Heat produced in this way can be used in a boiler to produce GM
=
steam that can operate turbine generator.
V
Escape Velocity V = s/ 2 gR R
6 . Geothermal Energy 1
1
-— mv 1
fh
fro ins ide the ea rth is in the form of hot water or steam. It * hj)
a m |v , -O mg *
The heat extracted m Conservation of Energy mg(h(

^m
can be generated by follow ing m et ho ds.

-
\ •, v
>
 IMill

156

Multiple Choice Questions 13'

Absolute . P E of a body at infinity is
(a) Zero ( b ) Negative
(c) infinity ( d) Both a & b
hour pos sible answ ers to each state ment are give n belo w , lick
< S) „-< , ,,
// i r f ff|
|
vbj mass of satellite
.
1 Which of the following types of forces cannot do the work on the particle (c) pull of earth
^ N ne
°
.
( 1) frictional force ( b ) Gravitational force
?
l5. When spe ed of a body is double then .
(c ) Elastic force (d) Centripetal force (a) K .E is doubled acceleration is doubled
2 . Relation between horse power and watt Is: 4 (c) P.E Is doubled ( d) Its momentum is doubled

( a ) ihp - 766 watt ( b ) 1 hp » 746 watt ,6. Consumption of energy by a 6 bulb in ond is:
(b) 60J
( c ) ihp = 736 watt (a) 120J
(d) ihp * 796 watt ( d) 0.02 J
. Proton, Neutron, electron and a particle have same mom (c) 30J
3 entum, which particle hav c
(a) a (alpha) particle (b) Proton
Rroater Kl) 17. Dot product of force and vclo< ty is:
( b ) Work
( c ) Neutron (a) Pressure
(d ) electron (c) Momentum ( d) Power
4 - Slope of work - time graph Is
18.
( a ) Work (b ) Displacement ( a ) 180 W
( c ) Power (d) None
5 - When two protons arc brought together, then
.
( a ) Their K .E Increases
( d ) None

( b ) P . E. decreases
19.
(c ) 1.8 W
.
If we go hove the surface of earth, the gravitational constant
( a ) Remains constant ( b ) Becomes zero
( c ) P . E . Increases ( d ) P.E . remains same ( c ) Varies inversely to the square of the dista nce ( d ) Varie s direc tly to the squa re of the dista nce
6. A porson holds a bucket of weigh 60 N Ha .
walks 7m along the horizontal and then climb up vr 20 The typical source of wave energy Is
5m. The work done by man Is: ( a ) sun ( b ) moon
( a ) 720J ( d ) mars
(b) 420J (c) earth
( c ) 300J ( d ) None
7 . The SI unit of power ( watt ) Is equivalent to ANSWERS
(a) Kgm*s » .
**

( c ) kgm1! 1
( b ) kgmi“ J l. d 2. h .
3 d 4. e 5 c . .
6 c .
7 « .
8 b .
9 b 10 u
( d ) None
. . 18. cl 19. II 20. a
8. Two manes of igm and 4 fm are moving with same K E The .. ratio of their linear moment srai
Ub . .
12 c 13 u . .
U b 15 cl . 16 it 17 cl
( a) 1 : 1 6 ( b) 1 ; 2 Ik.
(c )Va :1 ( d) 4 : 1 Short Qu es tio ns of Ex ercis

--
9 . Pick out tha conventional source of energy:
(a) Wind anergy
(c) Tidal energy
( b ) Coal energy
( d ) Bio mass energy
Q 41.
J ho d ,* *
> « of groceries while
stand ing still talking to a1 frien
situa
d.
tions
A car
simi
Is statio
lar ?
nary with Its

n# runnlng from the stand point of work, how

. thes e
are tw 0
10 . •
Escape velocity of body depends upon the
.
Am n t> th casts
(a) Mass of tha planet work done Is ura .
( b ) N iss oft u body °
Reason;
11 .
(c) Velocity of the plant
KWh Is tha unit oft
( d ) None
p9rson and the car both are at rest So the .
displacement .
is ggrft ( > •« •* d •0)

(a) Mas! Work done f dcosO

( b) Work
(c) Power P(o) co 8
. (d) Time W • *
11 . •
Which one ll non-renev > energy tot 7
*
W 0 •
(a) Wind
( b) Tides
So f work don becomes zero
*
.
(c) Uranium
( d ) All of these

r
 v .
\

Chapter 4 [u; :
V
*-
1 1
|S

158 n
PHYSICS - XI (Subjective)
Q. 4 2 Calculate the work done
vertical height of 10 m ?
In kilo joules in lifting a mass of 10 kg ( at a Ste 3 dV Vel
city ) ° thf|
gchola i

Q -
. 4 6 A
^
ball of mass m is held at a height h, above a
table The * hi 3 3 he Bht
159

(Mtn 2006- 2009, Lhr 2006, Fsd 2006, D.G .Khan 2006, Bwp 2007-2008 0ne student
says that the ball has potential enerev mgb * * *T ab
^
0Ve he fl 0r
‘ it is mg (h," * h,) Who
° '

Ans. Data : m = 10 kg
LhrJo
° 9,Grw °
correct ?
B¥ me
'' bUt* another saVs that
h
*
h = iom goth of them are correct.
Ans-
W (kJ ) = ? Reason
h, + h,
Calculation: As the work done is equal to increase in its P.E. So, Since P.E always measured with respect to some
** reference h,
point. Therefore , we can say that first student has measured P .E
W = mgh /

with respect to table top ( mgh,) while the second student has
W = 10 x 9.8 x 10 , n,
measured P.E with respect to floor = mg (h + h 2 )
W = 980 i \ /

980 rocket re-enters the atmosphere, its nose cone becomes very hot. Where does this heat
W kJ Q.4.7 When a
1000 energy come from?
Result : W = 0.980 kJ { Grw 200 j 2009, Mtn 2004- 2009, Lhr 2005- 2006, D.G.Khan 2005, Bwp 2004, Lhr 2010- 2011)

Ans. Source of heat energy

Q . 4.3 A force F acts through a distance L. the force is then increased to 3 F, and then acts through a fur When the socket re - enters the atmosphere, then some of its kinetic energy is used in doing work
%
distance of 2 L draw the work diagram to scale. against friction with dust particles and air, which is converted into heat. Due to this heat energy, its
Ans. Force displacement graph : nose cone becomes very hot.
3 F.
As 2 53 jnce' the force displacement graph is equal to the
t
*

work Pone by the body. So 2F- Q.4.8 What sort of energy is in the following:
F (a) compressed spring.
W = (F)(1) (3F )(2L)
* F - (b ) water in a high dam.
W = FI + 6FL
W = 7FI O L 2L 3L
( c) A moving car . ( Sgd 2003, Mtn 2004, Rwp 2005, Bwp 2007, Lhr 2009 )
d 4ns. : A compressed spring has elastic potential energy .
Q . 4.4 in which c a s e i s more work done ? When a 50 kg bag of books is lifted through 50 cm, or when * ? b ) Water in the high dam has gravitational potential energy .
*2"
kg crate is pushed through 2m across the floor with a force of 50 N ? (
I Lhr 2010 c ) A moving car has kinetic energy .
•4.9 A girl drops a cup from a certain height, which breaks Into pieces. What energy
changes are
^
Ans.
Case !:
Dato:
Case II:
Data:
i involved ?
Ans. Energy changes
(6^200 2006)
^
its K .E. When it
. A cup thrown from certain height losses its gravitational potential energy and gam
m = 50 kg
h= 50cm = 0.5 m
ma = 50 kg
d = 2m strikes the ground then a part of this kinetic energy is used to break the cup and rest of he gy.
W, = ? F = 50 N converts into;
Calculation : W2 = ? ( ) Sound energy
'
W, - m.gh
=5 0x9.8 x
Calculation :
W2 = FG
•*
( ) K .E of moving
( iii ) Heat
pieces
0.5 energy.
= 245 J = ( 50 ) ( 2 ) a green house window . Ust the
10 A boy uses a catapult to thrown a stone which accidentally smashes
= 100 J
Result:
Possible energy changes? (GrwWi)
More wcr < s done in COSK
Am, p<
Mlble Energy changes:
Q 4 5 An object has 1 J of potential energy . Explain what does It mean ?
,Ihe f0 0win8 enerev chan eS 0CCUf
" .
.
H
( Lhr 2004 , Sgd 2005, Mtn 2005, Fader;! 005 , Mli * 2006, Grw 2005- 2009, Bwp 2008
Ans. We know that energy is defined as the ability of a body to do work So an object has
, Grw 20
one \ ° * ' th
When the boy throws the stone
fha ll5tic potential
energy
s
change
#d t0 freak
* Into
the window into pieces .
. c ene

^*
of Kln
potential energy means that tr body has r paclty to do a work of one joule. (111)
When stone hits the window , » P
*
Rest of the energy converted Into txaLSBUW
(UwWo j

*
 k

160 Chapter [w - XI (Subjective)

^
0
li <v PHYSICS 161

Solved Examples velocity of brick

Initial height = V| =0
= h| = 5 m
m Initialheight = h 2 = 3m
A force F acting on an object varies with distance x as shown in Fig. 4.7. Final
Calculate th C
by the force as the object moves from x = 0 to x = 6 m .
Given Data :
| v*rkJ
To
Velocity at height 3 m above ihc ground = v2 > -
:
A force acting on an object varies with distance x as shown in Fig. Calculation Loss of P.E = Gain in K.E.
To Find: l
Work done W ?
mg(h|-h 2) = v; - v;
Calculation: Putting values, we gel
Total work done total area under the curve
= area of rectangle + area of triangle
= ( 4 m x 5N ) +
= 20 Nm + 5 Nm
= 25 Nm
^ ( 2m x 5N )

= 25J
fflLilJFkfrt
A 70 kg man runs up a long flight of stairs in 4 s. The vertical height of the stairs is 4.5 m. calculi
Exercise Problems " downward from the
a 40 N force directed at an angle of 20
its power output in watts . 4.1 A man pushes
horizontal.
a lawn mower with
Find the work done by the man as he cuts a strip of grass 20 m long .
Given Data :
Mass of the man = m =» 70 kg Given Data :
Time taken * t = 4 see . Applied force = F = 40 N
Height of the stairs K h 4.5 m Angle = 0 = 20°
To Find : Length of strip of grass = d = 20m
Power output « P ? To find :
Calculation : Work donc= W= ?
As power ** P =
—
W
t
Calculation:

or .msH
P
t
—
work = W F . d -FdcosO
W = FdcosO
Putting values, we get Putting the values, we get
p

P*
- 70 x 9.8 x 4.5

3087
20
W =40 * * cos
W =40* 20 >< 0.93
20°

4 W =751.68J

Or
P « 771.5 watt
-
p 7.7 x 10? watt ^
W T 5 * K)
5 kg ^ vertically at a constant speed under the influence of HiM

^
) falb
A ra »n drop (/H 10 '

= * n faUing br0U8b 10#m’ mUCh "

3 35
, - , “j
.
A brick of mass 2.0 kg * Iroj ped fron j a rest position 5.0 m above the ground What i* ( ,
lvcn
! ,r
ric ° fgnvity and friC i0 ln

L
at a height of 3.0 m above . ground ? D ata:
Given Data :
Mass of brick = m « 2 kg
Mass of rain drop = m * 3.35 x 10
^
m
 k

162 Cha pter 4 [ w „ - XI (Subjective)

PHYSICS 163

To find :
Height h 100 m
Work done by gravity *» Wg ?
SeboJ
^ W2 -mg. h cos 0° =mgh
work done lor 3 brick when place on lo the two hri
( a ) work done by friction Wf ?
( nlculution : ,
W =mg.( 2 h ) cos 0" =2mgh 'imjjh
* • Bmqli
F. h
( a ): - Work done by gravity - Wg
Wg FhcosO -
As gravitational force is along the displacement, therefore angle between mg and h is 0ft
Similarly
W 4 - 3 mgh
W 3 = 4 mgh
7 m / jh
flmgh
5mgh

Wg * mghCosO° 4 mqh
So
Wg mgh --
x ‘5 X
Wg 3.35 10 9.8 * 100
W 6 = 5 mgh
W 7 = 6 mgh
3iorjh
2mtjh
1 mgh
Wg = 3283 x 10‘* W 8 = 7 mgh o
Wo * 8 mgh
Wg = 0.0328 J B 9 mgl
Wio '

( b) : - Work done by friction = Wf = F. h Toial work done is

W,r = f hcosG W = W, + W2 + W3 W4 + W5 + W6 + W7 + Wt + W9 + W10
•

As friction is opposite to displacement, therefore angle between frictional force and h is 180°. mgh + 5 mgh + 6 mgh + 7 mgh + 8 mgh + 9 mgh
W = 0 + mgh + 2 mgh + 3 mgh + 4

So Wf =fhcosl 80° ( c o s 180° = - 1 ) W = 45mgh

Wf =-fh Putting values, we get
As the drop is falling at constant speed so f =W=mg W = 45 x 1.5 x 9.8 x 0.06
Wf = -mgh W = 39.69
Putting values, we get W = 4Qj (approximately)
5x
kmh broug ht to rest in 60 metre s. Find the avera ge
Wf = -3.35 x 10 9.8 x 100
'

bl A car of mass 800 kg traveling at 54 is

origi nal kineti c energ y .
.
retarding force on the car What has happened
to
Wf = -0.0328J Given Data :
Mas s of car = m = 800 kg
requ ired to 54 x 1000 - 15 m/s
4.3 Ten bricks, each 6.0 cm thick and mass 1.5 kg, lie flat on a table. How much work is Initial velocity = V , =54 km/ h =
stack them one on the top of another? 60 x 60
Given Data : Final velocity = v , =0
Mass of each brick - m - 1.5k g Distance covered = d = 60 m
find ;
Height of each brick = h = 6cm - 0.06 /rc
0) Average retard ing force — —
F .
.
To find:
Number of brick = n = 10
,
Ca c» l» tion:
( ii) What happened to origi nal KkE = ?

prin cipl e .
Work req uired to stack them one on the to; of another = W=? 0) As according to work -ener gy
i
kulation :
Fd = —2 mv 2
korx wi. : be done on (he fiut bn . 'yr ± fiat on
table ( i .e W, =0) . When we place other bric ks <>
nj Or Fd =
one. work is done in the form of V . accordin . o their height. Hence we must add all these
o
k ’ gel the total work done in term s or P. E . 7 us work done for 204 bnck when place on to Puttimg values, we get
 k

1 S4
£!S!E!2L1 pHVSlCS XI ( Subjecti « )
*
•

K
l 1M
Or FfbO) ; V 800(0 ( l > V )
* Height ol the lank /7 ] 0/77
l imc taken - t 20 min l 2(X)
CHU
. -too ^ v :: M *cc
400 x 225 Density ol water p 1000
Fs -
60
O: F = - 1500N
foHo^ U) Increase in P E .

Power ddi r©

^
ypump
(b)

(ii >
Negative sign shows that it is retarding force.
As the velocity of the car is decreasing so its kinetic energy also de #:
^ f ?

due to frictional force

* creases and beconte zero
*
Calculation mass
densit
4.5 A 1000 kg automobile at the top of an incline lOmetre high
and 100 m long is released and Or
do« n the hill W hat is its speed at the bottom of the incline if the averag rolh
e retarding force d ue to
friction is 4S0 N ?
Gisen Data: OOx 1000
Mass of automobile = m = 1000 kg 100000 kg
Height of incline = h= 10m ncrease in P. E .= mgh
Length of incline = s = 100m Increase in P.E .= 100000 ^ 9.8 ^ 10
Average retarding force = f= 480 N [Increase in P.E .= 9.8 x 1 O^ J
To find:
Final speed of automobile at bottom of incline = v - ? (C ) Power delivered by pump -
Calculations: p= wo rk
.As time
Using the relation loss of P . E = gain in K .E - work done against friction
2 t
mgh = mv + fd
p_ 9.8 * 10*
1 2 1200
mgh - fd = — mv
P= 8166.6
Putting val ues , we get
P = 8.16 ^ 103 watt
1000 x 9.8 x 10 - 480 * 100 = - xlOOOv 2
Or P = 8.2kW
2 A force ( thrust )of 400 N is required to overcome road friction and air resistan ce in pro pel ling an
98000 - 48000 = 500 v2

or
50000 500 v2
v2
-- 50000
automobile at 8 « kmh ' . What power (KW) must
Given data:
Force ( thrust ) aF = 400 N
' the engiinc
ne develop ?

500
/ - i 00 Velocity of engine * v = 80 km /h 80 * 10
x 60
22. 22 m s
60
°° X

’
:
>
or 0 m* Wind;
4A IWm ’ vf water * patmptd Irum a rmrvoir nil« a lank 10 m higher than the rtMTVCtf t , n Pfrwcir P ?
/f #f water « ) M# k% m find
*
Mutation:
kI c^r<» IPM±
the tfttrove
0M pvtre? 'J
in

‘m
VV
e4 by t uurn *
A *, f , , r i
A%
Or
*fid veloc
p F.v
P (• v to* 0
ity are
I

in the
»

u,m* dir ccU OO

/ v an*
*
'
wa & /
•
*
' ' , /n p i vcos <r

m « a
*
•
 Ikf

• «
_
Ch* pt » r 4 [ \ v „
s
pHVSICS XI ( Subjective )
& 16 7
> ' j. ,. Ov •
* V Tl
^-m' 2i" in
? I (i! diver ai h » v
SfK*
? SSSO watt ulu « ,
i0, s:
Or ? * $ > > ' K>’ watt
(
^ Cium ol K I .. = loss of p . E. r,g air friction )

4.1
Or P = P|VS
How large a force us required to accelerate an
jmv - smg (h, - h ,j

electron ( m " v - =2g( h , -l

» 9. M
0 kg )

^-
’
2.9\ iO ms through a distance of 5.0 cm? from W to « Or
sPccd 0|
Given data: Pulling vulucs we gel.
Mass of an dcctroa = m = 9 i MO"" kg = 2
v 2x9.8( 10 5)
Initial velocity * v = 0 v = 19.6x 5
2

,
Final \ velocity * \ , « » lQ
2 m/s vliar
Distance = d = Scm - Q 05 m v =9.9m/s
To find:
4, 10 A child starts from rest at the top of a slide of height 4.0 m.
Force required *= F = ? (a ) What is his speed at the bottom if the slide is frictionless ?
Calculation: ( b ) If he reaches the bottom , with a speed of 6ms 1 , what percentage of his total energy at the top
'

As work energy principle is • of the slide is lost as a result of friction ?

Work done = change in the K . E . of the object Given Data :

Fd =— 1
mv 2
—1 1

mv 2
Initial velocity = v , = 0
Height h = 4 m
To find :
=
=—
Fd 1 2
mv i As v , =0 (a ) speed of child at the bottom if slide is frictionlcss = v = ?
2
( b)
Putting values, we gel °k age of total energy lost = ?
-i
F 0.05= if velocity at bottom is \ - 6ms
^—
x x 9.1 x 31
*
lO
'
x ( 2 x I 07 ) 2 Caliuluti,ms:
1- ' 0.05- x 9.1 x 10“ JI x 4 x 10M
^ 0r child = v = ?
sPced of
2 ^ frictionlcss system
I- ^ 0.05- 18.2 * 10 17 Gain of K . E = loss of P E . .

F . IHXIO
0.05
1
I :
- mv = mgh

it - 3.6 x ) 0 IS
N[ v * = 2gh
4.9 A diver weighing 750 N dives Ijjjjj ihr
V = yfiP h .
from a bo .* rd 10 m above the surface of » pool of
conservation of mechanical energy r>utti n 8 values , wc gel
to find bin peed at H point 5.0 m above the water
neglecting air friction .
Given Data : V
-
= /2 x 9.8 x 4
Weight of ihc diver mr 750 N
Height of a point above ti m I
hi Him . -
v V7M
-
v * 8 8m/s ,

I ( eight of . i point above «8

* , |0 f h
the •urfae t • h '

5m Ol Energy « ?
168
Chapter 4
In the presence of friction PHY SICS - XI (Subjective)
"S! ScboJiLf . 1
/
Speed = v = 6m/s
P. E. at the top = mgh
= m x 9.8 x 4 Chapter
= 39.2 m
K . E. i
the bottom
at = — mv'
2
' CIRCULAR MOTIOI
I
2
= x
2 m (6)
*
| Learning Objectives
^
i
= 2 x m x 36

= 18
Loss of energy = 39.2m - 18m 1. Describe a r motion
s 21.2m
2. Define angular displacement, angular velocity and angular acceleration.
% loss of energy Loss of energy Define radian and convert an angle from radian measure to degree and vice versa.
x |(X > 3.
Total Energy
4 . Use the equation S = r 0 and v = rw.
% loss of energy 21.2m
” x 100 5. Descri : • qualitatively motion in curved path due to a perpendicular force and under stand tf
39.2m centripetal acceleration in case of uniform motion in a circle.
= 54% . ive the equation ac =ro = vVr and Fc = mco r = mvJ/r.
2 2

‘ -e
Understand and describe moment of Inertia of a body.
9. Understand the concept of angular momentum.
9. Describe examples of conservation of angular momentum.
Get Scholar Series books 10
- Understand and express rotational kinetic energy of a disc and a hoop on an Inclined plane.
11 . Describe the motion of artificial satellites.
Physics 12* Understand that how and why artificial gravity Is produced.
15, Understand that the objects In satellite appear to be weightless.
Chemistry 1
^ *
Calculate the radius of geo statlonary orbits and orbital velocity of satellites .
lu *

Biolog Dwcrlbe th
* Ntwton »nd
' j Elnst«in' s views about gravity.

Mathematics
(Subjective .& Jt ’ective)
170

3t
Is
SI
Chapter No. 5

It
£
|&
'
> i
! If
° I a VI
1
88
(
I
Chapta 8
tn
\ Mlt&L

0 f( U
I IK
motion
temple*

2)
3
4)
r

A
-^ ,
Moti
*

0 lon
ths

sate
) Motion
a
pHV SIC S

on
) an

llite
o
Motion
1
objec
( lira Unn of I

1) A stone
whirl
In
ed
t

aroun
orbits
elect
of CD '
ron
s.
d
aroun
in
d
atom
tin
s
/
T /,r
* ,. ^
- ^
f
— ——
X I fSub jrf i » v »

.
[
4
be body umtihuoutly change
^

in u urtulur path y« 011 ( A

0f
\
**
*
I

5) Motion of circular saw blod #

6) Motion of ceiling fan

i«
I3
Q.1
7) Motion of merry go round etc
^^
Define and explain angular displacement . Show that 1 radian =57.3°
-
* » inoi

<2
* l </i
ca
^ —0 §
2 co
. 2
< Angular Displaceme nt *
.2 «»
fk
% C
O
2
Tltc angle subtended at the center of a circle by a body moving along the
circumference in a given time is called angular displacement It is denoted by 6. .
,
Iz
5 1(c
Explanation

£u n
O cd

u If
^ a
“ a5
E
IItl 1
K o
O
u
ill
5

Li
M

3 O
r
• ?

e
O
E w HUM
•
&o
2
2
5 Q
< E

—o
E
c
E
plane of circle due to motion of the pa
through the center of the circle, which is pe p
while OP is rotating.
Suppose at any instant t the position of OP, ma - S
' ^ e
,
tQ the p|ane

,
Q wjth x.axis. After
of circle

f 2 Fa. some time t + A t its position be 0P 2 making an \ x.axis. Thus the

.
•

U
V LU —S| 8 o =1«
E Lx
c
3

* angular displacement can be defined as t e ang e & (JfQp during time interval Degree
§|
tf IS 3 4. For very small
values ofAO the angu
, lar displ accm cn ^ vector quan tity. In one complete rotation, a

I
t
is s s a s S .s %h Convention rotating object subtends an
1
.
*
2 3 c
o n = cu #
For anticlockwise while
.
angle of 360 degree If the
v w> o
u
«o 5 w
o .— for clock
-
rotation of OP, the angu ar
wise rotation the angular displacemen
Aun \ aceme nt AO
negative.
Is positiv e circular path 1$ divided into
360 equal parts then the
i1
i
£ E i 1 1 T Direction of Angular Displacement ,
angle subtended by each

Bo
t3 .
rr g order to determine the direction of angular displacement we use the ‘right
fond rule'
/
part at the center of the
circle is equal to one
degree.
JS ' a -g t- Revolution
o
i! " 3
2 g, S I
. ' cd
gs;
A complete round trip
the body elon|
'
the

Ig 3 Uni
circumference of the circle

^
Is called one revolution
& Jj Radian
1 rhe S|unit of subt ende d by an arc
* ^
le°cente ^ , ,
drC e Whose ength
,
a gular displacement Is radia
15
n
eQU
. It
dl
Is
t0
the
the
angle
r dluS
*of Clrde ‘
It Is the angle subtended by
an ere at the center of the

,rnenS|0nsS °are
n
dr uni tj degrees and revolution. lar
Angu displa ceme nt has no circle whose length 11 equal
to the redlus of circle.
172
Chapter 5 [Q
\n
pHYSiCS - XI (Subjective)
Relation between linear displacement and angular dis pia cem cnt
Suppose S is the length of the circle of radius r which
^ w

explain the angular acceleration?

173

makes an angle '9’ at the center of the circle. Then in

terms of radian, it can be expressed as
.
0
Len gth of arc
(rad ) Singular A cc el er at io n , „ . .
Radius of circle rate cha
of nge of anKU ar called uIar mccler ation.
Angular Acceleration
A S, .
9 = - f rad) Average on dm ele ctr
- we switch velocity and c uic fan,hp
r
angular „ Wlnal a velocity
city ’ goes creasing, if o>,
' , ,
Or
S= r0 thtimtlal Then the average an ~~acceleration iring - at time t and t
actively . tl trti Is can be
.jJ
This is the relation between linear displacement fined as the rat io of ( ige in ulur velocity to the total time
and angular displacement
Relation between radian and degree Do You Kno FOR YOUR
In one complete revolution the
linear distance covered by a particle is equal
to
* INFORMATION
the circumference of the circle i . e ., S « When angular velocity of
2 nr and the angle in radian
would be
s 2r the body Is Increasing then
a
0= —r= * = 2n radian lingular acceleration k along

So. 27t radian

r
360°
a 1 revolution
Instantaneous angul . i
the direction of angular
velocity and if angular

360° jthi Instantjneous angu cderation can be defined as the limiting value of velocity k decreasing then
Or 1 rad 'd' k opposite to the
* “ at ( he lino* jn / ervo 1 , \J upproai he \ to zero, Is called Instantaneous angular direction of angular
2n
As re fftttftumitafi
velocity .
Or
360° ( deration
1 rad • angle e. r; lays out a anpe
2 x 3.14 Au>
lim —

— -— — —
dctenoeS * So a
Or * c
Al

Q.2
iradian = 57.30

Define and explain the term angular velocity

rr,:„
MUtbn * ii w
*“ 01 Axis of Rotation
. . rolling
All portlcN" of 1

. body move. In circles flic

. * ,

, line joining the ront/c * of .

Angular Velocity
UMI ri n ulM acceleration is ud / tec'. 1» 18
,
M fhoie Circles k called axis of
rotation.
TORYOU* |04 Derive
the relation between enguler and ln**r ve|ocl lc,
Time rate of change of angular displacement Is called as
Suppose A9 Is the angular displacement during
angular velocityt
the time At . So the average INFORMIX OR '
angular velocity can be expressed as, Show that v •ru)
AO ,
w„ m
—At * tr »’iM
same «Ml# >< *
u
"r #*
pf ,
The Instantaneous angular velocity can be de
fined as the limn value of »*
* * ;
, r , , be tw
ta«lon
ee n An gu l»r n<» U n, ,r
^ *
•
AO/ At as the time Interval At , following the time t , approachr * Co n
. covers the lc
*r »r
,
ng ul»r ci5 “ ’
So, •llm
AO
—
to lets
*
,
cJnpl « r^nT
i
> ln
|
' id
r
bod y routing »boul
* *
* * » »i«W body »t P,rp,nd <jl»t»r c ' r°*
p #
with
Styveujlocity v. A, the «1» of « •« |» flrt'd* thvl* direction of ar'8uU'r
§

Direction
•
* » -* At
always ^ ' * “ ln" .
remains the sarne. o
Angular velocity is a vector quantity. Its direction Is along the Mg
of rotation and
West Point p mo thf0u h 9 Stance RiRj«AS In time At dur ing Its cir cular
can be determine by right hand rule. lf f#fer§
n
*
ne ,,** *
9n angular
^
dis pla ce me nt AO during tim e Int erv al
Unit
The SI unit of angular velocity Is red/ sec . It is giso measured in
Th
* * c#n ^ Fla 3.4 («)
revoiutlon / min
AS •rAO
and degrf? e / sec . The dimension of mgular velocity ls T [ 'J
, '

""'• *bo s d« by ,
At
*
 *
174

So , PHYSICS - XI (Subjective)
AS AO
0oUf 175
-— * = r - - replaced with 0, to and u respectively
At At a have been . Thus
nd
Applying limit \ t v o
- * ‘ tions for linea r motion
AS AO
*
Iim
» .0 At
lim r
*• At o.
Vf rVj + at
s B v , t + J4 at
2

.lun
. As AO
A > > At
r Inn
A« .. fa 2aS = vf
2
* ,
v
2

°
Or K/ » rt »J *^i Equa tion for angu lar motion
In vector form v to x r (l)
f =0 >|+Ut
I or limit At > 0 the length of the arc P,P becomes very
2 small and its direction • 0= o)|t +Yi ut
2

represents the direction of the circle at point P , .

Thus the direction of velocity v
at any point P Is always tangent to the circular path
. So the linear velocity at 2(i0 = 0)f - (0 '
2
,
point P Is called tangential velocity.
’ Q5 Derive the relation between linear and angular acceleration.
Equation of angu lar motio only if
^
axis of rotation is fixed. In this case all
tho angular vectors have the same direction. So they can be treated as scalars.
Define and explain he centripetal force and derive the relation for It ?
Q. 7
Relation between Linear and Angular Acceleration
As the reference line OP Is rotating with angular accelerations . The point P
also has a Centripetal Force
linear or tangential acceleration. As we know ,
I he fore which bends the normally straight path of a particle into circular
r A (u
Dividing both sides by At
Av
path is culled centripetalforce .
OR
AV A O) o A force which compels a body lo move In a circular path Is called centripetal
At At force
On both sides, we have Explanation
Applying limit as At -> 0 Consider a body attached with a string moving In a circular path. If the string is
tapped (broken ) then
It would not continue to move In circle. Observation
So , lim
At
*0
AV
- -
- lim r —
*1 " * 0 A t
[howi* If the string snaps, and when ball Is at A then It will follow the straight
P«h AB . So In the absence of some force which pull It toward the center of
7 *
lim
Av
AI 0 At
*
* —
r lim
•i « A t . |rclMht ball will not continue to move along circular path. It will move along
“ >•ten8 nt at that point.
Or ejjg ,*
*lmp il of centripetal force:
In vector form 0 “ «x r
Where a Is the tangential acceleration j
; Forc« acting on electrons In fixed orbits around the nucleus
PorCQ acting on artificial and natural satellites.
,

Note:- kj
Forc acting on earth around the sun.
Advantage of rotational motion over translational motion * ,
^
On a rotating rigid body , the points at different distances have the same angular or c ntrlp «tal acceleration end cen trip etal force
displacement , angular speed and angular acceleration. While tf cy have different
I *
linear displacement, velocity and acceleration.

Q. 6 How can we write the equations of rm n In case «. ngular motion? AV

a •— .(1)
At

Equation of Angular Motion

feqUlred bV par ° .vff
!‘CletlT. s7
*
V
° nc.A !
tth » pe«d of the

tquetion of angular motion are slmllai thos* » r> linear motion except that S, v
 t. * Jt, »
-v '
if
;- v _ • > • m _ .*

rm aW; i

pHYSICS \ I (Subjective)
si I
111 * JJ
'" 177
JA * -
sJ|0n for centripetal forte
V
W F , ma ,
*
~v>
- 3 (;r recsr- es
Att
As

And ac
v
—
»
&
& (% jM
i=
>
A*
v
r

Fc = r
mv
. k. ^‘ Hi .
WfZlSZJZj&L. * w
T*** -

Or i= v U) so ^AiS ter
$
measurements, this equation b
'
J-- •;•
-
•< 5f 5 ;
^ %r v. 'j.. v. , •.
v
\o ,\t we : 3 «. 3 triofrg e A?QR such that
m angular
is parallel and equal to v and PR is f''
v 'JtrKQtfa' hr *
frrV /
So, *
,
pa .-ai 3 and equal to v , As radius of the circle is perpendicular to its tangent, so mr w
2 ..2 TfJIVft7 ri
cifo ^
to# ' ji DHftripaiJ
7r ( v = ro) ^ ir
force is provifcrf fort of
v , and v , are perpendicular to OA and CB respectively . So the angle ZAOB is L *
friction rt oea vptaid of i car
'

Fc = mrb)1
,

equa ; to the angle <QPR. is .ncrasod a’ , a . . ;t n

Or
/
* jrn

frictional force is
*
nett

Moreover | v , | = | v . | = v and OA = OB ( radii of same circle )

* sufTiciem provide
to
2
Point to ponder Unit of centripetal force is Newton and dimensions are MLT ] .
[ - . Tncrefort .
oenir.petal fore.
5o rrorn isoscsies triangles GAB and PQR , we can write , the cer will ino . :
- awa> from
Q.8 Define and explain the moment of inertia? the trad. To avoid tie side -
QR AB slip, the outer edge of the road
m
_
~~
PR OB is raised through some angle,
I called the angle of me:motion.
Av AB The speed of 'he car al the
Or (3 ) Moment of Inertia ( Rotational Inertia )
v r
when At— »0, point ‘B ’ is very close to ' A', then length of arc AB nearly equal line
Moment of inertia of a particle is defined as the product of mass of particle and
turn

where <p
is
is angle
v = rgtan
^ ^
of
nttmtaitla
You may feel scared ai the loptf
square of its perpendicular distance from (pivot) the axis of rotation.
AB . i. e. AB= S inclination or banking.
roller coaster ride In the :3fc It is denoted by I and is given by
Equation ( 3 ) becomes, butyou never fall down even ^ 2
I = mr
Av S
You clo not fall out of your Explanation
v r go ups (3:
seat when you ' Consider a mass attached massless rod which can rotate about a
to a
down on a roller coaster A force F acts on
Or AV = S— ( 4) ; many forces on frictionless pivot 0. Let the system be in horizont al plane.
because 0
r the mass perpendicular to the rod . So,
tlu in going loop on a roller
centrifuga l »
Putting this value in equation ( 2), we get coaster the
,
*
force
F='ma Ji)
a = v—
Sv centripetal
of drag,
forces
gravity
the
.
cenirifiig
» This force rotates the mass m about 0. As the angular acceleration a can be
expressed as
rS friction. Due to
2 force, your body is prcSS
v with the outer rim.
a =ra
a= —r (5 )
equation (1) becomes,
Where a is the Instantaneous acceleration, as this acceleration is caused by F= mra (2 )
centripetal force , so it is called centripetal acceleration ac. Multiplying both sides by r
Direction of acceleration rF = mr a
2
Two cyhnoof
Since PQ is perpen dicular to OA and PR Is pi pendicular OB. So QR is parallel Since rF represents the torque. one twin iw i *

—
the orea!« ru
the perpen dicular bisector of AB . As accelera tion Is parallel to Av when AB -y Equation (3 ) becomes
to

- -
centrip etal acceler ation is along the radius , towards the DO \ Ol KNOW
,
0 So directio n of center
Here F is
T = mr x
2
(
. u , mrJ The quantity
mr
:
is known as Moment at uwrtl * rrpiv .
of the circle . So, pl 3 y$ in linear ihe icndeucy to maintato . »1«

The instantaneous acceler

circle is directed towards
ation
the
of an
center
object
nf the
traveling with uniform speed in a
circle and Is called centripetal r * JS SS i «
„ « «W
,tar mkram /
2
. “ ' state of rot nr ttiitc of
uniform angular motion

acceleration . of centripe tal

I = mr
centripetal force is in the directio n acceler ation .
The direction of

m J
-1
17$

Dependence of moment of inertia PHYSICS - XI (Subjective)

Ns shows that moment of inertia depends upon the mass m and the square of lar’s 179
nerpe^ o ,cu ar distance from axis of rotation r. Practically, it also depends upon
Ifine angular momentum? How can we relatP jt with moment of inertia ?
d stributton of mass and position of axis of rotation.
Moment of inertia of a rigid body
^ ( Moment of linear momentum)
Vo shy the bod es have non-uniform mass distribution. Consider a rigid body rMomentum
ade duCt of position sector r with rcsrfg to axis
^ up of n '
small pieces of masses m^ ma at distance rvr 2 from axis - cross-pr° angular momentum. of rotation and linear momentum p of a rotating
of rotation O
\cU
' caUed
*
.
prt OR

• m
or HOOQ
4 Article Is sa
changes
dt 0 h
*
ve
relative
anSu
to °
that reference axis
^
ar momentum about a reference axis
.
if it moves in such a way that Us angular
^ n
mi
r 9
rl
!• MP
* Consider**
a body of mass m moving with velocity v and linear momentum P
origin 0 Then its angular momentum can be expressed as
m4 restive to
( c)
—
'•
m2
V | L - r 'P
m4
O at that instant with respect to origin.
position vector
Where r is the
(a) (b ) -
Soi U disc or cjfeidr
The magnitude of
-•
L is given by 5.10
S<. rccse the ood\ be rotating
vagr tude o torque acting o rrv
'
angu ar acceleration a So .
- M
: _

^
L = r p sin0
= r (mv) sinG

— ass
= r%r ? aa.
<d)
!
2r ^ L = mrvsinG
Were 6 s the angJe between r andP .
( since p = mv)

secorc

=or Ttf -ass

= nva'a . Direction
The Sre
- von of angular momentum is perpendicular to the plane containing r

r i' ,t can be determined by right hand ru e.

l unit
. .

.
r
ie total 3 g ver by
* *
S vr of angular momentum is kgm /sec or J sec and dimensions
’are [ML‘1
- J-
= '
~ t

=
re ccrTr s 'i ' >s
*
-r - -VaV ? —
r- e asses state ^ - argL, ar acceeratioc e .
Show that kgmVsec
R- H.S = j sec
^ Jsj
= Nms ( v J = 1 Km)
ou = a> * = au = a fsayj
X
- Y
5
* IVA
1
'V* ) a
, m
.ms ( . 1 Nm = 1 kg
^
- far
M

-
Z nnt x V— t* I Or t
r

-
d * -
err.ajr i - car » /yesMd K . .

. * *-
« LM.S

» W - rvnr•si :I ** r momentum of a particle moving in a

»•» »«
circle

*”
angular retooiyco

- fl/ 5f
fT at pi ft -he c * s s* >d
«T«
—
** h sp
^ g *** *
*e *
n r and tangential
* w
velocity

J
L * mrvs4n90 * 1 0 * 9^
v I
* **
JDtM L •mrv(1)
n
**l (A$ v * f »1
if '
* r - r ( fto)
4
l - rr J
«> f $Uf
*
C3.
 180

Another definition of angular momentum

The product of moment of inertia and angular velocity of a rotating body Is called angular refine and explain the law of conservation of angular
momentum?
Angular momentum of a rigid body
Consider a symmetrical rigid body rotating about a fixed axis through center of mass f Con ser vati on of Angu lar Momentum
particle of the rigid body rotates about the same axis in a circle with same
as shown
in f ° , torque acts
n eternal constant.
on a system then the total angular
momentum of the
momentum of a particle of mass m, particle,
angular velocity
'oj'
^ Remains,
°
totaj = L + L 2+
= constant
L
’
mr
'’
(
° nUop ^
gxp
° lalJatl
^^
For second mass nd»(
6C
jaW 0 f conservation of angular momentum is if a single
apparent
L2 = m2r 22 G) The e .|nning body changes its moment of inertia. For example a diver
For nth mass
isolate !
f the board with a small angular velocity, Upon lifting off from the
U = mnrnJca pUShf
b ard' the diver ’ s legs and arms are fully extended . So the diver has a large
The total angular momentum can be expressed as, ° of inertia '1' about this axis. But when the diver ' s legs and arms are in Rg. 5.13

L = L, + L 2 + L3 + + Ln closedTuck position, Mmoment of inertia reduces to I, . | A man diving from a diving board.

L = nv o) + m2r22 G)
^
2
. .+ mnrn co
According to law of conservation of angular momentum .
L=( nv
^ co + m 2 r 22 . 2

f "
+ mnrn ) co Wliy does the coast
syslom slow down as* ** > , Li - 8
hci), = l 2 w 2
L=
V
Xm
1=1
. r‘
“
2
[ ••
•
i=l
into the beaker? Or
So diver must spin faster for small value of mome nt of inertia to conserve

EXPLANATION: angular momentum .

So, L = I co When water drips in;:1
beaker, the mass oh
Where I is moment of inertia of the rigid body about axis of rotation.
contents in (he bolt
increases which inert*
There are two types of angular momentum
the moment of biertiifc
Spin angular momentum to increase in mow"
Angular momentum of a spinning body (i.e., rotating about its own axis ) is called
inertia , the angular w*
decreases according to >
spin angular momentum ( Ls ) law of cons ervat ion 1
momentum .
Orbital angular momentum
Angular momentum of a body orbiting in a circular path is called orbital angular momentum (U)
So the total angular momeptum of a body is equal to the sum of its spin and orbital angular momentum
- This enables the diver to take extra some rsaul ts. The direct ion of angula r
which remai ns fixed . The axis of rotation
momentum is along the axis of rotation it
its orientation unless an extern al torque cause s to
of an object will not chang e
no sizea ble exter nal torque act on
do so. Earth rotates about the sun experiences
it, so Earth' s axis of rotation remains fixed .
Q.11 Define rotational Kinetic Energy and show
that (K.E )rot = % ICO Also 2
.
write down its practical use.
Rotational Kinetic Energy
about an axis is called
The energy possessed by the body due to its rotation
rotational kinetic energy .
Expression for rotational K.E.
cons tant velocity
axis with
Suppose the body is spinning or
to • In order to find the total K. WtaWJwe
consider that it Is
composed of small pieces of masses 2

lf mass r0 3
W has distance Vi * frorn 3X15 0
K * E. of
mass m, is given by
1
(K .E,) = mw“,
BY Putting v, = r,ro, we get rotational K.E
«1.11*
2
(K.E,)/trt - ” m,(r ,c«>)
Point object :
When the orbit al radiu s is larger as cor . p . red to the size of the body, the body may br* considerrt *
object
?
 182

1
K-E. * -
- = m#iV “

S miiarty (CE = X 'r» ar 22 0‘

^ = X m*r, » 2
e
in
putting ' 2 2 Intrusting Information
Hence nxatona < E of the w~>oie body is p £ = Xmv + X mv
< E -* = CX r - r / o3 X m 2r32<D3 - - Xrrv 2
®
2
) mgh ( X + =
2+1 :
X) 2

= X (m/ - 2 mg*1 = mv
^
2 2
+ m/ j + * m»r ) o -ZH I
4

*1L ^ K 1
*
l«k . = X to 2
K - E« « KL.
^
4gb
A~ cr s the rotatiooa CE. o* the body.
Use of rotational ICE. ^
v
=
Tl
4gh
(2) (b )
-
Pract>ca ,• otato'- a K_ E. is used by wheels, wr ch are ess
eng i es. A fy -» heel itorci energy between the pcn
ential parts of many
Speed of a r
, Rota tonal ccH' sion - the ciutcn

* er strokes of the pistons so EXPLANATION:

that energy is uniformly distributed over the full re
hence the rotation remains smooth.
volution of the crank shaft and
For Your krfornuDor
As rotational Y . for disc is

.
: "* ng in • q . h)
oypi = X m f ^ The two discs with moment
of inertia are spinning with
initial angular velocities as
Q.12 Find the rotational ICE . of the <£ sc and hoop . 3 shown in (Fig a). Rotational
Also derive the relations P.E = X m / + X mv collision takes place
for the velocities of disc and hoop moving down an inclin
ed plane . 2 mgh = X X
*h = v 2
( + ) mv3
between the discs and both
of them combine as shown
in (Fig b). As no torque is
v = \ gh (3 ) acting on the discs.
Rotational ICE . of a Disk
JP ! csuaton ( 2 ) and ( 3 ) shows that the velocity of the disc on reaching the bottom therefore, by law of
AS
(ICE) .* = X la 1

V --
T*
= I __ *r* &
f » r* **
me inclined plane is greater than hoop .
77 1 0.13 What are artificial satellites? Find the expression for minimum velocity
and period to put a satellite into the orbit ?
— consenaiion of angular
momentum, the combined
discs rotate with angular
velocity ©t having total
moment of inertia (Ij + It).
As "orent of nertia of a d *sc is i = X mr
53SSCS3
•
3

Sc ( K-E) , = >4 P4 mr1) to*

( K.EU
* e know
*
X m r *
/
e 1

= ro
.= . JESSES 1 WMal Satellite
i
I Ihal or
fcWUte can be launched from earth's surface to c,
bU ar ou nd de ar th.
Therefore,
+ fees = (li + h)°r

are kept MB their

; ^ ^^
Rotationai K- E. of a Hoop:
As *e e now
-
(K EU =
^ jre

rW cto* to the
near the earth have

ea rth is «fW criti ca l vel oc ity .

As ~o^r e- - * of '. ferta of a hoop s ***»00 in a circle of radius R -
I x mr 7
a satellite of mass ’ m’ is moving wit . aw;tvv close to the earth
So. |1LEW = » I'nT ) ®1

1
J
-
p
*ntripetal force acting on the satellite is
IK.EU rXmr' a . = rm] mv 2

fck -EW = Xr rr/ F =F

” (D
20
^ -
neves downward on an rc' ned place *rom height h. Then it has Rolbng te being provid
ed by it weight Hence
.
t

Atht roUtionsi and translabonal mortons If no energy is lost in friction the

ru0rT
M
toca
'

en erg y Qj tyi ejijc c * JOp on rea n ng the botto

m of the incline
' aod mg = —
mv 2
[v F '
^ )

*r vst Cr e ep-ja to the<po ten oa eo erf c at the

, I
top O e., R = 6.4 * 10* m )
P.E ( K£ mmm \
) + = (D
"
184

v
2 PHYSICS - XI (Subjective)
Sch i
Thus g=
R
( 2)
Where v is the orbital velocity and R is the radius of earth
^
APParCn t Weight
185

Thus from equation ( 2 )

2
v = gR Gene r 3lly
weight
d
of
,
an object is measured by a spring balance.
ba anCe Wh n the object is
acceleraM
of
" ' ‘ * ‘
P*
v = VgR
Tht rcadi S
WC 8 " up or <lown is

As
CC HedapP
vent
^
weight "
is equal and opposite to the force required to stop it
from
APP frame of reference .
g = 9 - 8m/ sec 2, R = 6.4 X106 m falling in the
[ weight of an object in a lift f
Putting values, we get
v= V9.8 x 6.4 xl 06
v = 7900 m/ sec
»
*
0

^-^ insider
0H
ADparent
the
spring balance
apparent
in a lift,
weight of an object of mass m suspended by a string and
as shown in figure. The tension T in the string can be
L A MWl ie , with the help of spring balance.
or v = 7.9 Km / sec
° f <bomilk measured the lift is at rest or moving with uniform
.
This is the minimum velocity necessary to move the satellite into orbit.
This is *
*of Aboui
wiellnc vsuh UJU , - CASE 1 When
* Mtna ' of velocity l
called critical velocity . 01 movts mCirn,i i tn 1
Mi. A Mtcllitc
« ^
* Mb i v/ i ' On Uic ijft js at rest, Newton ' s second law tells us that the acceleration of
at rest
a=0
Calculation of time period .
The time period can be calculated as,
vdocK ) of 30.000 object isj zero . So the net force becomes zero If ' W ' is the gravitational force T=w

j acting the object and T is the tension in the string , FI 5.17(a)

circum Terence of thccircle
K on
T- W = ma
*
ihc F^nh ai a J Then ,
velocity of satellite km T -W = O As a = 0
' 24 ckwc oftnaj
• J T=W
2 /TR form ihc GloW hmm
T= (Ast =~) Syticm. or T = mg
v
Result:
As 7T = 3.14, R = 6.4 x 106 m, V = 7900 m/sec weight of an object is equal to the real weight for observer
Hence the apparent
Putting values, we get inside the lift.
2(3.14) (6.4 x 10* ) .
CASE : When the lift is moving upward with acceleration 'a' .
T= ' .n the lift is moving upwards with an acceleration a So the upward force of .
7900
T= 5060 sec tension T is greater than downward force of weight W then
5060 Then the net firce acting on the body is
T= = 84 min ( approx ) T - W =ma
60
OR T = W +ma w - r « /rw
Result T* w m- *
If the satellite moves at height ’h ' from the surface of earth. Then he gravitational acceleration d# T = mg + ma
»
Fi 5.17(b)

inversely as the square of distance from center of earth. Thus, higher the satellite, the slower will
speed and longer it will take to complete one revolution around the earth.
11
^ Result;
T = m ( g+ a )

object Is increased by an amount of

Note shows that the apparent weight of
Ooses: oro : t» ng satellites oroit the Earth at a height of about 400 km. ^ ^ ln actual weight.
V . Do you know /

?* * When the lift I moving downward

*
with acceleration
the weight . So the we g
Your apparent weight
differ from your true
Q.14 What are real and apparent weight ? Find ne apparent weight in different cases for # the object is accelerating downward along weight * when the
ls
than the tension T. velocity of the elevator

^
greater
suspended by a string and spring balance in an elevator ? .
<
changes at the start
-
W T = ma and end of a ndt not .
during the re t o the
Or
-T = - w ma
nde when that velocity * '
T = W - ma constant
Real and Apparent Weight
is

Rea ! Weight
T s mg ma -
T * m ( g - a)
pull the arth on the object weight by a
Jt is the gravitational oj
the actual
moon the s loss .
Similarly, the weight of an
.
object on the su face of is gravitational pull
0 vjfH ^equal
ws that the apparent weight
°
is

of the moon on the object to ma .

J
 ,
-m
wmmmmm F
j

m
— Kg J
r.

Chopin , , jfj

irSss — . . ~~~
CAM IV When a lift Is falling frealy under gravity; T-N 1 7
Now wc* iunsidar that the lift Is fft und 1 KMV, Y , %ilon fo r O rbita l Vt lo cl ty *
lllhK * * *‘ Mr* ,
—
WM
m momg Mlt
•*****°' “ ••••‘ ;' L
" ' •
— ^ e
M I •W MM M
""
I mg inft
ifl <y
i to
‘
‘ "'
I mg n > K

Result:
T * o tr»» »
*
nif« •
* • .
froMi «rtd

.
So thr appeiant wftlght of objec t
shown by the %prinn baUnc e it i ro lht
* V 0- M
"V
seems to lit* weightless l hut it It siot of weigh * obj *
t r
* tlessness *
* Iqviting eQUfttlon ( I) en d ( y ), |
QU I Iplftln the phenomenon of
tyttem .
weightier In satellites and gre
vtty t « ««t .
m vV K

o
Weightlessness In Satellite and
Gravity Free System Or
When .1 satellite Is fulling freely In spate
under the «n tlon of fou»- , * attract n
( 4)
earth the sun or some distance star then the ev *
#
ery thing w < th n. tn» w- Will
bo In state of weightlessness . WhtrfC Ffcy « 1»
lo show that the earth' s satellite
behavior of projectile thrown parallel to
.
Is » freely falling object
* e cons . dor the . W I
of the orbit
ius

yt » Radius of the earth

horizontal surface of the earth in the H « Height of the orbit above from the equator
absence of air friction .
If th« projectile Is thrown successively at larger
the earth, the curvature of the path decr
.
speeds, then dur ng < ts free fall to
eases with Increasing horizontal speeds
? ui the A \ of satellite is not important in describing the satellite orbit So If

*
*
t t speed of satellite Is less than the orbital speed then It will not be able to
tyohi around the earth and fall back to the earth .
.

^
If the projectile Is thrown fast enough parallel
path will match the curvature of the earth as
In this case projectile will stert orbiting
to the earth. The curvature of the
shown In figure (I)
around the earth. The spaceship .
7 What It "Artificial Gravity"? Derive expression for frequency of spaceship required to provide the
artificial gravity ? __
all times because it orbits around*
accelerating towards the center of the earth at
the earth. Its radial acceleration is simply g the free Artificial Gravity
-
‘ fall acceleration In fact the . Artificial gravity b the gravity like effect pro . , an or biting satellite by spinning it around Us own axis.
space ship Is falling towards the center of eerth
^
..., .
at all times, but the curvature of UpliWlon:
the earth prevents the spaceship from hitting the surface of
earth. As spaceship 1« no . pict. the P» « hlP v the or blt for a lon ge r
Is like a free fall object so all the objects inside It appears to be weightless
, thus
,
Jm .* this weigh*tlessness craates
fore on tht space craft In 1 r v
lot o Pr
ltu

* '°
If c
*
for MtroniuU Pr sent ln 1
* * hl To overcom this

»
No force is required to hold an object falling In the
space satellites. Such a system Is called gravity fre system
e
fra m e of re fe re nce of the
"‘"' cully, m artificial *
grevity 1» created In the P
iltroniut then Is pressed towards the ou
Wp t0 perform the
, * *[xp
jfld MirU force on th
, , normi||y by astronauts.
oor 0| p»c«shlp m much the
Q.16 What Is orbital velocity and derive an expression for orbital JteJ"'nsioY nas on the earth
1W|
,
for f
Orbital Velocity 3,T,: .
Orbital velocity Is the tangential velocity
earth.
to ju/ sateUlu • orbit around the In I MU < .* *
100 km ebove
"
lb own
le tlon a,
is
central axis with anguler speed to

A
OR island with i ipc
2^000 kmh
• ^
The velocity of satellite with which It revolves round # earth is called orbital McCandlas tWV00
*
• n

^
pact fro m i
'
Th r th end some other planets revolve round the sun In nearly circular orbits . buttle and becam *
.
O
*
to tlo Ar tifi cia l satellites also revolve first human
This type of m ot ion If ca lle d or bl tel n »hc l- artA.
'

around the sun .

<r* :
*
188
\ PHYSICS
- XI (Subjective)
2 189
Or a = Ro>
* S
n of spacesh ip . For Your Information!
5ut o = — , where T $ the period of revolutio t A geostationary satellite orbits
_ 2 TH the Earth once per day over

! TT ( 2) the equator so it appears to be

So
* c =R Or r stationary . It is used now for
international communications
-p is period of revolution of satellite that is equal ' So
^
•

4 '
also complete one rotation in exac
* satellite
equation s (i) and_( 2), we get
7 ' surface
Equating

RI7
1 2 nr GM
3P 4IJ X [As - = f I tr>
* -
Satei'rte
T r
: : EXPLANATION; , both sides, we get
ac = 4x \ Rf To Create artificial
Squaring
on the space ship. s.
4 xV GM
: a. i
Or f =
4rR_
space ship is routed
**
about its own axis Th,
aL r
2
GMT Eartn
centripetal force is r
f =—
2 x\ R ^ on the astronaut. He tven
3 force of naans
^
GMT*
4r

As *orcc of gravity oro . oes the necessary centripetal acceleration So ,

'
( centrifugal force) oa is r= Do You know?
Or 4K 2
outer rim of the space #: 1 GHz = 105 Hz
Sc = g
and presses its floor iota
This equation gives the orbital radius of the geostation ary satellite.

Hence f =— 1 same manner os wtdfta

Substituting the values,
2x \ R Earth.
G 6.67
= x 10 " '
,1
Nm /kg # M = 6 x 102 Kg
2 2

/ . er trie scaces^ o rotates w th this frequency, then artificial gravity heips the astro nauts perform the T = 1 day = 24 hours = 24 x 60 x 60 s = 86400 s
^
easily. :i x (86400)* ] ’
"
.
6.67 x 10
"
x 6 x l0
Q.18 What are geo- stationary orbits and geo- stationary satellites ? Find the orbital radius of > So r= 2
4 x (3.14 )
stationary satellites ? x 10
sm
= 0.423
= 4.23 x 107 m

, ,h ^ t .
£‘ 0rh
1si£i* e
f
° 0 rr
0
b
^
°° n f 5 alellUe

The satellite which completes its one revolution around earth in 24 hours is called geo
OR
A satellite whose orbital
geostationary satellite.
motion is synchroniz ed with the rotation of the earth about it
* equal 10 thepeTi0d fr °
0

-
0 ati n
fear
stationary sate

own is IS
axis
«
^ \ %
muni
r771!
09
^
catio n
^ equator

^
he h a !7Ua ves ds t a Td
comes out to be 36000 km .
Write a short note on communication satellites
7ectf y 3bove
surface of

PulCOCMP
earth
_ s he ght

9M'

Allllfl l Com
5oi Satellite a

m
H-" OT e ,
Earth can M covt ^
his type of
’' orbital
s a t e l te s the one whosemotion becomes equal to the period of rotation
cs axis .
Acom Tht
by just
who
*
thret gao - atatoruuy i

ns a ways over the same point on the equator a : : ne ei th spins iataiiitM

sate te re^ a

-- -
Applications uses .
weather obser . ation a no other military
-
S cn satellites a ^
Expression of
^ e sed
orbital
in commun
radius
ication
of geo -
system
sta
,
onar I in

satellite:
;; r can pass S
eas. SS 5
ly through

^
for circular oroit is g n by beam, in straight line and
ed necessary * of
Astheoroita
GM ,** * MIS"'viaVawl ite .
ndhr
^
(D l s Provlde the ener y t0 ampHfV 8 from cauom sa fl" ®
*
« ' *
1

= Common
V
v r
speed of stellite in one day . So, *arth stations transmit and receive the INTELSAT VI
Sut This speeo must be equal to » verses Countries .

r
H
 t
Ch«Pt»f s
IK . PHYSICS - XI (Subjective) 191

Sate’ tt Offaniiat > on (IWTOSAT)

T e argest sate&t system. managed by t:6 country is ca ed NTELSAT V ORMU
* ,
*
news ntornabona tebscomrr ** ca on sate * e O g ^ ;atior
: n ?
' * Relation between S , r and 9 0= *
T worts at t e m <ro> ve
* % frequences
* o * a. 4 ti and 14 GNJ and : .
*“ <t capacity
r
cy 30 000 two ay te epN>ne c »rcw t p:u$ t*rf T V c * ar <- < s
* angular velocity
C c WXat a t t tSe Newton s and finstem v ews ab<KJt gray tat Ion >
' - Average
*
Lr?.;t
Newton s Theory about Gravitation instantaneous angular velocity M 0 -*
ACCOr ng to NrWIO' u xto / 4af

t
^
*vn porrade <v
k >
rft / a «irtrcf/> angular acceleration a,v =
Aco
Average
At
*>
-*
If
<y r4r duiwr Nr -r <* * AID
in WCVTIS u JoArjbrn V>«n -
instantar ccus ^ naflftar a =.u- o —
* At
£ rtste n $ theory about Grav tat on acceleration
AocQrdacig 10 i ftstmi tr*eor> Grvv.f> a
Rotation between Nr . r and w v - rca v = cox r
”0
-.-g
- *r ^
: t cx \ e > as sKow^ n |
4
yf
-
observe tNs y mxrt ! ve s ace is a f ^ n 'atfcec sited * a # *> we g^t
** * a,
- ra a , = ax r

- - - -
£ ste theory e 00^ t spaa o ore o gravgy act
* *?
» say that tcc es and g *: avs ^ov « a <rg geocevo -
0^ boo es but
*‘ * *
iem to tf>e
-*
. 0 cj
1
, t + - at 2
. -
2a9 = coj co
4

* -
stra ght "ei p i go<m«cr>l curved space t >t - »«‘
vJ
^ * Centripetal acceleration 7
& tft K s between s tws
** * *
-
1
mv
a HtwtO
* Ctntr . peta force
, “ "T
F
:
*• 0 grtvty W g>t no fir ntor o ' * w y
:%J bWdl
' theory
-
ease of t F, •mno 1

-
84 tt 1 y$ t*(
*°
gra> ta* o a * e si|> but ? w S » a s me reason or * • - Ctntripatal forca
eaceet t
* 9tro*g
. * * 1
K0> " g t4 # * « e'te W3 a‘
«
t »
.
So tf K » sfw> 0m 1 mat Ir »* ty a ecceeraton art n
- ^
Moment of Inertie ofa
Torque on a pe/tlde roteting t •mr'a

•* f"'- • lg t by a doAruto a^^ownt met cou

~ .. —
. •
1 meo v based on 00a of lg*: is imtf I
» xtwton of
- -
i
j; **
part as a so MP W t*Ut
'
« •
6« wOs d M MfKtM >» r tv
' Moment of Inartii of a tWn rod 1 •• ml
1

-
» * «
• • t»wn » tN«> tf 5iW V
* ^
*
« t twvc M f M i j t i sr
^ ' 4
l
ictyfi “|to Hawtpn 1
M - of fterb
d ng
-
gnt by t a
*
--
V"
v^fn
Moment of Inertia of a
Moment of Inertia of a d » c
I
- imrJ
2
1 : a

- -
-
aas^ ad durt
ate £ *I:
of strart sta #tCMiiby tr>a grMiy

-
a soar tc
^ ose
I 1 pradete 'atfr t*an hm+mn
^ 9*9 rx
-- ~ ,
fll
t i o s :o , Moment of Inertia of a sphere
I
-
^tYc 't £ tta -
i tr o y «ia congee « u icav
^ * law of motion for
s •la
L •mvTiinG
nTuiniNc mioimtiov L » rpiinO
«/ ty Wi ugr aeneciee n a
•0 *>
•
0« »4 «ty ti M we see tne star
^ tf»e

O « ' ?4S MKC

o» tgi
«
J .
e 'vrg tne •• tjr«

er >
192

l
, PHYSICS - XI (Subjective) 193
21 Rotational K .E .

Multiple Choice Questions

22 Rotational K . E . of disc K£
- l1
= — mr co
4
l
2 2

possible answers to each statement are given below. Tick ,

K.Ew = mrV ( S) tl c correct answer :
^
Rotational K.E. of hoop Fnur
v/ 23
i
Velocity of hoop falling from
Right hand rule for rotating bodies Is used to find direction of
an inclined plane of height h .
1
velocity ( b ) Torque
(a ) Angular
Velocity of disc falling from an
inclined plane of height h ( C ) Angular accelerati on ( d ) All

The mud flies off the tyre of a fast moving car In the direction of :
Velocity of sphere falling from moving tyre ( b ) Antlparall to tyre
Parallel to
^ 26
an inclined plane of height h
( a )
hes

^ ^^ ^
c) Tangent to moving ty r e (d Jon
(
angular is ^^ ^
The correct SI unit of momentum
\ / 27 Critical orbital velocity
/
v = v gR V
- M 3
(a) kgsnr * ( b ) kgms-1
R
Time period of close orbiting ( d ) kgmJs-J
28 T=
2 TTR (c ) kgm 1
* sj angular acceleration If
Ifl radius of flywheel .
is 2m, then Its
satellite \ 4 A 30kg fly wheel Is moving with uniform
Apparent weight of an object moment of
29 at rest or moving up with
uniform velocity
= mg
' [? 1 2 0
.

(c) 2kgmJ
-
-v (
(
b
d
)
)
30
6
kgmJ
okgm2
radius cm is:
Apparent weight of an object .
5 Moment of inertia of 100 kg sphere and having 5
30 moving up with uniform T = mg + ma ( a ) o .ikgm 2 ( b ) 5 kgm 2

acceleration a ( d ) 2.5 kgm 2

( c ) sookgm 2
Apparent weight of an object
6- The hoop and disc have same mass and radius their rotational K .E are related by equation:.
31 moving down with uniform T = mg - ma .Eh00P = 2 K.Edlsc
acceleration a ( a ) K - Ehoop = K . Edisc
| ( b ) K

Apparent weight of an object

32
falling freely
W K ' Eh„op =
iK - E disc
.
( d) None

Critical velocity of an artificial satellite is

</ 33 Orbital velocity of a satellite ( a ) 7-9miles s 1 ~
)
(b 7 - 9 < ms
ms
»-
-1
1

( d ) 790
(c) 7.9kmlr 1
Spinning frequency of a is .
34 In angular motion, Newton' s 2nd law of motion
satellite about Its own axis AP
( a ) F = ma >
(b F = At
35
Orbital radius of a geo-
stationary satellite
9'
(c )= laT

A man of weight W is standing In an elevator w ch

(d) All of above
Is ascending with uniform acceleratio n a than It .
aPparent weight Is
(b ) mg - ma
( a ) mg
( d ) ma - mg
W mg + ma apparent weight becomes.
10‘ fall , Its
W a body of mass 10kg Is allowed to
(bl 89N
( a ) Zero
(d) 10N
(c ) 9.8N
 194 pUVSjCS M (Subjective)
195
ti. If external torque is itro. then wtuch of these quantity is constant
( a ) Angular rhomentum (b) Force Short Questions of Exercise
(c) Linear momentum (d) None of these
1 nthe difference between tangential rf .
U. The acceleration due to gravity on moon is
^
th of that on earth, what wth
be ttij 0>
°
i W
*‘
for * * heel of known radius, how will you f,nd t
angular velocity, if one of these is given

on moon. If its mass on earth is m ? ( Lhr 2010 - 2011)

dj^
m
OiffWK* between tangential ;ular 1
<* 7 ff?
' (b ) 6m is
* Angular velocity w is g« is o / rvtotloq Jhile tangential velocity v is directed along
•
Ic) m ,w 7 m
•
latuuavi the circ l
unit o < w is rad/i wtii
*
"
13 The value of angular momentum of a body 1« ma » , mum if 0 i ecjuel
to , termination
(») 0* (b ) *
^ by using the following equation.
45
(«) 90” (d) 1S0*
The diver spins faster when moment of Inertia becomes petal force and why It must be furnished to an object if the object is
(a ) Smaller a circular
(b) greater (Rwp 2006, Grw 2006, Lhr 2009)
( c ) Remains the same .
15
Id ) None of these
When a body moves In a circle, then its linear and angular
ve octy are
JfAds the normaUy stra ight path into circular path is calle d cen tripetal force

( a ) Parallel * Or
(b ) Perpen4«cv a# corr.pe \ a t>c- j

* to ^o t* . along a circular path is call ed cent ripe tal forc e .

(c ) Antiparallel (d ) None :
mv
16. Torque per unit moment of Inertia Is equivalent to V.4 thematicailY. F<
1
( a ) Angular velocity (b) Angular acceleration Significance: .
( c) inertia towards the cent er of the circ ular path
( d ) Radius of gyration it is perpendicular to the tang enti al velo city and dire cte d
17. The moment of linear momentum is called Without cen trip etal forc e bod y will mov e oion g the tm tUl -
(a ) Torque ( b ) Couple
< Ul What is muni by moment of InortU Plain K »l n fici ncc , ,
(c) Impulse (d) Angular rpomentum
? E
* * * (Dwp 2006-2008 , Mtn 2005 Lhr 2010- 2011)

18. The ratio of angular velocities of the hour hand and minute hand ' a watch the square of its
(a ) i : i (b ) 7 :
, » Th « def
*" perpendicular distance from* *of*rotation
of m«rtia
moment of 0 1 ine d 1 is as the product of it
* mass and

19.
( c ) 43200 : t (d)
If the earth shrinks to half of Its radius without change In
^ Mathematically .
axis
I fi> f * (for a point mass)
» ss, the duration of
Physical Significance: is played by mas s durin g linea r
ang ular moti on w hich
rotf duri ng
( a ) 6 hrs Tht moment of inertia plays same
(b) Uhrs rota tion al inert ia of a
is the measure
motion. of
( c ) 24 hrs (d ) Shrs it ! nt of inertia
the line ar
. while mas s dete rmin e
nr acc eier siis
20. The ratio of angular frequency am linear fr «
( a ) 2n
ncy is
>) * $4
bod* iIZ
•
ccalerttion.
7
Moment of inertia determine

mo mw tum ? W «»
the flfflWtff «i»

con s rv
MMM
tion of sng uler mo m ..
ntum
.
?
Mtn 200 $)
.
>>« Is meant byTMi
* 1 (Mir Pur
bod
2004
y is
, Bwp

calle d
2006
ang
-
ula
200
r momentum*
*
locity of a rotating
v
&roduct of moment of inir t’ a an d ang ular *

\l. d
n. *
2. c
12. c
3. c
13. c
4. d
14 . k
** de no ted by L . thamatfca'
Ma hr

r
 , PHYS ICS - XI ( Subj ectiv e)
197
L= r xp
the dire ction of the following vectors in
State simple situations; angular momentum and angular
L = rp sin 0
velocity -
L = mvr sin 0 ( Grw 2009,Grw 2010)
Law of conservation of angular momentum of angular momentum and angular ve|or ' t
AflS'
Direction
The total angular momentum of the system remains constant, when no external directio n of angu lar velo city and angu8 lar momentum is along the axis of
, which can be
torque acts
n it
The
determined by righ t han d rule. "
Mathematically, °
Uotai = Li La L3 + = leu = constant
Right hand rule
of rotat ion in your right hand u W M
Grasp the axis
erect thu mb will represent the direction ofangXtm ** ** of then the

Q. 5 - 5 Show that orbital angular momentum Lo = mvr

(Federal 2005, Mtn 2006, Fsd 2008, Grw 2008, Mir Pur , u ,
2009,Grw 2010) Q.S.8 Explain why an object, orbi ting the eart h I
^ explanation to point
Ans. Proof: out why obje cts appe arun der
Let us consider particle of mass m moving in a circle of radius r as show in * (Fsd 200s)

figure P Ans . Explanation:

t is throw n horiz onta lly fast enou gh from a certa in heig ht, so that the curva ture of its
When the cujec
As of the Earth then the objec t simply revol ve roun d the Eart h . Now ,
Lf = r x p path will n atch with the curva ture

or Lo = rpsin 0
( where 0 is the angle between r and p)
So
- 4 the motion of the ob act is under
acce ’ eration .
) I e-ice we
Weightlessness of the body:
can say the
the
orbiti
cons
ng
tant
body is
acce lerat
freely
ion
fallin

nal
g
due
body
to
.
force
gravi

so that
ty (

the
equa l

objec
to

t is
centr

said
ipeta

to be
l

Lo = r(mv) sin8 A freely falling body moves only under the action of grav itatio
Since p = mv in state of weightlessness.
Lo = mvrsinB it fly ? Expl ain it
off of a movi ng bicycle, in wha t direc tion does
As the angle between r and v is 90° ' -
Q 5 9 Whe n mud files the tyre
, -2009 , Bwp 2008 , Fsd 2008,Grw20ii)
(Lhr 2005, Rwp 2005, Mtn 2005 Mir Pur 2006
Hence l_o = mvr singo0
| Ans. The mud flies off along the tangent to the tyre.
= mvr (1)
Reason:
Lo = mvr (hence proved) sticki ng force) betw een the mud and the tyre is
When speed of bicycle increases then adhesive force ( and mov es along
cent ripet al force so the mud leave s the tyre
not sufficient to provide the nece ssary
Q- 5.6 Describe what should be the minimum velocity, for a satellite, to orbit close to the earth around it tangent to tyre .
.
Whic h one
an inclin ed plane at the sam e time
- ) A disc and a hoop start moving down from the top of
( D.G.Khan 2005 Mtn 2009, Lhr 2010 2011
Ans. Critical velocity: W H be moving faster on reaching the bottom ?

The minimum velocity needed to orbit a satellite close to the earth is called critical velocity.
' , lhr 2006, lhr 2009 )
( Federal 2005-2006

Ans, O/sc will be moving faster on reaching the ground

Calculation:
Consider a satellite of mass m is moving with velocity v in a circle of radios (i.e radius of the & Proof:
Speed of hoop at the bottom of inclined plane is,
Since gravitational force provides the necessary centripetal force
[s
So mg =
mv
r
:
Vhoop =
sPeed of the disc moving down
>
the
^
incli ned p a
" e
or vs «= gR r s R ( rad J 5 of the Ean »
or v = y
/ gR
' VdlK = ifrh
3
v«
v
V 9-8 x
7900 m/ set
6 4 K io
‘ or =
3
“
or v •7.9 km r 1

H
VdiK « 1.15Vh00P
*nce VdiK > Wool*

%
f
uT
*
'
 198 '' '"•crM ,,
' 1 (TiubjwD )
Phytic l rNton ^^
yfllCR * **
* ,
t r moment of iiunua < > f
Slnct the moment of Intrtia of disc I* inwHor *
! KnM
*
vrlot » tv of disc IN greater ( h.m hoop
ult? (
Vr Solved Exercises
Q. S. 11 Why does J diver change hit body positions before and after diving In the p0o|}
(fedenlioos ikJJ, , i„,„ , ,
- ^v foil routing « w j i
k
,
3 v ' «* «* . tA
7 fkttrit * *****!
** '
Ans. The diver changes his body position to nuke fxtffl iom
Explanation
^ iQuIti

When a diver lifts off from the diving board, his legs and arms are full extended
,»
( vrM
An
dtecIrraOunlnb*
|)>U;
uniform, fMtit vcki*

velocity - <u. - 3.0 g

— “
^^ 1*’ l” * ^ * •***
^
1" 1 Ww* ^^
UIM ng*

thlic,
fey
Initial annular
moment of Inertia is large ( lt ) but angular velocity ( w , ) Is small.
When the legs and arms of the diver are drawn into the closed tuck position , Its moment Final angular velocity - at ,- 0<
- - 18.0 sec .
reduced considerably so that Its angular velocity will Increase to conserve the angular
mom ® '^ l ime 1

llW,* l 2U> 2 To Find :

ron 9»
(i) Angular accele
rcvolttl F'Angular displacement * e « ?
Q.5.12 A student holds two dumb- bells with stretched arms while sitting on a turn table. He is glveni
until he Is rotating at certain angular velocity. The student then pulls the dumb-bells
J
towiidJ *
(ii) Number
C |» tion:
Ci|cu
As
of

ar
^
chest , what will be the effect on rate of rotation?
^ a=
VO
—
),
(

l
Putting values, we get
a -—
0-3
-
18
3
a=-
18
|a = - 0.167 rev
(ii) As angular displacement is
Ans. Rate of rotation increases when student pulls the dumb-bells towards his chest . 9 = cot t + - at 2
n
*
2
Reason:
Putting values, we get
According to law of conservation of angular momentum. 2
lu) = constant 0 = 3 x 18 + 1(-0.167) x (18)
. 2
When student holds two dumb- bells by stretching his arms, then value of angular inertiaiis
So the angular velocity is decreased . When the student pulls the .dumb- bells towards
j" 0 = 54 + (-0.083) (324)
ss the
L
0 = 54 - 26.4
angular inertia decreases. So the angular velocity is increased. But during this whole Proce 0 = 27 rev (Approx)
angular momentum remains constant.

Q.S-13 Explain how many minimum number of geo- stationary satellites are riquired for
T. V transmission.
global
.*
mi
"*
A 1000 kg car is
radius of the circular path
to hold the car in the
round
is
circular
10
path
m
a
turning
,
?
corner
how large

(Fid 200s, D.G.Khan 2005 -2006, Mir Pur

2009, Mtn 2009 ) Giv«n Data:
Ans. Minimum three correctly positioned geo stationary satellites are required Mass of car = m = 1000 kg
1
for the global coverage of T.V transmission. Velocity of car= v * 10 ms
"

Radius of circular path = r = 10 m

Explanation: PlClftC oc«fl

As each satellite In geostationary orbit covers

Find:
jUJinaWt so the Force required = F ?
whole populated Earths surface can be covered by three correctly fow ,
positioned geo-stationary satellites
correctly by
MtillRH* ^ aleulatlon
•
:
The force required to keep the car in circuit
in c path will be centripetal

/ if - '
-
,w
s\

£
V
- >
.
/I
 pHV SlCS M ( Subje ctive )
Iif * 201
SvV
Fusing
f*
V A.
---
CX we ct
*
r [ r
1 K
# *
U
^n:
( jilfll the
lorwula
U * mvj- (1 )

F,
!0W lOp S
^
10 here v, - orbiU l speed md vw - - ( as s 2 nr)
1000 % too 2*r •distance travelled in one year
F« • When S l ime period T .

a
Fg
r, - ^i
*
10
1 POOPS
i » id
thus
values , we get
2>rr
Vo = — i
Putting
2 * 3.14 * 0 n
Vo *

* j ihowa n
• .
A ball ried to the end of tiring ts swun g in a % trtictl circle
Mg. 5.7. What will be the tenaio n in the string
of radius r under the
dlon ofgn • 9.42
v« * ;
3.16 *
.4
path and its speed is v at this point?
Given Data;
when the ball U « the point
Ast^i Vo *
:
ms - I

As the boll is moving in a circle, thus the putting that in

force acung on the ball must provide 4
2 981 * 10% 1.5 * 10"
the required centripetal force.
At point A two forces arc acting on the ball .
( i) Tension in the string T 10
^” * 1.5 * 10*

fii ) W eight of the ball W’

To Find :
T
r
* lo ^ kWQ

Tension in the string T ?

Calcu lation: --
These forces (Le. T and W) act along the radius
~
n*.
A dhc « iihout flippin g rolb do* n a hill of height 10.0 m . If the disc starts from rest at the top of the
hill whit iv its speed at the bottom 11
,

sum must furnish the required centripetal force .

T+W mv 2
-_ r
at Point A, so their vector Gnen 1' ita:

T« Find
Hcife, of hill - h = 10 m
' peed of disc at bottom " V s ?
or T - 2
w But W * mg Calculation:

-
r Using the formula
.r
I «
—
mv 2

Mi
v
mg
i?
T-m Puttin g values, we get

——
r 8

'i
4 * 9.8 * 10
If g, then tension T will be zero and the centripetal 3
^ force is just equal to the weight.
/ -F-
-
v > 130.67
11.4 msj
The mass of Earth is 6.00 * I 0U kg. The distan ce r from Earth
to the Sun is 1.50 * 10 m . A » ** "
Irom the directi on of the (North Star, the Ear » revolye s
Determ ine the orbital angula r mome ntum of the Earth about the Sun , assum
circul ar orbit about the Sun once a year ( 3.16 > 10%)
Given Data:
-
counte r clockw ise aroun d
ing that It trave l
CLl
''" ^
•
"R “ 00
P « riod

Djjtt:
•of
km.
one
• »
revolu
*
tion in dars ° Take mar < of the tartn rvi
-y *

Mass of earth * m s 6.00 xl 024 Kg

^
c ght of
'k satellite from earth * h •384,000 km
Distance
Time
To Find :
T - -
r * 1.50 x l 0 Mm
1 year 3 16 l o s
x ' 85
‘

^
- -- -
* e a r t h M 6.0 * 1024 kg
lUs of earth R 6400 km

Orbital angular momentum ft trth •Lo “

1

-
&
-
*•
u
*
4 *:vris" J
1
' . AA
V »
202

To Find: 's PHYSICS - XI (Subjective)

203
Period of one revolution in days = T = ?
r 6.67 x l 0 “n x 6 x 1024
Calculation: r=
Total distance of satellite from earth center = r = R + h 4

r = 6400 + 384000 = 390400 km simplification, we get

cn
X 107m|
*
r = 3.904 x 10 m [ JT23
speed we know that
por orbital
As v=

Putting values, we get h

v=
6.67 xl 0 n “

3.904 x 10
x 6.0
8
x 1024
6Earth
v= V 10.25 x 10 s
2
Or v = V 102.5 x 104 864 x l O
v = 10.1 x 102 ms 1 v = 0.03074 x ]

-
"

2;rr Or v 3.074 * 10'

Now T= v = 3.074 kms
v Or
-1
Putting value, we get Or v = 3.1 kms

2 x 3.14 x 3.904 x ! Qg
jm
10.1 x 102 Exercise Problems
j m 2 4 . 5 1 x 106 2.427 x ft
10 seconds
10.1 5.1 A tiny laser beam is directed from the Earth to the Moon. If the beam is to have a diameter of 2.50 m
T . 2.427 K 106
60 x 60 x 24
days
at the Moon, how small must divergence angle be for the beam ? The distance of Moon from the Earth
li 3.8 x 10Mm.
imirirr Given Data:
Diameter of beam = length of n.-c = 3 = 2.50 m
Distance of moon from the earth s rs 3.8 x 10 m
. ,
Kiullo nml TV NIKIIUIM bounce from M »ynchronou» aalclllte This untcllllc circle the ! irth once In « To flndi
.*
hour No If (he aatelllte circle enMwnrd above the equator, It stay over (be name »pnt on Divergence angle e 0 =7
aatelllte ? (b) What I It tpced ?
Given Data: * *
*
*
*
*
-
becauie (he Earth I rotating «1 the ame rale, ( a ) What I the orbital radio for a «ynchre» Calculmlonai
* *' As S « rO

-- - -
Mass of earth M •6 x 1024kg
Time period T 24 hours 24 x 60 x 6 0 s
Or 0 e
r
Putting values, we get
-
--
Gravitational constant G 6.67 x 10"nNm2 kg“ 2
To Find:
0 --^’
- -
(a) Orbital radius of satellite r 7
--
(b) Speed of satellite v ?
3.8 x 10

-
0 6.6* 10 ° rnd

Calculation: 5,2
from ret ,
to aa angular velocity of 4 S 0 .
rcv /mln In
*
Kmmophonc record turntable accelerate
( ) A
* r
- ^
fOMT 1
G |
Vcn
What I It average angular
* *
acceleration ?

-
[

Putting values, wet got

filial angular velocity a>i * 0
204 Chapters [ Q -
'
Sj ru,.v Si- hjili
4
•s PHYSICS - XI ( Subjective )
I

205
45 * 27t 45 x 2 x 3.14
Final angular velocity = cor =45.0 rev/ min = - 4.71 rad /sec
T« r
, otl :
Torque acting on cylinder r ~ ' >
60 60 (a )
( h ) Angular acceleration of cylinder
=
Time = t = 1.60sec ~ a ~ "U F
To find: latiuns:
OiM 1
= rFsinO
Average angular acceleration = a =? I
As t
Calculations: F are perpendicular to
As r and each other So 0 =
r -0 )
r = ( ( ) . 2( ) ( ( ) .6( ) )sintXr
As a=
t t = ( ) . 12 Nm
putting values, we get
Now for CX
4.7 - 0
a=
1.6
As T = I (X

a = 2.95 rad / sec 2 T = — mr u s inder. moment of inertia = I = - mr:

5.3 A body of moment of inertia I = 0.80 kg m2 about a fixed axis, rotates with a
velocity of 100 rad /see. Calculate its angular momentum L and the torque to constant an
sustain this mof
0001 Putting: seines, we gel
Given Data: W

2 x 0.12
2
Moment of inertia = / = 0.80 kgm 5 x 0.20x 0.20
Angular velocity = co = 100 rad/ sec ju = 1.2 rad/ seel
To find:
Angular momentum = L =?
5.5 Calculate the angular momentum of a star of mass 2.0 x 10 " Cg and radius 7.Ox 10 km . II it
Torque = r =? makes one complete rotation about its axis once in 20 days, what is its kinetic energy ?
Calculations: ( liven Data :
As L = Ico
Mass of star = m = 2 x 10 " kg '

putting values, we get

L = 0.80 x 100 Radius of star = r = 7.Ox 10 km = 7 .Ox 10 i n '

L = 80 kgm 2 /sec Time for one rotation = T= 2( ) days = 20 x 24 x 60 x 60 = 1728 x 10 see

1 » lind :
L = 80 Jsl
Now torque = T = I a
Angular momentum L ? ==
Kinetic energy K .E ? = =
As angular velocity is constant, So a = 0 Simulations:
Thus As L = Id)
r = ( 0.80)( 0 )
IV = ol
For sphere ( star ) = I =
•*

—
5
>
mr and o)=
"
2K
T —
• Thus
.
5.4: Consider the rotating cylinder shown in fig 5.26
—
•>
2
Suppose that m = 5.0 kg,F = 0.60 N and r = 0.20 m.
cr
I-= m i x
5 T
71
—
Calculate ( a ) the torque acting on the cylinder, ( b) the angular acceleration of the cylin *
Pulling v alues , we gel
x 3.14
( Moment of inertia of cylinder

Given Data : „
= — mr — 5
( )
,
x 2 x 1 ‘x t
,
7 x 10

43
') x
2
1728 x 10
'
'

U0.1424x 10
Force acting on cylinder « F '
ON J:
Radius = r = 0.20 i F= 1.4 x I ( JS
)
 Ws
w
.

.’06 £!l2£tor 5 ..

p ySlCS XI ( Subjcc ( ive )

^
\ . •\\

k I
l Kin .is
^^
Set
Ihus
g-
r
v 2
207

2
v = rg
Or
i h K i = : -s mi
s
r v= v rg /
Or
values, we get
i i ; vallies we , eel putting
v = Vl 000 x 9.8
2 x 114 r
k I v - O ' 10 ' M? I0 »
‘
; -I
; 5 172 Sx U) v = 99ms
Earth
k I = :5.4 SxlO .1
5.H
''
I lie Moon orbits
momentum
the so that the same side always faces the Earth . Determine the ratio of its
( about its own axis ) and its orbital angular momentum . ( In this ease , treat
spiii angular
K . l - =:. 5 xl ( Pj
. ] the Moon as a particle orbiting the Earth). Distance between the Earth and the Moon
x 10 K
. Radius of the Moon is 1.74 xJ 0 ^ /? 2
is 3.85 / ? /
1 \ I-
.''. ti A 1000 kg car travelling with a speed of 144 km h rounds a curve of radius 100 m. Kind (liven Data:
the
nccessan centripetal force. Distance between Earth and Moon = r0 = 3.85 x IOxw
( in . n I lata :
Radius of moon = rs = l .74 x 1 O^ m
Mass o| ear = m = 1000 kg
i 144 x 1000 | To find :
Speed ear = = 144 kmh
ol L,
\
3000
= 40 in see
Ratio of spin and orbital angular momentum = -?
Radius ol *. in veil path = = 100 m i h
1 u I m 11 : Calculation:
eeiiinpet .il loiee = \\ = ’ The spin angular momentum of the Moon about its own axis is
( ah illations: Ls = Isw
\s
tm
— mrs 2
to (1) As for Moon (sphere ) Is = —
i
— tTir
2

Dulling \ allies we , gel The orbital angular momentum is given by

1000 ( 4 t ) i Lc, =I „a)
2 As for Moon ( point mass) I„- mr *

100 Lo =mro “ ( 2)
I = I 0000 \ Diving equation ( 1 ) by equation ( 2 ). we get
_ >
^>
1 = 1 0 , MEN
L mr
P \\ = l . O .s IQS- 1
Angular speed to is same for both
>. 7 lv. it is the least speed at which an aero plant;can execute a vertical loop < > l 1.0 km rudiu' Lo mr
^ then will he no tendenev lor the pilot to fall down at the highest point ?
,

( l i v e n Data : Lo 5r 02
R uhris of loop = 1 - 1 0 kill = loot ) Ml putting values, we get
Ueelciaiion due u » gravilx = *j = ,x m/ see *
_k = 2 E74 _l 0V
( x
t n I iiul : 5 ( 3.85 x 10* ):
‘
k
(. . denial ions ;
Speed ol aeroplane =\ L ._ 6.05 xIQ12

\
7.37 x I 017
\s
1 k
r1- ~ 8.2* i (T
.
SN e i aeioplane e x e e u l e i eneul ii loop : ! n eeni pel a I loiee is supplied h \ gravity. k
 Sasj
..
200

, ,, . . .
1 | m | niliiU's on ils
,
vis one a «l«> - Suppose, by son,
, prot- o v ,b, Kllrll, . ^ jci

PHYSICS XI ( Subjective)
209
radius is onl\ hull as large as
w ul
1 prtsini
iirtsi'iil Mow Iasi
i ^ ill H lie rotating then ? .
I < M sphuc l = 2 / 5 MR ) Radius oTearth
| leight of circular
- r 6400 km
orbit h 900 km
( iivfn Diilii:
I mu- pci IIHI '
11 = 2-i hums no
fn *
1'-
Orbital speed = v = ?
->
.
)
~ ’

Moment nl iivm i « » 1 .splicic -I - s MR \1R ions :

s C RU
tut
* GM
( ) .
n !_* in il itidiiis R, R As v=
r (

K .KIILIS « illei conn .icimn = R = R \ Where r is the distance fro

r = R+h
centre of c irth

2 R
Mnmvni nl .
mciti i altci cnniiaClimi = I - _ MK Mi )
11cnee
r = 6400#$) 00
r = mOkni
In lind:
jviiud nl .
ml iimn alici contraction = =/*7300 x 10’/;/
. |§ *|]

Pulling values in cqu. (I), we get

( .i h n l . i l i n n s : J
Vcmding in law nl cnnscr \ aimn nl angulai momentum 6.67 XI 0 W 102

• "'
•
( )
i-
i V 7300M 0’
8 ^ 106
,
' 1
to . ( 1) ?
4 * 10 m/scc

2 71 2K v - 7.4km/sec
\s , — —
( ) and m . =
T
Pulling values, m ci|u. t I ) wc gel
In
M« >
s
2n
MR
'

s
T.
4
I
4 :
O! I = 24
I =6 hours
I lencc earth would eomplcic us one rmaiinn in 0 hmns

9~
.>. 10 should he the orbiting speed to launch a satellite in a circular orbit 900
\ \ hat
,, , , , ,
km iilxn tli Mirim »1 Hi larlli.* ( Ink mass nl Hi Imill as 6.(1 X lO K
and its radius is 6400 km ).
'

^ / T
*
-
C vi % i’l l Data: '
s

Mass nl eaith = M = (u( 1 - 1 (1

 - XI (Subjective)
/s
pl
PHVSICS 211

Chapter 6

FLUID DYNAMICS

Leanil

that viscous forces in a fluid cause a retarding force on an object moving through it.
Understand
Use Stoke ' s law to derive ar express on -
for terminal velocity of a spherical body falling through a

viscous fluid under laminar conditions.

Understand the term steady flow, incompressible flow, non viscous flow as applied to the motion of
an ideal fluid.
Appreciate that at a sufficiently high velocity, the flow of viscous fluid undergoes a transition from
laminar to turbulence conditions.
predate the equation of continuity Av = Constant for the flow of an ideal and incompressible fluid .
ppreciate that the equation of continuity is a form f principle of conservation of mass.
J
'^ erstand ihat the pressure difference can arise from different rates of flow of a fluid ( Bernowi .
Effect).
Duive Bernoulli's equation in form P + 'A pv 2 + pgh = constant
Explain how Bernoulli effect is applied in the filter pump, atomizers, in the flow of air over an aerofo
Venturimeter and in blood physics.
^ ve qualitative explanations for the swing of a spinning ball.
 'K
* i

wmrnm V .,
>

r ' s pHYSICS - \ l (Subjective)

213
Chapter No . 6
fWid that can HQW from one place to another is called a
suMW«>« fluid.
^
=—
classified fluids.
«

~ and ggfi are as

u —
lX. fluid dynamic s
*.
JZZ cl is called fluid dynamics.
t °
The Dra
law in fluid dynamics
Conservation
r ,w study of dynamic fluid is relatively complicated, but analysis can be simplified by
making a few
-
G»
.O . For this purpose we also use the following conservation laws.
KM
—*
]
.
gumptions
Law of conservation of mgs% which gives basis of the equation of continuity
of nerqy
c • Law of conservati on f fives the basis of Bernoulli's theorem.
o £
o V Q» What is meant by the term viscosity ? Explain, and
fluid friction or drag force and state Stock's Law ?
E 11 TJ
0

I 2C
~

£ cft
3 © •> O
*
z. 3
© 3 < Viscosity ( n )
.<
0
r
o *3
>
o
9. *
O’
V .*5
-
5

c LW
i5. sO <> -
<
Viscosity :
of iry of he
ffect between different layers of a flowing fluid is
Viscosity measures, how much force is required to described
,
- in terms
,
*3
C
lb~ C
5 >
E
liquid over another layer. It is denoted by q. The SI unit of viscosity
slide
2
is Ns/m .
one ayerofthe

.
H
a
W
c
Q
1
h *
*5

—-r
-
*
2:
Samples
• Substar ike honey and thick tor have large coefficient of viscosity. So they can not flow easily.
u *TD 3
Substance like water and milk has small coefficient of viscosity q. So they can flow easily.
Z
c
a
u. *
o IT Unit
O -o • The SI unit of coefficient of viscosity is karri ' s ' or Nm * s
3 • Its dimension is [ ML Y1).
o o * E Viscosity of liquids and gases
rt £
EE JB • Liquids and gases have non- zero viscosity.
>> --
u .Ea c: - 1
Viscosity of gases increases with increase in temperature while for solids and liquids it deceases.
r
av sc
c. jr
on
©
to
r1 Q.2 What is meant by drag force ?
O
> (N '
s <15»
E > * Dra8 Force
ZJ
h*
An object
moving through a fluid experiences a retardingfo rcc called drag force.
u OR
- ct
ao i
re
YgTg F ch 7f 3TmThc mution of a body moving through the fluid r rilled rirag - forco or fluid- faction.
^
*
~

For example
* V}
cu
U
1?
c u. motion.
re
Q
^• pWhac eors
"we stick out our hand out of the yyindow of a fast moving car, we feel a force opposite to our

^Cord on which depends upon

|ng
to Stoke' s law, drag force is given by,
F = 6nqrv

5/ A1
•
r
7. . r* '
^
214
\s PHYSICS - XI ( Subjective)
So drag force is a velocity dependant force. This equation shows that drag force 215
depends upon

-
4
m=
i) speed of sphere ( v ) 3
ii)
iii )
size of sphere ( r )
viscosity of medium ( q )
orin n
°0 r :>
; Hence
equation (1) becomes .
Q- 3 State Stoke' s Law. What are its limitations ?
( Vr ) <

v. =
67iqr
( 4 Trr ’ ) pg
Stoke' s Law v
OR 3 x 6r c q r
This law states that the drag force F acting on a sphere of radius r moving
ForVo
slowly with velocity v in a fluid of viscosity q is given by
F = 6 jtq r v
Vmconiti . *
Limitation MaUrial
M
v. = onstant ]
This law is valid only for spherical bodies moving slowly. For high speeds Aw OR bn
At fan
drag force is not simply proportional to velocity. fl /v,
OMO OR
Q- 4 What is terminal velocity ? Show that terminal velocity of fog IVftlrw velodty is direr ! ! y proportional to the square of the radius of droplet.
o «oi Thus terminal
droplet is directly proportional to the square its radius ?
Ofyc » fWi
*
i
* Q5 What is the difference between steady and turbulent flow ?

Terminal Velocity m
The maximum and constant velocity of an object failing vertically Can You Do That? Fluid Flow
downward is
called terminal velocity. Let us consider the flow of the fluid through the pipes. It may be either streamline or turbulent.
©%
Explanation Laminar Flow
Consider a fog droplet falling vertically downward. The drag force of air In laminar or stream line flow each particle along a stream line moves exactly along the same path as
increases
as the velocity droplet increases. The net force on the droplet is followed by the particle which passes through that point earlier.
Net force = weight - drag force
. The flow of afluid in which every particle of the fluid moves along a smooth path is called laminar flow.
F = mg - 6nqrv Turbulent Flow
The irregular or unsteady flow of thefluid is called turbulent flow
ma= mg - 67iqrv
oe When the speed of flowing fluid exceeds a certain cnbca/ value, the flow
When drag force becomes equal to the weight of droplet then it will ball can
start to A table ' eims
made suspended in n? becomes extremely irregular and complex and it changes continuously with time.
,
move with uniform velocity, called terminal velocity ( v ) . So its
acceleration of a > r coming fre
* Thus, Streamline (laminar flow)

.
(a )
becomes zero. (i.e. a = o ) $ ! feam *
According to figure, ’ ,
Thus the above equation becomes
m( O ) = mg -
0= mg - 6 TIT) rv
rvt
,
F.XPI WATIOV i
ii)c. a/r is jjccicii ftoifl }
noss Ic
. with hiph \ clout

according «'
**
- . ,
Difference between Laminar Flow a^ rhulent Flow
T
In laminar flow, each particle of fluid moves
does not change with time.
along smoothjeoth wh ,
ch

OR 67rr| r vt = mg
therefore,
I Bernoulli's equation «
.lJl<
In turbulent flow the smooth but continuously
pressure at the nirnlchull
(b) Turbulent flow

OR v
mg
0) decreased TJic tennis
I0 ere
changes with time . turbulent
HQ 6.1

* each other while in

.
1

,
6rcr) r is suspended due
pressure around it . flow it does not happen.
- -
In laminar flow, stream lines 42 On
Where v = the terminal velocity and
T) = coefficient of viscosity. in turbulent flow, the velocity of flu d rhanees
changesBSD
^
Relation between terminal velocity and radius of droplet ^por°te (Steady flow condition)
each other. This
mass steady f|0w different streamlines can nevei iniersect
Since density = c nditi
volume ° 0 n is
called steady flow condition.
m
OR p=
V
OR
 216
£ ,„ , pHYSICS XI ( Subjective )

^ Pter 6 [ . | . s

Q.6 What is an ideal fluid ?

If
'% i * * *. ». , o, „„H „
/ rn, c0 nserV
mass that flows into the bottom of the
pipe through A, in time At
Ideal Fluid equal to mass of the liquid that flows out through A in
5 t be 2 the same
,
A fluid which satisfies the following condition is called an ideal fluid Therefore
1 The fluid is non - yiscous i . e., there is no internal frictional force Am = Am2,
between adjacent layers of fluid iA ,v,At = pjAjVpAt As the water falls, its speed
increases and so its cross sectional

2 The fluid is incompressible , i e its density is constant PiA , Vi = p ,ApvJ area decreases as mandated hy the
continuity equation
3 The fluid motion is steady is called the equation of continuity
This equation incompressible, so the density is constant 1Jp EXPLANATION:
4 Irrotationol flow .
Since the fluid
continuity becomes A ' ~ P2 = P say) - < Conlimuty equal inn is A|v , A2\ J
the equation of OR A v - constant
Q. 7 State and explain equation of continuity . Thus ,
,
pA v, = pA 2 v 2 A=
const
Ax —
A , v, = A, v 2 v v
Av = constant
Av is called flow rate . W
The product
State and explain Bernoulli' s Equation
.
Q .8

Bernoulli' s Equation dynamics which relates

' equation is the fundamental equation in fluid
Bernoulli s
the pressure to fluid speed and height.

Aij •

AX 2 •
Am P2

Am
ii V2

h
?r‘

Statement .
The sum of pressure, K.£. P r un ‘] t u lil* .
\
and P.K per unit volume of an
at each
Explanation
incompressible,
^ . steady
in state is constant
non-viscous fluid JlW
W
Consider a fluid is flowing through the non - uniform pipe The particles in the Point (tloii }> a stream Hue. '
fluid move along the streamlines in a steady state flow as shown in figure
Mathematically
At lower end of pipe
Let 1* i — pv i pgli = constant
area of cross- section of pipe = AI proof through a
, non viscous
fluid
distance moved by fluid in time \ t = \ x j
velocity of fluid = v
^
,P pe consider the steady flow
time At. as shown in
of
figure
an incomprcss
below .

density of fluid = | » _
^ at
0 rk
done at upper end
-
volume of the flu d contained at lower end = V
mass of the fluid contained at lower end = \ m
upper end

Then
\m i = pj Vj
OR Am . = |i: A \ x .
-

OR \mi = p i A, v _ \t ( Y Ax = v \! i

At upper end of pipe

Let
area of cross - section of pipe = A ^
distance moved by fluid in time At = \ x
velocity of fluid = v -
density of fluid - p,
volume of the fluid contained at upper end = V
mass of the fluid contained at lower end - \m .
Then
\ rn = p A < j , \ tj
 C 1B
Chapter [
? » lui
l l I) *“
Area of cross section of pipe = A , |K >liir’
N PH YS ICS - XI ( Sub ject ive )
a y
219
The pressure of fluid = P,
Force exerted on the fluid = F , Change in K . E . = A ( K E) = . mv2 ?
* ~ mv 2 Do You Know?
2 ’ .
Distance moved by fluid in time At = Ax ,
-
Changing in PE = A ( P .E ) = mgh - mgh, , y >>

Smoke
Velocity of fluid = v, and arehi
the heights of the upper and I Air
e h2
of ener gy V
Density of fluid = p
8V law of conser vation
work done = chan ge in K .E . + change inV r
Volume of the fluid contained at upper end = V
Interesting Inform; , — 2
The work done on the fluid by the fluid behind it is given by IP - Pi ) = ” rnv; - r
2
W , = F ,Axl Bum
lultiplYinS both side s by —m , we get,
OR ,
W, = P A , Ax , [ ,
P
A , =» F = P A I
' ' '
f
^ A chimney works besl when it is tall
3 nd exposed to air currents , which

W, = P, A , v,At _ (l) Pt - Pa = -A ( V - -1 pv, 2

+ 'Jh - pgh, reduces the pressure at the top and
OR [ v A x, = v,At ] — II run . J r r r r r s U .
jrk done at lowe r end r - iu the upper region aunuspheric
0 P, , + pgh, = P
1
at lower end * - PV ;+ - PW + pghj pressure is small am] the smoke
m the tall chimnc) rises upward
.

Area of cross section of pipe = A 2 This is the Bernoulli ' s equation and it can also be expressed as
The pressure of fluid = P 2 A stream of nir passinq I ,
ovfir a
^ P + — pv + pgh = constant (6)
Force exerted on the fluid = F 2 '" o rise m the lube cause HIP I,W
dipped m a liquid will
ns shown Thrs oKrci
Distance moved by fluid in time At = Ax
2
is used in perfume
sprayers.
bottles and Q9 state and explain Torricelli' s Theorem .
Velocity of fluid = v 2
Density of fluid = p EXPLANATION
Volume of the fluid contained at lower end = V
narrow part of Ihe lube.
^
Due lo greater speed ofair in Application of Bernoulli' s Equation
Torricelli's Theorem
larly, the work done on the fluid by the fluid ahead
of it is given by pressure is decreased
I W 2 = -Fj AX2 Therefore, the liquid in llie
Torricelli' s Theorem is Bernoulli ' s equation with certain assumption made.
Statement
tube rises up in the tube at
W 2 = - P 2 A 2 AX 2 [ ••• shown in the figure. he speed of efflux is equal to the velocity gained by the fluid in falling through the distance ( h ; // j> under the
A2
=> F 2= P2 A 2] ‘union of gravity .
w2 =
- P 2 A 2 v 2 At ( 2 ) [ vAx 2 = v2At]
Proof
negative sign shows that this work is done against the fluid Consider a large tank of fluid having small orifice (hole ) A on it, as shown in figure.
force. let
work done
net work done both at upper and lower end
area of cross - section of upper end of tank = A, 1 v,
is area f cross - section of lower small hole = A2 Pi
W = W, + W 2 °
sPeed of the fluid at upper surface of tank = v,
W = P,A , Ax, At- P 2 A 2 AX 2 At
W = P, A, v, At - P 2 A 2 V 2 At _
sPeed of the efflux v
pressure
= 2
at the upper end of tank = P,
h -h:,
A' > rding to equationof continuity ressure at the lower small hole of tank = P 2 V
V

i
A ,v, = A 2 v 2
A,v,At = A 2v 2 At = V
eiSht of fluid at the upper end = h
^
.
ei t
^ of fluid at the lower end = h
2
n
r
*
TO
: equation ( 3 ) becomes
• e,

w := P,V - P 2 V
feow p
lng to Bernoulli' s equation

-
I W = ( P, - P 2 ) V ( 4) Pi ,
pv 2 + pgh = P 2 + , ~ pv 2
a
+ PSh> (1)

W =( P,-Pj)
I “ Ve uation of
— ( 5 ) [ v (> = -V => V ] ^ continuity
P ,
A v, = A 2 v 2
nge in K.E and change in P.E
P
I OR v =
A,
, —— Vj 0 ( 2) ( A,>> A 1
act of this workdone changes
K of fluid ar d a part changes its *
. Alsc the atmosphere So
e , / ’itational P E. So , they are op
.
Pressure will be the same because

k.
 P, = P, = P ( atmospheri c pres su re )

Hence . equation (l) becomes

l
P(0) + I'gh, = P + - pv / + pgh;
J
P ~
*
OR ,
Pgh = - pv / 4 - pgh ?
Usingthese
Dividing ootn sides by p, we get pA + i
- ( 10 00 ) ( 0.2 0 ) 2
= PB + ~ ( 1000 ( 2 )
) 2

I •7:r:
,
gh, = - v / 4- gh> PA + 20 = PB 20 00 :::
/ PA - PB = 2000 - 20 2
OR
I
,
- v ' = gh, - gh 2 OR
PA - PB = 1980 N / m
A Ii OR the pr es su re in na rro w pip e wh er e strea m lines are closer
• th at
OR v/ ,
= g( h - hj)
'
I :I
cui SHu.ii iu m
'
tlu »\ .1 ) -M ill
pu mp
mu r.cm u * This sh ow s
sm al ler th an wi de r pipe. Thus
n
Hows • .- let note U
I .
WrtHtt llUlltllt,., together is
OR y / = 2 g ( h , - h,)
~
titop ''
tnp iitS SU Ce tto
.
\isi .
afA v
,
f W he re sj ee d is hig h , the pr es su re wi ll be low .
iiti tluueUm: I
ws ^ 7
l How a dy na m ic lift is pr od uced in an ae roplane ?
OR
This is
v . - yjZgih - h

Torricelli s theorem .
'
) (3)
. '
the side IIIIK: I he m l«u,
w iei lOiU-l uu mui a« *,«
' '
IP1 < itt i U t; luwHl » ’
'" '
pitU P
l .wlitlti.
ut(» vi ^ 1
iAns2 - e
Note ' Lift on an aero pl an
on an ae rop lan e is du e to the eff ec t, where sp ee d of fluid
The speed of efflux is independent of the direction of flow whether the KMH.ANATION: Th e lift
, its pr es su re wi ll be low .
opening is directed upward, downward, or horizontally.
AI the coiuirjciKm is high
v. duals IS Iircilllf inj
Speed of efflux of liquid is the some as the speed of the ball that falls Explanation
freely under the force of gravity through a height ( h, h:).
'
-
' shown in figure, this K .E . would
pressure
there lore, ilk ur
the lube.
-.
Mil,ill
iWm The design of wi
• St rea m
ng
lin es
de fle
are
cts
clo
the
se r
air
tog
in
eth
su
er
ch
ab
a
ov
wa
e
y tha
the
t
wi ng tha n low er . tdtimr
• If the hole is po int ed upwa rd as at B
Air is mo ve s fas ter at the upper side of the win g tha n the low er sid e .
allow the liquid to rise to the level of the water tank . the top of the win g .
Pressure is lower at
a In practice, viscous energy losses would change the result to some extent . nc es a ne t up wa rd for ce.
Hence, the wing experie
Q.10 What is relation between pressure and speed of fluid in a horizontal Q.12 ' Ho w sw ing pr od uc ed in a ten nis ba ll?
Deflection force
pipe system ? .
Faster air

-
lower pressure

—
Swinging of a ball
right ( sh 0wn in figure) in
Relation between Speed and Pressure of the Fluid
I
--
r
If here the speed is high , the pressure * */// he low. ^ *
Proof
Suppose that water flows thr ou gh a ho riz on ta l pip e sy ste m as sh ow n in fig ur e. >« »
“*• ol
Slower air.
higher praaaura
The area of cross - section of the pipe at A is greater tha n the are a of cr os -
s se cti on at B due to friction between the ball and the air
sic) e. Spinning ball
According to equ atio n of co nti nu ity . Th e sp ee d of flu id at B is gre ate r tha n at A. The speed of air at one side of the ball * smaiie r tha n tha t at the 0
Applying Bernoulli' s equation at points A and B, we have
In this case, the pressure at one side of ba ei
—
Pn 4-
1
|U , pglf , In * IHII P£l» i
*
I; other side.
This gives an fytro curvature to the ball nown
. cuutntt wh ich de ce ive s an

opponent player . —
Where [ 5 13
.
P v = pressure of water at A ^ What li venturi relation? Explain
Pft = pressure of water at B
vA
vQ
= sp
-
ee d of wa

P = density of water
As the pipe system is ho riz
ter

on
at

tal,
A
speed of water at B

th er ef or e
= 1000 kg/m
i

h = hQ. Hence average P. E . is same at

1
Vanturl Relation

*
. . .^
Unt of door au of pr ssur
hodiontal pipe Is called venturi efft
* uPPosa that an Ideal fluid flows t ^
,
th lnere0»

# or
^ iio
of
ni al pi
w/otW of
Pe
* yS
th e flu id In

as shown In

both en ds . So equatio n ( i ) be co m es
222

area of cross - section of the pipe at At is greater than the area of cross-
Chapter
SiS sD, - cboU
^ rJ PH
v YSICS - XI (Subjective ) 223

- “ - c-
pres sure ( BP)

r:r
section at A; Bloo d
»a « *
The speed of fluid at A > is greater than
Ap plying Berno ull i '
s eq ua tio n at po ints
at
A
Aj
an
.
d
( By
B ,
eq
we
ua
ha
tion
ve
of con tinu ity ]
The
vess, el ood vessels are not rigid .
“ »
T

p»
1 ,
pv
*2 ' •
M >*
Sht =
I
P2 + ~Pvi + P«h : ( 1)
. Bl
under
the ve
no
ss
rm
els
al
inf
co
lat
nd
ed
itio ns, the
at all times.
volume of the blood is sufficient o keep
Where
P: = pressure of fluid at wide part of the pipe
. so the pre ss ure
atmospheric pressure.
of the blood inside the vessels is greater than Do vou know ?
Blood pressure is a
P ? = pressure of fluid at narrow part ( called throat ) of the pipe
Vi = speed of fluid at wide part
. During each heart beat, BP varies between a maximum ( systolic ) and a
minimum (diastolic) pressure.
measurement of the force
applied to the wails of the
arteries as the heart
-
v = speed of fluid at narrow part
A pers on ' s blo od pre ssu re is usu ally exp ressed in ter ms of the sys tolic pumps blood through the
p = density of fluid " er dia sto lic pre ssu re ( mmHg) , for example 120 / 80. body . The pressure is
pressure ov
As th£ pipe system is horizontal, therefore h = h. ,
Hence average P . E is same at both ends So equation ( 1 ) becomes
»1 Systolic Pressure .- determined by the force
and amount of blood
• it represent the ma -
xim um pre ssu re exe rte d wh en the he art contracts. pumped , and the size and

.^ 1
p + pvr = p
1
'
1
ftSftr 7
'
^
1 )
*
* %!
*•
* S
• The va lue
Diastolic Pressur
of nig

It repres
h blo od pre ss

the m
ure ( sys tol ic pre ssu re ) is 120 torr

m pressure in the arteries when the heart is at

flexibility of the arteries.

1 2 • For \ our information

P l - P2 = -
2
pVj - 2l> vi rest . Blood pressure is usually
(dia sto lic pre ssu re ) is ab ou t 75 - 80 torr .
measured while you are
• The value of low bli iressure
seated with your arm resting
OR P i - P2 = - P ( v; - v ; ) J2 ) Note de cre as e In the on a table. Your arm should
of blo od pre ss ure Inc rea se s with ag e du e to
fin d e speed of fluid Th e va lue be slightly bent so that it is
Th is is ca lle d ve ntu ri rel ati on wh ich us ed in ven tur i me ter to t ^ flexibility of vessels. at the same level as your
Special case heart. Your upper arm
Unit of blood pressure should be bare , with your
If A! » A 2 therefore, vj « v ?. as ure d in tor r or mm of Hq .
The blood pressure is me sleeve comfortably rolled
Then, according to equation of continuity Relation between torr and pascal up.
AjVi = A 2 v 2
1 torr = 133 3Pa = 133 -3 N/mj
A,
OR v.1 = — - \ = 0 . Measurement of Blood Pressure
pre ss ure of blo od dy na mi ca lly in the ve sse ls.
t AI / Sphygmomanometer is used to me as ur e the
Hence equation ( 2 ) becomes, Steps to measure blood pressure
P i - P2 = \ p(vj 2
- 0) : Ijinm than systolic pressure
, the ve ssels fal l down . .
- pv 22 ( 3)
• W he n the ex ter na l pr es su re be co me s
Pi - Pj * • The flow of blood is cut off .
• Head of a stethoscope is pla ce d ov er the artery .
Venturi- meter of ve n u Systolic pressure .ua.. y
spee d is ca lle d ventu ri meter rkmg principle pre ss ure gra
The devic e wh ich me asure s the flu id the ex ter na l
venturi relation
? it can be me as ur ed dy na mica lly ?
' Op en the release va
,
lve
• \yhTn externa pressure becomes
to de cre as e
eq ua l to sj«{ o« ^ re ss ur e, the ve ss el

Q.14 What do yo u kn ow ab ou t blo od pre ss ure Ho w

opens a little bit ing of ve ss el wi th hig h
of the na rro w op en
Blood Flow 1
A first surge of blood flo ws ou t
5 120 - Sgeed .
tu rb ul eiL
Biood B
As the flow sp eed is high, so the flow is -

• Blood is an incompressible fluid | 80 > u

Density of blood is nearly equal to that of ater. £ 40
Viscosity of blood increa se s th re e fiv e tin tha t of wa ter du e 0.
• to ” One beat
1
to hig h co nc entra tio n of .
1 blo c ce lls i. 30 %) Time ( )•
 £ PHYSICS - XI (Subjective)
224
^ Pter 6 [pi
225

Diastolic pressure
Now decreas e the externa l pressur e further till it Multiple Choice Questions
becomes equal to diastolic pressure .
• The vessel gets normal. possible answers to each statement are f>iven below. Tick

^.
( S) the correct answer :
The blood flow changes from turbulent to laminar
jrnur
The gurgle in the stethoscope disappears. falling body is doubled, then what will be effect on its terminal velocity ?
radius of
This is time to record diastolic pressure . I
If the
(a) Increase by 2 times (b) Decreases by 2 times
'r

(c) Increases by 4 times \ (d ) Decreases by 4 times

meter high tank is full of water. A hole appears at its middle. The speed of efflux be:
A ten
2.
FORMULAE] (3 ) 5 ms ' (b) 10 ms ’
-1
(c) loo ms ’ ( d) . 5.11 ms

The maxim um drag force on a falling sphere is 9.8 N . Its real weight is :
l Drag force F- 67trqv 3.
I N W 9 '8
N
(a )
J
2 Terminal velocity of fog droplet V1=
^
6THT|
vt «
—9il r * (C) 4.
The effect of decrease in pressure with
increase in
( d)
speed
0.0 N
of the fluid in a horizon tal tube is known as:
V .
4
( b ) Torricel li' s theorem
3 Equation of continuity —t constant Av = constant A|V 1 = A 2 VJ (a ) Bernoulli ' s effect
Equatio n of continuity
Viscosity effect ( d )
(C)

^
2
4 Bernoulli's equation P, +
J PVJ +Pgb, “Pj + Pv:+P8h: P+ pv +pgh=constant 5 . The SI unit of flow rate is:
-1
(a) m s
; 1 - ( b ) ms

5
Torricelli's Theorem
/ ,
v 2 ~> 2g(h *h 2 ) (c) m s ’
3 ( d ) m s 3 ~ J

.
( speed of efflux )
increase s , the viscosity of the gases
When the temperature
6 Venturi's relation P -P
^ PC - vf )
^ %
(a)
( c)
Decreases
Remains constant
"Dynamic lift" is related to:
( a) Bernoulli's theorem
(b)
( d

(b )
)
Increases
None of these

Archimedes' principle
(d ) Pascal's law
(c ) Equation of continuity the roof is:
. The force due to the gale on
A gale [ i.e., very strong wind] blows over a house
(b) In the upward direction
( a) In the downward direction
( d) horizontal
(c ) Zero
With increase in temperature , the viscosity of. decreases
gas increase s and a liquid
increase s ( b ) A
(a ) A gas decreas es and a liquid
gas ' s and liquid ' s increase
( d ) Both
(c) Both gas' s and liquid's decrease propor tional to:
moving with a speed v is
The viscous drag on a small sphere
(b) Vv
(a) v
1 Id ) v ’
(C >
^
Two fog droplets have radius of 2 • 3 . their terminal velocit
( b)
ies are:
A:6
(a) 4: 9
 IV

PHYS ICS - XI (Subjective)

lar ' s 227
(c) 2 :9 (d) 4:3 Scho
12 . Which one Is the venturi relation ?
A A
l
v: = \ 2g(h, - h:)
(a) (b)
' .
Q 6.1
Explain what do you understand by the term viscosity?
(Lhr 2004, Fsd 2005, Mir Pur
-
2004 2006, Ihr 2010 2011,GrwJon)
-
(C) A,V, = AjV, (0 ) None of these Viscosity
Art
*•
1

viscosity of a fluid is the measure of its resIsSancejoJlow . It is the frictional effect between different
IX Laminar flow usually occurs at:
layers of a flowing fluid.It measures that how much force is required to dide one layer of the liquid
( a) High speed (b ) Low speed anothe r layer.
over
Is meant by drag force / hat are the factors upon which drag force acting upon a small sphere
(cl Very high speed (d) None of these .Q 6.2 What r moving down through a liquid, depend?
of radius
.
The SJ unit of co-efficient of viscosity Is
Ans .
Drag Force ( Federal 2004, Mtn 2009 )

An object moving through a fluid experienc es a retarding force called drag force .
( a) Kgm VJ *
(b) Kgm V ’

J
Factors
(c) According to Stoke' s lav d ag force is given by,
'
Nsm ( d) Both b & c
15 - J
The relation between Nm and torr is ‘
F = 6 TI qr v
'2
.a 1 torn = 13.33 Nm lb) 1 torr = 133.3 Nm 'J
This eq jation shows that drag force depends upon
(c - ton- = 1333.0 Nm 1
’
( d) 1 torr = 1.333 Nm
J '
i) of sphere ( v )
speed

16 . * u d speed changes if the diameter of a pipe is increased to double ?

now the ‘ ii) radius of sphere (r)
iii ) coefficient of viscosity of medium( ri)
s Re ^ s n same (b) Increases to double ?
Q.6.3 Why fog droplets appear to be suspend ed in air
c Reduces to ha (d) None of these (Federal 2003, Mir Pur -
2003 2009 .
Sgd 2005, Mtn 2004 .
Rwp 2006 ,

T7 - h"gh concentration of red blood cells increases the viscosity of blood from -
Fsd 2005 2008 , Bwp 2007 Grw 2009 .
Lhr 2010- 2011)

(a) 2-3 times that of water (b) 3-5 times that of water Ans . Reason
(c) 5 -7 times that of water
(
2- 4 bm es that o water ( d) Terminal velocity of a fog droplet is
18. For which position, will the maximum blood pressure in the body have the smal est value mg
vt =
= Stand ng up right (b ) Lying horizontal 6 xr )T
c
’

-
Stand . g on one's head ( d) Sitting relaxed
aTg ««• ^^
19 The value os piooo pressure _ with age. AS the weight of droplet
Thus, terminal velocity is
Is
^ Vm
small and
very
!L
hence *1
the droplet appears to be suspende
a creases
' (b) Decreases turbulent flow ?
and
: Renan same ( d) .
“ c ' e of these
Q-64 Explain the difference between laminar flow
( Federal 2004, Mir Pur 2004, Mtn 2005
L Ur 2008, Bwp 2008, Grw 2003 - 2008. Lhr 2009 )

20 . Sphygmomanometer b used to measure

a r JA soeec fb 3!ood pressure
ic B*tood density d) Bothb & c

/- o c ?5 of its applications ’
JM and describe some
.
i c .
2 b 3. b 4. a 5. c 6. b 7 a. 8. b -
9 b
^ State the Bernoulirs relation for a liquid In motion
( lhr 2009. Grw 200 1
*
20. b
II a - 12. a .
I3 b I4. d J5. .
16 d 17. h 18. b 19. a
ns.
* Bernoulli' s relation
por an idea! fluid, the sum of pressure '
e and the potential energy per un4
ema ins constant
volume at any point along a streamlint ilwayi '

1
 V

228

,»
s pHYSICS - XI (Subjective )
i 229
P f — pv -f pgh = constant
Explain the working of a carburetor of a motorcar using Interesting Information
Applications Q.6.10 principle.
Bernoulli's Air
0) The swing of ball (ii) Lift on an aeroplane ( Rwp 2005,Grw 20ii)
( iii) Working of carburetor ( iv ) Blood flow Working of carburetor
Ans - t / uer~
,
Almonolinno
Q .6.6 A person is standing near a fast moving train. Is there any danger that he will fa || The carburetor of car engine uses a venturi duct to feed the erfwnuf
*
«l «Kjrn
*
I
- 2004, Lhr 2005 - 2008, D. G,Khan 2005, Bwp 2004,Grw 2005, Fsd “ '"' ards ?
j
correct mixture of air and petrol to the cylinders .
/
Ans. •
( Sgd 2003
Yes . there is danger that he will fall towards the train.
2004 )
Air passes through the duct and along a pipe to the cylinders,
Gas
1
Reason petrol is mixed with air by a small valve at the side of duct .
air through the duct moves very fast which produces low .
Ihfi carburetor of i rjtt ringing u ».o -.
The
wun.
When fast moving train passes near the person, speed of air between train and the n Vonlun dud 10 thn oorw.l mi/
pers
According to Bernoulli's relation pressure in the duct It draws petrol vapours into the air stream. » .
of air and pulfol to *> r.ylu /Wr A.«r
ift drawn dirouqfi IM duo tint) ai* »nq
a pip* In ft - n cytiOdom A tiny trtlwt lit
where the speed of fluid is high, pressure will be low . . *
It ** of durj ift M with petrol
For which position will be maximum blood pressure ( systolic fhc air thrr/ jqh the dud movoft vary
So pressure between train and the person decreases Hence large pressure behind 0,6.11 , ( a) standing up faV C/ Mtimj Iw prtwcure In t>*l
the Person pressure «) 1 the body having the smallest value duct , whitch dram patrol vapour into
him towards the tram . pi«U, horizontally ( d ) Standing on one ' s tbr» -
right, ( b ) sitting ( c) lying Uroarn

<X 6.7 Identify the correct answer . What do you infer from Bernoulli' s theorem?
( Grw 2010)
(i ) Where the speed of the fluid is high the pressure will be low ?
(ii )
( iii)
Where the speed of the fluid is high the pressure is also high?
This theorem is valid only for turbulent flow of the liquid ?
Ans. The correct answer is (c)
^
(; t ) standing upright , systolic pressure has maximum value in the
neck
( b ) Same as above
(Mtn 2004, Mir Pur W;
systolic pressure has maximum value in the legs
( d) In thi . -
c » se, the .
Ans . ' tatement ( j) is the correct answer
/
major arteries in the leg ever be greater
pressure In
0,6.12 In an orbiting space station, would the blood
OAJ . H fwo row boats moving parallel in the samr * direction nre puller! towards ^ach other. Explain? than the blood pressure In major arteries in the neck ?
Ans. Reason
2006) .
( O G.Khan

Ac epend of water bet ween the t wo boats Increases 15o/ According to Bernoulli's relation Ans . blood pressure would be same.
where the speed of fluid h high, Its pressure will he low .
.
be, prev ur * - b * -i / / - eo die two boats derreoses , Hew « * procure difference is produce d which pullsir *
IrTa -.
orbiting pace Nation, everything Is In state ol wlahilSiiDSii
So, pressure will be same in major
‘ arteries of both in neck and legs.
boats towards each other .
(Bwp 7003, federal 2005 , Mir Pur 2006 2009, Grw 7009 2010, Lhr 2010 2011,On
* Solved Exercises
O f> . 0

Ans .
f / plain, how the swing Is produced In a fast moving cricket hall ?
( f darral 7W>, f ul )< /> , f j f , Kf ,.,n 2005, Bwp 200 /, I hr 7009 )
"
bwmg in a Cfickfrt ball
*
.
UcfioMlon forcJ
f , i Ir air.
love urrt'i*4 fif «; 4^ -
lilftmnle ft. I

blvin Data;
A tiny water
terminal velocity. (liven that „ -
droplet of radius 0.010c
for air * .
d«c«nd« through ir
19 a ‘
hK m - high
,*
and dcn ty of water p 1000 kgm

it ', d I l f Mitt broorne - greater ..

When tip * ball movoc forwards ac well a ;* spins, tin- speed of air on
- „
/ Ofr p ui d to || - other
-
/ rr o lifig ^
RudillN Oi water droplcl r 0.010
1
cm - I . O x i o ’ m

.. —
13criuily of water p 1000 kgm
to Bernoulli ' relation,
where the speed of fluid It high, Its pressure will he low . VisLonity of air r \ 19 * It) ksm s
" '
ul Find;
bo af dial Mde, tin po v.UH - of air < . wra A- ner fm < . . 4- .
Tfjis
gives n Mjr / . , un Splnn rtj
' I ertninal velocity , V
^
deceives the batsman.
’ to the ball ' * ' d swing, ( his which (
filiation:
v

Iermiiuil velocity IN Riven by

V '
 : «*

230 Chapter g
PHYSICS - XI (Subjective) 231
Vl « ish m i
9T1

Putting values, we get

v* —t ^ A x p ~~r

values , wet get

2 x 9 . 8 xCl . 0 x l 0 ) x 1000
4 2
V(
— 9 x 19 x I 0 '6
"
putting
v= 0.5 x
1
4
3.14 xlO xlOOO "

2 ~
x 9.8 x I 0 x 101
8
,
v= 6
0.5
9 x 19 x 10 '
v*
vt - 19.6 x 10
171 x l O
vt = 0.11 x 10ms-
'

1
~
6
8
|v »
0.314
1.6 ms- i

Or v , = 1.1 m/sec IBBBIH EB

VVater flows down hill through a closed vertical funnel. The flow speed at the top is 12.0 ems . The '

speed at the bottom is twice the speed at the top. If the funnel is 40 cm long and the pressure at
flow
the top is 1.013 x 105 Nm 1 w hat is the pressure at the bottom ?
'

A water hose w ith an internal diameter of 20 mm at the outlet discharges 30 kg of water in 60i Given Data: 1 1
= vj = 12 ems = 0.12ms
" "

speed of water at top

Calculate the water speed at the outlet . Assume the density of water is 1000 kgm 3 and its (ion Flow
v 2 = 2 vt = 2 x 0.12 = 0.24 ms- i
, affg speed of water at bottom =
steady. . Flow
Given Data : Length of the funnel = h = hi - h2 = 40 cm = 0.40 m
Pressure at the top = Pi = 1.013 x 10 sNm
Internal diameter of water hose = d = 20mm = 0.02m 3
Density of water = p = 1000 kgm
"

d 002
Internal radius of water hose = r = =0.0 lm To Find:
2 -2
Pressure at the bottom - P2 - ?
Mass of water = m = 30 kg
Calculation :
Time taken = t = 60s According to Bernoulli ' s equation
Density of water = p = 1000 kgm -3
I
^
2
Pi + p v + pg/? i = P 2 + P v2 + Pgfo
To Find : 2 i 2
Speed of water = v = ? or P2 = Pi + pg(hi - h 2) + | P ( v -v )
2

Calculation:
2
or P2 = P , + pgh + p (v - vj )
Mass flow per second = —
t
Putting values, we get
30 2
— = 0.5 kgs -1
P2 = (1.013 x 10 ) + ( 1000 x 9.8 x 0.40
? ) + -* 1000 x ( ( 0.12)2
- (0.24 ) )
60
Cross sectional area = A = K r
2 s
P2 = 1.013 x 10 + 3920 + 500 (0.0144 0.076 ) -
4
= 3.14 * (0.01 )* = 3.14 * 10 m 2 *
P2 = 1.013 x 10s + 3920 + 500 (-0.0432)
P2 = 1.013 x 10s +3920 - 21.6
From equation of continuity
Av = Rate of flow

Or Av =
volume
-
Pj 1.01.3 x 105 + 3898.4
P 2 = 1.013 x 105 + 0.0389 x 10
!

sec P 2 = ( 1.013 + 0.0389) x 10*

3
Thus, Av “
mass
As volume •
fasi
.
DC ry
1.05 X 10 NrrT ’
see 'density
Or v - Mass
Sec area * dm.
1
 Exercise Problems
6.1 Certain globular protein particle has density of 1246 kgm-3. 11 Or
2
ri v I
2 falls thro
water( 7 j = 8.0 x 1 CP Nm s ) with a terminal speed of 3.0 cm h \ Find the ugh d, 2
^ radius ofth h —— V .=
Given Data: eHit
3
Density of protein particle = p=T 246kgm '

Co- efficient of viscosity = r|=8.0 x 10^ Nm 2 s ’

Terminal velocity = v ( =3.Ocmh = 3 ' 1

!
= 8.33 xl 0 ^ m /s putting values, we g
100 x 60 x 60
To find: . 2 _ ( 1 X 10 X 2
) (l )
Radius of particle = r =? 21
Calculations: 22
d =4.76 xl 0 6 '

2 3
I As v 2gr p d 2 = 2.18xl 0 m '

9T| d 2 =0.2cm
Or
9T1V,
Or r 2 -
2 pg 6.3 The pipe near the lower end of a large water storage tank develops a small leak and a stream of
Putting values, we get .
water shoots from it The top of water in tank is 15 m above the point of leak.
2 9 x 8_xl (r4
x 8.33 x l r
( 6 a) with what speed does the water rush from the hole?
2
b ) If the hole has an area of 0.060 cm , how much water flows out in one second ?
‘
2 x 1246 x 9.8
'

2
Given Data:
r =2.46 xl 0 12 '

Height of water above leak point = h 15 m =

V
r= 2.46 x 10 ‘ 12
To find:
2
Area of the hole = A = 0.06cm = 0.06 x 10 m
4 2 "

h.

r= 1.567 xl (V* Speed of water =v = ?

r= 1.56 10 m
x 6 '
V
Volume of water flow per second = ? (i.e. flow rate) r
t h( =o
6.2 Water flows through a hose, whose internal diameter is 1 cm at a speed of lm /s. What should
= , ,
h h *h

the diameter of the nozzle if the water is to emerge at 21 m /s ? Calculations:

(a) According to Torricelli’ s theorem
Given Data:
Internal diameter of hose = d , 2
= l cm = l 10 m
x ' W2g(hrM
-
v= >/2 gh
Speed of water in the hose =v , = 1 ms l
Putting values , we get
Speed of water emergence =v 2 = 21 ms - l V">/ 2*9.8 x 15
To find: v**>/294
Diameter of the nozzle =d 2 =? v lTjUm/s
Calculations: Or ^
Ivl 7m/s|
According to equation f

IVI =AJV 2
ntinuit )

ai td
d 0» Rate of flow
—
V volume of w»ter flow pet itc
• - .Av
2 Rate of flow •Av
 ; 'w
1 SIS
! V . X

1
' '
V>. •
- •

\9R
A
•
•
Th
,
yWbS; BU
’
,
' . .<
- rnrt*.
,w
-1
-S
•
kW
234
PHYSICS ~ XI (Subjective )
235
= 0.06 x 10^ x 17 h , * h:= h ( say )
= 102 X 10 /MV
6 “

Hence volume of water flowing oui per second i .e.

*

find :
To
’ pressure difference = P2 - P| = AP = ?
Rate ot flow = 102cm /sec
’

:
ra|culations
According io Bernoulli ’ s equation
6.4 Water is flowing smoothly through a closed pipe system. At one point the speed of
v er
1
while at another point 3.0m higher , the speed is 4.0 ms . If the pressure is 80 kPa
at
fru no 1

What is pressure at the upper point? lower N

<
Given Data :
H
= v , = 3 ms
-I
Speed of water at one point
i
Speed of water at second point v 2 4 ms = = •

6 (1
; 3m
Difference of height between two points ho - hi = 3 -
,=
p
'

.
= x xl ( 450
29 ( ) 2
— ) ( 410) 2

= O . .45( 202500 — 168100)

Pressure at lower point = P 80 kPa = 80,000 Pa V

To find: t

Pressure at upper point = P2 ? = = 0.645( 34400 )

Calculation : = 22188Pa
According to Bernoulli ’ s theorem
= 22.188x 103Pa

^. ^
: Pgh P; - Pl = 22 kPa
Pi + PV + Pghi =P:+ Pv: + ;

^
Or p’_ = p + PV |2 ' PV +PghrPghj 6.6 The radius of the aorta is about 1.0 cm and the blood flowing through it has a speed of about
2 1
the blood in the capillaries using the fact that although
30cm . Calculate
"
the average speed of
: :
P; =P| + p | - : )- pg ( h , -h| )
v 4
millions of them so that
( 8 xl 0 are literally
"

~ V each capillary has a diameter of about cm , there

2
Putting values , we get their total cross section is about 2000cm .
Given Data:
P: = 80000 +| xl 000 3
( : - 42 ) -
1000 x 9.8 x 3
=
Radius of aorta ri = 1 cm 1 X 1 CT m
2
= 2
= 80000 + 500( 9 -16) - 29400 Speed of inflowing blood = V| = 30 cm/s = 30 x 11 m/s )
~W
= 80000 + 4500 - 8000 - 29400 = 84500 - 37400 Total cross sectional area = A: = 2000 cm = 2000 " x 10
2

= 47100
0.2 m =
Average diameter of capillary = d: = 8 x 10 cm = 8 x 10 m
4 "

= 47.1 x 10 '

Pa To find:
P, = 47 kPa Average speed of blood = v 2 =?
the top of the wing is Calculations:
6.5 An airplane wing is designed so that when the speed of the air across bet veen
' the pressure difference L ' Applying equation of continuity
1
450 ms , the speed of air below the w ing is 410 nts . W hat is
the top and bottom of the wings ’ ( Density of air = ( 1 . 2 9 kgm )
=
A, v, A 2v 2
A , v,
Given Data:
or v 2 =
A2
Speed of air on the upper surface = v , i 50ms = nr,i'xv i
Vn =
A:
“ '""g values , we get
 V
"V
-.
< <»
1

236
PHYSICS - XI (Subjective )
V
_ 3.14 x ( lxlQ
0.2
-Yx 30 xl ( : r
of air past the lower surface =v =160 / ,
'
Speed ms
3.14 x 30 x 10" !
Density of air = p = 1.29kgm
'

0.2 of wing = h 2 -h , = lm
942 xlO Thickness
= 471 x 10 ° :
0.2 fo f» Dtl
= 4.71 x 10 = 5 x ms
4
| ( )
4
' ( Approx ) Speed of air over the upper surface jying =v 2 =9 w
Cg cul
) ® t »ons:
6.7 How large must a heating duct he if air moving 3.0 m/s along it can replenish the According to Bernoulli ’s equation
na
300 m ' volume every 15 min ? Assume the air’s density remains constant. P+ , Ipv, +pgh =Pl +ipv
J
3
J
+pgh 2
Given Data : L m

^
-i
Speed of air = v = 3ms Or P, - P2 = P(vl - v|) + pg( hI - h 1 )
Volume of air = =V 300 / / ? ^ Putting values
\, wc
kk get ' K - '

Time = t = = 15 x 60 = 900 sec

15 min
To find: I
1000 =
2
’
- X 1 ,29( vj - (160) ) + (1.29X9.8X1)

Size of ihc duct = r = ? ( i .e . radius of duct ) 1

1000 = - X 1.29( Vj - 25600) + 12.64
Calculation: 2
volume ( area of cross section ) (speed of the fluid ) ix 1.29( v\ - 25600)
As Rate of flow = = - 1000 - 12.46 =
lime
987.54 = ( 0.645Xv 2 - 25600)
Rate of How = —
V
t
= Av 987.54
0.645
= v 3
a 25600 -
V
Rate of flow = —t = TIT
"
v 1531.07 + 25600 = vj

V
i y
\ = 2.7 xl 04
Or r= Vj = 164.71
IX 7TXV 1
Or v 2 = 165ms '

Putting values, we get a stream from a Ere hose connected to the

6.9 What gauge pressure is required in the city mains for
300 2
r =
900 x 3.14 x 3 mains to reach a vertical height of 15.0m?
2 300 Given Data:
r =
2
8478
Vertical height = =h h h 2 - Ah 15 m ,-
r =0.0354
Density of water = p=1000 kgm
r = 0.188m = 0.19 m To find .
r » 19cm
AP ?
** -
|r = 19 cml I Pressure difference = 2 P Pj
moving air on the wM ofabo , P pfadtti
6.8 An airplane design calls for a lift due to the net force of the floW ons:
Nm of wing area. Assume that air flows past the
2 '
wing
1
of an aircraft with
required
strea
sp overtb * uPjJ Using Bernoulli ’s equation
speed of flow past the lower wing surface is 160 ms what , is'
the

^
‘2 1.29kgm and as PlVjJ + p h
surface to give a lift of 1000 Nm ? The density of air Is ~ 1
Pi Pvl P8hi
+ + = Pj + 8 3 '

ins same throughou t iu

speed of stream remains
thickness of wing to om net re . area so the
that the pipe is of uniform cross sectiona l
Given Data: 0
r : SoVl «v
^2= V)(say)
Pressure difference on the w » % P, - = 1000N/m

A
 Thu .* IV ipfcll
,
l > . 1 » fij? h , w,h
o» l > . I> , PK < h , 1 « , )

^
Putting value* , wr jtrl
&9WAT 7
*
IV \\ IOUOXV . S( IS )
Or

= OSCILLATIONS
1

f
IV ! 47OO0Nrn
~
Or (AP*l 47 x 1O^Pa

Scholar ’s YjtCUrtl

PHYSICS (Objective )
t

.
1
Investigate the motipn of > oscil ator using experimental, anal /tical and graphical methods
cj
'

Understand and describe that when an object moves

diameter o' the circle is simple harmonic.
in circle the motion of its projection or tne

Are also available 3-

4-
Show that the motio/i o;
mass attached to a spring is simple harmonic.
Jnders’.and that the motion of simple pendulum is simple harmonic and to calculate its time period.
Understand and use the terms amplitude, time period, frequency, angular frequency ad phase
difference.
Understand and use the terms amplitude, time period, frequency, angular frequency ana pnase

difference.
Describe the inter change between kinetic and potential energies during SHM.
Describe practical examples of free and forced oscillations.
with particular reference to the effects of the
Describe practical examples of damped oscillations
damping in cases such as car suspension system.
degree of damping and the importance of critical
240
PHYSICS XI (Subjective)

Chapter No. 7 oscillatory Mot ion

,
rid fr 0 on
moit ° f a body ab( ut « me n P 0si
“ ,
hn « catted oscillatory or
library motion .
O <u
period ic Mot ion
8DCa r*- < oscillatory motion that repeats itself after equal intervals of time Is called
O Oi The
c/a 2
§ periodic motion S
J2
GO Q .C of vibrating bodies
Examples
The motion of mass suspended from a spring
<u
o
C
G .
-O -o
O CL/>
1*
2. The motion of bob of a simple pendulum
.
r
t I2
C
o
tsi
m if!
* ^* «
u n iTr
3. A steel ruler clamped at one end to a bench oscillates when the free
end is displaced sideways
111*
<L> rrl TO

a 4' A steel ball rolling in a curved dish

-a
.2 UE
t/i Restoring force (Vibrating objects)

*
* 4l 4Bl The force whic h bring s the Syste m back to its stabl e equil ibriu m posit ion is Fig. 7.1
O §-3 called elas tic resto ring force.
ON . 2 *
> &
c
GO S
Cu 35 '
1

fc Mathematically *
£ <u n
a
•
O !“
i-i * 5 F = - kx
H,
CL
O
a
03
u u
V)
»
--
'Ll
00
2
£ It is equa l and oppo site to the applied force
u o tn
cr. C a c
c
u o
o
3
S CG o
o
o How to produce oscillation
C/3
E IS
2-
)
C
z o t/3
Jb>
«r

2-
s
5^
28
= 13 £ 5: In order to get oscillation;
O c > +
|x ui A body is pulled away on one side from its equi libriu m posit ion and then
u m ST3 £<
released .
o o E
13 ^
EP The body begins to oscillate (vibrate ) due to restoring force.
a
O -
q \D
a
o
3
U if UJ
<u
r
Unde the action of this resto ring force
passes over the rest position due to inertia.
, the body acce lerat es and it

a
O

ao
Q
o
Hi1
ll 1 i ic i ui
The restoring force pulls it back .
direc ted towa rds the mea n posit ion, so
-
•
0 Since restoring force is always
«.B a 3 the acceleration is also directed towa rds the mea n posit ion.

Is li
o -s
1 Requirements for oscillation
c
o 8
3
ie-u
C "
S Tw requirements for oscillations are
i .s
CG
°
I
2
s .9 < 1- Oscillating system has restoring force -
2 - Oscillating system has inertia
c ‘S " GO
Note
string produces waves.
if \ r
vibrating bodies produce waves , e.g. A violin conce pt of
on the
ere are many phenomena in nature, which are explained
8e
1 l|
^
cj c
6 2
* 0
struc tures sue
ancj
E
I 1 ration and waves. There are many large
£ If
thes e
^
II
•M
£>
s
H
ia 1 *
. 1 ees,
which appears to be rigid. They actually « rat
facts, so the architects and engineers take into account these
designing and
* vibra tions, while

Q
building of certain structure.
 242 ,s PHYSICS - XI (Subjective)
243
Q.i Define Hook's law and simple harmonic motion? What Is restoring
Restoring Force
force, derive the relation for acceleration of mass attached with a Elastic which brings the body bock towards its
mean position is coiled eiostic
spring? deforce
'^ ' force is represented a F, is
OS Th ere
storing
0» h
Hook's Law K
sign sho ws that Fr is directed opposite to x.
According to Hook' s law, within elastic limit, the applied force is directly The peg
ative
~

mas s Is rele ased , it begins to oscillate about the equilibrium position

proportional to the displacement.'Mathematically yVhen the
In figure, such type of oscillations are due to restoring force and
-+ -» as shown
F cc x inertia
. This type
for
of
acc
osci
eler
llato
atio n
ry mot ion is calle d simple harmonic motion .

OR F=k x 0)
.
expression
The acceleration a produced in the massm due to restoring force can be calculated using
second law of motion
Where k is constant of proportionality, known as spring constant. f
— e

Spring Constant F - ma ( 2)

equations <i) and i

( |, we get
It spring constant is defined as the force per unit extension . Its SI unit is Nm
1
and Comparing
k j
dimension is (MT ] .
2
. m a = -k x

. Simple Harmonic Motion a

k -x
m
The oscillatory motion, in which acceleration of the body at any.Jnptant is
directly proportional to displacement from the mean position andfflFrectcd a= - constant r
towards the mean position , is called simple harmonic motion
Examples
a« x - Hence proved )

Define the ollow ing term s related to SHM.

1- Motion of simple pendulum
( a ) Wave form of S.H.M. ( b ) lnstantaneous displacement Movwnent of Paper
2- Motion of mass attached to a spring.
(c ) Amplitude ( d) Vibration
3- Motion of a swing.
( e) Tune period ( f)Frequency .
UH - frrfi
Tt S
Conditions for SHM
\g ) Angular Frequency
1. The system must have inertia .
2. The system must obey Hook' s law
<#
- h-
p; .H
-
3 The system should have elastic restoring force Wave form of SHM
with time is calle d wav e from
4~ The system should be frictionless The curve representing the variation displacement
of SHM,
explanation
Show that motion of mass attached with a spring Is SHM.
Q. 2
Con
Cac
sid
hed
er a mass spring system
with mass m form
with
the
vert
trace on
ical arra
the
ngem
strip of
ent
pap
in
er
suc
mov
h a
n
way
g at
that
con stan.
pen
t

* oeed from right to left . the

obta ined whic h show s
Motion of Mass attached to a spring sine curv e is
can ^ Provides a time scale on the strip. The
Conside r a mas s m attac hed with on end of the spri ng. The mas s n
* ^nation of displacement with time.
move freeiy on a frictionless horizontal surface as shown in figure cahed wave form of SHM.
n po ’ion by a
'

' 1

repr esen t the extreme

When mass m is disp lace d through a dist anc e x from mea he Point A, C and E show its mean position wbile B and D
force F then,

—
Position.
Accord - ng to Hook' s law.

to elasticity, spring oppos *he applied f e Th opposing force is

i&i s r s s- neous displacement
“ 7

ca ed restoring force
 244

it usually denoted by x. The value of instantaneous

>$
12 r - s PHYSICS XI (Subjective

^I^
displacement -

mean position while it has maximum value at the

extreme positions.
•
is 2ero at
Amplitude ( xQ )
The maximum value of displacement T
of the vibrating body on either A , B , A , C, A
Us mean position is called amplitude
.
sides rom
ft
It is denoted by x<>- In figure,
the amplitude is the measure of
line Bb or Dd.
Vibration
One complete round trip of a body
about its mean posaion i\
vibration. called one
The motion of body from mean position
to upper extreme position,
extreme position to lower extreme position from upper
and back to its mean position
called one vibration . So according is
to the figure ABODE shows
the body. one vibration of
Time Period
The lime required to complete one
It is represented by T .Its unit is
vibration is called time period. c ;
second.
Frequency •
( )

The number of vibrations completed

frequency. It is the reciprocal of the
in one second by the body is called
time period At t = 0 pointer is at position A then at position B, A, C and back to A at instant
It is represented by f . The unit of T/4 T/ 2, 3 T/C ind T respectively.
n frequency is heru or vib / sec or cycles
l
1 /sec.
=— A circularmotion point ' P is moving in a circle of radius x with uniform angular
T *
frequency o Now consider the motion of point N, the projection of
»
on
OR f xT = t d.ar- ter DE The levels of D and T are similar to points B and C.
(i.e. product of frequency and
time period equals one ) With the motion of P on the circle, the point N moves to and fro on DE. Let
Angular Frequency P0« nt p is at 0, at t = O, the projection N at instants 0, T/4, T/ 2, T 4 and T will be
3 /
If T is the time period of a body r 0, 0, E and O respectively.
as
executing SHM, its angular frequency ( © ) is given *
Result
24
CO = Hence the comparison of motion of N and P, shows that it is a copy of pointer's
T on. Hence the motion projection particle P moving in a circle is SHM .

CO = 2 Ttf
l
co = 2 n( — )
T ^^ ^5
of
Derive the
of
expressions for instantaneous displacement, instantaneous
velocity and acceleration of the projection of a particle moving in a •
Note circle of radius Xp. ‘
et N be
Basically, angular frequency is the property of circular ‘ the projection of a particle P moving in a circle.
motion In SHM it
provides an easy method to determine the instantaneous displacement Aguiar frequency
and of P = co
instantaneous velocity of booy executing SHM. e angle
subtended by OP at any time t = 0 = cot
4 Q- 4 Show that the motion of projection of body moving along a
circular ad us ,
circle = Xo
path is SHM
I lln
' stantaneous Displacement
r m
° figure (in right angled triangle OPN)
SHM and Uniform Circular Motion ON
a mass m attached with the end of a verti = sln 0
Consider OP
“ the amp,itude x ,
^
Spended sPring It
harmonically with period T , frequency
S
- C:
vibrates simple <. angles)]
The motion of the mass is displayed by a pointer p,.
° N OP sine
* [ v <OPN = <0,0P = 0 ( alternate

99
 »- . •* > .W '
'
:* F,
*
..S'* £ **if * •
. --
-
. - 4
'
-Vfei - .
246 L - CT / a* * * . %!
>
.iM
PHYSICS — XI (Subjective)
But ON = x and OP = = x0
247
So x = x0 sin A of PN and OP in equation (3), weget
values
2

As 0 = <ot V *; - x
cosO
Xo
|x = x0 sin oq 0) 0 in equation ( 2), we get
values of cos
This equation shows the displacement of pointer N at instant t. putting
v = x 0co
Phase angle (0) Xo
The angle 9 which gives the states of the system during one complete cycle is
colled phase OR V /
= oh x 03 - x
2

Values of 0
o f Velocity of N
Direction velocity depends upon the value of phase angle
The wave form of SHM is shown in fig 1(c). In which of
The direction
When iwaries from 0 ? to 909 then the direction of v is
0 to D.
1. At the start of cycle, 0 = 0.
When it varies from 90 « to 2709 then the direction of v is D to E.
2. When 1* quarter of the cycle is completed, 0 - n / 2 .
•
• When varies from 2709 to 360 '- then the direction of v is E to 0.
1 When half of the cycle is completed, 0 =rc. Special cases J
|
When three fourth of the cycle is completed cyde,0 =371/ 2. • . „
At mean position fi. e. x =0) the velocity is maximum [i.e vm = wxo)
4-
position (f.e. x = ), the ,
velocity is zero ( i.e. = 0]
5- For the complete cycle, 0 = 2 x
• At extreme
* (a) <

(3 ) instantaneous Acceleration
Note .
r e acce er ihon at any point P moving along
2
the circle can be expressed as,

por each quarter of the cycle, the phase of vibration is changed by x / 2 radian. ap = Xo to
It is always directed towards the center 0.
( 2 ) Instantaneous Velocity ( v )
The acceleration of point N will be component of
The linear velocity of po nt P at any instant t = vp
cc oration ap along the diameter DE as shown in
Then vp - X co *fyure
*.
*
S nee the motion of * 4 or diameter DE is due to the motion of P on the FOR Y01 K
c» fde INMlHMAXilil a = ap sinO
.
The / e oc V of U * actual / the vertical component of velocity /p in the sin t 2

<krect>on parallel to DE
'' e component of velocity para el to DE is

v * / P > n(90 °-
0)
OP v * vP COS0
OP v * /</ > COS0
OP a /,//> COVJft

From r grt .5 ' jr *d tf « ar g «r OPS

PS
00 0
* OP
App ymg Pyt' agO< a' ’heofem, for calculating va ue of Pf 4
*-
(Off {w<; »(ONy
'
IPHf (OS')'' - (ON )'
 , PHYSICS - XI (Subjective)
a

a
= -to
2
\

= -constant x ' 2
[ v (n = constant ]
_
§cb 0 ar
*5

eqUation gives ..
the disp cement of SHM, ,
but in his case the point
249

OR a a -x
This equation shows that the acceleration is directJy proportional
to
^
in fi1
6u _
rtingits m
_
0 t n
'° °
the
f rm extreme

motion of
position instead of the mean position, as

a horizontal mass spring

N is
shown

displacement and is directed towards the mean position which is the property Q7. Discuss system and find the
of values of acceleration, angular velocity, time period
, instantaneous
SHM. replacement and instantaneous velocity.
So we can say that point N is performing the SHM with the same amplitude, time
period and instantaneous displacement of pointer Px, |p
Mass Spring System
A Horizontal
Q.6 Define the phase angle. a mass m is attached with a spring, while the other end of the spring is
Consider rigid support and it Is capable to oscillate on a
fjXpH with a friction less horizontal
table.
the mass m is displaced from mean position and released then its motion
Phase When
about mean position is SHM. p
The angle ( 0 = cot) which gives the displacement as well as the direction
motion of point executing SHM is known as phase.
of Instantaneous Acceleration
at displacement x the restoring force F produces the acceleration a. Then
Let
OR -* - 4

The angle ( 6 = aX ) which determines the state F - ma _ 0)

colled phase.
Note
of motion of the vibrating point is
According to Hook,s law, I -
-k x (2 )
This angle is obtained when SHM is related with circular motion.
Comparing above two equations. We get,
Displacement in terms of phase FlB. 7i(D
Special case F - ma
Let at t =0, the point P is at Oi and N is at mean position. Then the initial phase of ma = -k x
rotating radius OP is zero hence the displacement at t = 0 is zero. It is considered
as a special case.
I k
m
- x
General case(concept of initial phase) Angular Frequency
Let at t =0, the angle made by rotating radius OP with the reference line OOi= 4> As we know that
After a time t, the radius rotate through angle =cot. The angle made by rotating The wave from SHM
2
radius OP with the reference line OOi at time t is ( tiJt+0) or cosine a =- o x
(
is sine
So, the displacement at time t is given by curve. Comparing equations ( 3) and (4), we get
x = x0 sin ( o>t + <))) kV
Initial Phase
Now the phase angle is
0 = tut + 0
When t = 0, 0 =0, So p is called initial phase .

Now taking initial phase as 90° or - , then displacement >

\2)
x = x0 sin ( OJU90°)

OR X -X 0 COSO if
 HE
i v- C
K r
^V !
5
_ J

,
« “ l

,
. . “ > ••

Ci S TS
A
i
).
*3 .

250
- '
*
Ws V V
-
• v

Time period PHYSICS XI (Subjective)

As the time period of mass m having SUM can be expressed as, I 251

T - 271
Cl )
( 10 )

Putting values of < >, we get Velocity

•|rnum vibrating
T«
2n Joclty of masslsminlmum at

/: "JK K
V Cl ) -
So,
v = G)(0)
Vmin s 0
m« in
OR T 271 J— (6 ) between maximum velocity ( v0) and
k Relation instantaneous
velocity ( v)
Frequency equ atio n ( 10) in equation ($); we get
Using
As the reciprocal of the time period is called frequency So,
.

Putting value of T, we get

f
- I
I
= v„

This is the n lation between maximum velocity and instantaneous velocity.

( 11 )

J_ k_ Q 8 What is simple pendulum ? Show that the motion of pendulum is SHM.

Also find i elations for its time period and frequency.
2n Vm
Instantaneous Displacement
The instantaneous displacement x of mass m is
Sim ple Pe nd ulu m
x = x0 sin cot,
An ideal simple pendulum consists of a small heavy mass suspended by a weightless,
Putting values of rn we get flexible and inextensible
it r (j fixed with a frictionless support and medium
' .
iddically, the above mentioned conditions are incompatible and we use the light weight and less extensible
x » x0 sin t string.
Motion of simple Pendulum is SHM
Instantaneous Velocity Consider an object of mass m attached with the end of a light weight string,
The Instantaneous velocity v of a point performing SHM Is given by l-fingth of the pendulu
m
The length of the pendulum t \C
v is the distance between the point of
Putting value of <o, we get ^Pension and the center of the bob. O\
Working
3 When the l W
OR v» -x from Its mean position through a small
pendulum is displaced
UPoflsit*ion.
0 and release
d then it starts to oscillate to and fro about mean
T

^ST
V Ponents of weight X
the Welght m8 into two components mg cosO and mg sln 0.
1/ E
V
T3„ x !
°ther force In this
!^
cas tension T In the string.
e is the
. , they can cel the
mg cos 0

" T are equal and opposite to each oth er So

mg sin H

.
0 ® ach
Maximum Velocity other .! . e .,
-
Velocity of the mass Is ma 'mum a he mean po ion 0 where x o, so above
* N"« forc ° m8 C ,0 BT mg
equation becomes .
,lck
» r ?J towards Its mean position. So, the re

: J
 mmm
W 252
- H
'
. - f

.
k
ir t ,
=.
•

i
1 I
V

_
PHYSICS - XI (Subjective)
F = - mg sin0 d)
^
Scbol 253

— -
Negative sign shows that force is directed towards mean
position. of Time period
Also we know that Dependence
F = ma
Comparing above two equations, we get
( 2)
pen - < »
Note
ma = -mg sin0 perio d of the pendulum is independent of mass.
Tjme
OR a = -g sin 0 Frequency
For small value of angle 0, sin 0 = 0 recipr ocal of the time period is called frequency.
As the
So , a = — g0 (3 ) f=-
AB T
From figure 0= [ v 5 = r 0 => 0 = - ] Putting value of T, we get
i r \
(8 )
0= * [ v 0 is small so arc AB = x ]
2n \ t —
i Q.9 What is second :enduium? Calculate its frequency and length.
So equation ( 3 ) becomes,
Second Pendulum
a = ~g £ The pendulum whose time period is 2 seconds is called second pendulum.
t
So T = 2 sec
a =- f i )x (4 ) Frequency of second Pendulum
/
l
a = -constant x x [ vi = constant ] T
i
l
OR a cc - x / m

This proves that the motion of pendulum is SHM. 2

Angular Frequency / = 0.5 Hz
len £th of second Pendulum
We know that for a body having SHM,
a = -to 2 x
Comparing equation (4 ) and ( 5 ), we have
(5 ) As T = 2 n l —g
(t
— co 2x = 1
I
Or
T 2
'
u;
=4 TI 2

OR
t-$
4 TT
g
OR CO = (6) As T = 2 sec

Time period 0.992m

4 x ( 3.14 ):
As the time period for SHM can be expressed as, Or
f = 99, 2
cm
T=

Putting value of co, we get

^ L 3* few that the ( mechanical) energ y 1» cont erve d In SHM .

T=

* V\ ot _ ^oe_ r>A\ - — -< Q A t-

Cfc\

_ r
'
tjyj
4
*-
<> A
* ocofi.
JCJL
^
* ,

.
C xrT\ rv g

C rV *•“ * "
^--^
Vrri n rnriWn
> I vibrat ing man tpnng (jb|f

:•
Ult >
change in velocity will be very
i
small *
••
.
» is icro,
 254
PHYSICS - XI (Subjective )
Instantaneous P.E. 255
Let for any instant t the mass m is at a distance x from mean position, K .E .
So according to Hook' s law
maximummaximum at mean position
« E is where
1n* ' . / v
F = kx K.E 1
kx 2 I
When displacement = o 2
Then F = o 1
( K.E)max ~ — k 02
When displacement = x *
Then F = Kx
K .E.
So average force is Minimum at extreme position where x = Xo
The K .E is minimum
0 + kx I 2 > total «n«ryy
F= K.E
2 K .1
1
O /
ft A/ i
^
j
F = (kx ) . .// \
= 0 -0
“ 1
PE
5 l/ \ l
Hence the work done in displacing the mass through displacement x is (K - E )min = 0
>
O
W = Fd
1
Total Energy
= - (kx ) ( x ) At any position, the total energy is sum of partly P.E. partly and K E. .
So,
2
.
* E = P.E + K.E
= kx ”

E=
Work done appears as elastic P.E. So,
1
(P - E) ,nJ = kx 2
E = kx +
2
kxo
2
- kx 2

^
“ “ “

Maximum P.E. i

At extreme position, the P.E is maximum, as the displacement at extreme

position x = Xo So,
’
r
Jithe total energy of vibrating mass spring system always remains constant.
T Note
.
(P E)
2 during the oscillatory motion where the K.E Is maximum, and the P.E Is lero and
Minimum P.E . wHsn the P.E is maximum Is K . E Is zero. The change of P.E and K.E with
dl pl»cement Is required for maintaining the oscillation.
.
P .E is zero If the displacement x .
o, l e., the mass Is at mean position, thus * Aperiodic .
exchange of energy Is the property of all oscillatory systems
P.E. A ( O) 1

(P ) . E.
_2
=0
What are fret and forced oscillations? Also define driven harmonic
oscillator.
Instantaneous K .E.
We know that
,» Oscillation
( K .E ) *
*
“ mv 2
JrH *
Is said to be executing free vibrations if It oscillates tvlih Its
v»x
/
»M>out the Interference of an external force .
..
5lnce

So, ( K .EU - - Mndulum vlbratM fr ely with

•••ngth of the pendulum.
It, .
n tur l »
*»•"* **
, ,
" ^
‘ d p d

,
' wo** * " ut » *
d ni
/
with the
taU executing force4 vibrations
* ce
tr of *
an external
0
force*
So ,
r!l
/

4 - r'
' 266

For example
•
•
If the mass of vibrating pendulum is struck repeatedly, then forced vibrati
The vibrations of factory floor caused by the running of heavy machinery is
ons are pf0(j
another e
(
2
^ !
^^
tuning a
f
r

radio
radio
PHVSICS
,
X ! ( Subjective )

( E ectrical resonance)
is a good example of electrical
257

Tuning 0 Igignonce. To tune a

Driven harmonic oscillator radio,
We turn the knob of a radio.
.
H
a /v
The physical system undergoing forced vibrations is known a \ driven harmonic
it changes the natural frequency of electrical circuit ofrecelver until it becomes equal
oscillator. to the frequency
of transmitter.
. —
_ .
A
Q.12 What is resonance phenomenon? Explain it with examples ? NOW the resonance Is produced and energy absorption is maximum
• Hence a station is tuned. r «r
w
^
0 I cooking by microwave oven
Resonance
Resonance is the specific response of a vibrating system to a periodic force b
v
• . Resonance plays an important role in h eating and cooking food by
microwave oven .
acting with natural vibrating period of system.
OR c tr . The microwav produced by
water and fats molecules in the food.
are absorbed due to resonance by
y
Stirrer
Wave
guide

A
Magnetron

The phenomenon in which the amplitude of a vibrating body increases when ** Ti

/
the frequency of an applied force is equal to the natural frequency • This incri ases the- internal energy of the molecules.
of the Cooking
harmonic oscillator. • They get heat up a id is cooked cavity ~ Power
t Note
Experiment to demonstrate resonance
The wave length of the microwaves produced in this type of oven ist 2 cm Tui
Door and Choke
Consider a horizontal rod AB is supported by strings S, and S:. Three pairs of pendulum aa', bb' andcc ' n I and frequency is 2450 MHz
suspended to rod ' AB'.
• .
The length of each pair is same but different for different Da rs. Q 3 Wh3 i are damped and undamped oscillations? What is damping? Chassis weigh!
v Vajve
-
Cross section
of oil damper

• Displace pendulum c is in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper

<£> Oil
dampor
Suspension
A small force acts on all the pendulums through the rod AB. spring "
r
amped Oscillations y]
•

•
All the pendulums will oscillate with the pendulum c but with a slight
periodic motion.
The pendulum d,whose length and hence period is exactly the same as
Oscillations in which amplitude decreases with time due to energy dissipation
are called damped oscillations.
Explanation
o Platon

iit
that of c oscillates with larger amplitude equal to c. of the oscillating body gradually becomes smaller and smaller
amplitude rz

.. ^ use of friction and air resistance. As the energy of the oscillator is used up in ,
•
m
The amplitude of other pendulums remains small because their nature
periods are not same as that of the disturbing force due to rod A 9 .
nv «
to
“ PT*Tf#
r»»»
_
_*** *! tong work against the resistive forces, that is why the amplitude decreases with
toe till it becomes zero.
0
Examples jzxsxs&m rtf

- ^ plication
Motion of swing (mechanical resonance ) /SAIW 3 sMck_gbsgrbiL ° < a car which
Graph between arnplltuda and tlma .

r Wcation of damped oscillation is the

•
"
•
A swing is a good example of mechnlcal resonance .
WP aoolv a periodic force on swing
When the frequency of periodic force 6»cents e \ ual * o the natural
frequency of the swing, resonance 1 $ produced
- . ..
ssisi '
II
*
,
IrtMUvnc )
frvtjucnc<c»
UM
n iu i

viulcfl* . *
S
“ 'P'hdes a damping force to stop the excessive oscillations.
0aihplng

J damp
" **
1
is the process by which energy is lost by the oscillating system
/

!o
YU * ,# ed oscillations t

^>"i
develop ®

--
So energy absorption is maxim am . * a.

...
undamped
. p
Z ore called

-
E
some wiith time
« > «*“> ‘*
brflW
main 'P,in
osc,||
l0ns in <
u Hence, the amplitude of vlbrat n Is I creasev Mhlch the omplitude remains
Collapse of suspended bridge
ibe brldpc
into lhe wJ cr
, * •
Vo fb ) Damped

On a big span bridge -

the soldiers crossing the idge are ordered to break their
S'"'* 1
1 T. Graph between amplitude and Uroe

l
.
steps If the frequency of steps .
*nc »u« vith r jral frequency of the bridge . dtl0n
of an ideal simple pendulum is the example of undamped oscillation
Then there is a chance to c o e the briot due to resonance .
*
 PHYSICS — XI (Subjective)
259
Q 4 What Is the effect of damping on the sharpness of resonance ?
*
of © for mass spring system
Value
Sharpness of Resonance iod of mass spring system
•
The amplitude of vibration of a body increases when the damping is
«
1
Time Per
executing SHM w? T=2 J£
* kL
small. a
E s
S freque
ncy of mass spring system
• Thus, the presence of damping prevents the amplitude from becoming < executing SHM 27tVm
sufficiently large. s JTntaneous displacement of
The amplitude decreases rapidly at a frequency slightly different from
resonance frequency. ,
Dr vi 0
[
^mass spring system executing
SHM
x=x 0 sinJ t —m k

The amplitude as well as sharpness depends upon damping.

" velocity of mass /
Instantaneous k 2
A heavily damped system has fairly flat resonance curve. spring system executing SHMV
V =
Vm
xo - x !
J Vm \ x „
Example to see the effect of damping
Maximum velocity of mass spring k
O = xn
Attach a pendulum having very light mass such a pith ball and another of v„
system executing SHM
0
m
same length with a heavy mass of equal size such as lead ball.
Set them into vibrations by third pendulum of equal length and attached Instantaneous velocity of mass
spring system in terms of v = v.
to the same rod.
maximum velocity executing SHM
It is observed that tbe ^ mplitude of the heavy ball is much greater than Restoring force for simple
the light ball.
So the sharpness of the resonance curve of resonating system depends
4
m«ui bob •
Pith bob MM
pendulum V
F = -mg sinG

a= - \
on energy loss due to friction . Acceleration of simple pendulum i

FORMULAE]
Value of a) for simple pendulum
' fi
Time period of simple pendulum

Hook' s law
/ F = kx frequency of simple pendulum

Restoring force
F = ©tAT instantaneous P.E. of mass spring
a=
k -x ^ system v /^
Maximum P.E. of mass spring
m (P.E )
^ system v/
In / ' j
Angular frequency G>= \/ 0>=27tf \
instantaneous K.E. of mass spring
Y
Instantaneous displacement of
body executing SHM y / x = x<, sinG x = Xo sinwt X = Xo sin
( o
*'
)t+
^
system
Ma lmum K.E. of mass
*
Instantaneous velocity of body / system
executing SHM *
V coN /xo - :
X
2
Total energy of mass spring
Instantaneous acceleration of
body executing SHM a = -to* x

period and frequency 271

Time
body executing SHM s/ T =—
(0
 PHYSICS XI (Sul>]rcHvr )

.
\ _

261
Multiple Choice Questions he dkUnca cov« f «d by . body In on**
^body: to
^
mP Hi Vibration It 20 cm. What it the amplitude of tbe

— — -
cm
r . / .- m s w ws J wA >artfarw aft rim . •« . 1 u -\ ( * ) ths fflwci a /i.YHVf (a ) 1
° (b )
ftrn
* (c) 15 cm
'

-
W 7 -Scn-i
1. 'N?

|j)
a
^ veforr * o' 5
'
Standing wsve
" V s
(b ) Sine wave ( to 2J
rs!r * ““““ “r **p
( b) * « »/ « «
*
81
(e) Square wave (d) None of these (c) 1J W ( d) 4j
2. Force need to produce and extantion of one metre in a spring is called: , V If the length of second pendulum Is L, then length of pendulum having a period i sec will be:
L/2 (b)
la) Stress (b ) Strain ( to 2L

lc ) Spring constant (d ) (C) L ( d) 1/ 4

3.
None of these
When the amplitude of oscillation is doubled then energy of mass spring system becomes-
*
A spring of spring constant K Is cut Into two halves. Then the spring constant of each part will be :
14 ,

K (b ) K/
(a) Double (b ) Four times M s
4K (d ) 2K
(c ) One half (d ) Six times to
4. A simple pendulum suspended from the ceiling of a lift has time period T when the lift Is at . 15. The time period of the hour hand of a watch is:
rest
(a ) 24 hr (b ) 12 hr
When lift falls freely, the time period is:
(c ) 1 hr (d) 1 mm
T
(a) Infinite (b )
g 16. Which of the following quantities is doubled on doubling the amplitude of a harmonic oscillator ’
(a) Total energy (b ) Kinetic energy
(c ) Zero (d) 8 ( d) PE.
(c ) Maximum velocity
T for undamped oscillations of the
17. Which of the following characteristics must remain constant
5. In SHM, at extreme position is maximum particle ?
(a) Velocity (b ) Accerelation (a ) Acceleration (b ) Phase
(c ) Kinetic energy ( d) All of these (c ) Amplitude (d ) Velocity
6. The working of is not based upon the principle of resonance: Karachi and at Murree are related as.
Time period of the simple pendulum at
(a ) T.V . (b ) Radio (a ) TK > TM (b ) TK < TM
(d) (d ) 2TK = 3TM
(c) Microwave oven Bulb W TK = TM
acceleratio n,
l!l' moving upwards with uniform
7. Natural frequency of simple pendulum varies inversely: A simple pendulum is oscillating in a lift. If the lift starts
( a) Its mass (b) Length the period will:
(a ) (b ) Be shorter
(c ) Square of length (d ) Square root of length Remain same
(c ) (d ) Can't say anything
Be longer
8. Total distance travelled by bob of simple pendulum in one vibration is:
( a) Amplitude (b ) Square of amplitude
,n order to double the period of a simple pendulum:
(a ) ( b) Its length should be quadrupled
(c) of amplitude
2 times (d) 4 times of amplitude Its length should be doubled bob should be quadrupled
(d) The mass of its
to The mass of Its bob should be doubled
9. When K .E . of SHM is maximum, its:
Acceleration is zero
ANSWERS .
P E . Is zero ( b)
7. d 9. d 10 c
( to u 2. c 4. » 5. b .
6 d
8. d
Restoring force Is zero (d) All are zero 3.1 18. b 19. b 20. b
[1.1, I 7. i-
)
(C )
oscillation , which on f them decreases ? 12. d . 15 b . 16 C.
damped harmoni c 13. <1 14 d
10. In *
( to Amplitud e of vibration ( b ) Energy of vibration i
amplitud e an ( J energy ( d ) Neither amplitude nor energy
(C ) Both

J
 262
PHYSICS XI (Subjective
School ^
Short Questions of Exercise £
263
T = 2n / —g
Q.7.1 Name two characteristics of simple harmonic motion (i) Effe ct of doub ling the length
(D.G.Khan 2005, Fsd 2005, Mtn 2006, Bwp 2007- 2008, Lhr
2010.2011,6 When length becomes double, the time Period Increases V2 times .
Ans. Characteristics of SHM Explanation
• Restoring force is directly proportional to displacement from mean position. If £ = 2 £
•
•
Acceleration Is directly proportional to displacement from mean position and Is directed
mean position.
Total energy of system is conserved In SHM.
towa rdsthe T = 2n
if
T = V2
'
.
O 7.2 Does frequency depends on amplitude for harmonic oscillators?

Ans . No, it does not depend upon amplitude of harmonic oscillator .

..
(Mtn 2005 - 2009, D G Khan
2005, lhr zoo ) , T=' -J lj
(ii) Effect of doubling the mass *

Reason When mass become doubled the time period remains same
In case of simple pendulum is
I g
.
Explanation
As t me period of simple pendulum is independent of mass So it does not change with mass.

27i V £
In case of mass spring system
.
Q 7.6 Does the acceleration of a simple harmonic oscillator remain constant during Its motion? Is the
acceleration ever zero? Explain?
f
- JL jE
27 \ m
t

These equations show that frequency of simpl harm

e onic oscill ator is indepe ndent of ampl itude.
.
Ans Np it does not remain constant.
Reason
(Federal 2004, Grw 2005, Lhr 2010- 2011)

The acceleration of the body executing SHM is

Q.7.3 Can we realize an ideal simple pendulum? c -* -»
( Rwp 2005, Mir Pur 2006, Bwp 2006, Lhr 2008, Grw
2 OO9- z010 * ' ' a - - CD x
1
(1)

Ans . No , we can not realize an ideal simple pendulum. acc -x

Reason I . This shows that acceleration varies directly with disfitocsmeal
string
suspended by massless and [ nextensi!>l£
simple pendulum consists of point mass
.^

——
An ideal Zero Acceleration
.

.- ---
„

-
practice, it is not possible Above equation shows that acceleration is zero at rneanj « /Won wher e the value of displa ceme nt is

In a
zero (i.e. x = o).
distan ce trave led by an objec t movin g with SHM
Q.7.4 What is the total
time equal to its period, if its amplitude is A? a

Ans .
( Fsd 2006, Bwp 2007, Rwp 2008, Mir Pur 2009)
The total distance covered by the body is 4A.
* driving force?
(Sgd 2005, Bwp 2008, Grw ”
2008- 2009, D.G.
* ” **
Khan 2006)
Explanation Ans, (a)
perio d is the time during which the vibra ting body completes one Phase Angle
,
-
Time
it is the angle which gives the jj( 2£S2J£2 as motion of point executing SHM. It
round trip. In one round trip
A ** sci - . ^
Total c stance covered = A +A+ A+A = 4A determines the state ofmotjoa of vibra t ng body

dou bled ?
^
t hapP
el
* ( >)
• rotating vector makes
with refer ence line.

Q 75.Wha t happens
the suspended
to
mas
the
s is
time
dou
perio
bled ?
d of the simp le pend ulum if its lengt h is

(Lhrat 8,Bwp 2.oo7, Rwp 2008, Mir Pur 2009, Lhr 2010,Grw
2010 ) ** it is actually the angle which the

simple pend ulum is,

of a
Ans. The time period

?
'd
.a
264
pHYSICS XI (Subjective)
-

Q .7.8 Under what conditions does the addition of two simple harmonic motions
265
which is also simple harmonic ? Explain the relation between total energy, Potential
Ans . The addition of two simple harmonic motions produce a resultant, which i s Q.7.11
with SHM . energy and kinetic energy for a body
oscillating
when,
also ' . The total energy for a body oscillating with SHM
always remains nstant .
(Federal 2005)
AH5 *
Conditions explanation
The two simple harmonic motions have; , At extreme posit ion , the whole energy is in form
of P.E.
1) same frequency , At mea n posit ion, the whole energy is in form of K.E.
2 ) Same nature (i.e., mechanical waves cannot be super posed with elec
trom agnetic w , At any point between mean and extreme position, total energy of
si > le harm onic oscillator in sum of
3 ) constant phase difference aves) p.E. and K .E.
Q.7.9 Show that in SHM the acceleration is zero when the velocity is greatest and the
velocity |s zer
.
njU Des crib e some common phenomena in which the
resonance plays an important role?
the acceleration is greatest ? ( Lhr 2008, Mir when ° Ans. (Grw 2005-2009)
PUr 7009) Tuning of radio (Electrical resonance )
Ans. ( a ) Acceleration is zero when the velocity is greatest
Tuning of radio is a good example of electrical resonance. We turn the knob of
In simple harmonic motion, the instantaneous velocity and acceleration can be expressed a radio. It changes the
as natural frequency of electrical circuit of receiver until it becomes equal to the frequency of transmitter .
2
V= a = tux So resonance is produced and energy absorption is maximum. Hence a station is tuned.
At mean position (i.e. at x = 0) Motion of the swing ( Mechanical resonance)
.
A swing is a good example of mechanical resonance We apply a periodic force on swing. When the
/
V = «A .V; - A - 2
a = io ( o ) frequency of periodic force becomes equal to the natural frequency of the swing, resonance is produced.
V = (ox 0 (max ) a = 0 (min) So energy absorption is maximum . Hence, the amplitude of vibration is increased
Thus at mean position acceleration is zero when velocity in is greatest . Q.7.13 If a mass spring system hung vertically and set into oscillation, why does motion eventually stop ?
(Mir Pur 2004-2005, Lhr 2006, Mtn 2009, Lhr 2009 )
At extreme position ( i.e. at x = x<,)
Ans. It eventually stops due to damping.
V= / :
\A -V
U
;
a = toV ( max ) Reason
V = 10 (0 ) When a mass spring system vibrates, it gradually loses its energy in doing work goainst frictional
V = 0 ( min) forces So amplitude of vibration becomes smaller and smaller and hence the motion eventually stops.
Thus at extreme position, velocity is zero when acceleration is greatest .
So in SHM when a = 0, v is maximum Solved Examples
And when v = 0, a is maximum
Q. 7.10 In relation to SHM, explain the equations; A block weighing 4.0 kg extends a spring by 0.16m from its unstretched position, i he block is
(i) y = A sin ( c t + 4> )
^ ( ii ) a = - to 2
x removed and a 0.50 kg body is hung from the same spring. If the spring is now stretched and then
released, what is its period of vibration?
Ans.
Civ n Data :
0) y = A Sin ( cot + 4> ) '
Wave form of SHM is sinusoidal Mass of the block = mi = 4kg
•
Length of the stretched spring = x = 0.16 m
• y = instantaneous displacement
T» Find:
Mass of the body = m2 = 0.5 kg
A = amplitude

-
"
•
4> = initia l phas e angle
cot + 4> = phase angle
^“ :
' Ution
Period of vibration = T ?-
( ID
Acceleration of SHM depends upon directly proportional displacement and directed to The formula for time period is

.
.
position
a= inst
inst
anta neous
antaneous
acce
disp
lerat
lace
ion
men t
T = 2n
if
To find value of k, we use the Hook ' s law
( 1)

. x=
angular frequency
266
pHVSICS - XI (Subjective )
F=k x 267
or k= —
X i "
^ S ring, whose sPr* nS constant is 80.0
. Find the distance by
Nm vertically
1
supports a mass of 1.0 kg in the
or As F= mtg S
P° ,tion
'
which the mass must be pulled down, so that on rest
x ass the mean position with a velocity of 1.0 ms 1. '
being released, it
4 x 9.8 Data:
k= Giv*11
0.16 Spring constant = k = 80.0 Nm-1
k = 245 Nm - i Mass = m = 1.0 kg
Putting values in equ. ( 1) Velocity of mass = v = 1.0 ms-1
0.5 To Find :
T = 2 x 3.14 Distance by which mass is pulled =
245
Calculation :
T = 6.28 x 0.045 V = XoCO
As
fT = 0 28 s
Thus
What should be the length of a simple pendulum whose period is 1.0 second at a place Whm
1 Is
9.8 ms ? What is the frequency of such a pendulum? x0 = v
"

or
Given Data :
Putting values, we get
Time period = T = 1.0 second
Acceleration due to gravity = g = 9.8 ms
2 "
x0 = 1.0 [To
Uo
To Find:
Length of simple pendulum = l = ? Xo = 1.0 X Vo . 0125
Frequency of the pendulum = f = ? Xo = 1.0 x 0.11
Calculation: p<0 = 0.11 rri
Using the formula
T 2n - fi Exercise Problems
Squaring both sides
7.1 A lOO.Og body hung on spring elongates the spring by 4.0cm.when a certain
2 o
T object is hung on the spring and set vibrating, its period is 0.568s. what is the C
ma 8 .i. of the object pulling the spring? o
o
or
An
t -_ Hi1 Given data : o
<3

Putting values, we get

9.8 x (1.0 )2
4 x (3 l 4 )2 .
Mass of the body = m = l 00g = -l

Extension produced in the spring = x = 4.0cm =

^
1000
L = o. lkg

—100
= 0.04m TT«w
/ -
9.8 x 1
4 x 9.85
9.R
To find. -
Time period = T 0.568sec (when mass in is suspended)

/
Mass of the object = m ?
Now frequency
39.4
f 0.25 m- ^•culation:
f

f
--
-—
l
T
1
According to Hook’s law
F kx
Thus kx * mg
~ also F W mg
--
1.0

k
\

^ -.
f
 - •
f
•
'
.

A BH

268 £hapter 7 ,
j a r' s PHYSICS M ( Subjective )
269

EZHEN I
or
.v
Or
( i ) wh en m is ^
atta che d to th e spn ng .ihe n

putting values , we get

, 0.1 * 9.8
k= Put ting val ues, we get
0.04
-
24.5 Nm
k
As the time period of mass attached spring is
•i
T=2x3.14

Squaring on both sides

T 2
* &
Or
Tl - 4 n* A
Ma xim um s

4 iJ
lotting x alucs. wc get
m. 24 5 v ( 0 ShftV • - =50 crVs
5
4 x ( V 14 )

m* •0 200 kg ZJ \ n 8.0kg bod * execute* SUM with amplitude 30cm. The restoring force is 60N. When the
Or In 200 cm{ dUplacQBKfil Is 30cm. Find
i (it period
the » n m \ ccclcrution . vpeed , kinetic energy and potential energy when the displacement is 12 cm.
\2 V K'ad of 15.0g elo nga tes a spnng bx 2.00cm . If body of ma ss 2* 4 g att
isach ed lo pna i *
w h a t wil l be its ( itp eno d ( »0 spri ng
set uito xibraiton w i t h an amplitude of 10.0 tin n data :
tm ‘maximum « p^ed of its vibration . of body = m =$ 0k £
Given data: Amplitude = \ = 30cm = 0 30m
-
I v\ad m * 15 Ogm 0 015kg - Resu >nng fcrce= F = 60S
Extern.c« pcwiuccd \ 2 Ocm 0.02 m - - -- -
Ma*> attached to the spnng • m 2*4 gm 0 2 ^ vg
=
Displacement = x 30cm = 0 30m

To find:
Amplmak •x 10.0cm 0 10m * - - til Period = T = '
0 » ) Acceleration a = ?
(in iSpced v = '
U> ) K E = ?
=
=
(i ) Ume penod •T '
* ( v ) P.E ? =
(u) spnng constant - k ? .
When the displacement x = 12cm 0 12 =
tin) maximum sreed • ve - *
Period
nlmg to Hooks law . F = kxc
(u) Aocorcmg to \ \ »v s law

nws
F « k\
kx mg
-. - i a k = —
F

Or
\
• xahstSk we gc*
k
x
l
Or k _ 60
0JO
» I
k -
- 0 1 ** 3 fc*200Nm
 ym

270 *

XI ( Subj ectiv e )
PH YS ICS
Now usin g the form ula f * » r time

2
peri od ol

k
mas s prin j: syste m
^
sc
( ,r K . l- = 7.56 J
271

Putt ing valu es, we get be formula

lor P t . is
I
X
I 5
2 * .1 .14 p. n = -k\ 2
2 no *)

I 6.2 K >/OTO4 -- P.E -"200«PT :v

I 6.2 8 0.2
I l .25(isec
- P.E = 100 ) 1 ) 144
^
^
Or I ) second
( i » ) \ nclc r 4 lion: X .
k A block of max* 4.0 kg U drop ped rom
fr a heig ht of 0. K 0 m on to a sprin g of sprin g cons tant
sed.
>
a c» \ \s I I
m "nrnd * k • I 960 Nni Hi id the max imum did ancc thro ugh whic h the sprin g will he com pres

Or a
k
v
. *'
( :
byass y
t the bloc k m = 4 kg
m 1 ( eigh!
t h OJf flm
-i
Spri ng cons tant - k !960 Nm
~
Mul ling \ allie s, we gel
200 |o find:
a - 012 .» Max imu m dista nce B
X ?
H ^
ii 1 Oin sec ( ilcu latio n :
As P.E = mgh
Neg ativ e sign show s that acce lera tion m dire cted n » \ \ ,od > the me ui p- - .
H n P. E M .O * 9.8 * 0.80 1

( iii ) Spe ed: P E * 3l .36joul cs

com pres sed thro ugh Max imum dist ance
I he spee d of the bod \ exe cuti ng SI l \ 1 is given b\ W hen the bloc k is drop ped on sprin g, the spnn g will be
r ~ elas tic I * h .
V l' » v \ -N that grav itati onal P H
So
. will be conv erte
grav itati onal P .E •clas tic P .E
d into

I luts.

Putt ing valu es, we get

b Putt ing valu es, we gel
mgh = ik x;

31.3 6 2* -
>.
A
x i 960 * x . J

Or 31 36 = 980 * xj
3 I 36
Or
980
Or . -0.32
x 1

15
Or
A sim ple pend ulum is 50.0 cm
= 9.8 m> J?
R = 0. l 8mj
long Wh l
-vs ill be its .
frc ., « encv „f \ ihra tion at a pile * wb <

*
l engt h of simp le pen dulu m - ( - 50.0cm = O.50m
2
grav ils - g = 9.8 m / s
I Acc eler atio n due to
ofind:
pen dulu m sfS f
freq uen cy of simp le
A
 272

Calculation : PHYSICS - XI (Subjective )

273
For simple pendulum , formula for frequency is
Total mass = m = mj + m 2
m= = 1300 + 160 = 1460%
putting values, we get Spring constant of each spring = k =20,OOONm '

1 9.8 Combined spring constant =k=4k =4 * 20.000=80

f =
1
2 x 3. I 4 /o .50
To fmd : Frequency of vibration = f = ?
m 1
fbecause they are connected in parallel )

f= —
6.28
% 19.6

Calculation :
1 1 k
f=
6.28
x 4.427 f= —
2 TC V m
!f = 0.70 Hz ! Putting values, we get
1
f=
"
6 A block of mass 1.6 kg is attached to a spring with spring 2 x 3.14 V 1460
constant 1000 Nm 1, as shown in Fig. 7.14 The spring is
—
"

compressed through a distance of 2.0 cm and the block is f= V54.794

released from rest. Calculate the velocity of the block as it
passes through the equilibrium position, x=0 if the
surface is frictionless.
Given data:
fc= —
f
NL/
1
6.28
Hz
Mass of block = m = 1.6 kg
7.8 Find the mplitud frequency and period of an object vibration at the end of a spring, if the
Spring constanr= k= 1000 Nm-1 Fig. 7.14
equation for its position , as a function of time, is

To find;
Maximum displacement = = 2cm =0.02m xc x=0.25 cosfu— It
Velocity at mean position =
“
Calculation :
vo =? what is the displacement of the object after 2.0 s?
Given data :
As the velocity is maximum at mean position , so

v 0 =xn0 k
x=0.25cos —8 t
m Time = t =2sec
Putting the values , we get Amplitude = Xo = ?
1000 To Find:
vo = 0.02 1.6 Frequency = f = ?
Period = T = ?
vo = 0.02 x >/625 Displacement = x = ?
v 0 = 0.02 x 25 Calculation:
Amplitude:
vo = 0.50m/s As given displacement is •

7.7 A car of mass 1300 kg is constructed using a frame supported by four springs . Each spring h x = 0.25cos ( —8 )t (1)

spring constant 20,000 Nm . If tw o people riding in the c? r have a combined mass of

find
^ And general equation for displacement is
the frequency of vibration of the car , when it is driven over a pot hole in the road . Assume
weight is evenly distributed.
x= xocos
cot (2)
Comparing equation ( l )and( 2),we get
Given data :
,
Mass of the car = n? = 1300 kg 1^
- = 0 -5m
From above
|
equatio n , angular lrcqu . ncv is

Mass of two people = m2 = 160 kg

I -*T *' *
74

rcquc no :

Chapter 8
Or

I 11/
16 WAVES
imc period:
Now T= -

r =17
/
i
Learning Objectives j
/ 16
of waves .
1
'
= 16 see ] Reca ll the gener ation
of
and propag
motio ns in
ation
transv erse and longit udina l waves.
Describe the nature
on c.11 ulation of displacement when t 2scc
and use the terms wavel ength , freque ncy and speed of wave.
uumj due in equation ( I ) Understand
Understand and use the equation v = f > .
.v = 0.25 eo > ( — ) x 2 Newto n ' s formu la of speed of sound.
8 Understand and descr ibe
ce correc tion in Newto n ' s formula of speed of sound for air .
Derive Lapla
Or .v = 0.25 cos ( —4 ) Derive the formula v = v 0 + o. 6lt.
Or x 0.25 cos 45" Recognise and describe the factors on which speed of sound in air depends.
Or Explain and use the Principle of superposition.
.v = 0.25 * 0.707
Or A = 0.17 68
-
Undc rstand the terms interference and beats.
and beats giving exam ples of sound waves.
Describe the pheno mena of interfe rence
licncc |.v = 0.1 S ' / / ]
Understand and describe reflection of waves.
e station ary wave s for stretc hed stings and vibrati ng air
Describe experiments, which demonstrat
columns.
Explain the formation of a stationary wave using graphical method.
Understand the terms node and anti -node.
Understand and describe mode of vibration of string.
Understand and describe Doppler ' s effect and its causes .
er' s effect in radar sonar astrono my satellite and radar speed
Recognize the applications of Doppl ,
traps.

.> t
 pMVRlCn xi ( Nuiij .
* iivt- )
/ ( !

Chapter No. 8
/ JjpIV *
i

I v
- .\
V /> O
'
*
,! <*• . If ! niiU ^ nli
(} ill u .
rn > luuhpo , "
t "W fa truHijerrtd from
vnergv without u oihpoitiny ' lace to

w -
v * • > ( ! m

3TZ 1 **‘t natur* of wave may be different, but the mechanism I'/ wl kh it titporu
«i-3 , - S > . energyis same *
H— 1 JiiD of Waves
T 111 Types
.
,- 11
i • • A

| of three types
r
41
P
in |
m ut i Wflves are
,| Mechanical waves
which material medium far theft htonagatlon
1 lk Mnvs " are culled
U 5 z
— ^r mjhliniMl waves.
„
. which
OR
propagate by the oscillation of/ mauterial purtides are called
o a u ves
* rk
|l P! T’ IP a
mehanical waves
for example
% Uit/ asonK
2 You K
/tOW 3

waves are
is
Is I? waves , sound wa
particularly useful
undersea communication and
for
3 O “
Water
5 detection systems. High
2) Electromagnetic 1
3
— i. aS
2 f. s 3
*
< V u frequency radio waves, used
.5 o
5. [he waves which arc produced duej to oscillating electric and magnetic fields and
2 —
>- »
=
- «
a thev require no medium for their propagation are called electromagnetic waves.
in radars travel just a few
centimeters in water, whereas
£ 35^ ”
a>
*
*
sJ £
>
as
- -r — JMi Thesewaves propagate due to oscillations of electric and magnetic field.
For example
highly directional beams of
ultrasonic waves can be made
to travel many kilometers
z - Radio waves, light waves, micro waves, x- rays etc.
c > §§ 3) Matter waves Radio waves are
u 2 - electromagnetic waves and
E- « = The waves, in which the energy transfers in the form of kinetic energy of very .
V
•
J
~S
J
—
-G _E on
< ast moving particles, are called mater waves or de Broglie waves. These waves
re associated with particles in motion.
ultrason c waves are mechanical
waves. The mechanical waves
(ultrasonic waves) can produce
disturbance in matter and

S 2.
_L± for example
Wave associated with the motion of electron.
therefore, can travel for long
distance through matter (water )
a
r
>
3 U —
=
£> O g o >*
What are progressive waves? Give its types.
without any loss in energy - The

5
r
«
m—
> =
|I
~
- a
N

m
electromagnetic waves travel
through matter for very short
distance and lose their energy
because they are absorbed.
Progressive Waves
The waves which transfer energy' by moving away from the source of
disturbance are called progressive or traveling waves.
Sample »
onsider two persons holding the opposite ends of the rope. Suddenly one
|r— ^ i
s n gives a -

^J ,° erk tQ the rope The distur 5 ance in the rope produces a pulse
-
f
i
-
.
ch moves toward other person When this reaches the
. other person it pushes ^
if 7

I—
hand upward So the energy and momentum transferred from one person
.
r
Vards
‘ other person. This is an example of progressive wave. ^ -
Jerking of hand is its source and rope is the medium for the propagation of
- wsves.
•" nds of waves
- two kinds of pro6 assive waves
 278

L ngitud |ar * s PHYSICS - XI ( Subjective )

(i ) Transverse waves ( ii ) Longitudinal waves ° 279
Transverse Waves
Crest „d, u
The waves , in w hich particles of the medium ore displaced perpendicular to the I »K the mean level /, calle Cresl
direction of propagation of waves are called as transverse waves. m " < crest.
C
Trough A

Take a loose spring coil ( slinky spring ) for illustration of motion of source in The por tion oj the mm hch -
w its mean level /r mil / trough
.
generating waves in a medium . Slinky is the soft .spring which has small initial Amplitude
length hot relatively large extended figure. Consider a horizontal spring system The a mp litu de ,
is the maximum dispiacemen of poin| ,a crest or a trough of
Through

with its one end fixed . When the free end is moved from side to side, a pulse of
Transverse waves strin g . Amplitude -
the
fi ed Len gth
wave having a displacement pattern as shown in figure , which will move along *end Wave
the spring. This shows that displacement of particles is perpendicular to The dista nce betw een two consecutive crests or tw „
° ,
trough is k town
direction of propagation of wave , hence transverse waves arc produced.
the ,,
,/re length it is denoted byX.
,

Time Period
Longitudinal Waves ( Compressional waves ) „cal,ed i
-o
The w aves , in which particles of the medium are displaced along the
tf propagation of the waves , are called as longitudinal waves.
direction
Longitudinal Which produces it. * *° ^‘
be the t,me Period
time
he oscillator
nMn #
- 1
r

If one end of the spring is moved back and forth, along the direction
waves
of the Speed of Wave *
waves
spring. Then the waves are produced in which displacement of the
to the direction of propagation of wave and such waves are call
spring is along
ed longitudinal
When a wave progr sses, each particle in the medium performs SHM. The time
that the crest require : to moves a distance, of one wave length is equal to the M FX*-
waves, as shown in figure.
Note
time required for a point in the medium to go trough one complete oscillation. If
V be the speed of wave, then W-
Distance covered
V =
( Why, sound waves in air are longitudinal in nature?) Interval of time
Both types of waves can be set up in solids . In fluids , however , v = X/ T
transverse waves
die out very quickly and usually cannot be produced at all . That
is why; sound
waves in air are longitudinal in nature .
Q. 2 What are periodic waves ? Also discuss its different types ? i - =n
<J25> , Where f ir. the frequency of the wave which is same as the frequency of oscillator
(crest or trough ) which produce it .
AI
Periodic Waves Wave Profile
The waves which are produced by continuous and rhythmic disturbances in a A Relation between path difference and phase difference
medium are called per italic waves. Consider the snapshot of the periodic waves moving through the medium. As
These may be transverse or longitudinal in nature . A good example of periodic anY distance x from the reference point then phase difference can be des
cribed
waves is an oscillating mass - spring system which executes SHM . as

Transverse Periodic Waves P

The periodic waves in which the displacement of particles of medium is Points C and C, as they move up and down are always in the same state of
perpendicular to the direction of motion of waves are called transverse periodic Orations, (i .e. they have identical displacement and velocities). There are many
waves . D0| nts or
particles along the medium which are vibrating in phase . The points
Experiment
i^ h other.
.
Sitouted from one another through distanced , 2 X, 3 A. .. ore oil in phase w ith
let us consider a mass spring system which can vibrate vertically as shown in AI
Some
Points are exactly out of step, for example, when point C reaches its
figure . A long string of uniform thickness is stretched hor ,? ontally and its one end
V Minium up wall displacement, at the same time D reaches its down wall
is attached with the oscillating mass m . Due to oscillation of mass spring system ®placement
* .
a transverse wave is produced in the string.
The wave appears to be traveling on the spring, from its one end to the other . In "
l >obu separated
Pixtsilc in phase. from one another through a distance ofV2 . »J2. M2. .. *
. < v

this case each part of siring vibrates at right angle to the length of stretched
string The crest and troughs are being repla - . d 1.7 one another periodically and
waves appear to be traveling.

0r
9

••
?
r
 280
vb 0
„,
2 '
Longitudinal Periodic Waves
. „ < inoiiuhJi <» *
.
/
.
The periodic w iviu In whk h p utk le * of the medium vibrate* along the cflrei tjr> ulcjUUo' "
i 1

of motion of waves are called longitudinal periodic waves or compression

^ ^ **** to a ® rvxjuiw w , .-»
periodic waves.
'Lperalu change) / tt « j ihe air during a comprmiun ,
'
.
< on, - >i HnKS ,

Experiment .todutimai PV = constant

.vioOii ii

fltlt
$ 0 Sts&3a, jtJ& Z
To explain longitudinal periodic waves, we take an example of a spring Milt
increases from P to
.
which is suspended by the help of threads Longitudinal wave is produced Vi/hen the pressure
According to Boyle' s Uw,
•s 'rr/r
-.
'-'r jpfxr
Miurnrf iiJir
rfOUt
1-rVt

in this spring by applying horizontally varying force at one end of the yto V - AV . Ifpri
Qlau r>5Ut
PV = ( P + AP ) ( V - AViv
spring. This force produces compressions and rarefaction in the spring as
shown in the figure. PV iPV - PAV + AP
V - APAV
and AV r
-vac
Since changes AP th< So their product APAV can oe
In this case the various parts of the spring vibrate along the length of the spring neglected. Hence above ition 25
(or along the direction of motion of wave). When spring was undisturbed then all PV = PV - Ar
GIG
332
*
072
the suspension threads were vertical. But when the longitudinal wave is OR 0 = - PAV +
Helium
’-26C
*
produced in the spring then these suspension threads are displaced. Their PAV = VAP far

displacement is same as the displacement of corresponding parts of the spring. VAP

OR
The graph of displacement of various parts of spring and corresponding values of AV For Your Information
the distances of these various parts of spring, from its one end is shown in the AP AP volumetric stress values
0R P =- [ where = H]
DI constant
figure. A V /V AV/V volumetric strain Types of Gas ! T

Q.3 What are the factors on which the speed of sound depends upon ? What OR P=E (3) Monoatomrc 1 e~

was Newton's formula for the speed of sound ? What was drawback in So equation ( V becomes Dramatic 1 40

it, how it was corrected by Laplace ? ‘ Polyaiomic ' AS

Atr .P, for air P = 0.76 mHg =i.oixi05 N/m

T 2

Speed of Sound in Air and p =1.29 kg/m 3

s
Sound waves are longitudinal waves and their speed depends upon 1.01 15
x
v=
compressibility (i.e. elasticity ) of the medium 1.29
v = 28 om/sec
• inertia (i.e. density) of the medium. experimental value of speed of sound is 332m/ sec. The theoretical value is
If E be the modules of elasticity (reciprocal of compressibility) and be the
density of the medium, then the speed v can be expressed as,
“

•
o 0 ut
ess than the experiment value.
drawback in Newton' Formula s
D ing a
^ compression the temperature of air does not remain constant but
"creases .i.e. it is an adiabatic change.
Speed of sound in solids is much greater than in gases LaPlace Correction
Reason [ apla«
assumed that compressions and rarefactions in air take place so rapidly

Since molecules are closer than the gases, so hey respond more *!, heat f compression does not able to transfer to the neighbonng cooler
- quickly to a disturbance.
in solids in r
ieB°, - °ns
Therefore the temperature of the medium does not remain constant .
s ar»
In other words so the
, speed of sound in gases is smaller hah in solids because adiabatic change.
His case, Boyle's

-- — —
smaller modulus of .
elasticity law can be takes the form

-
the gases are more compressible and thus have
Newton' s formula for the speed of sound i < air
If E be the modules of
speed v is
elasticity

E
ar d p be the density

(1)
of the medium, then the
H r ^ r:
A A: -A ), so
PVr = ( P+ AP ) ( V/-AV )
r
v

v=
\ P
f 282

Where r
CP Molar heat capacity at constant pressure
Molar heat capacity at constant volume
Y SirlCCc
) ,n0
/
V <

/
•X ( l > 4-

'
v y .>
Mut
iH< i n ) Efl
CO
AV At
c >' P !P A P) I . ti
loci
V .) . <

$ how -
By Binomi ; e e x p a n s i o n
«

1
(n IIX
( 1 +- x) s 1 -mx + n — f
^J
Si ) P~~ ( P AP) ! - y
- A
. A
A
-\
v
h neelecl ine Hjiuic
~ .ii
auumgliei powers ol —
A\
V
AV APAY
P -
i
P -y p -V + AP - 7 -
/

\
Niru e APAY
\ P and AV both are small so neglecting the term y -
\
AV Note
so , P P - VP t AP The sp

OR AP TP
4 * \\
l

V
V

Ten\P
I
J
r
density
(3) Eff
When
.
AP S ’I C '• N density
71 * \ V
[ whore - - L
\\i / \ sham

yP
- t
So e q u a t i o n ( 4 ) becomes
As

So the s
1
V - I
Ti
— ’ let
y

f At S T P
P = 0.76 -mHg = 1.01 10 N n
Value of y is
*
different for different ^
s 2
p
-
1.29 kg/ m , 3

gases . For 7n?rY =l 41( for diatomic gas )

M -"-
r , I
\ : — i - S

A
v = VI H x 2 S0
v - 333 n i / sec Di viejj
which is close t o the experimental value of 332m / scc .
' lng t

Q- 4 How the variation of pressure, density and temperature effect the

V

speed of sound in a gas ?

Effect on Speed of Sound in Air

( 1) Effect of Pressure
vl *
Av \ -
\ ' •
 \ wMibjccti
ve)
sa density is directly
f ,d density of gas also
' proportional
—
to the‘
P ssure.
increase s > so the ^
i
)
V c 0
of Density
nstant temperature and
speed ol ** nen
sound
pressure of
remains same .
*4 :: pressure of gases
! eloeity is inversely proportional to havmg same
, smaller the density, greater the square value of y
I
! flOVVS
[
the speed, ii e root of their the > /

- . nerisitiles which
yP /
( b)

V P
To Uyr i
9
** * r9tt>r

v = x/ yi i
’ r e candip
VP
v = constant 1
As the sound
waves arc
/P mechanical waves ihc \ c«m
transfer energy ami
l i
therefore cause fltckcrimi of
V oc - candle (lame.
—
VP - AT
AV
-
-t:V .if
'0-
• V

Cut
*4
lote t.- 0'
-

speed of sound in hydroyen

'

if - , .. . - . . . -
"A
is four limes to its speed
hisity of oxyye / j is
i sixteen times as that i ox\ ycn hemuse
in
ofoxyye / ?
j) Effect ofiremperatu
re :
p
i
Vhen a gas is heated at constant pressure
then its volume is increased and
tensity is decreased

i yP ft
v= ft
P
ihe speed of sound is increased with the rise in temperature.
v0 = speed of sound at 0°C
vt - speed of sound at t°C
Po = density of gas at o°C
Pt = density of gas at t°C

So V< » d)

And yP (2 )
V'
P,
f

%g equation ( 2 ) by (1)

vI yP / p
Vo yl’/ Po
vf P„ (3 )
V
0 P .
284
. pHYSICS - XI (Subjective)
C. Then
Settop 285
If V0 is the volume of gas at 0° C and Vt is the volume at t

,
V * V0 [1 + pt] Q.5
state and explain on principle of super position. For Your Information

Where p is the coefficient of volume expansion. For all gases, its value is WbVM 1

l Principle
about
273
Superposition „ ,Upon' hka
A. Y vm» 2
*
of medium Is stmulta eousi
If a particle displacement of , .Y n u m f, r Stipor POA »»<<

V, = V | 1 + — 0
l
- .
•lovv u th
° rt tho
the resultant Y
Mnmiltant wnv»

- I

. -*
V Y, Y
* ,
''
As v„= - and V [ v p = -1 super position principle thP resultant dispiacem ent h
' Suporpoilllon of two wavnn of lh« anm
frtciuancy which nr *» oxacily in phaaw *
V Then by membe
Pc P
v = y>+ ya+ + Vn v '
JXJ. \AMvn » 1

1+ —
tflft
^
f Spri &

^
So
P, Po L 273 * ' in figure When . ° "
then durin« »«
_ r «afor than tho »h«od
-,
a shown
of overlapping, the displacements of waves Z2 P 35 shown in figure
OR
P .
BL =I+ J
273
(4)
.
Whit happens when 1 |PI plan |
sound?
. ? n
Concoicie tiles lister than the speed
ol
.
of xn ind time
(c) .
After
continue
having
their
crossed
motion
.
each
along
other they again aHn
the spring in their P
figure (d) We can study three Important cases nf su
“
rZZ '
-
°ri8 nal shaP« a d
V<? directlons as shown in
position Principle.
" \Ahvo 1 and wav 7 super posed
*
Raaullant wave
A conical surface ol concentrated
energy sweeps over the ground tt 1
sound ^ Ya0
Using equation ( 4) in equation (3 ), we have Cases of Superposition principle
supersonic plane passes overhead, l|
,nd Suporposiuon of two v/avan of tho somo

r
n frequency wnich am oxnclly out of phnnn
v
1+
t
(5) Or
vt °
t C + 273
known as sonic boom
EXPLANATION:
(i )
StQCXTXn' the phenomenon of interference

-
Ce

-
( a)

~
273 Vo 0° C + 273
Vo
zzz:, h , h :r| (ii) f

~~
v1 T

zzzszzsr
(c )
(6 )
Or
Vo T
0 LnCh
'^ pe of a cone with
ape . Jel airplanes, missiles
*
he
* ‘ the moving body tit,
C SCi
* (iii)
* j
Where 273 + t°C = T = Absolute temperature corresponding to t°C movmg with speed greater than (he jperi
ol sound propagate Shockwava ih
:trad Q.6 What is interference? Describe its types. Also write down the
And 273 + o°C = T 0 = Absolute temperature corresponding to o°C .
,

Thus, the speed of sound varies directly as the square root of absolute
behind them, producing a so called
boom. Shock
stmt

waves are longitudinal w

,.
. i conditions for constructive and destructive interference
aro - !/fudej that
temperature.
like sound but with larger
pressure Both c x /iifiswu - Audio generator
Possess much
Speed of sound in air at t°C
and supersonic
shock v/aves. The
objects
sound
by airplanes travel out in
produce
waves
all
this typv
produced
directions but
Interference
When two identical waves meet each other in a medium
S
. . --=3
T RA 1 =
s,
V t together at ihcM
As 1+ may become crowded
increases its speed . Flg (|
B then at some points they reinforce the effect of each ot ur Power amplifier
Vo 273 as the airplane a cone
leave
The supersonic airplanes behind it. A and at some points they cancel the effect of each otter.
shaped trail of sound
waves * This phenomenon is called interference. x ’•
Or
t
cone - shaped wavefront .
*
produces a thw
They causj
ground
273 effect on reaching the aboul 2 P** 1
*
;

=
ol
an increase of pressure about one-hal »

^
and higher
_
ine the
By using Binomial expansion and neglecting square per square foot
for
decrease In PreJJ J
“ 5
pressure. when .
by a
second / followed ,
powers, we have below atmospheric intercepts the S oU
:
1 t edge of that cone hlc 1
L CRO
Vo^ = 1+
2 A 273
+ below , we hear
assoociated
a
with
.
" sonic
an.
"
boom *
" bre3 (t
aircraft
The sonic
boom
,J kWJfl ,
o r
[ ••• « = 1 + nx + 1 sound
the
barrier
total
"
effect Of the concentration
aircraft' s radiate
6

,, ^^ (
j
V
surface of the would fad* e
So V = v° + 546 — energy, which speeds . 11 (fh
directions at subsonicsonic booms
332 ( as v 0 = 332 m/ sec ] possible to hear two
one from the lea ^
V, = 0 +v same aircraft , trailing . j
546 and another from
the
pt.
0e ^ jti11
F|0 8.8 (b)
-
+ 0.6 U cone never intercepts the n
passeng ers do’ ^ ' f Bound »v«
Or Vt = V 0
thus the aircraft °
P* ar P nt*,* *
of constructi ve Inferforonce

This equation shows that with

by
one
appr
degree
7
Celsius rise
mutely 6Trn/.scc (
in
^orTl^"^ ^ sonic boom. Point Z . * °
p" end P are points of destructive
»
Intorfensnce

speed of sound is increased

 ^ . Piera
286 5
z
' '
pHYSICS \ l ( Subjective )
Types of interference c ts
287
of interference
They are two types L

'i f
destructive interference
1>

-
on for
Constructive interference i
.
o
interference ^
c "
»'Vtv the
» " eitteids “
f ^ h difference is mid integral mulling
(> / , .

.
• Destructive iW

.
of
Explanation , It consists pf:
jn fjmjre. mv interference
,W IA
C
°rZ ZlXX.ZZor production o horntonic sound wo os
0
AS = ( 2 n 1) - where n=

w
of fixed frequency
An audio- generator .
A microphone
A cathode ray oscilloscope ( CRO ) is attached to microphone to see the
Fig. 8.8(c )
Constructive
Q Or

Q- 7 What are
AS = (n +

beats ? ^
dm

Explain
)X

It with the help of example as well as

graphically ? Also mention some uses of beats?
input signal wave- form. 4
Constructive Interference 40$
The micro - phone is
,
placed at various points in front of loud speakers
shown
,
fig .
as
At
shown
these f!
<> AAMAMAAAAMA
I I !
n f - gure. At P„P and P 5, a large signal is seen on CRO as in B !
aJ slightly different frequencies, traveling in the same
;

meets with dii ll lic' ii two

nijves

points compression meets with compression and rarefaction overlap each oilier then there is a periodic variation of sound between
and
mi direction
rarefaction. So the displacements of two waves are added up at these points and minimum loudness called beats.
Co maximum
a large resultant displacement is produced . We . can find the path difference at
sei Consider forks A
two tuning and B of same frequency say 32Hz are sounded ( C)
point P , between two waves is, sin separately then they will produce pure notes. But when they are sounded
AS = S2 Pi - SiP, tw<
simultaneously then it is difficult to differentiate the notes. The sound waves of X 1S y 1S
—4 z
4
I ! two will be superposed on each other and will be heard by the human ear as Resultant
= 4- X - 3 - X an
n in single pure notes. If the frequency of tuning fork B is lowered slightly by loading
it v Formation of Beats
it with some wax, say it becomes 30Hz .
=K No «
Condition for constructive interference No - , if A and B sounded together, a sound of alternately increasing and
dec ceasing intensity will be heard. Such a not is called beat, which is due to
' • nenever path di fference is an integral multiple of wave length, displacements of
/ 11 a w aves are added up. This effect is called constructive interference .
tote interference between the sound waves from A and B as shown in figure below.
At some instant X is the displacement of the two waves is in the same direction.
AS r\ X = where n= o, ±1, ±2, ±3,...
fhe The resultant displacement is large and a loud sound is heard.
Destructive Interference:
At P; and P4, no signal is obtained on CRO, as shown in fig. At Aft < After time !4 sec, the displacement of wave due to one tuning fork is opposite to
these points the displacement of waves due to the other tuning fork. As a result, a minimum
compression meets with rarefaction and they cancel the
effect of each other so
resultant displacement becomes zero . We can calculate the path
difference
disp ^ placement is produced at Y. So a low or no sound is heard. After next V sec,
lhe placements are again in the same direction and a loud sound is heard
*
between the waves the ^ ain X It represents a loud sound is heard two times in one second because
At P *thef
teii ^
AS = S 2 P 2 - S1P 2 ^ C
frequency difference is 2Hz .
°nclusibn
= 4X - 3- *
2
totingf °{ , per secondbt a S e<lual
, dlfference
10 t ic between frequencies of

= -A
Ihi
%
Math e
“
atically,
Similarly at P4,
f« - fB = n = number of beats per second
AS = S 2 P4 - S,P „ frequ n V difference is greater than 10H1. then it is difficult to recogmze
Cm, * ? '
s\.
=3 U- 4X % 1 565
f beats
°
= U - tfM
re used to ;

1
 PHYSICS XI v-abjecthe
-

-
< szr .~ er ~ suer as : arc

-
* : '
re
- '
-
-
^
:
5
e
*«

:
=
.
":

r
=
ec :
= §= T
:
y *
239

of Stationary A s .es
r g ca r .
-
3 cce r t -cv * .*e ~ c - T e ? *
*
""1 " C ze sz z 5r» “ *r r C
I3SrEC KuCO :
*
“
i ~ ~ tm ~ z J * CC
*
" “ - '
* t
r e s^;:enx»t or of two
'

. opposite
r
'- r .- e of such r *o wa es
*"
s
= c
i :,
C - rror *<
K *rc» r • brae « toe
a arc
* — B
~
4 2 *0 ~ = 3

i ric .cs ar «*r. r - *sc 5TO- - - f g- 'e ,

b ).

&! l«:i r* t*e eerier of

5 ejection of Aaves
rw ft

¥ * .* ~ t : - *:
- H9B MOfBOH BWI WUBmm ms9m
*
• “ =- ID
s •e ^Veaac fw n« b<x >5Arv
~cC .' f «r i ;K* r «c z +' * ' *
*
s 'f'>ne::J - as «re -« -exir arc wa »- * rgty ^ r« "c4rl “a
*
: r ;£ - :: :* - . :*
_ -: r r j: : : *
* *
:. * • rr * * * • •: •

: ;• ~ e » -
re^ er or ©r » ; ror- bOo?v3ary o * denser
JZ' s :-s * e a o - g > r * sc i •^cse
- _ or e s f » d
t

-
to a rig -d see •ped
- ee to :>c a:e -
or . a
- * DO You Know? /
ro— s - sce of a t i r e oth er en: o * r s sp rg s h
« pr uc ed ft ft bin ts on th e s^ oe -pose to each other, we want to find out the
Stare s to wt ue ft a cre st or thresh od oil
. . it dear that points
- - 6 and- 7 sh ow n in fig
sz rg
•:rtc or r e
ts e- c - : * a cs rv e c
-
;

c support to :' c : -ce s

-
-
3
F
C«
-
-
C
ea
:
c
QT
~ g
-
at
t _
z
So
~ z
t
3
the
sp
ng
r
r
g e
>
*
oc
e<
*
ts a
“ as
ssc aretne
*i. 3 etc
nts
are
of
at
the
a
poi
a
nts
sta nce
\
.
2 B
>74
4.5
apa rt fro m ea ch oth er . Th e res ulta nt
.
.
*

super position principle

*
e < e r *r -s t sc c e»ets e c ~ a ar op -po te - ea r. o - or
-the spr ing :. e to * - ch - ac e ^ ent s at the se are ca c a: ed b >- ap ply ing the

- 8 A. . * i cl shows tha t the res ult an t d^sc ace me -

nt of the po > nt 1 3 5.7 at the instants
-
rest i zsar ^rted
- tTt xjg
*
~ c ? ra e oa t * Vi en d to
— .
:=0 T/ 4 T/ Z, 3T/ 4 and T. t can be seen that the resultant displacement is a / ways
-
- e* ec : a - or wa ve s bo u ^ oa o o * a rar e ec- - : ee o e ^z «
at a the instants.
1

= or T / z
»rc- c- e - r 8 of ergs' w spr ~ g » r a § ! sr f 3 ^ ts *
an d 6 at ins tan t t .
“ t of poi nts 2 4
. i ci shows the resultant c splace ren
* ‘

vc :rre
^
" £ " i i s^ zz zr ert to c ~ o - a res t Is o -oc - ce c r t ^a-
ekj - 3 4 and T. These points
? mo ve ^ th ma x r-um -
d ' sp ac
’err ent .
fro m me an

or re sc ~ c *r 0 “ - ts e ~ t - to ex 3 «\ - er re rest p - odj eed re ac “ es : e *

»it>ons. A s t a n f l i n g -w j v a c s t i ^ r n
i s fcrr r.- ac w t' s n t w -5 a n g t h
_ o - to r e . . of the string s an integral
: r:
sr
; r
* £ Sc
. of str
a
“ t

res
"

t
~ c
s
* sr - g t e ' c '3 'e ' e:

nr '
ert ed r a c t as a
•

res t c
^

-
to ot
~ re so g
~

^ “
g e fea
e
ct
- - 5 e 'd
^ Perties of stationary A. 2 \ p <
f
>

1- There a ^ e points of m.ed um in stauonary wa es wh.- ich pe rm an en oy sn ow

. multiple of half wave fenglh:
otherwise no atandingH
-

^ ero dis pla cem en t are ca lle d no de s .

ph as e wit h ea ch oth er. I \ PL >
\ TM N:
| V W~ r rwo s -:ce >sive nodes are in
If L is the \ensit- of the smer
- ~ se '
*
oomti
3- each point along the stationary waves vibrates wit h diffe re nt am pli tud es . .
^
- 2 r-2 s e-se ” . c - a a- e* — ed
- s - e :
* z 3 -
3 0 '
L There are points of medium in stationary wave s wn c h- hav e ma xim um
A*>d X;, X; BO i-; 2« C
*
wavelengths in ihc ftgiises a. c
- e: jtr : s reject ee s^: tra: : - ce goes a -
~ ^ ph as e ::na “ ge D ^
* '

and c respecnvrh that

amplitude are called antinodes.
I 3 t“ : “ c c 'Cr a
* I
_ — s ro de nt cn a ra re r — *
nod es is / J 2 .
I ff distance between two consecutive xt antinode »s 74.
mvn Fig a,L = X» 2 = 1 >« X
.
o?r Fig bv L = X T - \:-2 =- ^
•
a transverse treeing - s Denser ec
- •
distance betwee n on e no de an d ne the
^
- X:= 2 » Xy2

-
se : z ^ e e “ te no de s be ca us e
ectec wth out s » c 3 ge « .
~ TB '

D tw
- e: . s J
me diu m fn
*
-
*
^ • energy remains standing in the ,. Th at is from Fig c,L = X72 **
-
u

-
n
Define states = ry waves ano x? w tn :
* _ - eo< oc u : i? G ve pr op er es of nodes r ain at rest, so energy cannot
^
fto through
s
the se
*
po
x,:= 3 x,: .
C5
stationary waves. Also de ne -ode anc : Mi - ode .
-~ hl y
8 £ rgy
hs
stationary waves are a so called
osollates between P.E. an d IC
sta
E
nd
. Betw -
ing
ee
wa
n
ve
no de s. Thus the leagtfi of ibe mr L
is an wtegpA ( 1, 2 md 3>
>

^ multiple of half ' c ^

<EP
Stationary Wave
rfce ^ rnr produced by - e sup
*
*wr
nkiom r of /w identical ntfvvrs
When antinodes are at
at passing through equ l'hnum
-
their ertreme P04 00
'
-
- ^^ ^
pos bon. thejwh o« en
en e
eWgy -E.
wavelength.

in opposite iirecnom is CJJ. Mn

 290

.y cl,niar ^ PHYSICS XI ( Subjective )

Commonly the standing waves are produced due to superposition of a 291
wave traveling down a string with its reflection traveling in opposite
Mode of Vibration
direction. d
cecon string is plucked from one quarter
the of its length

K3>£DI
Nodes when loops as shown in figure the string vibrates
. If be the wave
The points of zero displacement on stationary waves are called node . t0
of vibration in this mode, then
;th and f 2 be the
Antinodes frequency
. *

The points of maximum displacement on stationary waves are called antinodes . f= Ai + *u. 2

Q.io Show that frequencies of stationary waves in a stretched string are

quantized. OR
X2 = L
Prove that for stationary waves in a stretched string fn= n f, OR
speed of wave vis
Thus,
\j = i2 X2
Stationary Waves in Stretched String
Let us consider a string of length 0. It is stretched and is clamped at its two ends .
The tension in the string is denoted by F. Putting value of k 2 , we get
When the string is plucked and then released, two waves are generated which
moves in opposite directions along the string. Both of these are reflected back f, =
from the clamped ends of string with opposite phase to generate stationary
waves on the string.
As the two ends are clamped with rigid supports, so these do not vibrate and we
get nodes at these ends.
Speed of waves on string
The speed of wave depends upon tension F in the string and mass per unit length
m (i.e. thickness and nature of wire ). f 2 = 2 f, { since — = f, ]
2C
F Thus when the string vibrates in two loops, its frequency is double than when it
- v= (D
m vibrates in one loop. f 2 is called second harmonic.
First mode of vibration Third mode of vibration
When the string is plucked at the middle of its length then the string vibrates in a When the string is plucked from one sixth (1/ 6) of its length then the string
single loop as shown in figure. Such a mode is called fundamental mode of vibrates into three loops as shown in figure-. If X 3 be the wave length and f 3 be N N
i * 2L
vibration. the frequency of vibration in this mode, then 2
,c = —X —X, + —
3
Distance between two consecutive nodes = — +
2 2 2 2
If X, be the wave length and f, be the frequency of vibration in this mode, then (
u 3
=
2

Thus, speed of wave v is

2
X, = 2 C ( 2)
or

So th e speed becomes,
x
- 2C
7
v - f 3 X3
v = f1 X1

OR f, = 7

putting value of X,, we get

3v
f 3 = T7
2C

“V.
(3 )
5 fa= 3 —
v

* putting value of v from equation (1) in equation (3 ] / e get

= — m

M
»
292
PHYSICS XI (Suhjcclivt)
The frequency f 3 is called third harmonic, 293
vibrations in organ pipe open at both ends
nth mode of vibration
If string vibrates in n loops then,

fn = n — U n f,
Modes of
, ll5 consider
^ Jplete
an organ pipe of length ( which
is ooen
freedom of motion so it acts as antinode.
h . ,.
h er .ds' 5 at the open ends air molecul« have

\ V. ) curves which represent the

And wavelength is disp
Mode of Vibration
A- n =
V.
where n = 1,2,3,4,S fundamental
case there is only one node at the middle of th ' e, . As .soSSf
n this pjn both ends of pipe are open, so there are two
So the stationary wave have a discrete set of frequencies f,, 2 f,, 3 f,, at both the ends. If X is the wavelength of ,
nfi, jntlnodes
which is known as harmonic series. The frequency f, \\ known as fundamental [J - -L + -L 41
frequency , and the other are called over tones. 4 4 \ :

Note v
for Your Informant X.
The stationary waves can be set up in the string only with the frequencies of 2
harmonic series determined by the tension, length and mass per unit length of t Or
.
.
the string Waves not in harmonic series are quickly damped out.
n Iff, is the frequent y of sounc th
v = f, ;
velocity of sound is

, V
Q.11 How can we change the frequency of string on a musical Instrument ? OR fi =
ri

' iifUw putting value of A. ,, we get

The frequency of a string on a musical instrument can be changed either by
varying the tension in string and length of string.
f, « —2C
For example
Tht frequency is called fundamental frequency or first harmonic
Second mode of vibration:
The tension in guitar and violin strings is varied by tightening the pegs on the In this case, there are three antinodes and two nodes.
neck of the instrument. Once the instrument is tuned, the musicians vary the If /.< is the wavelength of sound then
frequency by moving their fingers along the neck . By doing so the change the Air
^—4 + —^2 + 4«.
*
ft v2 *2
length of the vibrating portion of the string. T=

iSSSiSSS
Q..12 Find the frequencies produced in organ pipe when it Is
(I)
00
Open at both ends
Closed at one end
maintain » " toady ofcllldlon
^ OR
t-
l + 2 + 0,
4 r
x2 = e
is the frequency of sound, then speed becomes,
v = f2 X ,
Stationary Waves in Air Column provided With
< idled n rcsoitnior.
ol « •^
,
T ic
OR
Stationarywaves can be set up In air column inside a pipe or tube. A common be in the form
b
movement f utti
example of vibrating air column Is an organ pipe. periodic
by «» ou h p,
|cce 1
,
n cr8| or^
' ,'
«id
' nR value of A.a, we get
piece nets ni l
Organ pipe
, f, =-
An organ pipe is a wind Instrument In which sound Is produced, due to setting up
of stationary waves in air column.
It consists of a hollow long tube with both ends < vpen u with one end open and
supplies the
10 mmnlm
air column
-
moulh piccc
lip and ids up
, ^
" nc
il)0 w

**". S Or
fj =
l
2v
—It
rcsonuting pip* or
the other closed. There are two types of organ pipes
Open Organ pipe: It is that organ pipe wi . e both ends are open. V.
0 ) V

(ii) Closed organ pipe: It i - that organ pi ; whov ne end is closed.

 mm MB
. .>
Ti
i 3K2 .. r '
• 4 >
4
^ - —
.r T 1 P
fa
. *
>
5> t B ‘
294
P H Y S I C S - X I (Subject
Third mode of vibration
For three loops, there are four antinodes and three nodes. If / _, is the speed becomes . ^ 295

wavelength of sound, then length of the pipe is

50 V = f, X ,
. Or f, = v/> ,
£ = -^ +
4
X, X, X,
2
+— + —
2
—4
.
Fi9 A
Stati
waves in
fi = v/4 (
^ As X =

frequency f, is called fundamental frequency

both Pnr'
1+ 2+ 2 + 1 V
f =
4
,
A The
Second Mode of vibration
mode of vibration contains two nodes
_ XX > Second and anti-i s If X 3 is the
I wavelength, then length of the pipe is
2
V 1 = 3 ( >74 )
( b)
/, = 3 / 4 /) ..
M =
' 3
So the speed becomes,
V = fj >. j

U - T-

3v
f 3 = TT If fj is the frequency of sound, then speed becomes
2f v = f 3 X3
v
u= 3 2?
v
OR

Putting value of X } we get/

u= i
[ since — = 1', )

The frequency f 3 is called third harmonic .

nth mode of vibration
2C

or
*3 =
^ 7

3v
If air column vibrates in n loops then,

And wavelength is
= n f1
So
or f3= 3 ( - 1
^
AC

[ since — = f, ]
AC

Xn =
2f
n
where n = 1, 2,3,4,5 ... ?h!,rd called second harmonic or first overtone.
S ls

| r Mode, of vibration:
/ = 5(i. / 4) /, = 5 V 4/ )
(C )
.
, „ ' de of vibration contains there nodes and three anti -nodes. If ? is the
rT
So the longitudinal stationary waves have a discrete set of frequencies f , 2 f 3 f », w length ° , the length of the pipe is. ^ Stationary longitudinal waves in a
„
nf which is known as harmonic series. The frequency f, is known as pipe cloud at one end. Only odd
harmonics are present.
fundamental frequency, and the other are called over tones. 21 x X ,
*
5
CM
4 2 2
Modes of vibration in organ pipe closed at one end
Let us consider an organ pipe of length ( which is closed at one end Then at the c=
closed end we get node while at the open end wo get anti node. 4
Fundamental mode of vibration:
Fundamenta l mode of vibratio has one node and one antinode. If X, is the
n 4
wavelength of fundamental mode, then leng h of the pipe is. OK

lffs 's th e
i
’-
^squency
f
AC

of sound, then speed becomes,

296 PHYSICS - XI ( Subjective!

v= fs Xs
hlj« r

0 mb er
^
of waves received by observer in
on e second is
297

then
OR f I - w
Putting value of Xv we get Casel
ob se rv er moves towards stationary source)
f
* ~ J7 (When
A mo ve s tow ard s the so u “ "
!',
^
| r
let observe velocity of the waves and en
rel ati ve the oh v + u»-
5v rhe
of wa ve s eived
°
nu mb er rec bvy ot
bS» Crve rin on »
or f =
' M N0 w , the °
+ u '1
co nd is
V '

^r

or U* 5 )
4
* V ( using equation 1)
V’

So |f 5= SfJ ( since -- f, ] Fio » 1«

-

\>
An otwarvw moving wWt velocity u,
Which is the frequency of third harmonic or second overtone * .
toward a (tstkvwy aouroo hoar a
frequency f that n greiitar ttwjr *th«
•ourw frequency.
nth mode of vibration
If air column vibrates In n loops then,
> 1 so
fn n (
®
—1 Af )

fn n f, Result Oo server
And wavelength is Thus the apparent frequency of sound heard by the observer will increase.
At where n = 1, 3.5 - 7,
Case II
K *- for this long
(Observer moves away from the stationary source]
n ques. see on
Conclusion let observer B movers away from the source with velocity u0, then
azeem T*- relative velocity of the sound and observer = v - u0. Thus, the number of
the se cas es , we co nc lud e tha t the pip e wh ich is op en at
By studying the both guides
both ends is richer in harmonics . — • ^ves received by observer in one second is
Q 13 . Wh at is Do pp ler Eff ec t ? Dis cu ss its differ en t ca se s .
Fifl a. io
Un observer moving with vetooty u,
j rwjy bom atnoonary scum hears a
Doppler Effect v-u . ( Using equation 1)
(frequency /, that <s smaler than the
J scores frequency
wa ve s du e to the rel ati ve
The apparent change in pit ch )
the frequency ( or of
en the sou rce an d ob ser ver is ca lled Do ppler ’s Ef fec t.
motion betwe
f,, = - V
Note
This effect was first observed by John Doppler while he wa s ob ser vin g rhe ^ V
r
se s the fre qu en cy of em itte d v-u
frequency of light emitted from a star . In some ca Since ^- < 1
d fro m a sim i ar so ur ce v
light was found to be slightly different from that emitte so
cy of light de pe nd s up on ffi < f
on the Earth. He found that the change of frequen Result
motion of star relative to Earth . will decrease

^
by the ob se rve r
6 apparent frequency of sound heard
Example se in
The pitch of whistle of an engin e co mi ng tow ard s the pla tfo rm
D sta nd ing on the H en source moves towards the stationary observer ]
appears to become high , to an ob ser ver
When source wit h veloci ty us the n
observer C
platform m oves towards the s t3 ' ,s decreased- , s
«
"* are compressed and their wavelengt h ln 1
2) The pit of whistle of an engin
ch e joi ng aw ay fro m the pla tfo rm : *
compresse * second
pla tfo rm * (j in a stance equal to v ^^
appears to e . ome lower to on obsr er stand ing on the
^
Different cases
d wa ves havin g wa ve len gth X .Let
Consider a source of sound S at rc emits so
1
,

Meed of the sound for a stationary observe is v . Then,

 ( \v VSlCS - XI (Subjective)
298 hir ’s rh< • 299

Thus pnber of waves received by observer D in one second is For Your Information
*-
of sound waves for observer is ,, the
wavelength )
flit = When source and observer move towards
the
\ - 11 Hi fo Y ”
each other with velocities u, and u , .
Ac =
- ( 3) A ""D
respectively, then waves are compressed m

the value of >- o from equation (6), we get a distance equal to v — u, in one second and
putting ^ the restive velocity of the sound and
At = - t/.Fm -t ? , observer becomes v t uf In this case both
OR ? T (

.
V
the relative velocity and the wavelengtn of

Where
Ac = A ' A / w
M 1
»

. • v ,r 1v
- f

„
inr r
Stic,’ v
*
,

t
wave changes. So, the apparent frequency
is
n-^r,«.«

= AA = decrease in wavelength in one second called Doppler shift .So '

-
“. J * 4
'.
« ,i ? r:
" •iv
*'
" r= -
V -t

>/
-u V

V
*u
- 11,
V + u„
v - u,
r
I r
US When source and observer move away each
A /v = — (4)
1
'
other with velocities u, and u 5 respectively,
Since then waves expand In a distance equal to v
Thus, the number of waves received by observer C in one second is u, in one second and the relative
velocity

of the sound and observer becomes v - u0.

k' So in this case both the relative
velocity and
T the wavelength of wave changes. So, the

putting the >

value of .c from equation ( 3 ) , we get Jj* * apparent frequency of sound heard by the observer will
apparent frequency is

Jfcrcuw _ - u„ v - u„
the uses of Doppler' s Effect. r=
V Uo
U v
-
= f
.Q14 Write down v+u V+ ut
fc = -
\
Yt
I
( v - UK ) m
V 1
'
Plane approaching
Pats navigate and find toodt*
echo location.
ft= i ( 5) ,
(' ] Radar System

t
l v-u ! EXeUNAllON from Rsdio Detection And
during flight, they JAOAR IS an acronym it > s derived
,

ceding
ince
\
uluavnind sound in user •

Ranging.
-u \
>1
of pulses and ’he rellciictl
which transmits and receives radio waves. The radar

w
adar is a device
So fc > f
waves from the '
L
'nn?
objects provide the nai dir
i

*system uses to determine the height and speed of aeroplane. This system
tl from
, rnnl »
aeroplane
; «ne and received by
Result information and iocatico ' radio waves which are reflected
the food E (b >
Thus the apparent frequency of sound heard by the observer will increase . I reflected waves have shorter
1
fte system.
wavelengths , then the aeroplane is
Fig. A
Case IV waves have longer shift is used in a

:
; . reflected A frequency

p ;
; If motion of

^ ^
detect the
[ Source moves away from the stationary observer ] the radar system radar to
n : usln
i) ;
- ng away from a aeroplane
When source moves away the stationary observer D with velocity u$ then
waves
j c oupling
k»' . T R . * 11«) Speed of Satellite
ct
radiations from Earth . When these
are expanded and their wavelength is increased. In this case the waves sending electromagnetic
\m
of
a distance equal to v - u in one second
expand in Tr.invilH'fl .
'
BxMT
vU-
** 1 I
speed of satellite can also be determi ined by
, then these are received on the earth . The value
* * *
ii)'ia
Fe reflected back after colliding with the satellite speed of satellite.
Thus hg estimation of
The wavelength of sound waves for observer D is

/ D=
v +u
-
* ( G)
I'
'.vjtl <
Ol

T IO dopph i effect CMthrough

'lionifyi wotxf i!w
l* rtene $ i sUltrasound
Ireqmr' « SMHz angry
to
J
“J
J )

111
1 PPler

a technique
1 \1
Sonar l nd Navigation and Ranging
w ^•
for
^
detecting
^
's shift in wave length of these radiation

the
)

*
objects under water
in water
by an

Lances
>
depends
,

observed
system use*

,
upon
which
the
is
f directed towards tt> ttmth
the
e
llratonic waves because they can
" r
apparent change
' Akn
, J etc

^^ ^
rarpiver deeds
“
* / ons
weapons and mines
siorml The atvolooty " ,)f*’
OR A0 =
A
V
—i 4 - —-
U
Uttpeniis un the
parent n
J K
l

Ww
speed of the target and the
** an e ubmannev ^
antisubmarine
= A + AA
’ti'CHid
Si
's shift. In this way we can locate
Pth of sea can be measured.
M! ^
Where
blood
ii

1
= AA = increase in wavelength in one
second c , lied Doppler shift . So
velocity Of
detected by
effect by noting
^
ncyf
4 k = -L shift ( change in
(7)
I
300
PHYSICS ~ XI (Subjective)
( tv ) Speed of Star 301
By comparing the line spectrum of light comin g
(
ron a dista nt star an< j

shift between speed of

labor atory sou rce, Dopp ler' s can be
V ^ \oond
the light emit ted from and temperature ,
v = v0 0 6lt
measured to calc ulate the spee d of star with resp ec o Eart h *
Tfor constructive
JT .3 r > movin g towa rd
• ', tiir «Mrth show blue r
. hih] ; away from source
^^^ for destructive
where

Blue shift / Condition In sound waves AS = ( n + -) X

The frequency of light emitted by the star inm
. ( » .e wa « ri< ngt r Interference
where n=o, ± 112, ± 3...
decrease s) if it is movi ng towa rds the earth, a pared to the li Beat frequency
*
emitted by stationary star Thus spectrum is I towards
'
1 I transverse waves on
udv elcn glh i.e to the Blue end of spectrum, wh»ct * i * l B ue 't V
Red Shift rTundamentjl fraqu* '
The frequency of light emitted by the star dec * . (i r
* .i a* 4
*•
/ itatlonary waves oil firing
f* A

increases ) If it Is moving «» way from earth Th t \ „ -

r ;trum i *
!

fn = n U
towards the lony rr wa \ i lrny th \ « tow .u ' ' < . •
on strlngf nth 4 v where n = 1, 2, 3, 4, —
which is called red shift V
lefif th of Statio nary —n
Note
'
/ Wave
wivfS on str . nj | nth mod }
* where n 1,2,3, .
As astronomers have alto discovered that all th < - 'r na awa y from ut and fc «
1
, >

their red shifts, they have estimated their speed |

frequen yof longitudinal
f, «n
fn = n f,
n organ pipe
v / itjro iry W
* where n = 1, 2, 3, 4,
( v ) Speed of Car .
..

Microwaves are emitted from a source »n form of ' rt bunts [Kh b . of longitudinal
7 avt It t ’h
. K
In their way The reflected bursts uc drtc tm in tht detector If x / stationary waves n organ pipe n
Doppler s '.hill 1 » bsei veil Hy wh ch Speed of <H it UlOjimd MtoOWtW
i . ^ Over at oolh ends ( nth mode ) where n 1.3, 3, -
car by computer program. frequency of longitudinal fn » n f,
attonary waves In organ pipe f, »n
where n •t, 3 5, 7,/
*** *

doted at one end ( nth mode)

*-n •n 3 5 -
4/
Wave length of longitudinal
—
.
Relation between velocity,
frequency and w ivelongth of
waves
stationary waves In organ pipe
where 1, ,

Relation between frequency

and time period
Relation between phase
dlffeteiue and path difference

Speed of sound

Boyle v law for Isothermal P\ jnstanl

process

Newton ' s formula for speed v

IP
1#!
Boyle ' s law for adiabatic
process

Speed of sound in air

302

Multiple Choice Questions

%\
4 t -4

tK . • r
SMI
, 4 <-

Four possible answers to each statement are given below. Tick ( ) the correct answer
^ ;

Longitudinal waves can not pass through:

(a) Liquid ( b ) Solids \t -
( d ) Gases
( c) Vacuum
, the velocity of the resultant wave:
When two identical waves superimposed
(a ) Decreases (b ) increases \i -
(c ) Remains unchanged ( d ) is zero
Waves produced in organ pipes are: 18.
(a ) Transverse waves ( b ) Longitudinal waves
(c ) E.M. wave ( d) All of above
Speed of sound in summer than in winter. 19.
(a ) Decreases (b) Increases
( c) Remains same (d) Can not tell
Newton calculated speed of sound using process. 20.
(a) Adiabatic (b) Isothermal
(c) Both ( a ) and (b) ' ( d) None of these
Speed of sound in hydrogen is times its speed in oxygen.
(a ) 4 %
(c ) 2 ( d) 34
1. <
Error in calculation of Newton's formula for speed of sound is about:
(b) 11.
( a) 10% 35%
( C) 16% ( d) 27%
The frequency range of human ear is:
(a)
( C)
20 Hz - 20 kHz
20 Hz - 200 Hz
(b)
( d)
20 Hz - 20 MHz
200 Hz - 2 KHz
I
Q.
Beats are the results of:
(a) diffraction of sound waves (b) constructive and destructive interfered
Ai
(c destructive interference (d) None of these
the tuning fork make , wave in air w ill t r a vel '
If the time required for to one complete vibration the
distance equal to:
X X
(a ) (b) Q
4 2
(c ) X (d ) 2 X.
The term which can tell us the stage of vibration of the particles of the medium is called :

(a ) Time period (b) Phase

(c) Wavelength . (d) Amplitude « s:
transport of pa rtld
it is common characteristics of all types of wave motion without the
(a ) Particles (b) Drown
(c) Energy transferred (d ) Mass decreased :
waves , produces
When a string, which is tied at both ends is plucked from the centre of
(a ) Transverse waves (b ) Longitudinal waves
(c ) Standing waves (d ) Electromagnetic waves
 z '/

in a stretched string, ifspeed of

) 2 the wave is doubled,
( a
the tc slon
(c) 8 . |(b ) ^ will be:
4
frequency of a stretched strl
(a ) Tension
rl
"*
Propo tiona |
othe:
d) 6, , <
(c ) Reciprocal of length (b ) 1 inear density
A string fixed at two ends vibrates in
first overtone one se« mp n»
eSment . w »
Square of tension
. The standing wave pattern
(a )
Is:
(c ) fundamental (b ) second over tone
Two sounds of the same frequency \m air Id) second overtone
) amplitude must Have same:
(a
(C ) loudness ( b ) Intensity
Which of the following ( d) wavelength
phenomenon can not take
(a ) reflection place with sound waves?
diffraction ( b) interference
( c)
M
- . *. - - v
) :
- ”

polarization
»

of
Presence moisture in air:
(a ) Increases speed of sound
(b) Decreases speed of sound
(c) May increase/decrease the sound velocity (d)
Does not have effect
Doppler's shift measure the change in of the wave due to relative motion of source and
observer.
(a ) Intensity (b) Frequency
(C) Velocity ?

(d ) Wavelength
ANSWERS
2. c 3 b 4. b 5. fe 6, a 7. c 8, a 9. b 10. c
12. c 13. c 14. b 15. c 16. c 17. 18. 19. a 20. d
; •• .

+y
r
- r * ’ v *

Exercise
‘

Short Questions of \ 1•
"
. > •

in com mon with transverse waves ?

What features do longitudtnal vaves have
2006- 2009, Bwp 2008 , Lbr 2010- 2011,Grwzor?)
(Federal 2005, Mir Pur

Common Features
e ,
DOlf1 types of waves traaSBSS. CI
‘ * 7'
u rtinn. refraction and reflection.
^''^
.* ***
.*
“

^
N
F
*
types of waves can
determination of the
produce
speed
In
of
mSS
wave,
-
^
^ b|e f
from
both
.
these
microphone
waves
Is fed Into «<
*
controls.

^* * *
bode ray oscilloscope,
^ * * the 5ame adjustment of the
a) Which trace represen *
b) Which trace represents the
thode ray oscilloscope
nete7
frequency?
I
 c . rV • r

* »• v--
Jo V*- Xi

XI (Subjective
Ipr^ PHYSICS
304 -

2 apteLitv,
^ Scbo
Why d es sound travel faster in solids than in
305

.-
Q8 6
(Mtn 200 6, °
Sgd 2003 -2005, Fsd 2006- 2008,
§ases ?
Rwp 2006 Grw
2003 - 2004, D.G,Khan 2005, Mir Pur 2004, Bwp 2006)
travels faster in solids than in gases
Sound
Reaso n:
Fifl. 823 A B C 0 E Spe ed of sound is give n by:

+"
(Lhr 2004, Bwp 2009, Fsd
" iT " ^
'M
2008, Gr
Ans. Loudest Note
* *°09)
200 8 • Wh 6re
greater com
uom
as '
pare
Dar d
ed to gas
sa
P
< - es but modulus of
den sitV f « • Although the density of solid is
°
elasticity for solids is much areefer as compared to
In fig. ( d ), the amplitude is maximum, so loudness is maximum for this case . gases . So
Maximum Frequency
in fig (b ), the number of waves is maximum, so frequency is maximum in this case
.
Hence sound travel faster in solids than in gases.
Q.8.3 Is it possible for two identical waves travelling in the same direction along a string to give rise to 3 are bea ts useful In tuning musical instruments?
Q.8.7 How
stationary waves ? ( D.G.Khan 2005 -2006, Rwp 2005, Bwp 2006 - 2008, Lhr 2006 - 2010-2011,Grw 2011)
( Mtn 2003 2004, D.G.Khan 2005, lhr 2006, Fsd 2005 2008. Rwp 2006, Grw 2008 - 2009- 2010)
- *

Ans. Tuning of musical instruments

Ans. No . it is not possible
In ord ^ r to tune a musical instrument;
Reason uen cy . If the two freq uenc ies do not mat ch , beats
g oppo site Sound the ir strument against a note known of freq
Sta tionary wav es are pro duc ed only whe n two iden tica l wav es trav elin in direction along the instr ume nt by tighte ning or loose ning the
will be produced . Adjust the frequency of the untuned
same string superpose . string. vVhen no bea ts are hea rd, the instr ume nt is said to be tune d.
f are sou nde d toge ther , bea ts are form ed . If h > fz
Q.8 8 When two notes of frequencies hand 2
ed ng but som e of Its par ticle s per manently sho w zero
Q. 8.4 A wave is produced alon a stre
g tch stri what will be the frequency of beats ?
displacement . What type of wave is It ? (a ) f»+ fi (b)
Ans. These a ^ e stationary waves. ( c) fi- f 2 (d) % (fr f 2)
, Mir Pur 2005 , Bwp 2008, Rwp 2008)
(Federal 2005
Reason * inter ferin g freq uenc ies
'em ' difference of indi vidual
On i n stationary waves some poin ts of the med ium per man ently show zero disp Ans Since beat frequency is the equal to the
-
nodes and some points show maximum displacement called ontinodei Beat frequency is fi - fj. r .
hea rs
,
the exp
, ,
losio n.
• - M.9 AS a result of distant explosion, an observer senses a grou nd tremor and then

and ant ino de 7 Explain the time difference? ( Lhr 2009)

0 8.5
, Exp lain the term s cres t and trou gh , nod e
2010, Lhr loto- tf 1!
’
( Mtri 2003 -2004 - 2009, fid 2005, Rwp 200 6 , Bwp 2009; Grw

>. Explanation
Ans. Crest Craft
equilibrium pos ition s £ The speed of sound is given by
Tre port on of tran sve rse wav e obo ve the
called trougn
Trough
Throw/ i than the speed of sound
senses the grou nd
gas
in es
trem
(
or
air ) due to
first and
The portion of transverse wave below the equilibrium position Is Amplitude
ca ’ied trough . then hears the explosion.
air t jn cold air ?
Node Nod ® 8 to Explain
why sound travels faster In wa rm 2003 , Federal 2004, Mtn 2009, Grw 2009)
Antinode S|d 2005 Bwp
^^
>

The points o' iero displacement on star, onary waves are called
A|
«ason
nodes.
Antinode
'
*The speed
'

of sound is given by
Tr e of maximum
pO ' nts :placement n stationary yvaves are
called antmodes
306 , PHYSICS - XI (Subjective)
Scboi i
^
gssnn®® , . . ,
307

w ax P
Since gases exp and
equation, the speed
or
of
) heat
sou nd
ing.
will

mov e
So
be

with
the
grea

resp
den
ter

ect
sity
in

to
war

an
of
m
war
air

obs
m

erv
air
than

er
in

so
decr
the

tha
easp*
cold

t the
air
Hen
.

freq
ce

uen
^cording to aS
Given
B
Hz
5 > s c
^ , the beat
, determine the frequency of B
Dat a :
Frequency of tuning
when loaded

fork A = fA = 320 Hz
Per
^
SCC '
f Und ha by l"a inK
"
° ' '
hC frcquency of A 320
‘ “
,
'
Q.8.11 How sho uld a sou nd sou rce 0
, sound Number of beats per second before loading = n = 4
does not change?
( Bwpzooj, Number of beats per second after loading *= n' = 6
sou rce and the obs erv er is zero the re will be no change jn **p 2008) w..
Ans. velo city bet wee n the ,
If the relative To Find:
frequency of sound. Frequency of tuning fork B after loading = f „= ?
Examples Calculation :
orig in and sou nd sou rce mov es alon g the circumference of the ci e 1: Befo re loading:
When the observ er is at hen the ir Case
distance remain the sam e and the freq uen cy of sou nd doe s not cha nge . As fA - fD = ± n
Source and obs erve r are mov ing in sam e dire ctio n with sam e velocity . 0f fB = fA ± n
Putting values, we get
„
f = 320 ± 4
Solved Examples —
fn 324 Hz or 316 Hz
By loading B, its frequency will decrease. If 324 Hz is the original frequency , the beat frequency will
r.xatuple 8.1 reduce. On the other hand , if it is 316 Hz, the beat frequency will increase which is the case.
Find the tempera ture at whi ch the velo city of soun d in air is two time s its velo city at 10° C. So, the original frequency of B is 316 Hz.
Given Data: Case 2: After Loading:
Temperature = T0 = 10°C = 10 + 273 = 283 K -
Velocity of sound at 283 K. = v 2 »3 = v0 fA fB n'
=

Velocity of sound at T= v, or fB = fA - n'

As velocity of sound is two times its velocity at 283 K
I hcrcforc
*
fB = 320 - 6
vt = 2 v0 = 2 V 283 fB = 314 Hz
To Find :
Thus f 0 when loaded is 314 Hz
Temperature = T = ?
Calculation:
• Using the formula
1 *amok 8.3-
A steel wire hangs vertically from a fixed point, supporting a weig ht
to
of
the
SON
weig
at
ht
its
is
lone
1.5 m.
r
(
end.
alcu
The
laic
mm and its leng th from the fixe d poin t
diameter of the wire is 0.50
the fundamental frequency emitted by the wire whe n it is pluc ked ?
J
(Density of steel wire = 7.8 x 10Jkgm )
. _
o, 3- LL 283
Glvcn Data:
V 3»
Weight = W = F = 80 N 1
2v T Diameter of steel wire = D = 0.50 mm = 0.50 x 10 ni
Or
„ 283 ’
v2
—
D 0.5 x 10 ’ * ..0.25 x 10
'
1 <v j m

2 -T
283
Squaring on both sides
Radius of steel wire r =
Length of the wire =
2 2
= 1.5 m
Density of steel wire * p * 7.8 x 10 kg m
4
—-
= 283
Find :
Fundamental freq uenc y fi r?
T
-
283 x 4
T 1132K
-
T « 1132 273 * 859C°
 308

Calculation :
As formula for fundamental frequency is
Second harmonic \\ * ?
Um rz
1
2f
- £0 )

• rvere m is the mass per unit length of the string.

^
'
(

(a)
u at
aU * '
’ wn
When
:
Pipe »» open at both end *.
Using the formula.
So first we bave to calculate the value of m .
fn
.As volume of the wire = Length * Area of cross section of wire ,
vo lime of the wire =
( i x rcr2 For fundamental frequency
And
Mass of the wire = volume x density
2
M= l x rcr x p
M t * KT 1 X p
Mass per unit length of the string = m = — = t 340
2
m= Ttr p 2 x1
Putting values, we get 170 Hz
~3 2
m= 103 fz = 2f ,
3.14 x ( 0.25 x 10 ) x 7.8 x
m = 1.53 x 10~3 kg m - i f2 = 2 x 170
Putting values in equ . (1 ), we get

f = . 1
2 x 1.5
80
1.53 x 10*1
For second harmonic n = 3
f2 = 340 Hz

f3 = 3 f
f3 = 3 x 170
,
,= f3 = 510 Hz
f
hi 80
0.00153 (b) When Pipe is open at one end

fi - j V52287 .5
Using the formula
.=
f -
4f
f, = 1(228.6) For fundamental frequency n = 1

fi = 76.2 Hz
Thus
•
' IT - lxv

the first tv
A pipe ha* a length of Im. Determine the frequencies of the fundamental and
harmonics (a ) if the pipe is open a both ends and ( b) if the pipe is closed at one end. Putting values, we get
340
(Speed of sound in air * 340 ms 1 ) "
f| = ~~~T
4x1
Given Data: ,
f = 85 Hz
Length of Pipe = t * 1 m In this case only odd harmonics are present.
Speed of sound = v = 340 m So, for first harmonic n = 3
To Find: ft == 3f ,
f3 = 3 x 85
fa) If the Pipe is open at both ends. f3 = 255 Hz
Fundamental frequency = f| » ? for second harmonic * n = 5
First harmonic = f2 = ?
Second harmonic = f3 = ? -
f5 5 x 85
f 5 = 425 Hz
fb)

-- -
If the Pipe is open at one cod.
Fundamental frequency fj ?
First harmonic fj ?
-

j
310
pHYSiCS - XI (Subjective )
311
.
i
A train is approaching a station at 90lunb soonding a whistle of frequency logo .
the apparent frequency of the whistle as heard by a listener sitting on the pUtfo *
the apparent frequency heard by the same listener if the tram move av* av from ^
.a
v

same speed ? ( Speed of sound 341) ms ' )

,
* ' 4 lK w Thus
^ or V=f, 4
Given Data .
Putting values, we get
Speed of train * U, = 90 Kmh
Speed of sound » v * 340 ms •l
1
*
90 * 1000
60 * 60 - 23 m* *'
-
v 200 * I 0‘« 1500

-
v *3 0 10‘m iec

Frequency of source f 1000 Hz K A* ihc transnuttcr emits

To Find :
( a ) Apparent frequency ( when train is reaching a uik*vcr > oKerve'. ) f
* - -
(b ) Apparent frequency ( when train is moving away from the ob .erven - f - >
Calculation :
(a) When train is approaching toward listener then uting the formula
• v
I f
V Us
Putting values, we gel
r pi - * )
l 340 23 ) * 1000 12 Two speakers * re arranged u shown in Fig. 8.24 . The distance
between them is 3 m and they emit a constant tone of 344 Hz.
f' -- —
315
f ' 1079.4 11/.
X 1000
A microphone P is owned along a line parallel to and 4.00 m
(ram the line conacctiag the two speakers. It U found that
l nr of maximum loud is beard and displayed on the CRO
( b) When the train is moving .sway from the listener ’. ter ‘
. • e ^
When microphone is on the center of the line and directly
opposite each speakers. Calculate the speed of sound .
v
r *- f Cisco data :
lv Us Distance between speakers 3m
Putting values, we get Tone frequency * f * 344 Hz .

140 Distance between speakers and line of motion of P « 4m

r 340 * 25
* IOOO Tt find :
Speed of sound v ?
-
3

340 t ilculaium :
f x 1000
105 For tone of maximum loudness or the condition for constructive
r - 931.5 Hz interference , the path difference must be 0, ± M, ±2 A , ±3 A,
At middle point * 0* the path difference between two sound waves is
*ero (as ,S|0*SjO) thus at that point construction interference takes
Exercise Problems place.

0 200
8.1 The wave length of the signals from a radio transmitter is l 5f'0 m and the the
What is the wave length for a transmitter operating at 1000 kHz and w i t h * • 1 or the next point Pof construction interference the path difference between waves should be X.
waves travel ?
Given data:
Wavelength of the signal - =* 1500m
Sc- X * path difference * S2 p] 5 /?
Now we calculate values of S1 p]
— ,,

Frequency of the signal * f =C )kHz *20(3 \ 103 Hz, From right angle triangle SiS1 pi
Frequency or transit uc . * U\
*
lr= lOOOx 10 Hz __
To find :
Wavelength the transit ;er = = X; '
V
“ (3
^
16* 25*5 m

Speed of radio ves = v ?

 i *
Jm
•1 l
312

HKTCtbre path difference

Or
-
X 5 4 -
— .V, / '
SchoW * PHYS ICS (lubfrrti rj

312
X* l m ' f u Uf » d :
This is the path difference for constructive interference

^
(
*cn length ofih
Now v = fX
putting the values, we get
v « 344 x l (»)
:
(b)
Olculalion When length
-
of the wmk
( when

“ inc
| ^
** ^^ ^ vre<
y
dbyone birdwidwMi
r4 « 0« ekmvng fc
ka
^ )

v = 344 m5- t
When tension in the string reduced by oonhird without
is constant,
then speto remains cfcuswf .*
constant hence
the lot :
and v = f ' X' '

8J A stationary wave is established in a string which is 120 cm long W

and fixed i both Thus fX = f
vibrates in four segments; at a frequency of 120 Hr. ends. Th
fundamental frequency 7
Deter mine itsJ wavr icngt h If X is the original wavelength,
then the reduced wavelength
an (1 Hu is.
Given data: r -x - — X
Length of string = f = 120 cm = 1 0 t 2 m
ft, V3.

Number of loops = n = 4
^
100
=
thus equation ( 1 )becomes
Frequency of vibration in four segments = f4 = 120 Hz
To find: 300)1 = r* -3 x
Fundamental frequency
wavelenght = X =?
Calculation:
= fx = ?

As the string vibrates in four segments and the distance between two N ( b)
or
or ^=
: bo|
'
= r
r
450Hz
When tension is increased by one third
As the relation of fundamental frequency withou t changi -
ng the length:-
for a stretched string is
consecutive nodes is ~
> so the length of the string is £
I / .illVm
2/
( 2)

1
X .I
/ when tension is increased by - F, then
Or 3
2 !
1.2 F' = F+ -3 F
Or X=
2
—
F' = jF
t*
X = 0.6 m
If string vibrates in n loops, then frequency of stationery waves will be
f „ = nf ,
r - ±21 JE
Vm
,4
f 4 = 4 f,
-£
P

—
As n =4 1 I
f=
21 V m
Or fi =
f .l =
4
120
—
Or

Or
f =>
JM

--- -- -
4 A

-
as f=300 Hz

.* ..
|fl =30Hz freq
The frequency of the note emitted by a stretched string is 300 Hz . What will be the
uent Thus f - 1.15*300
8.4
this note when: 8.5
•
(a ) the length of the wave is reduced by one - third without changing the tension.
( b ) The tension is ncrease 1 oy a le-third without changing the length of the wire .
Given data:
harm
(»)
( peed
onic
»
when
of sound
it is
- open at both ends -
( b ) closed at one end
“ " “ ““
*
Frequency of th^ etched sir g = f = 300Hz =350mss )

-t i
i .4
 hr1 it
I I - V

314
:• s> IT ' * r

Sch°iai-r*s PHYSICS - XI (Subjective

Given data: - )
Length of organ pipe = / =50cm =0.5m 31
- l Maximum length = /
Speed of sound =v =350 nis Speed of sound v
max =
To find: = ~ 340 ms
To find: -
-
(a ) (when pipe is open at both end )
Frequency range =? i.
fundamental frequency = f =?) , e./i = ? &
=?
Calculation:
Next harmonic frequency = f 2 =?) For organ pipe open at one
(b)- (when pipe is closed at one end) f
_ nv
end only ,

fundamental frequency = f =?) , " 41

M in im um len gth
Next harmonic frequency = f 3 =?) For fund amental frequency, put
n =1
Calculation :
(») When pipe is open at both end:-
The frequency for nth harmonic in open organ pipe is
fB = —
So the fundamental frequency is
f
1
_ 1 x 350
when n = l ,2,3,.•••••••••••

put n = 1
.

Ma xim um len gth

For
£ lm
“
min
1 x 340
4 x 30 x 10‘3
= 2833Hz

fundamental frequency, put n = 1

2 x 0.5
nv
f i =350Hz f\.mn
4 jmax
Next harmonic frequency i. e. n =2 is 1 x 340
f = x
2 4 4
21
f,,„= 21Hz :
-f “ v “ 350
‘ T oT Result
So the fundamental frequency ranges from 21
f 2 =700Hz 8.7 . Two tuning forks Hz to 2833 Hz.
exhibit beats at a beat frequency of 3 Hz .The frequency
(b) When pipe is closed at one end:- ) Its frequency is th of one fork is 256 Hz.
en lowered slightly by adding a bit of wax to one of its prong. The two
When the pipe is closed at one end , then frequency for nth harmonic is exhibit a beat frequency of 1 Hz. Determine the frequency of the forks then
Given data: second tuning fork.
n wh en n = l ,3 , 5 , 7 ,..
41 Frequency of first tuning fork = = 256Hz
So fundamental frequency is Beat frequency before loading = 3 Hz
1 x 350 To Be at frequ en cy after loa ding = 1 Hz
(Put n = 1 ) find:
1

- 4 x 0.5
f =175Hz
Next harmonic frequency i .e. n=3 is
, C
*lculation:
As
Frequency of second tuning fork = 6 = ?

-
f, f2 = ±n
r 3v
Or f 2 = f, ± n
fJ = TT
41 Putting values, we get
3* 350 fj = 256 ± 3
r 4 x0.5
* Ik
'

To| f 2 = 259Hz or 253Hz

_
[f, = 52$ Hzj "
A church organ consists of p*nes open at one end, of different len
fu
gth
nd
s . Th e m
n
l» lB
0(fi
ltt l11

7'nuoamdebedrwiofthbewaatsxpr, oduced per secoofndfliwiXllformkere se}&an"Jd*W£ow *££*re.** ** ***!££&

^ *
O X 25 9 H x as co rre ct an sw er
. 256

^ ^
ra ng e of the am en the frequency must 25 254
is 30 mm and t e ’
^ on gr . 4u
is Ca lculate th e frequ en cy
will be greater then 3 beats
(speed of sound 0 -
IS )
i

Given data:
Minimum Ic l min * 30mm -30 x 10 m
 * >
* iV ‘. A *1 a % . 1 * A
f

m
* V
.
ft's V > fc \. .
w . &
‘ r>
- *1
.
• V ’Ti.
316 J *

Since the number of beats per second decreases on loading first fork is one, therefi
ore 259 i Scholar'8 PHYSICS - XI (Subjective)
frequency of second tuning fork .
Thus Speed of sound = v ~ 317
Correct frequency = f2 =253Hz As (254-253= 1 Hz) 340 /fry 1
'

Time = t = 50 sec
8.8 Two can P and Q travelling along a motorway in the same direction . The |ca To find:
a steady speed of 12 ms the other car Q, travelling at a steady speed of 20 " * ’ ? v
« V ,
^* Speed of source (i.e.train )
,0 un = Us =7
to emit a steady note which P’ s driver estimates, has a frequency of 830 H / YVh
Q ’ s own driver hear ? " **** K
‘ its h 0 ni
‘* Calculation:
Distance covered by the train ?
=S =? i

(speed of sound
Given data :
- 340 ms )
-I

Botrai ( JOm» ')

Using Doppler, s fonnula, when
f '= ( )f
source is moving away from listener

Up =12 ms
Speed o f c a r P =
-1 ^ 7
VfUsT
Putling values, we get
Speed of car Q = UQ = 20 ms
-i

- 1 P
••
1140 ( — 340
340+ U,
)1200
Speed of sound = v 340 ms
* «
I 340 x 1200
Frequency heurd by P’ s driver - fp = 830Hz
Or 340+U, 2T

To find:
Frequency heard by Q’ s driver - - fp ?
Or
Or (
-
1140
340 frU, 357.89
Js = 357.89-340
-
U, 17.89 ms-i
C a l c u l a t i o n:
Speed of Qrelative to P UI
"UQ Up 20 12 8 ms -
Using Doppler’s fonnula, when source is moving toward listener
- - - 1 Distance covered by train after 50s
As the acceleration of the train is uniform,
distance covered S * vBVx t
-
r v
-Vv - • U /
f since v
so
V
0+ 17.89
2
8.95ms 1
^
-
S = v„xt
'

Or

P u t t i n g values, wo get
340
• /
FQ Putting values, wc get
S
--
8.95 x 50
S 448m
The absorption spectrum of faint galaxy Is
830 -
340 8
fo - identified as the Calcium a line Is found to be 478 nm. Tb '
ifoTh !Jwstslsngth of 397 nm
”
340
-
830 ( ~ )fo • .
when measured In a laboratory.
) l the galaxy
moving toward, or away from the Earth
.
Or fq
-
830x 332
340
lr>
-
b) Calculated the peed of
data:
- -
the galaxy relative to Earth?
(Speed of light 3.0 « 10 ms )
'
- 397 I 0Jm
f 1104711/
,0 - - - wavelength ( laboratory measured ) X 397 nm *

n .9 A train sounda Ita

platform aatlmataa
Fifty aeronda after
horn
Ita
bafo »
fraquancy
daparture
sstl,nates the frequency at
.
,
It

thr
sets
• i
off
20011
driver

.
/
from
The
the

aotinda
station
train
the
1140 !| .
then
horn
,
anti
move
an

again
,
|,te
t afr„
obaerver
off
and
and
the
afcelartl
pW «
,r.in ,,,rc
departure. )| 50 a after
- ui
„
t V*
r
^ r '‘^ - - *
Apparent wavelength 5i' 478nm 478* l 04m
0f
) 1«
t " v o 3.0* lO ini
the glaxy moving
'1

towards
’
or away
h) Speed of galaxy relative lo earth U, 7
from earth * ?
M

. (ip««d
n dates
of wound
-
the station Is the tralo aft
340 mi 1
j
?

^ . Maa ,
A v •fX .or c* a what*
original frequency,
o 0 ipiU of light

(i h
Original frequency oi
Apparent frequr ricy •f
itn -
401 (
II
170011/
f
 =p • ' -

\> . Vl

318 £!liPter 8 ru PHYSICS XJ (Subjective )

55!
f= ‘
\
f=
3 x 10“ Chapter 9
397 x 10 ’
f = 7.56 xlOMHz
For apparent frequency, PHYSICAL OPTICS
r=-V
s
3 x 10
r = 47 8 xlO v
,4
f ' = 6 ,28 * 10 Hz
(a)- As A'> A or f ' < f f so galaxy is mo vin g awa y fro m ear th. . Understand th wavefront.
(b)- Using Doppler effect Wh en sou rce .
is mo vin g awa y from obs erv er, then I 1

2. State Huygen ' s principle.

r« v
f 3 - Use Huygen' . principle to explain linear superposition of light.
v+Uk As v=c
4- Understand interference of light.
evid ence it prov ided to sup port the wave theo ry of
f=
c
f 5 . Describe Young's double stilt experiment and the
c+U » / light.
Putting values, wc get ^ »
6. Recognize and express colour patterns in thin films .
3 10
x
- Describe the formation of Newton's rings.
6.28 x 10 = '* x 7.5 6 x l 0 “ 7
.
3 x lo ' +U, 8 . Understand the working of Michelson's inte rferom eter and its use s

6.28( 3 X 10 +US)
B = 3 X 10 * X 7.56 9 . Explain the meaning of the term diffraction .
X 10* X 7.56
10 . Describe diffraction at single slit.
6.28 3 X X 10 8 +6.2 8U,=3
. ang ula r pos ition of firs t min imu m .
11 Derive the equ atio n for
- x 10*
6.28 ,
U = 22.68 x 10 " 18. 84
12. Derive the equation d Sin 6 * mX
6.28U, = 384 x io
6
13. Carry out calculations using the diffrac tion gra ting form ula .
14.
crystals .
enon of diffraction of -
rays by
_ 384 x 10 ° Describe the phenom X

‘ 6.28 15. Appreciate the use of diffraction of X- rays by cry sta ls .

Or .
u ^. ^ xio W 16.
17 . Understand polarization as a phenomenon
t pol ariz atio n Is
ass
pro
oc
du
iat
ced
ed
by
with
a Po
tran
laro
sve
id .
rse wa ves.

Recognize and express tha

ariz atio n .

.
18. atio n of Po lar oid on pol
Understand the effect of rot
pro du ced and det ect ed .
19. Understand how plane polarlz d ligh t Is

r
m Chapter 9
Scholar *s PHYSICS - XI (Subjective) 321

Chapter No. 9 The branch of

physics which deals with the nature of light and its different
phenomenon is called physical optics .
c
c Light is form of energy which produce thesensation of vision.
i .
in 1678 Huygens' s , an eminent Dutph scientist, proposed $hat light is the *
form of energy which travels in foflfn of Waves. y
Q.l What Is a wave front ?
'
_
^ ^
V M

Wave Fronts
The iurfocrjn whicft oil
X the points of wa ve s have sa me ph as e of vib rat ion is

V
knows os *ront
i^1 V\
*3
^
Explana
b ( )
po int sourc e pro pa ga tes ou tw ard in all V &vo front
'
Suppose> the light tted from a Spherical wave fronts ( a)
, the wa ve s rea ch es the su rface of an and piano wavofronUs (b)
sp ee d After tim e t
direc tio n fci th spaced a wavelength apart .
re wi th en ter as S an d rad ius as ct. Tho arrows represent rays.
il nai
so urc e is sa me so all the po ints on
As the distan I the se poi nts fro m the
the sur of the sph ere ha ve the sa me phase of vib rat ion . Su ch as su rfa ce is >
known as wave front. *>
Note
m a poi nt so urc e are sp he ric al
T e wave front fro
spa ce by the mo tion of wave fronts .
Thus wave propagates in

wa ve fro nts Is on e wa ve length .

The distance between two consecutive
rw Ray of Light
dir ec tion of propagation of Do You Kn ow /
The line normal to the wa ve fro nt wh ich sh ow s the r
i erf l»< y» ( > >0f>C
3/r a
* ** 0m4»r
* * *
light is called a ray of light wvwftonl

(1) Spherical wave front

pro pa ga ted in sphe ric al for m wi th EXPLANATION:
The wave front in wh ich the light wave s are
away
The wavefronts far
the source is called spherical wave front. fro m the source are very
fro nts are the
me dium , the wa ve large spheres, A small
for a point source of light in a homogenous the sph ere will be
tion of
concentric sphere of increasing radii.
por
the plane wavefront.
U) Plane wave front
) fro m the so ur ce, a small portion of
At very large distance (i.e. at inf init y
fro nt is known
pla ne. Su ch a wave
spherical wave front will become very nearly
plane wave front as shown in figure.
322 Chapter 9 [ph
<~ *s
rfrnlar PHYSICS - XI (Subjective)
323
Q.2 State and explain the Huygen' s principle ?
for detectable interference pattern
Conditions
following condition must be met, in order to observe the interference
The
Huygen's Principle phenomenon;
If the location of the wave front at any instant t is known then Huygen' s principle
1. The interfering beams must be monochromatic.
2. The interfering beams of light must be coherent .
enables us to determine shape and location of the new wave front at a later time The sources should be narrow and very close to each other .
3-

—
t + A t. This principle has two parts; The intensity of the two sources be comparable .
4-
I. Every point of a wave front may be consider as a source of secondary
Monochromatic Sources

r..r :“ ria^
wavelets which spread out in forward direction with a speed equal to the speed «
of propagation of the wave . ^
ii. The new position of the wave front after a certain interval of time can be
found by constructing a surface that touches all the secondary wavelets
c
c
Coherent Sources 1 K
sources of light which emit waves, having a constant phase
The monochromatic
Explanation: difference, are called coherent sources.
Let AB is the wave front at time t . *> How to obtain coherent sources
To determine the wave front at time t+ A t, draw secondary wavelets with center A common method ‘o obtain the coherent light beam is to use a monochromatic
CAI A source to illuminate a screen containing two small closely spaced holes, usually
at various points on the wave front A 'B' and radius as c A t, where c is the
speed of propagation of wave. The new wave front at time t + A t is AT3 ’ which in the shape of slits. The light emerging from the two slits is coherent because a
single source produces the original beam and two slits serve only to split it into
is a tangent envelope to all the secondary wavelets. secondary learn the diagrams and
two parts . The points on a Huygen' s wave front which sent out
Q3. Discuss the interference of light, discuss its different types and A wavelength are also coherent sources of light. mathematical derivation
conditions for detectable interference. 0 experiment for demonstration of and read the theory only
Q- 4 Describe the Young ' s double slit
interference of light. Derive an expression for fringe spacing.
“

FIQ - 7
* construction f 0f

Interference of Light Waves urn

-
k vtarv
* J A ST Ctfm
* ** Young's Double Slit Experiment
When two identical light wave travelling in the some direction are superimposed
to each other in such a way that they reinforce each other at some points
In «01. Thomas Young performed the interference experiment
,
to prove
the wave nature of light. A screen having two narrow slits s dlummated
(constructive interference ) While at some points they cancel the effect of each by a beam of monochromatic light.
other (destructive interference ). Such phenomenon is called interference of light . i The portion of wave front incident on the slit behaves like the source
Types of interference secondary wavelets. The wavelets leaving the slits are c0 .
Superposition of these wavelets results into the series o rig an
There are two types of interference
bands which are observed on the second screen placed at some dist
(i) Constructive interference parallel to the first screen.
If crest of one wave falls on the crest wave , then they support each other Such a Conditions for Maxima and Minima
interference in known as constructive interference. ,n order to derive the equations for maxima and minima , an arbitrary
For constructive interference : Point P is taken on the screen on one side of the central point O as shown
is
Path difference = mX where m = 0.1,23 ln figure .
AP and BP are the parts of the rays reaching P . The line AD
1

(ii) Destructive interference

drawn such that AP=DP. The separation between the centers of the two
slits is AB=d.
If crest of one wave falls on the trough of the other wave , then they cancel each
other . Such a interference in known as destructive nterference.
For destructive interference
Sort m... flgfnr
^ |V
.i

1
distance of the second screen from the slits is CO
detween CP and CO is 0, It can be proved that the angle BAD=0 by
= L.

assuming that AD is nearly normal BP. The path difference between the
The angle

Path difference =
1T
m+ — X, where m = 0,1,23
.
wavelets, leaving slits and arriving at P is BD. From right angled triangle
/
ADB, we can write
324
£
^ apter 9 [ph
y» ica|
crholar's PHYSICS - XI (Subjective) 325
BD
AB
=sin0
J *
p

Ty Fringe Spacing:
or BD = AB sin 0
( AB = d)
Path difference = BD = d sinQ (D B
m i0 jhe distance between the centers of two consecutive bright or dark fringes is
called fringe spacing .

Constructive Interference L Bright Fringes:

for Two
If the point P is to have bright fringe, the path difference BD must be an integral 6f fn order to find the distance between two adjacent bright fringes on the
multiple of wavelength. So, screen mth and (m+i) th fringes are considered
BD = mX
Thus d sin 9 = mX (2) Position of the mth fringe ym = (m) —d )
.
Where m = (X,1,2,3, •••••* XO
fringe = ym+i=( m+i) -
Where m is called the order of the fringe. At central point 0, the path difference
BP-AP=o, so there will be a bright fringe at 0 corresponding to m=o. This is called
position o '
Im
zeroth order fringe.
Then .
%
Destructive Interference:
If a dark fringe is formed at P, the path difference BD must contain half integral
multiple of wavelengths. According to the condition for dark fringe. An interference pattern by monochromatic
Ay = 0Y+ 1 -rf ) —a .
light in Young,s double slits experiment
l
BD = [ m + ] X — XL
)
A
Ay = —a
Thus d SinQ = [ m + — ] X (3)
For Your fnfoftnntion For Two Dark Fringes:
adjacent dark fringes on the screen
Where m =0, 1,2,3, In order to find the distance between two
#
Position of Dark and Bright Fringe: (m + -) th and [ m + ~ ) th fringes are considered .
ooi
Let y is the distance of point P from the central point O and a bright fringe is 2
4
0436
0 ^0 OK
0.106- 1 ,
_ _y
formed at P. Now from figure, we can write from trianglePOC Position of ( m + -) th fringe = ym = (m + -)
J
0104
.*
yi » 0140
.
0 (71
OP am
tanQ 3 . ,
- (w +
3. ( XlA
— ) th fringe J
^
OC L Position of (m + = Ynwi
y= LtanQ ^
Then,
(for small 0 sin 0 * tan 0 )
y= LsinQ _ Ay
3 fXL 'l , 1 J XL
Position of Bright Fringe: Ay = (m + )
2 ur (m+ )
2 lT
m
From equation ( 2 ) l

sin0 *
mX
—d Ay -
XL

—
. Thus equation (4) becomes

.
Ay
XL equally spaced. The
y=m —d m = 0,1,23... . Hence the bright and dark fringes are equal width and
elpac ng
Position of Dark Fringe:
From equation (3 )
\

i
2
can
; T Z e
be used for the determination of the wavelength.
foMhe
^
sinO -
Thus equation (4) become.
H ;
i
y = m+ — —
l 2J d
m = 0,1,2,3....
326 Chapter 9 h>| ,
Q. 5 Explain the phenomena of interference of light in a thin film ? ’
Scholar * PHYS ICS XI (Subjective)
327

arrangement:
Experimental
Interference in a Thin Film
A transparent medium w hose thickness is very small (Comparable with
the wavelength of light ) , is called thin film.
The thickness
slit is almos
gradually as
t
of

we
the
zero
air film between plano - convex Ion . and
at the point of contact /0' and it increases
proce
the
ed
thickn
glass

towards the periphery of the lens , Thus

ess of the ajr film Is constant will lie on
in
the point where
Examples: the circle with O as center . s
G
"
o ) oil film on the surface of water, from a mono chrom atic sourc e 'S' becomes Ilel
—
Light beam (a)
( ii ) surface of soap bubble, h the lens ' L \ This beam of light falls
, ;°";;o' after passing
throug convex
n— h
(Hi)
Explanation:
cracks in glass plate.

Consider a thin film of a refracting medium. A beam AB of

Interferons 0
^
'
Do You Know ?
on the
towards
glass

rays falls
the
norma
plate
air film
lly
surfa
on
G

s
.
and
the
of
Some

.
lens
the
,
rays

these
are

rays
partly

are
reflec

reflect
ted
partly refracted through G. When light
ed
normally

by the top
air film . As these rays are coherent
Fig. 9.6 ( a )
Experimental arrangement
observing Newton’s rings.
for
and bottom
monochromatic light of wavelength X. is incident on its upper surface. It is
partly reflected along BC and partly refracted into the medium along BD. V’ « L\
and interfere each ( her

ed
constructively or destructively.
upwar d is observed through a
When the light reflect
At D it is again partly reflected inside the medium along DE and then glass plate G, a series of dark and
microscope . " M ’
focus ed at the
along EF as shown in fig. The distance between the beams BC and EF will
bright circular rim are observed, as shown in figure. These
^
•

be very small, and they will superpose and the result of their interference 'Vv‘ concentric rings are Called Newton ' s rings . •

will be detected by the eye.

Dark Central Spot :
It can be seen from fig. that the original beam splits into two parts BC and The vivid iridescence of peacock
feathers due lo interference of the lens and the glass plate , the
. of the
,

EF due to thin film which enters the eye after covering different lengths light refler tpd from its complex At the point of contac t
of path. The path difference depends upon;
layered surface . thickness of the film is effectively zero but due to reflection at the
1. Thickness of the film
lower surface of air film from denser medium, an additional path
Interesting Information difference of k / 2 is ( or phase change of 1800 ) introd uced .
2 . Nature of the film rings is dark due to Fig 9.6 ( b )
Conse quentl y the center of Newton
3. Angle of incidence destructive interference . A pattern of Newtons rings due to
interference of monochromatic light
If the two reflected waves reinforce each other, then the film will look
bright. However , if the thickness of the film and the angle of incidence 's
film will look Q.7 Describe the principle, construction and workin g of Miche lson
are such that the two reflect ed waves cance l each other , the
find the wave length of light used ?
dark . interferometer. How can you

Interference of White Light :

If white light is inciden t on a film of irregul ar thickn ess at all possib le
angles , we should consid er the interfe rence pattern due to each spectr al Michelson ’s Interferometer
Colours to measure
colour separately inference Michelson s interferometer is an that can he used
suc fhar
are dui to ' instrum ent
devise d this For Your Information
But if the thickness of the film and the angle of inciden ce are ^ white tight. distance with extremely high Albert
precision.A . Miche lson
Then the of light rays.
the destructive interfe rence takes place from one colour instrument in 1881, using the idea of interference
remain ing colour of the white light will make appear ance on the film . . Principle:
Q- 6 Discuss the format ion of Newton ' s rings . Why does
fl
the centra l ,ts forking is based on interference. When light from a single source is Q /
spot of Newton's ring look dark ?
‘ -
spitted into two parts and then interfere it forms an interference Patter n

Construction and working: A photo graph of NfictveV

shown Interf erom eter .
The essential features of a Michelson's interferometer are
Newton' s Ring schematically in Figure
When a plano- conve x lens o_ long Inca ! ten th is placed in contact with
, ll enclos ed between them to form
a plane glass plate a thin m ' * is
dark and bright fringes u wn as Sen ton 's rings.
circular *
 Ray Diagram c .hoUr > PHYSIC? ’ \1 ( Subjectc )
329
Moveab le Mirror
. ^^
wavelength of red cadmium light and proved at
m
( 2 ) M cheHon measured the length of the tedard met in terms of
\ m
*
Standard meter = 1553 ^ 63.5 wavelength of light
{3) If light of wavelength >„ = 400 nm fs used, then it can .
sure the
4
thickness upto 10 mm ( or t -f

( 4 ) It Is used to observe the in w

*•
f! <! Mirror
Q,8 What Is meant by diffraction
% OtJIX
* Also discuss the di ough a narrow slit ?

Schema ic diagram d a Mcftdeon’t inaurfmvnjtrc

Diffraction of Light
Working The property 0/ hen dm i; of light around obstacles and spreading of light
into the geometrical shadow of an obstacle is called diffraction . Shadow
Screen
Monochromatic light from an extended source fails on a half
G, that partially reflects it and partially transmits it Th
srivered glass plate EipUn Jtions : - Object

.
refected per or - andl S
as I In the figure travels a distance t, to mirror
towards G,
*
wh ch reflect
s the beam p
*
.
Mx cd Consider a small steel h ba ; i
of about 3 mm in diameter
-
illuminated by a point source of l ght ‘S ' The shadow of the
object is receded on a screen as shown in figure. The shadow of
Shadow

The half silvered plate G, partially transmits this portion the ipbencal object is not completely dark but has a bright spot at
^ Bright spot
that f naJfy rnves at the
observer' s eye. The transmitted portion of the ongmal beam
,
a distance L to mirror M, which reflects the beam
labeled »s < navels
back toward G;
-ts center it happens only if the light bends around the obstacle.
Bending of light caused by its
passago past a spherical object

same piece of glass as G, Is introduced in the path of beam >1 This phenomenon becomes prominent when the wavelength of light Is large as
,
plate . G therefore equalizes the path length of the
as a compensator
be .im l and m g ass Th
two beams having their different paths are coherent They prod
uce mterferersce
’ . co pared with the s ze a* the obstacle or aperture of the slit.
.
« d ffraction of light occurs, In effect, oue to the interference between rays
Point lo I’oiuk J
Hold two fingers close
0

effects when they arrive at observer's eyes coming from different pans of the some wavefront . together to Form t slit Look
at a light bulb Through the
The observer then sees a series of a parallel Interference fringes . In a predic t Diffraction of light through a narrow silt: silt Observe the Pattern of
interferometer, the mirror M, can be moved along the direction perpersd eu sr to.A The e oerimentai arrangement for stub > ng diffraction of light due to narrow silt light being seen and Think

its surface by means of a precision screw As the length L, is changed, th iatt <
*
Is shown in figure.
why It is so.
EXPLANATION:
of Interference fringes is observed to shift kit us consider a slit AB of width d is Illuminated by a parallel beam of The lending of light rays around
the small openings or obstacles
If M, is displaced through a distance equal >72 a path difference of monochromatic light of wavelength X. A small portion of the incident wavefront
. .
P sses through the narrow silt Each point of this section of wavefront sends out
.
Is called diffraction We see the
.F \ ~ x x * diffraction fringes through the
this displacement (i.c — — .
* A ) Is produced, i. e. equal to k Thus' fringe is seen
*
secondary wavelets to the screen. These wavelets then interfere to produce the
diffraction pattern. It becomes simple to deal with rays Instead of wave fronts.
two flngeri close together like
site
shifted forward across the line of reference of cross wire in the eye piece of the
. 0n> y nine rays have been drawn where as actually there are a large number of

I
telescope used to see the fringes. A fringe is shifted each , A
: ne the m rror it r»Y .
displaced through X / 2. Hence , by counting the number m of th; *ut
nges which consider ray 1 and 5 which are In phase when in the wavefront AB. After
are shifted by the displacement L of the mirror. We can write th equc= : n. tht « reach the wave front AC, ray 5 would have a path difference ' ab * say equal
*
to Va. Thus, when
these two rays reach point P on the screen, they will Interfere
L =m —2 destructively. Similarly, each pair 2 and 6, 3 and 7, 4 and B differ In path by >72
or 1
K =
# nd wlt|
do the same .
m
iri
order to find the value of pith difference ab, we consider the rignt angle
.
l*lg19.0
lr ingie
Veryprecise length measurements can be made s an interferometer.
.
‘ aAb, as shown In figure SR<
Uses: Si«R » *
..
is u ;ed lor the
Michelson s' interfe romet er following purposes:
(1) it is used for the detc nation of w elength of light.

.«
T +

'
•9
3 JO
Mitipttr j ,
nr .
,b AH
7
i nO hot Aft d
..
t - » rrijft
*
HiU A'

,
'
, ,
* 1

,
*
,
XI (SulijttHvi';

< Of,MXU0V« * Ml . W J) f 4
331

thuc ah
d lt)
J
MO
*
•» * 1 fi /n
'
if 'J ion
r„ jr

/ vvh
pl
; || M /'
« n fv - y
f ‘
irriv
' (’ /
. ' '
-. ‘, , ,
*-
< - > >' lh /
' V v
* /
OK y f
’
/ / / II therefore, i iN rh n • , <
/ - - ^ ^ p poth t y
i t - jVH /
) For your Information

( ,rnUny I rl J
'
1| f rl ' ,
f or (JctUru live tot rferenc .
« ( fir * ) minimum ) , ;»b
>. fit " path d « f fvr " fix for > on nif.rij
^ f.7/0
* ' - - -
M * f ,' » for fir r minimum »n b < - .
2
» ,<| 0 ,* ,
cor (« f
/ ( ullvr * nr / c choul d lx inli gr ) l in jlt » | «• r /i
” i 1
-
,r* ,* )

.^
«
/ ), >!
,
-
.
'(I )
n,
,
10 i/ -»
•
nqtniMjn
' / / rI! t < * rf (
Path / lift ib h /
• 1
jMX vj

'I .111 / ' Mlf)

..
.
from figure , » - b
" r gM ' ngU
- ' CiriO -
y
„„7,,,.
7
«Hu f » . J
. )»
•
» •» { Amir -J | , , ,A
nJ |

^ ^
fnfereefmg Application
Of
l , » he
/

different ordmc ,f minim,

- . or ill) •! .' MnO
- ib

I
In K n r /mdlfronc for
*r * * f / V ffj
( )) 0
.
mth<- vdi of of ,/ ' M (i if » -
ffjyt n I , / Comparing H) U)
tHm O in /
^
- ,- * t id Sln'
path differe
^'
nt « o ,
xw
^
( 3)
( > ), , 1 li ' <>"
,o / / < • / / ill , tfw - ri -
- . r>.m *
.
W ' ll Of
-
/yfif M ffi M, ' ,
/ ) {,
/
, .,
i/ f hf ; » } ( fringe me h known /
'

< r o order Irnag * * formed fiy th » gr iMng

-. -
O.ri ’ A tmUu

-
Il o region b« r ef> » • / / /o ' on;* ' oh /•» minima both above f , J below
* * **
-
-. )
If v/ -
in
(

- 0 on nither
* - ld « of till ' -
dim ' lion , i v ilue of 0 / /ill b< ifnved . --
-
/)

be * fill ! < • l / f l y ) > \ I rn, / irn, fo tfi) *, / /,, y / / « • mm / olil i i i i r » « • - . ,f ,,t whi) h / f / i» nd / / • again K » bright image If |> * » f » diffi n?nt * 1'« - -
‘ » a'
)
IO on
) ) 1 ) ) •
I Mn ‘
‘ * .
-
/
'
d*rk ,» od bright fring . / / / ( it * r- ntnil bright
* .- , , |,
-
the iHO j rtf mulnp li - of . , < • / / ill get * n).oncJ third order Hr , image **
IftiiDniifiirtxr Infurmoiion

-
.. - . .ino ' * ' ' ' . Wfit" r n , , , ,
00 |yryju) 4|| 0/ «M» / / /
*' / #

f| l « in | < [ i • ! //< if / / ill .

-
i t

- <J / 1/ <* 01? 3

tj l
' Wh
* t it
wavelength of light /
diffracHon grating and obtain the grating aquation to find the
Iiik
n
, .
- o, -. if
-
ll - ' - - - ' '
, .
! tli
i' / '
il
.
.I
f
. ,
granti
n
ng
I .
«
and
Ihe
'n
lif
r .
'
' . ' ailed
order m
die
-
* ritr «
order
.
of
arid
diffrac
v > or ,
I l itioii i /
tion
fhe
rri i/ im i I * t
f
i / lm i
Tf«a
llIt
- • .
try
. itir J
. ) >

-" D) »
*- *'•

.
) i > i

u
- paraf ’ Ifn . • - * obt)
- d ,pondl
»ip < flg « ft v
% if' flviiglli oloor ilfM f f / fre' fo af /a / or « .

f >iffr « jr tion Oroting 0,10 Dotcrlbe the diffra ction of K rayi throug h cryitah ? Alio daicrlb a
.
"/• dljfrt Jr U f j f i tjmllh fj ' orr i' j of / / // / / / * . iilal e on whl' h \/ f r y JUv
• yuirJ l i' inl f / / fill' l hut -. ( \ r / r i h h r % ) / / flmw n hy rnmn o/ nillm j r t i y i f f r
fj .- - tlif Braggi i fpJMtlon and Its different uieir
%
- _

s / l t h firn fJhjtru t / ifl fjrjltii i h t h n m i t o r p n l - i n n i m j h r i w r r n i h r z / rritth m ), ,/ fti|I)

- m /"

-
III M
)

nn / fi y /«4 * fjlut
*
-
/ * /pi .< 1 dlff r # '
* .
i v i illti "

gf .Olf / g bat ^ f < ii / »|/t / / to '/ / / Horn |< tif nrillrnata . |

) ) ) ) )) )
.
) Mil
>1

, „M,;,I . •iUl
'(
()

ll ,,M
-,
•« •" '*" ' W 1
Diffraction of X
X rayi h type ol
of the order nl 10 m.
Rayi by Cryitulft
»

elactromagnwtlc. radiation of much shorter wavalangth .

» gfLAPA lONt
ini IT
rwtuwm >
If vTi«
i
r »)
"
flg
|
CVt
- »" '' pAmUfl

.* - -
)))
Hl f -
*
ItKKI
rf »
••
) .
*
« ''""'
Oratirig alamant
I hr
t/frrvarrf "
dlituw • hr I // e r / i .
lh nuilar nf ( wo )»// ) / ) aril Un» h
* *
) ullp' l (JtrilInfJ
lull'll’ 1.11 lli In order to nli vnivB the affect of diffrac tion, tha graving
-
spacin
of the order of iliu wavelength of tha radiation uiad The regular array of
g must b «

.
.
w< jt «i livn i
smallt' inn m ww
v. , M i|n
uwvUf
-
fti i/alo it obtainad » / dividing tbt Ungth i / / f tfm grating by th " dal
• torni In a uy» tnl forma a natural diffraction grating
Tha Itudy uf nt.oml< Strut of crysta l by X ray was Initiat ed In 1914 by
* )
* , turn
* *
nornbar tl of » > * llna » ruled on It • W H , itrogg and W . l Uragg wllh remarkable achlavemenu Ihey found
That « monuQhramall of X ray was raflettad from « cryatnl plane
V the grating lament d - I / N
)
• . ' *
-
If / / « » ontlde )
Working ar» d thao) / >
wrill i *r « gtli of tt « dlffrat .tlort grating than l l/ f « - - • l If II acted like mirror To umleritand thl effect, a * erlei of atomic
( dories of cunateni Idler planar ipaijlng 'd' parallel to a tryital h» » B
*
b
,
hown by lines |V . IM* / l* lb 1 shown In fig, and so un .
r ) / f » liJa » » ha parallel l a»m i-» f ntor Hror au. light IHumlii dlrig Ilia
*
#
- ^ fiirfi "fTragg' aquttlont
..
.
A i
nonn al Intlda flta ft » e pan « the wav « front that pall
grating at
, hippo «n •• ray bagmW incident at an angle on orte of the uUne *
, n < .rt ,
,
--
„„ , ‘ K y

.
|OII uf

.u
|
through the illti haha vai %ourt *» of > • try wave U > «< « ordlftl hi • cnmprt * I
" ^* " . 1 a ** travgll »orn d tfrn «
••
0|r ^ t

piene ofprVat«l

.• * *'
» all »W
1
Tha beam rafle< lad from that lowai plana < *
Hu /gar / t print ipla
dim ciior
- ‘
T ""t1' 0» t IV ) aa ccin para tu Ihi beam reflet tad from the upper ulane rhu
* ,
'-
(
( ontldof tha pataf f r /d
" i me
*t i » to fotui >n Ota ^ * an afigl« 0 with All after ,||„
,
11, Itlft
tail "•
0 -,., VJ
,I«
ttffev tlvp path differ nn » baiwenn the wo * fflectr *
« i ! « i V * 1 • 111
^ ' *
| 1

dlffrertlon fhay « ra
dlffar
than
en < «
'
hei
* uraart at p by ronvgk
irl t a y t a i r llona Wfvglaftgth X, they nr ll » M Mlfl e ” "
--
Jion*' » la
I 11
'
|glM > If the path roll) ( (» •
P A ha Iniidani beam contliti of the '
y / dl r a i n f a l l a «« h
Othe r at
• ‘
. VS
 332
Chapter 9 [ph
ysir
From triangle ABC, we have ^i QPtitn] Scholar ' s PHYSICS - XI (Subjective )
,n9 III 333
BC
-— = sinO •On |n transverse mechanical waves, the vibration can be
AC
Or BC = AC sin f) vertical , ho riz on tal or any oth er
oriented
direction. In each of these! cas
along *
said to be polariz ed . es the
Or BC = d sin ft
wave is <r
*
As AC=d
Similarly from triangle ACB' , we ha The plane of polarization is the plane containing the direction
ve of vibration
CB
of the particles of the medium and the direction of propagation of wave.
= sinO A light wave produced by oscillating charge consists of a periodic
AC variation of electric field vector along with magnetic field vector at right
Or
CB = AC sinO
"

.
A multi- iportur «
This »
•• piclufb
point vutc.o
of oghtiy wo * hol
ditfrnctlon patten
of a
wtvita-Ugto
through a PTO
angle to each other . The direction of polarization in a plane polarized
light wave is taken as the direction of electric field vector .
A
An unpolarized light ,
Or ven doth, CA Unpolarized light: due to incandescent
Tidbit bulb, has vibrations
CB' = d sin 0 * A beam of ordinary I ght consisting of large number of planes of vibration in all directions.
Thus, path difference = BC+CB/ is called unpolarized light *

= d sinO d sinO (D
polarized light:
I
I
The bear of light in which all vibrations are confined to a single plane of Potarlod- 2
Path difference = 2d sin 0 OifTraction p.« tte<n oi a
Both reflected beams // ill reinfo
hair urvjor
-.
la or
single humiin
ilfuminaUon.
vibration s called polarized light.
Plane Po -
rce ( constructive interference ) if Production and Detection of plane polarized light

yr
difference is equal to integral multiple The light emitted by an ordinary incandescent bulb is unpolarized,
of wavelength Hence for (a)
constructive interf erence
,

because its vibrations are randomly oriented in space. It is possible to " * urpoianzed
Path difference = n>. (2) obtain plane polarized beam of light from un-polarized light by removing
Comparing 1 and 2 , we get all wave , from the beam except those having vibrations along one
2d sin 0 = n). where n = 1,2, , particular direction. This can be achieved by various method as give
n
3 below Fig. 9.15
where n is the order of reflection . Th
is is known as Bragg' s equation, or Bragg' s (1 ) Selective absorption
Experimental »rr»< jomont to V>ow
law thill light WIVM arc tranavefee. Tha
lines »ntn arrows incftoatea eieoJnc
( 2) Reflection from different surfaces vibration of light « ava .
Uses : * *
(3) Scattering by small particles
1. Bragg' s equation can be used to ( 4) Refraction through crystals
determine the Interplaner spacing
Selective absorption method:
between similar parallel planes of a crystal i.e., d = n /'
Select , ve abortion method is the most common method to obtain plane
2 Sin0 polarized light by using
certain types of materials called dkhari su
2. X-rays diffraction is very useful
biologically important molecules suc
Important constituent of blood, and
In determining the structure of
h as hemoglobin, which is ^an
tw
These transmit only those waves, whose vibration are parallel t o t h e a r u a
direction and will absorb those waves whose vibration are in other d recbo . "
.
“
3- Bragg' s equation can be used to
double helix structure of DNA
determine the wave length of light.
One such commercial polarizing material is Polaroid.
« the un - polarized light is made incident on the shee of IP , ,d the
_
° roidjhe
{\jt . by >.
2d
-Sine
j ;<•> oi
transmitted light will be plane polarized. If a second sheet o
such a way that the axes of the Polaroid , as shown by the
them, are parallel, the light is transmitted through
1 hn« dr« on
second Poiaroid lso
*
Q.11
produced and detected ?
.
Explain tha phenomenon of polarization How pla
ne polarized light Is
/
A ;
the second Polaroid Is slowly rotated about the beam o
the light emerging out of the seconcI o a
,d sappears
fur
when the axes become mutually P P f ^
^
^
and
The |jght reappears
EXPLANATION:
Little light is due to
polarization
<w ^ the r rotation and become brightest when the axes are aga par alle l to
each other .
Polarization
The phenomenon of Interference end diffraction eve proved that light has wave
Transverse Nature of Light:
V l0
°* Th s experiment
nature, but these phenomenon do not show whether light waves are
*
‘ proves that light waves are
never disappear even if the two P ar
waves. If the light waves were longitudinal they would
longitudinal or transverse . The phenomenon of polarization shows that light asstfsgsJ °
Polarized because of scattering by air moleculi ,
mulually perpendicular . Sunlight also becomes
he E4rths atmosphere or by reflection we can obtam
v

waves are transverse . partially polarized light instead of glare o ign •

 334

p H VSICS — XI (Subjective )
Reflection from different surfaces : > *l
cho\ 335
• Reflection of light from water, glass, snow and rough
angles of incidences, produces glare since the reflect a
road surfa <> , for - g .. — — — — -—
,

polarized, glare can considerably he reduced by u.mg polarized • light

.un; • . ,
p .,rt j
•

1
Multiple Choice Questions i
Scattering by small particles:
- below. Tick ,
Sunlight also becomes partially polarized du
earth' s atmosphere. This effect can be observed"' »
f our possible answers each statement an given ( S) / ie correct answer :
pair of sunglasses made of polarizing glass i cert i
light passes through than at others .
n da • , of t « . -
bT loo * ng d uttfy up through i
, \ v si -
Polaroid: I The wave theory of light w
Galileo ( b)
A synthetic doubly refracting substance that frc i ;,
-*
ab - o r
one plane, while easily putting polarized fight in another plane
j. , - j |ltfl » ,
(a)
(c ) Kepler ( d)
Huygen
Newton
of rub:
l. The locus of all base of vibration is:

Q.12 What Is meant by optical rotation >

*• pOMK
( a) (b) Interference
(c ) ffrac ( d) Polarization

Optical Rotation
When .i plane i
In

M |Uf .
gs experiment the Plano convex lens used should be of:
[gth

focal length
(b)
( d)
Large focal length
None of these
< 1 light
.
plane of polarization Quart! and - odium c> orate y t i
which are termed optic ally active crystals
.
Are > .examples
The aif between
pattern
lens and the plate in Newton' s rings experiment Is replaced by water The rir

A few millimeter thicknesses of such try t . * - (a) Contracts (b ) Expands

ret « u* t
* polar *:at on
by many degrees Certain organic \ ubst » ncev . •
such s sugar and tartaric tod .
*
W (C Remain same (d ) Becomes darker
increase In:
show opticil rotation when they erg s property cf c • T '« «4 vtxar* 5 Fringe spacing In young's double slit experiment Increases due to
'Ubstancc . can
‘ r (a ) 5 » t separation ( b ) Wavelength
*
( d) Frequency of source
FORMULAE ! 6.
(c ) Order of fringe
Fringe width In Interference pattern will be more, when coherent sources are:

(a) Dose together ( b ) Too much apart

Path difference for constructive
(c ) incited at same angle
(d ) Inclined at 45°
Interference In light d$n « s .
m/ nere m « 01, 2.3,
.
^ 7 Which Is not optically active?

^y/
Path difference for destructive
Interference In light

positlon of mth bright fringe

d Smd » Imt JX,
where m * 0,1, 2 3

yma, AL
—

T
•
d$ R0
where
•[ 2nv*l]
^ 8 .
•
( )
(c )
Sugar
Water
Longitudinal waves do not exhibit:
•
( ) Reflection
(b)
(d)

(b)
Tartarlcacld
Sodium chlorate

Refraction
( d ) Polarization
yj/*Position of mth dark fringe
/
V v (m — 1 —
a
Q
9 .
(c ) Diffraction
When light falls on a ball than its shadow
(a ) interference
has bright
( b
centre
)
, It Is due
Diffraction
to:

Fringe width / spacing ( d) Refraction

Av (c ) Polarization
T 10. The danger signals are red while eye * 1 more sensitive to yellow because :
Grating fitment L
N
y da ~ ( whenl lm/
•
( ) Scattering In yellow colour Is less
wavalangth
than
than
that of
yellow
red
colour
21 fo) Red light is longer In
Displacement of mirror in yellow fd ) None of these
L*m - r«d Is less than In
M. ^
m Scattering in
Mlchelson Interferometer monochromatic light ?
Which one of the following Is nearest to
Ught from fluorescent tube
/ Bragg' s Law 2 d am 0 •nk
Where n » 1, 2 3 . •
( ) Ught from neon lamp
(b)

%
 oifes eiusv ' IOIA
Z '- ' /' y s' "
r jf
* ks P H / S I C S - X I ^Subjcctr .
U • <*
* ^ *o o . #
produced t r f t> »k
t
* # >«# #.*
* * ** ** ^ M**
t •+ - i,
* ' v' , - '
*
> >
*? ; S * •
X* '4
* Short Questions of Exercise
fl
^ * * * ** ' *
" ’ <v
-"«
*' * * ** " * * ** * **
< > t« j r rt
***,*** Unde wftM cofrtiiom, tfw two ,
s t « Ptrfx Oft* /
scuff of r **,* *s IL >
*
•%
«v s>
* >
(M ft
** * ' ^
? * ^ sourcfe

^ - ^ 2005- ^,
7/// 200
$
_ ,
Ifer 299t, i*r 2y/ „ J x 20 -
id )
< 4 ,
ff J .- , vrtto
, 1k&s u /

. A/4 - Cor^Jitiom for coherent source; ^2OT

-
0 + fp x
< v*ri ' t
*hx wmthoffclr te/ 0 .
so rces 3'
* S3 'I to
"0> \ f

f t) «vo
** / d
t& l
•flcse 4
* *
^ (> ) netOorce rnyjl- e
^ /W
'/ : cmf / /< / e fen gr " o " o o' 'c ~ < c
' *2) MO CtattgA
< * ** 44 / '/I fc/ f/x
(» )
perr
rh£ u /
'* " .:* ' < /e constant ' '
,
ce
* - ce

. tr^ .
' «, //Vy *• Y/f
* '
fh ) A T ptoud
'fr «’' *f 0. 3 - 2 Mow »' d'st : ;ce
.
.” . *.
Interference fringes affected 6 / » ne eparatio
tweer. the -- its o-?
- -.
(d ) yoong * " ae '

" < * *' * # **'' p . «r

- .
'/ *'«> J * <> ** * wk*n y
*
r i ‘ i*rfS ,

ll/yw llg if rtpUctd by Wu< 1, 7 Ant,

'; experiment ? Can fringes disappear?
& / > ncra,* !ng rne se sargt 'or bet //een s;its fringe
spdc;'- g Js decreased sno / ice versa.
*
’

3
(b) Wider

7.
ry

// '
•

y>
M tfsn +
** *
'/ fr * <V V«
'its r -*n r Of pfffditt tcAoxKt
*
fdj
#/ rth
Bright
v/htU D M?
spac ng '
-
g /en by,
A /,
—
'v ’'*' 4n .* ^ A/ *
/
.
/ ' (b) Interference *
fCj /X . '/ / fd) D»$p « Of>
Tr ip equation shows that the distance between fringes(Ay) is inversely
proport onai to the sepa ^ a: or .
% n •/ > son rUf (jff Uff
* * f
between the slits (d) .
4
' f&
* {

^ 0/ mo/«r»f the mirrc^r through

-» dUteivce of r
, the p
* ' Fringes can disappear
by When separation between the slits is made /oroe enough, the fringes will be
so dose that trey cannot
be distinguished from one another and pattern will disappear.
r* > ' / (b ) >.
0- 9 * 3 Can the visible light produce interference fringes ? Explain
.
(<
> 4 (d ) 2/ .
.
- . .
( Mtn 2003 2006 Bwp 2006, Ptd 2005 Sgd 2005 Gnw 2009-2011) .
1 On d /> /' ng th** k 'lgth of th® grating 'L' by total nu
Am .
/es visible light ( white light) can produce the interference fringes.
mber #N' of the lln? s ruled on Explanation
,
fa Or at ir g bern^ r t • . (b) Total length of slits White light consists of seven colours. Each spectral colour produces its own mterference fringe
pattern. These patterns overlap to give rise a resultant diffus d coloured interference pattern.

v
{ .)
' rota he ght

F'olari / ation of light shows that light

of slits ( d) None of these '
wavts are S- 9 - 4 In Young s ex
' periment, one of the slits Is covered with blue filter and other with red filter . What
( a / lor < gftud>na ! / / ay «* s would be the pattern pf light Intensity on the screen ?
(! j V <r werse waves Ans’ No Interference pattern of bright and dark fringes is formed on screen.
(c ) sound waves
( d) all of these Reason

AN vVEf
^ 6. |0 c.
We know that for detectable interference, the two sources must be monochromatic havmg constant
Phase deference
Since the bl
interference Is not satisfied.
ue an d re d lig hts have So, the cond tion lor .
,k 2. a X b 4. a .
5 b 7. c H. d 9. b
20.
br 12. d 13. a 14 a . .
19 b 16. c 17. c 18. a .
19 »
 *
3 V

i n
V. V '
i. S M_» ' m
*
nifp.Q mus w
\yk IOJ ^I
338 Chapter
PHYS
’ ICS XI ( Subjective)
Scholar *
Q 9.5 Explain whether Young' s experiment is an experiment for studying interference
or diff ract ,
of light .
Ans. Basically, it is an experiment to study the Interference of light though it involves diff
on ff n
16^100» *01 ,* Q.9.9 How would you manaS t 0 & eX more orders of spectra using a grating ?
*( federal 200s, Gr < 2005, Mir Pur 2006, Rwp 2006, Ihr 2006, Bwp 2008,
*
faction. Mir Pur 2009, Ihr 2009, Grw 2010 - 2011,ihr 2010)
Explanation Orde rs of spect ra (n)
Ans.
As the light passes through the slits it bends around the slit ( diffraction ) . Then th * The formula for diffraction grating is,
w
superpose each other to produce the interference pattern effect of light But in
only study the interference effect of light.
thit *
racted r ;jy,
experiment wt .
d sin0 = n /

OR ft
Q . 9.6 An oil film spreading over a wet footpath shows colours? Explain how does it happen ?
for maximum value
. .
(Bwp 2003, D.G.Khan 2005-2006, Rwp 2005, fsd 2005 Bwp 2008 Grw
2009, Ihr aounoii Grw . ,*,, So
Ans. This equal ion show '. tha We can get more orders of if ;
This happens due to the interference of light waves
Explanation Tor a given diffraction grating
Its grating element is constant, so
^
Oil film spread over a wet foot path acts like a thin film .
• A light beam is incident on the upper surface .
the wave
r
length we
1
can obtain more order of spectra .
Hence, by decreasing
• It is partly reflected from upper surface and partly reflected from the lower surf.ice of thin film of oil. ?
Q .9.10 Why Polaroid sunglasses are better than ordinary sun glasses
• The two reflected coherent beams superpose and an diffuse interference pattern of different colours is
obtained.
. .
( Grw 2003, Sgd 2003- 2005 , D.G. Khan ZOOS Ihr 2005 Fsd 2005, Mir Pur 2009, thr 2009,Grw 2010)

Ans.
Q .9.7 Could you obtain Newton' s rings with transmitted light ? If yes, would the pattern be different from of vibrat ion .
Polaroid sunglasses pass small light having specif ic planes
that obtained with reflected light ?
.
( Ihr 2006, Bwp iOo 9 Mir Pur 2009) * Polarized sunglasses reduce glare .
They protect the eyes from bright rays of sun light .
Ans. Yes , the Newton' s rings can be obtained by transmitted light .
Polaroid sun glasses blot out only the harmful glares .
Pattern of transmitted light:
that
exactly opposite to of reflec ted light . There isflfl
The pattern obtained from transmitted light is s rings unpol arized and plane polari zed light ?
of Newton Q.9.11 How would you distinguish between
phase change in this case . Every dark ring is converted into Bright ring. So the centre , , Grw 2.006 )
( Bwp 2004, Mir Pur 2004, Rwp 2004 - 2005 Min 2005
is bright .

^ Plane polarized unpolarized and light

image of wave kn Ans.
Q.9.8 In white light spectrum obtained with diffraction grating, the third order ave
ratio of the two is slowly rotate d about an axis which is along the
coincides with the fourth order image of second wave length . Calcu late the Suppose light is incident on a Polaroid . The Polaroid
lengths ? direction of incident ray .
dimmer and disapp ears at certain
Ans. Ratio of two wavelengths If the transmitted light is plane polarized, it becomes dimmer and
Grating equation is given by orientation.
If the transmitted light is unpolarized, it becomes dim but not compl etely block ed at any orientating
d sinO = nA.
For first wavelength n=3 Q- 9- 12 Fill In the blanks.
source of secondary
princip le each point on a wave front acts as a
So d sinO = 3\, 0)
.
(i) According to Haugen' s ,

For second wavelength n=4 wavelets .

two adjace nt bright fringes for violet light is
ce between
So d sinO = 4A., W) «
( ) In Young s experi ment , the distan
Comparing equations (1) and ( 2 ) we have smaller than that for green light
incr jj££ « th* wavelength of
3 A.1 = 4X2 (iii) The distance betwee n bright fringes n the interfe rence pattern
^
the light used increases.
OR AL =1
K 3
Hence, the ratio is 4 ; 3 .
 ‘
.
r lfpc PIMCW ‘tnJ J
-
, PHYSICS XI rs
* ^ - :
v*.
^ - *>
«
p ter / V ..
-* .* 141
4
' 4 9*r <* f. ' »w
^ - «s
r* « « «• >» artvttrm r> v v -
V

|!
r .
'• • ; '<

-
* *= - s «»
« ** 8» '/ i'V*' M* *V

", < Wruos fr -QfUz

-
*f o e «
y ,£" >* •.*
** V f• -- ^ T **
-
J>jiante between 1 o bright friogn » fringe ipac;
( jlemWw-
,y ?

**6
V* U a m' t4t'>.Ci
*
»
** i #* (r/ JawJ x < ;ojrf w
•
*

^
_ Af fiamsola for fringe tpacmg a
Lys
XL
T
-
p. jfo g vaJ jci, -
?«r
Solved Examples
71M »y
af a ^ f
fr « ^
1^ ^
n fMMX M
Tk 4stMa of tW ikinf
4.25
f'
.
***
r . er Oa \<
'< K
^ ioca 4 59
* ** wavefcugfli a# fW Mcidesi hgkf.

' MMjt rje ..ver0 25 or 2 5 /

> . *| * 4 . Iff * m
. .
f > Mr:** ' ,i ygjstrr \ y r - shU L I 9f> cm i r, jjgh » of wavelength 450 nm in incident on a diffraction grating on which 5000 ImeWcm have been

-
1

tt4a«eof ted 4irk In •jr •6 W cm

ror « rlr. ird rfe / V fnr. j c rr. 2 ^ ^ 5.9 / JO m4
(0
( ii )
How mao? order* of ipectra can he observed on either tide of the direct beam ?
btttrrr ne the angle corresponding to each other.
t* Fiafc 6«ra|Data:
Varveiengfh of vncUienf fight X ~ 7 h clength of light = X 450nm 450 / JO Yn
; /
-
f . alcHbtNMK Line'; ruled on diffraction grating * S * 5000 lines per cm
A the fomv ,.3 fr* d*rk fringe it
,
y (m * - 1
)
Al
Orating element d
7 Find;
I
N
I
5000
cm * — 1
500000 -m

P’ / ungva we get
6

I’ X/l
(i)
( ii )
Orders of Spectra n ?
Angle = 9 ^ 7
-
50 / 10 4
a > >(2 5 / 10
Y > Calculation:
(i ) For maximum number of order of spectra, SinO “ I
As m a x i m u m possible value of angle of diffraction is 0 - 90°, therefore sin 90° - 1
V> / 10
4

fflfcfcr) 4
Using the formula
d SinO * nX
Or /. - 2 5.0 10
«• / /

5
/ 2 5 / 10 1
Hutting values, wc get
/y
7
X 5.9 / I 0 m '
1*n / 450 * 10
( X - 590 / 10 °m
\ 500000 J
* 1
Or £ 590 nm) 0

'4
n *
109
x
500000 450 10 -9
/
_L 3
x IO
5 * 4 5 * 1 0 * 225
Yellow sodium light of wavelength * 89 nm , milted by a single source passe* throu p& n = 0.0044 x 103
' f9 r $
slits J . 00 mm apart . The interference f atter i is obs ^ved on a screen 225 cm away
are two adjacent bright fringes?
*
^^ n •4.4
Hence, maximum order of spectrum * 4
Given Data :
Wavelength of sodium light X = 589 m
Separation between the slits d 1.00 nm
589 x 0 9m
00 x lO^ m
-- - (ii )
EH
For first order spectrum , n -I
Distance of screen from slits * J , 225cm 2 25m
- Using d sinO = nX
 I
r\ i f o o P i l l o w • m i J

34a Chapters y*»caj PHYSICS - XI (Subjective )

ar s 343
Putting values, we get Scb° ^
I
500000
sinO = 1 x 450 x 10 " 9
Exerc ise Probl ems
9
sin = 500000 ( 450 x 10 )
0 ( ) x '

Light of wavelength 546 nm is allowed to illuminate the slits of Young’s experiment. The
sin 0 = 225 106 10
x x 9 "

-
91
3
separation between the slits is 0.10 mm and the distance of screen from the slits where interference
sin 0 = 225 x 10 effects are observed is 200cm . At what angle the first minimum will fall? What will be the linear
sin 0 = 0.225 distance on the screen between adjacent maxima ?
1
0 = s i n (0.225) Given data :
lQ = n ° Wavelength of light =* X 546 nm 546 x = =
For second order spectrum , 0 * 2 Separation between spts = d = 0.10 mm = 0.10 x 10° m
2
d sin 0 = nX Distance o fro slits = L = 20cm = 20 * 10 m
Putting values we get To find :
1
500000 -
sin 0 ( 2 ) ( 450 x 10 )
sin6 = ( 500000) (2 x 450 x ( O *) '
9
" Angle fc ,ii

i ringc spacmj *
mm
lin <
i =0=?
stance between adjacent maxima = Ay =?
Calculatio n : f
sinO “ 450 x 10* x 10"* T As the formulla. for minima is
sinO * 0.45
1
0 = Sin ( 0.45) V I I= (m +-)X
1

-
”

|Q 26 , 7° For first minima, m = 0

For third order spectrum n 3
d Sin 0 nX
Putting values wc get
- f Putt mu values, we get

sin &=
546 » 10 '
2 0.10* I 0
»
J

1
- -
sinO (3) ( 450 x 10 )
9
sin0 = 2730 x 10 *
“

-
500000
sinO 500000 3 450
( )
A
( x
sinO 675 x 10 x 10
9
x l O'9

’
) sinO = 0.00273
8 = sin '(0.00273)

-
sinO 0.675
1
0 = Sin (0.675)
0 = 0.16°

-
19 - 42 5 «

For fourth order spectrum , n « X

For fringe spacing, using the expression

Ay =-
U
d SinO * nX
Putting values, we get
Putting values, wc get °
-
2
20* IQ * 546* 10
1 -9
sinO ( 4 ) ( 450 x 10 ) Av = J
~

500000 0.10 xI 0
-
sin9 ( 500000) (4 x 450 10 *)
sin9 = 900 x i 0 x 10 9
x

‘ -
"
Ay = 1.092* l 0Jm
Ay = 1.092mm
sinO = 0.9 approx
- t (
0 = sin 0.9)
| A y m m
slits 0.5 mm apart and produces an
of light which illuminates two
Calculate the wavelength .
b = 62.2 j interference pattern on a screen placed 200 cm away from the slits The first bright fringe is
of 2.40 mm from the central bright image .
observed at a distance
wen data:
mm =0.5 10"
' m
Distance between slits = =
d 0.5 *
 • ?
JP,

• 1 - I

Ir
7 i

r u f o o o n io u IAI *
344
Chapters
fj PHYSICS
«
i - XI (Subjective)
Distance of screen from slits * L 200cm 2 m Stb**L 345

Distance of first bright fringe ° yB 2.40mm * 2.40 * 10 * m monochromatic light of /1 =588 nm is allowed t
9.4 A ,
I on the half silvered glass plate (7 , in the
For first order maximum m I Michebon interferometer . If mirror i id through 0.233 mm, how many fringes will be
To find : observed to shift ?
Wavelength of light 9 data: 1w
Calculation :
Using the formula
A Given
-
Wavelength of light X = 588nm = 588 x lO’ m
Distance through which mirror AY , is moved = L =0.233mm = 0.233x 1 (r’ m
y =n, XL
To Hod:
irv

T Number of fringes shifted m = ?

or
- £
x -mL
Putting values, we get
C alculation: As for Michclson interferometer
I LJffi
, the expression is

/
‘l
2.40* l 0 *0.5*10 > 2L
m
W2
Putting we get
As for first fiingc m 1
2 * 0.233* 10 >
XH .20* 0.5* 10 * o, 588 * 10 ’
X 0.6 * 106 m m = 792!

X 600 ntn A second order spectrum is formed at an angle of 38,0° when light fulls normally on a diffraction
9.5
atiog having 5400 lines per centimeter. Determine wavelength of the light used .
Give n data:
9.3 In a double slit experiment the second order maximum occurs at 0 - 0.25 " Th < wavelength is 8 C

Angle of diffraction = 0 = 38°

nm . Determine the slit separation .
Given data : Number of lines on grating = N = 5400 lines per cm =540000 lines per meter
For second order maximum ~ m 2 Order of spectrum = n = 2
P
To find:
Angle “ 0 0.25
Wavelength of light = k = ?

To find:
Wavelength of light =
X 650nm = 650 x 10 Calculation:
Using the formula
Slit separation d ? dsin 9 = nX
Calculation: , dsinQ
Using the formula X=
n
dsin0 = mX
mX d«
—l
N
Or d=
sinO
Putting values, we get
2*650* 10 '9 Putting values, we get
sinO
x= n
N* —
d= sin38°
sin(0.25° ) X~
4 540000*2
d =2.979 x 1 O '

X = 5.70* 10 ’
d = 0.3* 10°« 10*11»
X= *570
m = 3.3mm |Xa 570nmj
346
Chapter 9 [ph
9.6 L5ic«i (V..
A light is incident normally on a grating which has
2500 lines per centim
wavelength of a spectral line for which the deviation in sec
j
S.hnla r’ s PH YS IC S - X! (Subjective)
347
Given data:
ond order is 15.0° f'
^ lnPute
0
Blue light of wavelength 480 nm illuminates a diffraction grating. The second order image is
Number of liner on grating = N = 2500 lines per cm = 250000 9.8 at an angle of 30° from
lines per meter formed the central image. Slow many lines in a centime of
ter the grating
Angle of deviation = 0 = 15° have been ruled ?
Order of spectrum = n = 2 Given data :
To find: Wavelength of light = X = 480nm = 480x 1O^ rn
Wavelength of light = X = ? For second order image = n = 2
Calculation: Angle of diffraction = 0= 30°
As grating equation is
To find:
dsin0 = nX Nu mb er of line per cm = N = ?
Or —N
1
sin0 = nX As d - —iV
1 Calculation:
Using the formula
dsin 0 = nX
Or
_ sine
N *n
Putting values, we get
—N sin0 = nX As d =
1
N—
„. sin0
Or sin 15° nX
X=
250000* 2 Put ting the val ues, we get
Or X = 5.176 * 10 7 ‘
sin 30°
2 * 480 * 10 -
’
X = 517.6* 1 O * m '

0.5
N= 9
X = 518nm 2* 480 *I
'
O
N = 5.2 * 105 line spe r met er
9.7 Sodium light ( A = 589 nm ) is incident normally on a grating having 3000 lines per centimeter .
What is the highest order of the spectrum obtained with this grating ? N = 5.2 * 103lincs per em
Given data: 9.9 x- rays of wavelength 0.150 nm are observed to undergo a first order reflection at a Bragg angle of
Wavelength of sodium light = X = 589 nm = 589 x 1 CT9 m 13.3° from a quartz (Si02 ) crystal. What Is the interplanar spacing of the reflecting planes in the
Number of lines on grating = N = 3000 lines per cm = 300000 lines per meter crystal?
Angle of highest order 0 Given dpta:
To find: -
Wavelength of x rays = X = 0.150nm - 0.150 x 10 m
For l order reflection “ m = 1
#t
Order of the spectrum = n = ?
Calculation: Bragg ,s angle » 0* 13 . 3°
As grating equation is To find :
As
-
dsi n0 nX Calculation:
Interplanar spacing d ?

or
— -
1
N
ilne nX
sinG
Using Bragg’ s equation
2 dsin 6 “ mX
d*
mX
NX 2*in0
Putting the values , we get Putting values, we get
1* 0.1 50*104
8W90°, d«
n » 2*iinl 3.3*

0
300000 *589*10
1 d
-
0.150M 04
2*0.23

--
n 5.659
300000*589 " / * d •0.326*104m
d « 0.326 nm

Hence -
n 5.66
P 5 tM
 m
5
348 ** nmile%\ _
g •(
_ _Chapter 9
fuh ysicalQ ICS ~ X1 (Subjective)
9.10 An X-ray beam of wavelength A undergoes a first
order reflection from a
of incidence to a crystal face is 26.5°, and an X- ray crv ^
Pii
i H
1
^ 349
third order reflection when its angle of incidence to
beam of wavelength
that face is 60.0°. nni Unt
^
11 its
anK |
beams reflect from the same family of planes calculate (a) As
'! '?
er 8oe$*
(b) the wavelength A .
Given data:
For first w avelength A1
interplanar spacin
R
^
8 thal the
°
f lc
*
to *
PUncs anjj Chapter10

Angle of incidence = 0| = 26.5°

For Ist order reflection = /? = l ,
OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
For second w avclcngth A
- ^
Wavelength of x ray beam = 0.097nm
Aj = 0.097 x lO ^ m
Learning Objectives ]
rd
For 3 order reflection = n2 = 3
Angle of incidence = = 60° 1
t
Recognize the term of least distance of distinct vision.
To find: Understand the terms magnifying power and resolving power.
• 2.
Inter plane spacing = d = ?
Wavelength of first beam = A,
.
j Derive expressions for magnifying power of simple microscope, compound microscope and
=? astronomical telescope.
Calculation: Understand the working of spectrometer.
Using Bragg ' s equation
Describe Michelson rotating mirror method to find the speed of light.
2 dsinO = nX
nd
For 2 wavelength Understand the principles of optical fibre.
2dsinGj = n ,A. . identify the types of optical fibres.
Putting values, we get Appreciate the applications of optical fibres .
2dsin60° = 3 *0.097* 1 O ’ '

2 d *0.866 s= 0.291 x l O *
0.291 * 10 ’
d*
2 *0.866
#
d » 0.168 * 10 m
d - 0.168 ntn
For calculating wavelength Ax
2 dsin0 , n, X,
v

2dsinQf
n
Putting values, wc get
X - 2 N0- 168 * IO *sin:6.3°
1
X, - 2 *<XI 68M 0 * * 0

-,
X , 0.140 * 10*
X « 01$nm]
1 ft 2
 «•» * «» f

150
Chapter 10 [
Optical
=
i , PHYSICS - XI (Subjective) 351

^ $cho sir
]

—
Chapter No. 10
Optical Instruments

. = ? X
areca
We use
microscope,
... ««
o
compound
, , w 34
lfc amBie
microscope telescope, spectrometer, optical fibers etc.

> Visual angle

c_ : made by on object at the eye is called visual angle.
The angle
•
u
V 2
7 v Vision (Near Point )
* Least Distance of Distinct
V

u
i fI
r -
Ui
J

c
z
n
‘ "'
called‘TnTmjj
" ;nCefrZ*' r #
the least distance of distinct vision or
A
near point. It is
» be distinct is
denoted by d
I
„*
r
V .
Fig 10.2
2
*
Explanation
i >•
Vi I I
7. '
I *
-
A § _, For a human eye , a
sharp mage is formed when the object is placed at a distance When the seme object Is viewed at
• ehorter distance, the image on the
S X
y x
. But hen the object is within this limit, the image retina of the eye is greater; so the

.
e e
• £ C § beyond a minimum limit v /
vision is about 25 cm
object appears larger and more
details can be seen. The angle 0
c
5 ? . of distinct
I
|~ appears to tfe blurred and fuzzy Jhe distance
with age.
the object subtends In (a) is greater
-
J
-
SO
/.
—-
c
J
-cz ~c
*-
.E
—
X
LJ
from the eye.(for young The location
Linear Magnification
The size of the image goes on
of

increasing,
near

when
point

the
increases

object brought from a far off

thanS’ In (b).

takes place.
point to the focus of the lens.
5 So the magnification
•A -— - &
0 The ratio of the size of the image to the size of the object is called magnification
r- £ -#
•
£• 2a o
2 or linear magnification Le . .
= z,
0 V 2
u ^— C
size of image
~
T 2 -. rj

—
u
JC
SO O
2
Magnification =
size of object
2 ~ a
.
26
a u «0

- r*-,

-
I c I
g. ,
c
8. £ I | 6 J OR M=— (1)

.
c fi Q 5.

u . .

c
•x

a. u
-5 £S
Sis I ?
Si w * I? " £
Vi
1
v. • • e
Another Definition
0

The rath of distance of image from the lens to the distance of the object from
m ie1

u c .
I 1 lens is called magnification
Magnification "
distance
image

'I
'
3
mm
P
object distance
B si
M (2)
ii OR
- 13 j 2 P

Ji
*s
£ ll Thu by comparing (1) and (2) , wa have
*
M *I .a
sn w,«nlfl« lon
0 p

*
4 till 14
2 I «
TK **
U r
he Unifying powar or
^
8 subtended by the
afi les

blended by the object

‘
at
angular
Image
the
magnification
as
unaided
seen
eye
can
through

a a the angle subtended by the object form near

.
be
the

point
defined
optical
at
a

unaided
the
device
eye
ratio
to

and
of
*
that

the object with optical dcvlee at near point .

3 9 angle subtended by
Then
angle subtended b;
Magnifying Power
 M= —a Diagram
e,
OR M — .
0
Resolving Power
The resolving power of an instrument is it ability to reveal the minor details
the object under examination . of
OR
The resolving power of an instrument is it ability to separate the image
very close objects . aftwo
Mathematically Working object
int d. The angle subtended by the
The resolving power is the reciprocal of minimum angle of resolution Consider an length of convex lens , then a
within focal
Raleigh showed that for light of wave length X used to see two points separately at eye is a making an angle p at eye .
_ is obtained at near point d
by using a lens of diameter D,

Angle of minimum resolution

*
_-
n„ 1.22 —
D
magnified and virtu

The angul
Power
gnificat on is
L
° = ^= P'
:2
—
.0 ) ( >
OR Resolving Power —amim—
1
»
I)
1-22X By using the figure (I
a
)
Resolving power of plane diffraction grating size of object
it row ftnd n to reW tana = r
The resolving power of plane diffraction grating is wnai print nuke t pinho*# * distance of the object
X X a p*ete of paper and hold m
*- o qmd
R= front o< your rye do to \
* tana = -d7
XrX, AX page . You
- * < r the prw
* . a r %Q.10 x
where X* average of two wave length X,and X,) clearty . For small value of a , tan a aimp
O **
And Xi * Xa * X
It H tt*r
So a=
d
—
Also AX = X,- propagation of I gfit through
If N is the total number of lines ruled on grating then th * p .
n hole wtiic mskti
*
th«
pinhola
By using the figure (2)
Size of image
R N m dear image at n a i tan(5 =
* distance of image
Where m is the order of diffraction . camera .
l
tan|3 = -
Q1 > What Is a simple mlcroicopt ? Calculate Its magnifying power. For small value of p, tan * P
i
( Also q -.d
( 3)
S
° (
( 2 ) and 3 ) n cqustion ( )
Microscope Putting the values of a and P from equation '
l/d
A microscope is a device which U used to see the magnified imag of very mall
and near object
Simple Microscope
. — .i
M
O
Size of image Distance of image <1
A convex lens can be used for magnification l ^
P
O‘Site of object DuUtnce ofobjecl
'
Also
Working principle
object l placed bet' « n foe poim md op
When
lent
the
then an erect, *
virtue! and an larged image It ov ned .
if center of biconvex

Construction
magnifying glass (l.t. blcorivi 4 lens}
It consists of a

, * «
>1
*
T
 - A • .
v \\
>
•

:.v,
‘
t '
K
T
• ‘
4
v.f •* *§. { i- ’
£. -
V
- -
*M
E
* *
+ 1
. > <• •

t *

354 — r— —
Chapterio [C ), K
< ;i| | ,
" 5*?»b
Mr s PHYSICS XI (Subjective) 355
M* - ~

/>
Ray Diagram
Therefore, M= - (4 ) q = dj A
P h
i i » 5i
Now, using the lens formula
*
I « y« P
r *
f
p q
Since the image Is virtual, so q = - d
1
C
—
f p (1
— — ft - oanlury mteruvcofia
t « v «iiiu nlh
*
Ktiloh could ba tno »d up and Itnt i.in
Ha kupport ring { Cb» >Ua vt llw v «um
( , - ..
*
Ray diagram of a Compound Microscop* of m» hlalriry of Osianta, tlormcs)
Multiplying both sides by d, we get
d d d
Working 's
f p d formed by objective
Image
beyond the principle focus of objective. A
< =<-> The object of height li is placed just
of height h, is formed . This image acts as an
rted and magnified image
f P real, Inve
d , object for eyepiece .
OR
— =I i -
p
cl
r Image formed by eye piece
formed by objective lies within the focal length of the eyepiece . Eye-
The image
I of height h at near point.
But
—P = M
(
piece makes a virtual and magnified
Magnifying Power
image 2

Therefore , If
M = 1+ — final image of height h at the eye
f P = angle subtended by the h
2

at the eye.
or- angle subtended by the object of height
Which is the formula for magnification; it shows that
focal length should i hen
be small for high angular magnification.
P _ tan p
M= -
a tana
Q.2 What Is compound microscope? Describe its
construction and working.
Also calculate its magnifying power. Since tana = — and tanP = Cl
el
jOg h, / d
(

* )

Compound Microscope
So
h/d
h2
M=

M= —
A compound microscope is used when h
high magnification is required
Construction Multiplying and dividing by h,
h 2 x hL,
It consists of two convex lenses. M= — -
(0 h h,
Objective
It is of short focal length and small aperture. h!, X hi,-
= -- —
(ii) Eye piece h h1
It is of large local length and large aperture
of the objective = Mi
Principle linear magnification
4' h
When the image formed by the objective of small focal length is within the focal A Compoun d MicroscoP of the age piece - M ,
length of the eye piece of large focal length then a virtual, inverted and -y = linear magnification
h i,
magnified image is obtained. (1)
i Thus M = M, x M2
Now M, can be written as,
 .
A. -'
«9
rt
v‘
: t>w. Vf *
k
.
356 ppm J
Chapter 10 '
tOptioii
M, =i
PHYSICS - X1 (Subjective)
(2 ) - Scb
^
0Ur
P
As eye piece acts as a simple microscope
expressed as.
, hence its magnification M
2 can be
principle
A ,
real Iner ted and dimin
which
ished image formed bv
is at the focal point of bo h rh
the
.' 'ect ve serves as an
er les then a vi ual
object for eyepi ece ' ' *
Mj =l+

So, equation (i) becomes

.
—f (3 ) and mag
Working
nified image is

by
forme d

Objec
at infinit

tive lens
y.

imaige formed
M .aL-f (4) The ' 0ar
pa
"°
3 el bea
' Hght rays comin
.
g
The
from distin ct
forme
objec
d
t forms an image A’ B' at
is a real, inverted and
PL
For higher magnification
« J focal P int
diminished .
of the objec tive image

We should use the eye piece of Image form ed by eye - piece

shorter focal lengths. A'B' acts as object for eye piece . Image A ' B' is forme d at the
The real image
infinity . The final
For higher resolving power the eye - piece . The eye piece forms the final image at
focus of
virtua l
, inver ted and magnified.
With wider objective we u$e blue light (
of shorter wave length) to produce image formed is
diffraction and to give more detail of the object. less Focusing for IniiniMB ty — —
object as well as
by the objective is at the focus of ive
When the image forme d
or focus ed for infinity.
eye piece . Then the telesco pe is in its norm al adjust ment
Q.3 What is an astronomical telescope? Find Telesc ope : (in norm al adjus tment )
Its magnifying Power . Length of eye piece and
of telescope , the distan ce betwe en
In norm al adjus tment
objective is called the length of telesco pe So .
L = f0 + fe
Astronomical Telescope Magnifying Power
defin ed as angle subt ende d by the
Telescope For a telescope, it can be
throug h telesco pe to theangle . "
For Your Intorm itiu
Telescope is an optical Instrument used for viewin image at the eye as seen
g the distant objects. It Is of seen by unaid ed eye. So
many kinds . subtended by the object as
P
M = - (1)
Astronomical Telescope a
The telescope used to see the distinct image In right triangle OA ' B'
of distant heavenly objects like
A ' B' A'B'
planets or moon, is called astronomical telescope
Construction
. tafi a =
OB
A ' B'
f .
A simple astronomical telescope consists of two parts tan a = a =
(i)
. to t
Objective: It Is of large focal length fQand large aperture.
in right triangle O' A' B'
00 Eye piece: It is of short focal length f, and short
aperture. A ' B'
A ' B'
Ray Diagram tanp = P =
O' B' f
Putting values of a and p in equation (1), we get
.
So, equation (1) becomes

M=
A ' B' / f
A ' B' / f
.
M=
A' B'
x
f
0

. Reflecting Tel'

f
f .
A ' B'
OR Ms —f.
focal length of objective
M= —
local length of eye P1CCC
 368

Note
A good telescope has an objective of large s PHYSICS \ l (Subjective )
brightness of final image depends focal length and large 359
aperture. The
upon intensity of
objective. We use incident light on the should focus so that the parallel rays enter!
the objective of large aperture The telescope are focused at the
magnify as well as make for this purpose. near the eye piece.
image to be bright . It may crosswire
Uses of Spectrometer
Q.4 What is a :spectrometer ?
write down Its uses.
Describe its construction and
working; also ..
It is used to;
Study the spectra of different light sources .

Spectrometer
. Study the deviation o{.light by glass prism
Calculate the refractive index of material of
Measure the wave length of light by grating
prill
The optical device which is
used to study the spectrum .
is called a spectrometer Spectrum of various Describe the Mkhelson \ experiment to calculate the speed of light
. of light beam can sources of light Q5
refraction by prism or by diffraction be obtained either
by
f rom a grating.
Construction
It has three main components
Speed of Light
: Light travels so rapidly that it is very difficult to measure its speed. Galileo 7
6
(i)

^
Collimator was the first who tried to measure the speed of light . Although he did not /
77;e function of is to a 0 «
make the rays coming from a succeed in measurement of speed of light yet he was convinced that it
end of the tube a convex near bv source parallel .
lens is fixed and >on the other At one takes some time to travel form one place to another.
provided. When slit end. an adjustable slit In 1926, Michelson made observations for the calculating of speed of
is just at the focus of is Telescope
from slit become parallel convex lens then light rays entering light in air The apparatus and experimental setup is shown in figure .
after passing through the
(ii) Turn Table lens. Experimental arrangement
Turntable is capable to rotate about the An octagonal ( eight - sided ) polished mirror M is mounted on the shaft of
attached at the bottom of turn fixed vertical axis. A circular scale is
also a motor. The speed of motor is adjustable. Suppose that the mirror in
d A
table A prism or grating is place
,
stationary position. The light from source S falls on face 1 of mirror M. Source
to observe the spectra on the turntable
. The reflected light from M falls on plane mirror m. The light reflected of lighl
from mirror m falls again on face 3 of M. On reflection through face 3 it
enters the telescope T
m
Working
When the mirror rotates anti - clockwise, initially the source of light will Michelson’s method for
not be visible but when mirror M gains a certain speed, the source S
measurement of speed of light.
becomes visible . This happen when the time taken by light in moving
from M to m and back to M is equal to the time taken by face 2 to move
to the position of face 3 .
Expression for speed of light
..
Sch .
nutl'dl»Q The angle subtended by any side of eight sided mirror at the center is 2 n / S
Spectrometer radian.
Thus 0= —S radian .(i)
(iii) Telescope
Also 2 TT
A telescope fixed on a stand and is 0 = (n t OR ( u= —
rotatable about the r-' me axis as that of T
turntable. A vernier scale is also attached along ^
with the telescope. 0 = ( 27tf ) t U>= 27lf
Working 0 = 27rft 00
Before using the spectrometer, one should «
carefully adjust the turn Comparing equations (i) and (il), we get
horizontally by leveling screws. The collimator is adjusted table
of light.
to get the parallel rays
— = 2 Tift
 or = ft
8 system based on optical fibre has large capabilities, it
com munication
or t = —
1 , The
used to transmit thousands of telephone conversation, T V program
can be
8f
. and data
transferring .
„and Optical fibre imagt.
The distance covered by the light in this time is 2 d i.e , S = 2d
^ ''
e f CienCy ^
distance ’ „
As Soeed of light =
.. Mbles
|o
and ght gh
weieht cah
time Fiber optic system consists of much
protective
smaller
case is about 6 n dWeter <
*
wh ch
'

'
S with its
—t A fiber optic the same
•
copper
m
c=
can replace a 7.62 cm diameter bundle '
of
^w
Putting values of S and t in it, we get

C"
2d
1/8 f .
q7
amount

What are
of signals.

the basic principles Me optics? Explain n, m . A •jvxsr issu'd v

* if.
. * *
FXIM.ANATION
r
* **
'crt v;r kr fjfA-
**
**^
The Wrrr^ - i »
'rnJ *

OR c =16 fd A typical glass fibre is

He calculated the value of c in vacuum and is Principle aboui 100 - 250 fzm in
small
Optic should be totally diameter For
c = 2.99792458 * no * m / sed Pom! to Ponder Fibre light in an optical fibre requires that light
possible diameter the phenomenon
propagation of it. This can be done
OR c = 3 * 10* m/sec The
fibre and cannot escape from of total internal reflection
within
fined the is observed and there
will
Note be small chance of power
The speed of light in other materials is always less than c. Total Internal Reflection losses of light due to

• The speed of light depends upon the nature of medium (refractive index )
(1)
(2 ) ^Continuous Refraction
different ways in detail.
dispersion
two
• However the speed of light in vacuum and air is nearly equal. Now tie discuss these :
(1) Total Internal Reflection medium towards a rare e,
a denser
a light ray traveling from critical angle Reflected Ray
Q.6 Write down a short note on optical fibers. Also discuss its advantages ? When
of incidence greater then Air n
medium , makes an angle
is totally reflected back into the same
of ihe medium , then the ray
is called total internal :
Eacft o m
' * 9m optc
* V a
dtuser medium. This phenomenon
Fiber Optics eye v' a .
e n i o Si trough n
/ by r» 82»
c<e «TWSU<TP
*
reflection .
x /
i
n
••

For hundreds of years man has communicated using flashes of reflected sun light
'J
' Critical angle which it /
medium for
/ Gave .
or Plwilc
by day and lanterns by night. Navy signalmen still use powerful blinker lights to The angle of incidence in denser
is 90 is called critical angle . /
/ j Waicr
in
*
the air is
transmit coded message to other ships during periods of the radio- silence. corresponding angle of refraction If the angle of reflection
is called
It is denoted by Oc 90" the angle of incidence
Graham Bell invented photo phone after the invention of telephone. His Photo
Refractive Index: the critical angle .
phone used a modulated beam of reflected sunlight focused upon a selenium
of refractive Index .
particular value
detector placed at a distance of several hundred meters away. The transparent medium has
in vacuum to the speed of light in I
In this way bell succeeded to transmit a voice message through a beam of light
In recent past the idea of transmission of light through thin fibers optic has been
developed. In these days it use in communicational technology.
*
The ratio of speed of light
transparent medium is called
bQ >
_
index of
. .=
refraction of that medium .

—
Speed of light in
Refractive index of material Speed of light in the medium
vacuum
Advantages of Fibre optics: *%
It has large advantages due to the use of optical signal (light signal instead of c
radio signal ). OR n= -U X
x £
I
Index) depends upon nature of
f .
Wafer Otuat «
• It has wider band width of capability and safe from electromagnetic Where the value of 'n' (refraction
4
greater men
tedium . Being ratio It has no unit.
interference. For angles of incidence lights la
other then at , all tne
medium to the tne critical
angle air .
Optical fiber is used to transmit light around the corners and into When light incident from one optical back to the none is refracted into the
may be reflected reflected;
inaccessible places. th« boundary, a part of Incident light
may be refracted into the
part
It is possible to study the interior of lungs and other parts of human body. same medium while the remaining
•
For this purpose , a flexible .
fibre optic nsertt nto the body. other medium .
 i he amount of light reflected or
refracted at the boundary depends
values of refractive indices of two optical upon the
media. It also depends upon
of incidence. the angle
Continuous Refraction
If 0, is the angle of incidence in
medium T and 02 i the angle (2) ,
Pr Pagat 0n f ight
medium '2'. Then by Snell's law.
n sin0,
of refraction in
**
* * ° m de
f ° °' through optical flh

= n 2 sin 02
or _ sin 0:
value
n2 sin 0 index of refraction . Then such a fibre is called multimode graded index
0 f less
If right comes from denser
medium and enter into rare fibre.
greater than 0,. ,
medium then 0 must be If the cladding is of constant index of refractive and less than that the core then -
The particular value of angle of is called multimode step index fibre.
It
incidence 0, . for which angle ray passing from a denser medium to a rare medium, it bends away from
becomes 90® is called critical angle 0 . of refraction
02 As light
When 0*= 0t then 02 = ?
C
normal and vice verse.
90
In multimode graded index fibre, the light signal has confined within the optical
So n, sin0c = n2 singo Fia
^ fibre by continuous refraction and then refraction from the boundary and then
10.11
Croaa *eciion« l »1trm of
sioOc = —
n
again 'efraction, so light remains inside it and cannot leave or escape from it. -
(a ) MuW modo atop Indo * fit
^
**
( b) MuiU rwxH graded Index fib #
*

sin0c = L2 MS . ~=yon?
-r
^

cr .
1.5
where n2 = refractive index of air
= 1.0
Hi = refractive index of glass
= 1.5
sin 0t = 0.667 ight propagation with a hypothetical
Or multi layer fibre.
Be = sin '1 (0.667)
Or 0C = 41.8° Q8 . Explain the different types of optical fibres? Jackal

It is the critical angle of glass.

Condition for total Internal reflection Qlaaa cladding
For that two conditions are Types of Optical Fibers
required
(I) Light should travel from Optical fibers may be classified Into three types . Qlaaa
denser to rare medium. (I) Single mode step Index fibre.
II) The angle of Incidence should be g
1
raater then critical angle. (II )
(HI )
Multimode step Index fibre. •
( )

Outgoing Multimode graded Index fibre.

Notes Cladding
The term mode Is the method by which light Is propagated within the fibre.
oran.
4 Inoomli 0) Single Mode Step Index Fibre
1
It his very thin core about 3 pm diameter . (t »
a n . •1.1 ixial ray 4
* a
It has a relatively large cladding. •ingla •moda alap •Indaa hbn .
n, •1.0 2 rig . 10.10 (h) 1
.
Monochromatic light sourct Is raqulrad to sand light signals through it That
Light propagation within a
1
Propagation of light within a
glaaa rod .
foKlbla glaaa flbra
li why wa use laser source.
•

.. .
* It cen cerry more than 14TV chinnals or 14.000 phone calls.

sSSSS * than e ! '

3
r,y
®, « ,
( H) Multimode Step Index Fibre
1
It Is the optical fibre In which central cora has •
,..
n<
rod from air at an an|la I '
' T" '"thr Ug*h the
> h I1
"1
.
.
diameter such as 50pm and high refractlva Index
boundary of lurfaet of rod juit Ilka ray 1 which l/
, , l n el d anTi t
t n , °»
1
The central core hes constant rafractlve Index n, such as
•
Whlla tht ray a and j maxing any 4J
' #
' l of
° ,
• i. sa which steps down up to Ml at the boundary with the Mul ml

^ *
(hrou
raflaetlon md 10 thay propagata Inilda tha > IU r*OdVh\ * 'ilt rn*1
k
t 0 t 1 l cladding.
Light
pmpdflSpUon
ssssr
|

£ STmEsz
1
It Is useful for short distances only
**
 365
364 - XI ( Subjective)

(iii) Multimode Graded Index Fibre

^
EifUltOptica r Hv iCS
^ Optical fiber
• t s g "i ssi-cs •
£ *• " ch cent' - .
core nas h gh retractive
3 :r - r. • r : e 5 ; = 5 :z . . z ' i s i s o ^ : e ~
= '
- jy\ icropbone
Electrical
Electrical
•
•
7* e : s- t ;e
~-
*
'
r "^e co'e -arges from. 50|um to 1,000pm.
iere s - - parties ai- aoundap. set weer. core and cladding.
—
>
(sound) t signal
signal
~ £ pt is co^ftir jcHxsfy refected with > the
"
fibre optics. It is
_ s £ _ for org distances.
*

losses in o
Q9 - Explain how the signal is transmitted and converted into sound?

Power power due to given

Signal Transmission & Conversation to Sound Losses of ugh fiber, it suffers losses of
light s al travel
~"
e c'r optsc co
*

— cat on system consists,

of three — ajor components.
When
factors.
^ scattering and absorption energy is
(I) T ^arvs — tter (1) Power
When the
loss
ligh :
by
travels along ribers by multiple
due
reflections
to the
,
impurity
some
of
of
the
light
glass medium .
(if) Optica fiber medium . It is of atoms such as
zbsorbed by trie glass
scattered by the group
light signals is
(ifi) part of energy of
Receiver Some
joints.v H
(i) Transmitter
^^
Reduction of loss
Care - - manufacturing can reduce the power losses by absorption
transit tier converts :re
electr cal signal into light signal which is obtained
_ and scattering.
ror-
em/tr. g dope or a se'.
-
‘ microphone. ve- ght so 'ce n the transmitter is either a LED (light
-. got sign a is invisible infrared of typical wave
'
(2) Power loss due to dispersion
, then a narrow
monochromatic
‘ JT A * c ~ o es *‘ .
aster than visible or ultrav det light. The lasers and If he light signal is not
perfectly
directions .

tn
3
- -
"
LECH sed ' tr s app cation are tiny un ts ( less than naif the size of the
orde’’ to mate the size o* the fibres. *
. band of wave lengths are
So they cover different
refracted
lengths
in
of
different
paths inside
time
the
, as
fibre
shown
and
in
and reach at different
produce phase difference . So the signal
~*
e r * s g' « s S 'e modu ated to transt the information, it flashed on and off.
fig- (a), having different
wavelengths Xu X 2 and X 3
^
-
D i c« mod at o ' s e / c 'essec r b ts of megabits per second where the bit is
e re' * ( on state ) o' o (off state ).
received is distorted and faulty.
Light paths in (a ) step
index
-index
fibre .
and (b) graded -
Reduction of loss considerably be reduced
(ii) Optical Fibre - index fibre can
Disadvantage of the step
figure .
fibre , as shown in internal
fusing a graded index and suffer total
" re modu - ated p - se tra e
through the optical fibre by total interna reflection
/
The different wavelengths still take different paths
the same point like x
-
s' 5 co^i ' - o s r refract on w » th wery faster speed despite the ultra purity ( 99 - 59
reflection at different layers , but still they are focused at
inversely proportional to the
% g ass; o* tr.e opt cs f per . Tr, e gnt s gna ' s while passing through the optical the speed is
but at a
an< y etc. It is possible, because path than X X
or 3
-
* p 'e become d rr and ~ s t c e fegenerated by a device call repeater Repeaters *
refractive index . So the wavelength Xt travels a longer *
'
' OOvm
-
g e typ zc y p aced 30km apart, but n the newer system this separation is about
greater speed in a low density
portion of fibre .

Time difference wavelengths

between different , the
(iii) Receiver all time difference index fibre
In step- index fibre, the over using a graded
length of fibre . But
Receiver captures the gnt sgrais at the ore' end, and - converts then to may be about 33 ns per km per km
about 1 ns
e ectr ca pfgnals by means of photo-bode y commur cation can be time difference Is reduced to

' ep esented by a particular pattern or coo c-f V

anc - by using computer type
'pment The rece. ver is pre mme to c *. * it to . nd os, and converts it
ec - *
r t o sound P ‘
, C t u r t w d
*« » J reou ?d

'r
366
Hll PtorlO [( >Pticai|
^ pHVSlCS XI ( Subjective)
FORMULAE) S 367

I
Multiple Choice Questions
Linear magnification M= —O
P four pos siible ans wer s to eac h state men t arc give n belo w. Tick ( S) the correct answer :
Angular magnification
M
u*’ M=
“
0i
1

telescope has large aperture to:

obje of
y Resolving power of an optical device
< / Olid 1.22 — R. P. = 1
(

I)
The ctiv
Red
e
uce sph eric al abe rrat ion ( b ) Increase span of observation
. ( a)
D a ( d) Have low dispersion
" Mil 1 - 22 X (C) Have high resolution
V Resolving power of an diffraction grating X
= .
X
The sky app ear s blue bec aus e:
X . -X i AX R=Nxm 2 Blue light is scattered most
Real light is absorbed (b )
(a)
v Magnifying power of simple microscope M= -
d
M =I + i ( c) Blue light is absorbed ( d) It is sky' s natural colour
P pow er of tele scop e can be incr eas ed by:
Magnifying power of simple microscope r 3 The magnifying
d ( b ) Incre asin g the foca l leng th of objective
when focused for infinity M=- ( a) Increasing the length of telescope
f obje ctive ( d ) Incre asin g the leng th of eyepiece
Magnification of objective in com (c) Increasing the diameter of
pound med , the cha rac teri stic whi ch doe s not
microscope M, = 5L 4 . When light ray trav els from one med ium to ano ther ium
P change is:
L Magnification of eye piece in com
pound (b ) Wavelength
d (a ) Velocity
^1 microscope M 2 = l -f — „
(d ) Amplitude
(c) Frequency

M Magnification of compound microscope 5. The magnifying power of an astronomical

.
telescope is 10 If the focal length of objective is too cm.
M = M x M2 , M= - l+ — What is focal length of eyepiece?
Pf (b ) 100 cm
Length of telescope under normal
adjustment
e
- ( a) 10 cm
L = f0 + fe ( d ) ' 5 cm
( c) 1000 cm
esc ope If foca l leng ths of objectiv e and
Magnification of telescope f 6 . For normal adjustment, what Is leng th of ast ron om ica l te \
M= —
eyepiece are 100 cm and 20 cm respectively?
Speed of light
c =16 fd , (a ) IOO cm
( b ) 20 cm
( d ) 120 cm
c (c) 5 cm
x/ Refractive Index n= —
v 7* Two convex lenses of focal lengths 10 cm and 5 cm are plac ed in contact, then thei r com bin ed foca l

n sinQj lengths are:

Snell' s law n , sinO , = n 2 sinO 2
n2 sin 0 , ( a) 15 cm
( b ) 5 cm
3
(c )
10
— cm
( d )
10
cm—
8. The Image formed by eyepiece of com pou nd micr osco pe Is:
(b) Real and diminished
(a ) Real and magnified
(d) Virt ual and diminished
(c) Virtual and enlarge
9 . Which of the following qua ntlty Is not rela ted to the wav elen gth of inci den t ligh t?

(a ) (b ) Ra diu s of curvature
Focal length
( c) ( d ) Ch rom atic abe rrat ion
Power %
l 0, a vir tua l and dim inis hed ima ge ?
Which of the following Is used to obtain
(a) lb ) Con vex lens
Concave mirror
 \
388
Chapter lo [Q pHY3iC3 - XI (Subjective) 369
SchoU i
(c) Convex mirror (d ) Plane mirror
^ —
11. Two convex lenses of equal focal length f are
placed in contact, Short Questions of Exercise
combination is:
(a) Zero
the resultant
f0ca| ler
>gth 0 ,«, (
understand by linear
(c) 2f
(b)
( d)
f .
Q 10.1 What
lens Is
do you
used as a magnifier ?
magnificatio n and angular magnification? Explain how a convex
i/2
12. Final image produced by the compound
microscope is:
(Mtn 2003, D.G.Khan 2005, Fsd 2005 2008 * .
Bwp 2006, Mir Pur 2009, Grw 2009, Lhr 2009*2010 2011, Grwaoil ) *
(a) Real and inverted
(b) Real and erect Magnifica tion
Linear
13 .
(c) Virtual and erect
For normal adjustment, length of telescope
(d) Virtual and inverted
Ans,
The ratio of the slu.eflmOQt to the site ofobhet Is called linear magnification M =i. .a
0 P
is:
(a) f0 U (b) .- ,
f f Angular Magnification
The ratio of the angle subtended bv the Image as seen through the optical device to the angle
(C)
^r. (d ) i
.
f < ubtendbd bv the oblect at naked eye is called angular magnification. M = *- jj -
14 . A spectrometer is used to find:
Convex lens as a Magnifier , and
(a ) Wavelength of light the focal length of a double convex lens then a magnified erect
(b) When we place the object within
Refractive index of prism
(c) Wavelength of different colours (d) All of above virtual image is obtained .
15. Light rays coming from a distant object
are considered to be: resolving power of an optical instrument .
angular magnificatio n and
(a) Parallel to each other (b)
.
Q 10.2 Explain the difference between
optical instrument ?
Parallel to principal axis What limits the magnification of an
(c) Parallel to lens (d) Parallel to source
(Rwp 2005 Bwp 2007, Lhr 2008-2011) .
16. Critical angle is that angle of incidence in magnificatio n and resolving power
denser medium for which angle of refraction In rare Ans . difference between angular
object whereas the resolving power of
medium is: apparent sae of intone of the
Angular magnification increases
(a) 45° an instrument separates the images of two very close objects
(b) 900
(c) 0° Limitation in lenses which limits the
(d) 180° aberrations are the two main defects
17. Mlchelson calculated the speed of light using: The chromatic and spherical
magnification of optical instrument.
(a) Spectrometer
fb) Galvanometer
(c) Interferometer ( d) None of these
18. In optical fibre transmission system
(a) ~ Diode
are used to regenerate the dim light signal ^ . Ans Reason
(b) Repeaters D
1
(c) Laser We know that resolving power, R = —— =
The least distance of distinct vision is
' Transformer
0;
.
25 cm. The focal length of a convex lens Is 5 cm It can act a * . 1.222
length. It
. •

produces less diffrqction . Hence. « t increases thi

timpie microscope of magnifying power: Since the blue light is of shorter wave
resolving power of compound microscope.
a) 4 (b) 5 . microscope
W 6 (d) Q.10.4 for use by the children . The Images seen In such a

28. Photodiode converts the ftght signals into ^ one can buy a cheap
edges
microscope
Why .
Is this so? (D.G . Khan 100S,
have coloured
a) Electric u%r a ;
( b) Sound signals An
* Reason
W Ertfcer of these A) Hone of these It due to fftf
Is flfrffratlotL tenjfj cannot bring ifl
len . Such .
The white light will disperse after passing
point
through
(focal
the
pointj which win *
five cclou red edge
ANS VERS white light from the object to a single
l.i 2. b 3. b 4. c ii 6. d 7. d
12 13. e .

k
14. d 15 » 16.b 17. d

» .
 370
,
^, ° =2*“**, ,
£!SLT [Opuca
PHYS ICS - XI ( Subjective ) .

.
371
Chromatic aberration is a type of distortion in which J lcn> fails to fi,ru\ all c,,[lir j , tcbo^ ll
. . , * *' ^ "
.-" . TvT
> hc
Chromatic aberration \hows fringe* of color along boundaries ihai separate J v P int
in j br \ h
Identify the correct answer :
-
^
Reason It occurs because lensc * hnv < a different refractive indo for differ cm u , , n ; '
Q 108
n . different uvivclcnglhsol light will be focused on diltcrcnr positions
. i .s <
index decreases HII / I ineregsum wavelemilh Since rhe focal length / « •! i, , . , J, , . . i, , , b
"n the refrr
®
CHOitr ()
|
,
The resolving power of a compound microscope depends on
The refractive index of the medium In which the objects placed
|a
(b) The diameter of the objective lens.
Q.10.5 Describe with help of diagrams, how ( a) a single biconvex lens can be
used as a (c) The angle subtended by the objective lens at the object. ‘
biconvex lenses can be arranged to form a microscope . magnifying gUn.
lb) (d) The position of an observer s eye with regard to the eye lens.
|
( |) The resolving power of an astronom ical telescope depends on:
Ans . For single biconvex lens: IMtnJOOi. fvd VXA
\ \ ( a) The focal length of the objective lens.
When object is placed within the focal length of the lens then an erect , virtual and magnified (b) The least distance of distinct vision of the observer.
obtained. m Rt it ( c ) The focal length of the eye lens.
‘* (d) The diameter of objective lens .
.
For biconvex lenses:
of objective lens .
In compound microscope, when the image formed by the objective .
is v th m » he fool length of th Ans. (i ) (b ) Diameter
(li) ( d) Diameter of objective lens
eyepiece then a virtual, inverted and magnified image is obtained
. shoeing the different light paths through a single - mode and a multi mode fibre.
Q.10.9 Draw ketches
telecom municat ions ?
Why Is the single- mode fibre preferred in
mode and multi mode fibre are shown below .
The different light paths through single

Ans The path through a single - mode fibre.

Cladding

( a ) Kay diagram of single biconvex (b) 6 convex tenses used as

lens used as magnifying glass to form a microscope
Q.10.6 If a person were looking through a telescope at the full moon, how would the app < ranee of ;
moon be changed by covering half of the objective lens.
( Sgd 2003. Fsd 2004.lt ' 2010
20111

Ans. The apparent size of image of moon does not chanoe It looks dim only " A.
Reason Fig 10.14
Multi - mode step - index fibre
Light propagation through

•
Magnification of telescope depends upon the focal leriQth of the eye piece M -

When half of the objective lens is covered, it does not change its
the light reduces to half
find by ray
^
length. So only the
intensity of Preference of single- mode fibre
Single mode is preferred in telecom munica
• A strong mono-chromatic source is used in
tion because
single mode fibre,

Q.10.7 A magnifying glass gives a five times enlarged image at a distance of 25 cm from the lens hence no signal is lost.
* There is nojiispersion of light and
diagram, the focal length of the lens.
r

Ans. Scale : ( along x - axis ) M = 4 Q-io 0

,
,. How the light signal Is transmitted through h* .
Fsd 2005, Grw 2010 )
2D08 0.G.Khan 2005
5 cm = 1 cm D = 25 cm
op tical Fibre by:
25 cm = S cm f = ? 5 cm The signal is transmitted through the
From fig focal length = OF = 1 25 cm ( 0 Total internal reflection
M = internal reflection while in
Thus f = 1.25 x 5 = 6.2 cm f
(ll)
minupus rffrnrflpn , signal is transm itted by mean of total
reflection and
fihr the by total Internal

^ ** Index fibre. the signal Is transmitted

mitirnode Step Ind
25
5 = 1+ — 5
25 cm
case of multimode. graded
continuous refraction.
25 25
4 - —f fa —4 = 6.2cm

-
 How the powar is lost in optical fl &rt through dispart o*' ? Exp
•'
!Uvi!>icMv
ns . Power Ion by diiptrslon
^ iVi4

*
When light vgnal is not perfectly monoch'O'’' tT * c. tra '

’
light will d/iotrit on patsing through tht corf o ( tr t
optical fibre into different wavelengths *,
shown In figure

—
~
+r
|
-
jl U f M i f
at 4
—
>

——
and
_
_—
/1 eu as

Each wavelength will have different oath It noth

• Therefore, the signal received Is distorted or faulty

from cye -
piecc - least distance of distinct vision - d cm

Dispersion

Snail's Law and tha indo* of rafroction of the * start* T> » rns * * r |*h i
*
slightly diffarant angla whan posing through a mot ana T * » ipts: 4 cart N
_
Whan tha light p**»t » into a matanal at an angk t*a S« t fcaww ,* oa t ©» 'afrwtad suwon- g to
*

•at *
of virtual image .

callad dltparsion or chromatic dtspartJon

*
of Hg* » H
l P d
we get

nWIHTIlliHll
Solved Examples ±2 5 m pli
i
9

- ± . _ 25#
J
1

-
p' 250
25
A microscope has an objective lens of 10 mm focal length , and an rye piece of 25.® > nn tad I
.
length VVhat iv the distance between the lcn % o and it % magnification, if the object »* in *rpta« | I , 250 25
when It i * 10.5 nun from the objective ? -
p ( 25X 250 )
Given Data. I 275
p* 6250
l ocal length of objective f0 1 Ontm
-
Focal length of cyc piccc fe 25mm

To Find:
Distance of object from objective lens p 10.5 mm 1^ -
Distance between lens
22.72rmij
L * q P' .
Pulling values, we get
0) Distance between lens l q + p' 7 l - 210 + 22.72
( ii )
Calculation:
Total magnification M ?
-
L iy2.12snm
[L * 233mm)
of objective ) ( Magnification ofeyc -
piece )

(i) If wc consider the objective alone

•(Magnification

-u
1 i+i
p
As q' »d
- -250mm
374
PHYSICS - XI (Subjective

M =- 52500
238.56
^ 0/
= 9.4°
M = - 220 using Snell ,s law (For air-core boundary)
Again
Negative sign indicates that the image is virtual .
nSinO = n , Sin0' n - refractive index of air = 1.0
( l . O)Sin0 = ( 1.50 ) Sin 9.4°

Calculate the critical angle and angle of entry for Sin 0 = 1.50 x 0.163
1.50 and cladding of refractive index 1.48
an optical fibre havi
v , n 8 core of refr Sin 0 = 0.2445
activc index
pftJ
Given Data : 0= O.
^
'
Sin
Refractive index of core = ni = 1.50 9 = 14.2° 1
Refractive index of cladding = n 2 = 1.48
To Find .
( i)
Exercise Problems
Critical angle = 0C = ?
( ii ) length 5.0 cm is used as a magnifying glass . If the near point of the
Angle of entry of light = 0 = 7 10.1 A converging lens of focal
close to the eye , calculate ( i ) the distance of the object from
observer is 25 crn and the lens is held
Calculation . angular magnification when the final image is
the lens(ii) the angular magnification. What is the
formed at infinity ?
Given data:
Air
Focal length = f = 5.0cm
n = 1.0 Near point = least distinct vision - d - 25cm
To find:
TT
(
(i) Distance of the object from Jens = P = ?
(ii) Angular magnification = M = ?
, when image is at infinity = =?
( iii ) Angular magnification

(i ) According to Snell ' s law ( For core-cladding interface )

niSinOi = n 2Sin02
When 0| = 0 then 02 = 90°
C

Thus 1.5 x sin 0c = l .48 x Sin 90° = l

l .5 x sin0c = 1.48

( ii ) From Figure
 I M J
r« g
^ PfMOtfw ,
CPE) Asgolir nugmficagioo = M =!

M*l
25
—
d
,4 PHYSICS - XI Subjective ) 377

(in)
M l +5
M =6
S
-
Now- when image is at infinity, object must be at focus, hence p » f
Putting the values, we get
4
d =12 ’
M S
P - 96
|dc =0.5cm

Hence
M - a
103 A telescope
.
lenses Find
is made
le
o f
angular
an objective of
magnification
focal length 20cra and
.
an eye piece o f 5.0 cm, both convex

Gr ? n data :
length o f objective = f0 = 20 cm
Focal
Putting values, we get = cm
25 PocaJ l ength of eye-piece = fe 5.0
Or M*
T To find:
Angular magnification = M = ?
M =5.0 Cak lotion:
fo
10.2 A telescope objective has focal length 96 cm and diameter 12 cm . calculate the focal length ud Angle magnification = M = -p
minimum diameter of a simple eye piece lens for use with the telescope , if the linear magaificitioi
required is 24 times and all the light transmitted by the objective from a distance point on tbs Putting values, we get
telescope axis is to fall on the eye piece.
Given data:
HP
§3
Focal length of objective = f 0 96cm — 04 A simple astronomical telescope in noimal adjustment has
final
an objective
image formed
of
? (
focal
ii)
length
calculate
100
the
cm and
angular
Diameter of objective = d = 12cm
0
(

an eye piece of focal length 5.0 cm . (i) where is the

Linear magnification = M = 24 magnification .

Given data:
To find:
Focal length of objective = I 00 cm fo -
Focal length of the eye- piece = fc =? Focal length of eye piece fe = - =5.0 cm
Diameter of the eye - piece = dc =? To find:
image = q ' =?
Calculation: (i) Distance of the final
(ii) Angular magnification = M = ?
As magnification = M
—=
f
calculation:
(i) In normal adjustment , the
for
image
eye
due
piece
to objective
-
therefore
is formed
.
at the focus of the eye - piece, this

Or .= —
f*
M
image acts as an object
p' = ff = 5.0cm
1 l 1
Putting the values, we get
.
f.-*
’ 24
f
ii
s
P
JL'
<1
g
(As in* * ii virtual)

-
5 q
f ®
f# •= 4cm of the *
As focal leng is lirectly p. portumal to diameter, so the ;0
ratio of the diameter 1 l.i
is equal to the ratio of their fc < d lengths . Thus
q
^^

\
X
 l m
^
i£!2H0 [pptic
$cho
PHYSICS - XI (Subjective)
379
10.8
q
, 0.6
q=
o q = 18cm
q - oo thus final image is formed at
infinity ' '
( ii ) Angular Magnification Thus the image A B is formed 18cm away froi lens .This image will act as an object for the
second lens , which is 26cm from the first lens
M= -
^ Thus
p' = L- q = 26 -18 = 8.0cm
M= I -
5 For second lens
p -8cm ,f -16cm, q -? r
Or | M = 2 p|
1
10.5 A point object is placed on the axis of and
3.6 cm from a thin convex lens of
second thin convex lens of focal length focal length 3.0cm . A
16.0cm is placed coaxial with the
on the side away from the object . first anil 26.0 cm from it
Find the position of the final image
Given data : produced by the hvo
lenses.
Distance of object = p = 3.6 cm
Focal length of first lens = f = 3.0 cm
Focal length of second lens = ( =16.0 cm
Distance between two lenses = L = 26 cm
To find :
Position of the final image = q /= ? q' = - 16cm
Calculation : Negative sign shows that image is virtual .
Using the lens formula
10.6 \ compound microscope has lenses of focal length 1.0cm and 3.0 cm . An object is placed 1.2 cm
cm from the eye , calculate the separation of
from the object lens. If a virtual image is formed , 25
the lenses and the magnification of the instrument.
Given data:
Focal length of objective - f0 = 1.0 cm
Focal length of eye - piece = fc = 3.0 cm
Distance of object = p = 1.2 cm
T find:
Distance of image = q ’ -25cm ( virtual image)
®

°
Separation of lens = L =?
(“ R ,culatlon
:
Magnification = M ® ?

As separation of lens * length of microscope - L - q p

Or • So first we have to calculate q and p
q 3 3.6
As lens formula is
Putting values, we get
1 3.6 - 3
I I _
1
—f = — + q
q 3 * 3.6 * P
0.6
10.8 .

»
 Mi
K
W
380 Chapter 10 (Optical - XI ( Subjective )
lmtm igr’s
PHYSICS
Or i I I 28
q p =
M 5x~
3
Or I* "
1
q l l .2
X M=
M
140
3
1 1.2- 1
,
M = 46.66
q 1.2 =
M 47 approx .

—
1 .0.2
q 1.2
- £3

10.7
of
of the objective
wavelength 589 nm is used

limit of
to ie \v

resolution
an object
for this
under a microscope

microscope .
\ . If the aperture
Sodium light is 0.90 cm, ( i ) find the limiting angle of resolution , ( ii )using visible light of any
q = 6cm wavelength , what is the maximum

Now for eye-picce

-
This image will act as an object for the cyc piecc Given data:
t
Wavelength of sodium light = > =589 nm = 589 xl 0 * /w '

’ />/
-
q' = 25 cm , fc = 3cm , p' = ? Aperture of the objective = D = 0.90 cm = 0.90x 10

Applying lens formula To find: a - 9

(i ) Limiting angle of resolution = mm
,

±f.!
= p +I
q ’ ' ( ) Maximum
ii limit of resolution = '
ccrmin
- 9

l l l Calculation:
Limiting angle
p' f q’ . (I)
_
Using the relation Lfor
limiting angle of resolution .

1 I I
a mm =1 2 2 p —
i ia.
p
' -
1 25+3
3 25
Putting values , we get

“
589 x 1 O .
.m .= 1 22 .90xia!
718.58 x
'

10 ^'
xo
'4

p1
75 0.90
= 798.4 x 10 ’
1 28
p' 75 7.98x 10 '
= -
75 is used and it is
P (H) Maximum limit of resolution elength of the visible spectrum
28 at , the shortest wav
p -2.7 cm For muximum limit of resolution
400nm for violet colour light .
Thus , separation between lens = L = q + p'
L = 6 + 2.7 Thus V 400nm 400x 10 Jm
= =
|L = 8.7 cm| So
/
CC mm = 1.22 —
D

L — P
q d
Magnificatiqn = ( 1 + — )
fc = 1.22 x
400 xl 0 l
oioxTo
~

"

Putting values, we gel 4.88 x 10

i

M=

M=
—
1
-T
“
mi *'
0.90x 10

^ — ,
UTnidjan

1.2
 i >

382
g^ Pter lOTOpij
1 «. R 2l!*t , PHYSICS - XI ( Subjective )
An astronomical telescope hasing magnifying power
Kind the focal length is of the lenses.
of 5 consists of two
thin ,enses 24 383

Given data : '"••pm Sow using Snell’s law for glass - waier interface
Magnifying power = M = 5 r\\ sin 0 , = n 2 sin 0 ,
Separation between the lens L 24cm
To find : = = Where
n , = refrective index of glass =1.50 j
Focal length of objective f
= =? n , refractive index of waier = l .}3
=
Focal length of eye- piece f
Calculation:
= =7 0, = angleof incidenceor critical angle = 0' = ?
Magnification M is
equation
—
0, = 90 for total internal reflection
becomes
M - =
f
^ Thus above
1.59 xsinG ' = 1.33 xsin 90“

Or 5= —
.
Or f , 5f
Distance between
= 0)
two lens is
cladding of an optical fibre are 1.6 and 1.4 respectively .
The reflective index of the core and
the air , of a
10.10 (li ) the maximum angle of incidence in
24 = 5 f + fc c Calculate ( i ) the critical angle for the interlace
at the critical angle on the interface .
Using equation I ) in n ( ray, W hich enters the fibre and is incident
24 6 fc =_ Given data :
Refractive index of core n
^
1.6 = -
r 24
T Refractive index of cladding n 2 = 1.4 =
\\ = 4cm To find :
( i ) critical angle for core-cladding interface = 3=?
Pulling this value offc in equation ( 1 ), wc get
( li ) maximum angle of incidence = 6' =?
f „ Sx4 = Calculation :
=
f , 20 cm ( I) -
Snell’s law for core cladding interface
m Sin 0 i n 2 Sin 02
=
, where nt 1.6 =
* nT * m n mum ,,
unK t
,,
* m Ulr Wln l0 tUlly in ernal|y reflect a light ray if its angle of incidence is ul leas
* or total Internal
reflection if pipe is in water 7 ( refractive
'
index n 2 = 1.4
0 Gc = ? ,=
of water = 1 33
Given data: 1 02 90° =
Angle of incidence lor glass Putting values, we get
in air = 0 = 39° = Sin 90°

—
1.6 sin 0 c 14
To Find :
1.4
Angle of incidence lor water
= =?
0'
• ft
sin Qc =
1.6
Calculation: sin Bc = 0 - 875
For refractive index of glass light - 1
0.875 )
pipe using the formula 0c sin= (
1
n = sin 0 (
1

Maximum angle of incidence

Putting the values , we gel •From figure, for 0 = 61",
t

I angle of refraction 0 j in
the
384
£l22P!?MitOptica| , PHYSICS - XI (Subjective) 385
the core should be
01Z = 90^ 0 C
nstrui SchoJ
^
e; = 90° -6 i° = 29°
Snell ' s law ,
Chapter 11 .
for air - core interface
,
n sin 0 j = n 2 sin O , ' HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS
IxsinOj = 1.6 xsin 29°
sin 0[ = 1.6 x 0.485 ,
For air, n = l
;
sinO = 0.776 For core n 2 = 1.6
* 1
0 J = sin ( 0.776) O,
' =29° Learning Objectivesj
o; = 5 i° kinetic theory of gases .
. state the basic postulates of
1. by a gas and derive the equati on P = 2/3
%
* *** * * ** * cause s the press ure exerte d
2. Explain how molecular movement per unit volum e of the gas .
N is the numb er of mole cules
N0, <i/2mv >, where 0
2

propo rtiona l tempe rature of

Scholar’ s 3. Deduce that the average translational
kineti c energ y of mole cules is to

the gas.
basis of kinetic theory .
Alternative To Practical 4-
5 -
Derive gas laws on the
Describe that the intern al energy of an ideal gas is due to kinetic energy of its mole cules.

wo rk and heat in therm odyna mics .

6. Understand and use the terms
On adiab atic proce sses.

—
7- Differentiate between isothermal and

—
.
PHYSICS, CHEMISTRY , 8. heats of a gas
Explain the molar specific

BIOLOGY & Computer Science I

9.
».
1V
,. . .
Apply first law of thermodynamics to
,
Explain 0 second law
Understand the conce pt of
<
reve rsibl e
derive

and
Cr

irrev
- Cv
n mic and »
=

ersib
R.

le proce ss
«•
,
•
entropy.

12 . Define the term heat engine.

is Available in Market 13 - Understand and describe Carno t theore m .
of tempe rature .
H. i scale
Describe the thermodynamics
and diese l e
^16. Describe the working of petrol
Explain the term entropy.
17‘ Explain the change in entropyAS -
^ crisis
as an e ntropY ‘
Appreciate environmental crisis
 9
|. YHie
|| ® X M' . HI . JM IKI-I

Chapter No. 11
,
tllJ ^
, vi
,
nlo n between
,
be, ,,,,,
tramform
, . -
,'
n
/
U
*
«W
«
' " *'
, ,
"'"""" * thi

.
tunial*
ot
ork
iutt
^ h
^ ^
ir lyy

, ..
g& ,1 _
,„b ' l It" - ' <Iy 11.111 /

,
I
l
ntral role in iethnolog
II !<* Vh
)
rt IK
' & jr use
*
-.
In the form of heat
liliestid
111
ifltHt pOttUlatf t of l lr etjr

<E> Gases
Kinetic Theory of
of gases Is well described by the kinetic theory. ! t relates
The behaviour
1 MV
(K .E
) of gases microscopic properties
macroscopic properties ( T, P , and V etc to
hematic:
! al model to study the behavior of gases .
etc.) It provides a mat
Postulates
of gas consists of very large number of molecules.
• A finite volume
separation between
The size of the molecules is much smaller than the
< molecules.
5 • The gas molecules are in random motion and may change their direction
-
CL
of motion after every collision.
and with walls of container
U • Collisions between gas molecules themselves
u are assumed to be perfectly elastic.
except during a collision .
/ • Molecules exert no force on each other
o c
0 -O3 us
>
q CL,
Q- 2 Derive the relations for pressure and temperature in terms of average
u __
kinetic energy of the molecules?

merely

transferred to the wall of the container per I

collision of molecules of the gas .
Expression for pressure of gas
Consider a cubical box as shown in figure.
Let
Length of side of box = £
Number of molecules of a gas = N
Mass of each molecule of a BaS m
li «
h 3E > Mass
"

= v«

,‘
ln bal
f the momentum of molecules be o
rebound «°
sPeed. So
collision Is elastic, the mole ^
Final momentum= nW«
Change in momentum = -mvu - mv, „
2mv
- ^ *

\
 V"T - mm
JSIf v

388 Chapter 11 [Heat & - XI (Subjective) 389

Tu
lar’ s
PHYSICS —
^ > na[Jig
sJJ
After recoiling the molecule travels to opposite face EFGHE and collides with it.
The molecules again rebounds back to the face ABCDA after covering a distance
2C.
Let, time between two successive collisions = At
.-
j bstitut ng the

Px
value of
,m
— .in eq. (1), we get
.
4

2t 2
Then At = [v S = vt ]
Vlx N
The rtumber of collisions per second (or collision frequency) that the molecule
+ VNl
makes with this face is,
2
+ v )* 21 is called the mean of

I Where N
vi *
f= —At It velocity o f molecules
moving along x direction
- So equation ( 2) becomes
square ( 3)
Rate of change of momentum of the molecules P„= P<V/ / >
to y and z axes will be
the faces perpendicular
due to collision with face ABCDA =
-2mvu Similarly, pressure on tne

At Py = p<Vyfll
Putting value of At, we get P, = P<v > / , therefore mean square velocity of all the
molecules is random
v mv > x 2
motion of
As the , i.e.
~
Rate of change of momentum - -2mvu x — = locities will be equal
t component ve
Now, according to the 2 nd law of motion in terms of21 momentum: .
<vx > = vv
2
<
2
> = < v,2
>
— By second law of motion, rate of change of momentum of molecule is equal to
< V > =< /
2 v > + <Vy
2
>+ < V22>
2
the force applied by the wall. Since 2
+ < vx
2
> + <vx >
<v > = <vx >2
2

From Newton's third law of motion Force Fix exerted by the molecule on the f ®Kv2> = 3<VX >
face ABCDA is equal but opposite. ^ 1 2
<v > = - <v >
2
So, 3
K
mV „
2 \ 2
Putting the value of <vx > in
eq . (3 ) we 8 et /

t 2
Px = - p < v > the vessel will be
2 3 every where inside
mv » pressu re of the gas
t'
F« = According to Pascal Law , .
uniform density
the same provided the gas is of
Thus, the total force acting along x-axis due to N molecules of the gas moving
with velocities v1K, v^ v3 x ,vNx is . So,
P « = Py = p = < v J >
F = Ffx + p 2X + x >
* 2
^ 3 3
mvlx mv Thus in general
OR Fx = (4)
t t ip<v 2
>
P=
As pressure is normal force per unit area 3 square velocity .
of
,
mean
Hence P = . ^ t- A
-
f
2
This is the relation for pressure
Relation between pressure and
in
average
terms

mN
OR As P
V
Putting value of p in equation ( 4)
OR
P= -
mass 3 V
Since Density =
Volume P‘ -
mN I
3 2 V
OR
3V 2
OR
 -JM
A,
i
- m i

\] (Subjective) 391

.
I
r = - \ < - *m > l
3 ' 2 T < mV >
* :
s
— = N.= nymt>er of moiecuies p r un t volume
* - o in the average

r s constant <
1
-m \ > 1 IN. - Ci 1
«»»" TTZLcr,rfi*» m .
I the| asJavrson the basis of of gases

0«

o
*
P
* - mv

P or <K £ >
< >
1
Coockiwon |0yU* S UW
temperature is inversely

-
constant
^ wnrt eitrttJ by i% fa « dirtxily pmport mji to tht wragt
K E of molnyUx
jgus
* * t mt
OS at
totHkas
Q -3 .
Prove that T<cm/>
1
lO
-"
<> =
Interpretation of Temperature
According to ideal f iHW kinetK energy 0f the molecules
PV nRT •
Where n is the number of moles Ii >«k r» constant
V is the volume. T is the absolute temperature and R H the u g a s convt
^t I
< ®r rtmaMW

^ V
,< >
1 tc rs
*"*
elso constant . So

(R = 8 Jt 4 Jmol ’ K ’) a XM
* pv *
* constant
If NA is Avogadro number then number of mole can be r ijxetved ai
N | oa p« constantly )
n * rr
NA

‘
1
Thus equation (i) can be written » v . oa p
* —V
NRT proved it is the Boyle s law
.
PV * *****
the absolute
or PV * NkT ( 2)
pressure is kept constan
23
temperature when the
Where k = •
$ the Boltzmann's constant its value s 138 >
* K
'

‘ from kinetic molecular theory of gastS-

Nj- no1 >
constant per molecule
Also we know that
o
*j¥ i
: , OR v,Ui <i «v' >
D
P=
N
3V
< —2
I
nn ^ J 3P
also constant
1
j ** Ihe pressure is constant. IS — is

OR PV * —3 .
< ~ mv >
2
2
13)
Thus,
Comparing the equations( 2 ) and ( 3 ) . we have I 5
V ~ constant * ~2 ID* >
NkT = - N < -- mv > ‘

3 : OR v « < - mv * >
„ 2 i ‘ 2
OR T= —
3K
<- mv * >
2
—K = Constant 1
• Ah©
1 2
T = constant < — ms > '

2
392 Chapter 11 rHeat
PHYSICS - XI (Subjective)
* Thermod lar’s
$d> °
So . V o c T.
Hence verified , it is Charles law. Work done
positi^
Q.5 Write a note on Internal Energy and show that it is independent of the
Work done
system ( gas) on its environment is
by the consolered as positive .

path. tjve work done

Nega
by the environment on the system is considered as negative .
d ne
Work ° of heat Q enters the system it either appears as an increase in
Internal Energy If an amount
energy of the system or is used up in doing work by the system on its
The sum of all the forms of molecular energies (such as kinetic and potential internal .
F
I \
environment
v

energy) of a substance is called internal energy . V"

for Work in terms of directly measurable variables

Explanation ression
In the study of thermodynamics, an ideal gas is usually considered as a working a gas enclosed in the cylinder with a moveable , - frictionless piston of
1
C0P Her
substance. The molecules of an ideal gas are mere point mass which exerts no area ' A' . In equilibrium, the system occupies volume V, and ; iv
ectional
force on one another. So the internal energy of an ideal gas system is generally
•

the translational Al £ of its molecules . Since T oc <K .E >, thus the internal enemy
ot an ideal gas is directly proportional to its temperature.
How can we Increase the internal Energy
A d< alomsc gas
molecule
both translational and roUtahas
exerts
defined , ^
pressure
force per
'P'
unit
on
area
the
i .
walls
e.,

p= I
A
of the cylinder and its piston. As pressure is
fa! ,
bT
A cas sealed iaq' "de' b> 3
.veigHess. fcxtonatess
-
"iry

Tre corsta .t <3o Tvrard aec*ed

*
-
energy. It also has vfcratatf^ F = PA
F
force eauais FA and n the
1) By heating energy assocaled w h the sprirq or piston s aisc deed db^- jrafd
When we heat a substance, energy associated with its atoms or molecules is e bond betv en its atoms
* ^ * exerted b / gas on piston .
wor< s dc'e cn me ass
This is the foijce
increased i. e., heat is converted to internal energy' .
,
so that it remains in the equilibrium . As
The gas expands through AV very slowly
2) By doing mechanical work
the piston moves up through a small distance = d - Ay
When two objects are rubbed together , their internal energy increases because
of mechanical work. The increase in temperature of the object indicates an Work done by the gas is
increase in the internal energy. W = FAy
Note Coratar< Prwsura
Similarly, when an object slides over any surface and comes to rest because of W = PAAy P
B
> f
frictiona forces , the mechanical work done on or by the system is partially
converted into internal energy.
Internal energy is a state function
in thermodynamics, internal energy is function of state . Consequently, it does not
Since AAy = AV (change in volume)

^
W = PAV
is is the work done by gas on piston.
TP
0
A
V —
&V •;- 4 %
We can express work in terms of directly measurable quantities.
depend or the path out depends on
Explanation
initial and final states of the system.
J .
p
C, j
Sr» phlcal Representation
Consider a system wh ch undergoes a pressure and volume change from and C,. Work done can be calculated from the area under P- V graph .
to Dr and Vt. respectively, regardless of the process by which the system work
Bv the details of change In internal energy and the mechanical l- ui Your lolornuiUon
changes from r. it = : to final state. By experiment it has been seer that the ' "

.
a";(P, V„TJ ,
c n describe en « gv
,cs
change in interna ) energy is a . ways the same and is independent of the paths C1
and C 2 . S
v the general principles which deal
mechanical energy. These principles are
with
known
heat
as laws >
| ' - ec*
-a

^ V,
i
' te — a ere 'g, is sim ar to
the gravitational P.E . So like the gravitational P.E we
t2ke tne change in internal energy and not its absolute value , which is important.
^ V,
S 2 Explain the first law of Thrminify wig »
—
nd » » eonseduencjL
-0 SvremV -
• 01

Q6. Discuss transfer of energy into wo 'k and heat Also calculate the work
Flrst Law of Thermodynamics Work
done by a thermodynamic system d Tngtne volume change . benm
he woix
its . W
Work and Heat
[ foundings.
Both hec : and >. ark correspond to ar fer of en*. - y by some means
•
" miticiiiy
Q* AU W
Tea was first applied to the sr m engine ere it was natural to transfer *
neat in and get work out.

\
394

Explanation
Clmptor 11 [||CII|
A Hi
iI2l«4y« . atlon
pHVSlCS Xl

*
m

\ s nen heat s added to a s\ stem; there Is an increase In the Internal energy from pressure and volume whert . ,
j

. . Initial
.
the
<5
' sxmur i
t , to U: due to the rise in temperature and an increase in pressure or change in
the state if 3 t the same time , a substance is allowed to expand, then W is the
il ? V
- e
"
'>

after the
isothermal change takes pt > Then
P,V, = P,V2
* > \
Vviir
^tr MII/I
*
,

work done on its environment

^
io\
of an ideal gas depends or k , * /' O r
V
Heal entering a I energy ’

*-
Q = (U2 - U,) + W the interna
AS constant .
OR Q = AU + W (D
positiveand Waving a
is negative l
he work ivxvcm
by ihc system is pos dont y1
leased .O.ii
Therefore
•'
Thus, the change in internal energy AU = U2 - U, **
^\\
ihc » iivc a
From equation (i)
work done on the
sy«etn \\ AU = 0
is negative, as thermodynamics uces
AU = Q - W ( 2) figure. shownintt \\
» Hence first law of “

Q = AU + W
Examples of First Law of Thermodynamics
Q =O+W
Bicycle Pump
Q =W
A bicycle pump provides a good example. When we pump on the handle
rapidly, Expansion
I4Uthermal amount of heat Q has tc be|
it becomes hot due to mechanical work done on the gas, in this way; it »
external work W , an
increases expands and does
its internal energy. if a gas produce an isothermal change .
supplied to the gas in order to
time ; hence to keep
Mllivoltmotor place to another requires
Note of heat from one |
Trappod air Since, transfer , the expansion must take place slowly .
The arrangement consists of; Thermocouple in pump temperature of the gas constant
Bicycle pump with a blocked outlet. A thermocouple connected Isotherm Isotherm .
Piston an isothermal process is called an
through the blocked outlet to note the temperature of air When pushed in The curve representing
piston is rapidly pushed, thermometer shows a temperature rise
( 2) Adiabatic Process system is called adiabatic
due to increase of internal energy of the air. The push force does heat enters or leaves the
A process in which no
work on the air, thereby increasing its internal energy, by the
increase in temperature of air .
process .
Explanation i.e ., Q = o
Human Metabolism or leaves the system
Since in adiabatic process no heat enters
Human metabolism also provides an example of energy conservation. Human
being and other animals do work when they walk, run, or move heavy objects. ^ ence the first law of thermodynamics becomes tp
Q = AU + W
Work requires energy . Energy is also needed for growth to make new cells and to
AU + W 0=
replace old cells that have died. Work done will result in decrease in internal
OR W =-AU
energy of the body . internal
Adiabatic Expansion at the expense of
1
According toi' law of thermodynamics, to an organism of human body i
lf gas expands and does external work, it is does
of the gas falls.
AU = Q W - energy of its molecules and hence , the tempera ture
Hence, the body temperature or internal energy is maintained by the food we Adiabatic compression temperature of the
it increa ses the
eat 1 Sas is compressed, work is done on the gas;
Note (Metabolism) gas

Energy transforming processes that occur within an organism are named as -W = AU

Condition for adiabatic change con wressed rapidly
metabolism. exponds or is
Mabatic change occurs »hen the case Qf adiabatic
Applications of First law of thermodynamics cylinder. In
Particularly when the gas is containe >
t rernain consta
(1) Isothermal Process changes, as the temperature of the gas n()

is called 7 tant pressure to

A process in which the temperature of the system is constant PV =constant
of the gas at coos
isothermal process . y Is the ratio of the molar specific heat
, i.e * .
G volume
ift isothermal process the condition for the applicat on of Boyle' s Law is fulfilled. ^olar specific heat at constant
Therefore, when gas expands or compresses Isother ally, the product of its
pressure and volume during the p ocess emains t nstant .
396

Adiabat
HH

Chapter 11 [Hct &

ThCrn» od
X

r
pi
^ ^
SlCS

Qv = cv A r
M lSul) jci.iiv < )

d)
1
a
397 I

The curve representing un adiabatic process is called an adiabat

first law o t thermodynamics .
An adiiibat is steeper than an Isotherm . Ving W
Examples of Adiabatic Process |
'
APP Qv = AU +
CV.AT = AU + W
The examples of adiabatic processes are CVAT =AU + PAV [v W = -
i. The rapid escape of air from a burst tyre. constant (i.e AV= o), ork done by the system is
yolurn ^ remains
2. The rapid expansion and compression of air through which a sound wave is Since law of thermodynamics
passing. Thus the first
3 Cloud formation in the atmosphere. zero CAT =AU
Q.8 ( a) Define the following terms: Hence AU=Cv AT
OR
(I) molar specific heat
r A |constant
pressure pressure so that its temperature
an Ideal gas is heated a slant
(ii) molar soecific heat at constant volume ( Cv) if one mole of I
heat transferred Qp i given by
(iii) molar specific heat at constant preasure ( Cp) rises by AT then the
I ( 3)
(b) Prove that Cp Cy = R- energy increases the s e amount as at constant .
volume for the
the internal
me rise in temperatureJI AT .
( 4)
= CvAT
Specific heat thus , so the work done by the
pressure constant
The amount of heat required to raise the temperature of one kilogram of a substance up to one Kelvin is called S,nce' the g pands t < ep the

specific heat. gas is

I *
= PAV ( 5 )
One kilogram of different substances contains different number of molecules. Sometimes it is preferred to
consider a quantity called mole. One mole of any substance contains same number of molecules. according to
%first law
—
of
—
thermodynamics —
Qp = AU W
Molar Specific Heat of a Gas I
CpAT = CvAT + PAV
( 6 ) [using equations ( l
3 ( 4 )

Molar specific heat of the substance is defined as the heat required to raise the temperature of one mo oft j
substance through IK.
5)l «
According to general gas equation.
Note PV = nRT
In case of solids and liquids the change of volume and hence work done i I titij
one mole of an ideal gas, n = I
against external pressure during a change of temperature Is negligibly PV = RT due to
mole of a gas
small. Centum **
Ccntf '1 At constant pressure P, amount of work done by
prMWft g
But gases suffer variation In pressure as well as in volume with the rise in vo Vm«
AU * C.OT AU* C AT .
mansion AV caused by the rise in temperature ^
AT
temperature. Hence, to study the effect of heating the gases, either PAV = RAT
pressure or volume is kept constant . We can define molar specific heat of L T
a gas in two ways.
(1) Molar specific heat at constant volume
0. C.
T
AT 0.
- Putting value of

,
PAV in equation (
C AT = C v AT + RAT
. OR
6 ), we get

olli Cps Cv +R
temptrtWtj
The molar specific heat at constant volume is the amount
mole of the gas though IK at constant volume.
of heat required to raise the
^ if >
j
Cy = R
^ p

that Cp > Cv by an amount equal to universal gas constant

^
.
It is symbolized by C v Its SI unit is J Mole ’ K \
( 2 ) Molar specific heat at constant pressure
'

The molar specific heat at constant pressure is the amount of heal

I,
required to raise the
art of 0' * ^^
^reversible process is one
verstble Process
a note on Reversible and Irreversible
Processes.

exactly reverse order ,

mole of the gas through Ik at constant pressure. . A
n be retroced
in
11
It is represented by symbol C . . wi(Aoitf
producing any change n siirroundings‘
ExP anat\on
( Derivation of Cp - Cy * R
^ '
At constant volume then th
*^ dlr « process, but thermal and mechanical
effe
;
if one mole of an ideal gas Is hes . ed a constant slumt so that Its tempers '
transferred CL is given by
c rises by AT
- 6
*
398
Chapter 11 [Heat A
Th pr tVSl CS - XI (Subjective)
exactly reversed . If heat is absorbed in the direct process, it will be
given out in ^ 0(j
cbol*
§
r' s
engine
399 f

the reverse process. If work is done by the substance in the direct process o f he at
, work
will be done on the substance in the reverse process. Hence,
the
tficiency of heat engine is defined as the ratio of wor ne to the heat
i

working efficiency
substance is restored to its original conditions. rhe de no te d by rj
. is
Cycle
A succession of events which bring ike system back to its initial con
supplied
Where
It
W = Q,- Q
W
/ HTR T,

a cycle.
dition is called
Thus, .
efficiency = —
Q . Q,
>t
Examples of Reversible Process . <V- Qi w i
(D The process of liquefaction and the evaporation of a
performed slowly are reversible processes.
substance .,
n= Q
Q Qj.
Engine

(2 ) Slow compression of a gas in a cylinder is reversible process

compression can be changed to expansion by decreasing the
as the OR o
" * r
"

the piston.
Irreversible Process
A reversible process is one which can not be retraced in
pressure on

This is the ex
I
(nil-
pre ss ion
Q2

for
Q.I
e
I
of heat engine .
J
LTR T2

exactly reverse order, ermodynamics

without producing any change in the surroundings. an d exp lain Sec o
Q.11 State
Explanation
All changes which occur suddenly or which involve
friction or dissipation of
m Th er mo dynamics
energy through conduction, convection and radiation are Second w La of
irreversible. for wo rkin g of he at engine,
Examples According to Lord Kelvin' s statement
wh ich co nv ert s all the he at ab so rb ed
It is impossible to make a heat engine
0) Explosion is an example of highly irreversible process . rej ec tin g any he at to sin k
CM) Work done against friction from a hot reservoir into work without
OR
.
Q 10 Write a note on Heat Engine ? There is no perfect heat engine
Exoir? nation
the heat source at
Heat Engine
Htal engine It a device which converts heal energy Into mechanical work
Introduction
Do Yon Know /

SSSTSSSTBSSS, S:
which the substance eventually returns to Its
Inttrnil energy Is zero AU 0
Hsnce, according to First lew of thermodynamics, the rk dont |
.
-. - - - -
The earliest hett engine wes the steam engine It was developed on the feet that
when water Is boiled In e vessel covered with « lid, the steam Inside trios to push AU + W
Q Q Qi Qil
steem engine . .
the lid off, showing the eblllty to do work This observetlon helped to develop n therefore 0.1 - Q o+ ,
W tv W Qi Q
*
end

-
OR
Qi - Qa W
Conduction
A heet engine consists of;
w a o, -
ther m od yn em lci two bodies at different
•
hot reservoir or source which cen supply heet it high temperature of co••
nd law of
Int o wo rk .
e cold reservoir or sink Into which heet Is rejected at a
, ,° he at
/f r th$ conversion ofenergy It conttlm cennot b# mido

.
lower mn
* Ha
.
temperature
working substance Is needed which
can absorb hunt a from source,
"* ngl hoat r #
i0 p«
rfo rrn V
it rvo r no mattar how much
* 'H nci for th# wo rkin g of hu t
ttm
#ng
pa
ln#
rat
th
ura
# r#
to
mu
wh
it
ich
bo a
haot

zsssi w
* • «
l0Urc
*
»* of h# t
. ** , *•
t# #r#
mp tur a an d lin k
•
at low
# which co ntt lm a

Working “ h iJcp j
* J^ 1 Ul t: trui for
irnoum of# boat energy but cannot
oc aa m an
ba
d ou
co
r
nv
atm
#rta
oip
d
ha
Into
r
uia ful m ee bi nleel
A hoat angln# li mad# cyclic to provide
• .
contlnuoui aupply of work Working
iub»t #nc # abiorbi haat Q, from lourca, conv #rti voma of It Into work W V
#
*p # nil on and roja cti
.
th# r #it h«it Qj u old r #i#rvolr or link
400
Chapter 11 [Hcat Sc Tt ,
Intei'estyig Information
& atmosphere during one cycle equals to the area enclosed by the
inability utilize the heat contents of oceans
The reason for our to
pV d » agrflrn -
lower than anyone of the two.
ib that there is no reservoir at a temperature
net heat AQ absorbed in one cycle.
Note
of a motor car extract heat from the burning fuel
In practice, the petrol engine
,
and converts
rest to
a fraction
atmosphere.
of this energy to mechanical energy or work & expels the thermodynamics
AQ - AU + W _ „(1)
40 /0 available heat equation we get
Petiol engine converts roughly 25% & diesel engine 35% value of AQand AU in
Putting
energy into work. W
Q, - Cb = 0 +

w= Q » - QJ
Q.12 What is Carnot' s Engine ? Explain its working and calculate its efficiency. heat engi
of
Also state Carnot' s theorem. According lo Kvr> n
I !t« 2 rxi Lwr yr irwrn
. „_ ( eta )
n
Output (
r ^
•

rv i rcitctt Nv* a %Ui ,

- * *
H it rtjn J KMC <jt a single
*
cannot be convert vftrtfy
A waterfall analogy
heat engine .
for

Carnot's Engine * ^
A Carnot

He showed
heat engine is a hypothetical engine that operates on the
reversible Carnot cycle. Sadi Carnot in 1824 proposed this ideal engine using only
isothermal and adiabatic process.
that a heat engine operating in an ideal reversible cycle between two
jars
heat i* inn -
to *- :
running » heat engine
. »
the link •«

neat reservoirs at different temperatures would be the most efficient engine. out to be
compression turns
or

.*
Principle isothermal expansion

works on the same principle as that of cyclic heat engine t takes

The energy transfer
jroportional to Kelvin temperature
in an iso
,
reT, 3n<tt reSPr-
c ve y ,
Carnot 's
neat from
engine
not body, convert a part of it into work and reject the remaining part
* G. 0, are proportional to
Kelvin temper "
to cold bed / Qi
Working
Hence
T1 . Q
i Carnot cycle using an, ideal gas as a wor < * rg substance is s' owr PV - ( 2) becomes
t corsets v following four steps 1
1. tsotherr^ai expansion
r> t gas s aflowtd *0 eroartd iorherr , ai / at temperature- . aosoro ' ? f.. 1
f;
usually taken in percent
-
2.
« ar Cn ' v
A<flabtr;c
' * cr ' 9S4 r j c r '* ? pryjjj s '«preser:ed bycu've Ai.
*
r'*
( l H »%
' fiTA Aff ffiner ,' / ,l /
*
- -
'

rxoard ad a^a ICJi 1 a " t; •e '- peratyr #

f
* s
s s ' * a*
^ d
•< j % s
-
*ed jy $C Son
* .
fif hot & co
'
yi*
• a t vy“ ywv<v 00 thrC
.'.*"
* fbe
1
gat r -
rage s so vesstd $orfc #r ~ ar;y at
*
" , / ’if .; r AffXA r
,
depend *
rijltijr» of d «
. •uixtanci
lht Ml /
er - ta * V, o* e - vd " - e / sci(4 s ^
STJTSTH H V> « **

. -. "
r j . .

.
r . jtt t* ' , the
. *<*> . „.-
.
4 0
* 11 hy »»« *
• '
* ga v s
’’ ad atsi 4# , 4 wf v. H * 444 » "
« r„, of h««l* rigm
*>* "* 47 , jfevrAvt
*
/ •< ( >
*
a
-
4' y +i+' s>i y
* * ' , \ .* * ''
*
' 4 IOCKH
b I
* ' oW r v W'
*
l >urW
f 4 a
*
• '
/f K jfrf O
'
S' « # %
‘ I
\ er * .< - , ,r '
u
-
Mi :*
xv

A#
f
*
K
- tr &
*40
4 W ’S
wv' - r # \T K m , 4
-
*v •
'* * V '
 402

Carnot's Theorem Do You

Know ?
Statement
A'o heat engine can be more efficient than a Carnot engine operating Heat out
between
the same two temperatures . is used to Since this scale is
Extended statement o f wo rki ng su bs tan ce . So it can be applied at very low temperature
All Carnot’ s engines operating between the same two temperatures ;dePen
de nt .
have the resistance the rm om ete r an d gas thermometer are based
same efficiency, irrespective of the nature of working substance Rn ftaerato, Platinodi
. ’
Work ynam I sc
ica ale of temperature .
Note tlierifl
T = 273.16

^ ( For platinum resistance thermometer )

-
All real heat engines are less efficient than Carnot engine
due to friction & heat
losses.
m
Q.13 T = 273.16 ~ ( For gas thermometer )
Describe the thermo-dynamical temperature scale. Low l mp«»rnturB
* compartintni
A rufngnmlof Irm lors , oms
^ hoa l f
ow -lomocnaiuto
com
h hof -icmpwjitvjto partment t0
'
T ilTn the working of petrol engine and diesel engine.
Thermodynamical Scale of Temperature «1 boot engtno
surroundings
with thn holp of oxtemni
woi . It it
*
operating in roverw
Q.U
^
A temperature scale is defined by using
thermometric property of certain
working substance . If the working substance is not
pure then its thermometry
o«Tk»r
m
property Is changed and reading of temperature
measuring instrument becomes A heat engine takes heat Petrol Engine
from a source, converts a Although different en gin es ma y differ in the ir co ns tru cti on tec hn ology bu t they
unreliable.
pan of it into work and
Thermodynamic scale of temperature is Independent ire based on the principle of a Carnot cycle.
of nature of working rejects the remaining pan to
substance. the sink. But a refrigerator Construction
takes heat from a cold body
According to this scale, the ratio Q with the help of external Petrol engine consists of pistons, crankshaft , sparking plug and valves. It is shown
is equal to the ratio of temperature of
Qj work and rejects the hcaL so n Figure.
source and sink . hot body. Thus a refrigerator
works in reverse order of Working
So, Q, T heat engine Atypical four stroke petrol engine also undergoes four successive processes in
= (A )
tach cycle.
Thermodynamic scale of temperature is defined by choo
sing 27316 K as the 1Intake stroke
absolute temperature of triple point of water as one fixed point
(upper fixed Recycle starts on the intake str
point ) and absolute zero as the other ( lower fixed
Kelvin
point ) .
CM
For Your Information

thermomr irr
*^atmosphere pre
oke in which P
. .
mixture is drawn through an inlet valve nto the cy jn(jer from the carburetor
ssure .
bulb
1 1
One Kelvin is defined as of the thermodynamic temperature of the impression Stroke
273.16 i the c
triple point of water. mpression stroke, the inlet valve is closed and the mixture
is
°
cornPassed
Triple Point adiabatically by inward movement of the piston.
i - Poty
Triple point of water is the temperature at which water, ice On
and water vapours a rap id inc rease in
mixture causing
are in equilibrium state which is obtained at particular tem
pressure .
perature and *SS
,# e ^ temperrat
ur -
Plsl n to
0
^
Ure* The burning mixture
> ^res
8 Spar (
expa
nds ad iab
de
ati
live
ca
rs
lly
po we
an
r
d
to
for ces

° m 0utward- This is the stroke which

Let
a = the heat absorbed or rejected by the system at unknown temperature T. A triple- po 11
*
^ 3ft to dor °
ks h Ve

•sr<
Q, = the heat absorbed or rejected by the system at temperature of triple point
,
of water .
temperate
t>een
. ^ £
constant - voW *
*
t NU

tc
* f0 J -"
6s ^ 0 6
^ ve
out et va s op en
^s. Th
* e ga se s
ward fv!ost motorbikes have one cylinder engine but
are ex
ca
pe
rs
lle d & piston
usually have
Then, according to Carnot cycle
 404 XI (Subjective)
Chapter 11 flleai
* Thermod sPHVSlCS -

Efficiency ,
The actual efficiency of tuned engine is not more than 25 to 30% because of heat , of increase
e
of Entropy

& friction losses. Cylinder block

SD»> rk plug
valv« • VAlvr
- of entropy of HTR =
0
—
Decrease .
The jel engine on this aircraft
0 converts thermal energy to

Increase o f entropy of LTR - — T: work, but the visible exhaust

V clearly shows that a
considerable amount of
Net chang e in entropy = — -— = positive thermal energy is lost as
waste heat.

of net chan ge of en tropy is + ve or we can say that net EXPLANATION:

sign
I AST, > T 2 SO the
incre ased . The remaining part of thermal
syste m is
I entropy of the natur al proce ss
energy is rejected to the sink,
(i.e. according to second law of
Exhaust
there is net incre ase of entrop y due to a
This proves that
big end crankshaft Flywheel from higher to lowe r temp eratu re ). This is also calle d anoth er thermodynamics.
Diesel Engine flow of heat
therm odyn amic .
of s
No spark plug is needed in the diesel engine. Diesel is sprayed into cylinder at statement of second law
Ther mod ynam ics in term s of Entropy
maximum compression. Because air is at high temperature after compression Second Law of that the
natu ral proce ss , it will go lit
L the direc tion Do You Know ?
the, fuel mixture ignites on contact with air in cylinder & pushes the piston If a system under goes n
outward. entropy of system plus the environment incre ases . Approximate •fl etonctox
'
body to a cold body to
vxrWvjx davtca
* -
flows from a hot E«e tone
Efficiency: For example, an irreversible heat D*vic » CM
the entrop y is incre ased . 70-9«
increases the disorder . So wc can say that
incre ased 50-03
The efficiency of diesel engine is about 35% to 40%.
Q.15 Define and explain the term entropy.
Addition of heat increases the disorder; hence the
Entropy as Unavailability of Mechanical Work (i.e
entrop

., Degr
y is
adati
also
on of .*
Eto^
o
.
lrir
y< > i
nwor
t «
Domestic fias
« y
furnace
90
70-85
72

vi1.’
battery

ener„
Sloraoe
'
)
°'
ure , so the avera ge K .E of
.- “
Entropy
Let US Con 'H
molecules ink 1
*° f differ
° ent
n lg1er temPerature water is greater
,
temP era
than lowe r ‘temp erature . The
be
sw
EE
>

TS T JS
Entropy is state variable of thermodynamically system. It was introduced bv two water
^ ° ^ "
Sink f 3 engl e
’
wWc h C0 U d
'
Noe -
39

"
betweeTrh;
^ T“
95
Rudolph Claudius in 1856 .This gives quantitative basis or mathematical formula
them and mechanical work can
be obta ined . ** ** *30
for second law of thermodynamics. “ Crated,
° rod then heat starts fo
But if
^ tanl<S 30 ronnected with a condu cting
.
.- 2000

^
fl wfrom ther mal equi libriu m is reac hed > 20
The physical significance of entropy is that it is a measure of disorder of
° ho h y towards cold body until
molecules of a system. Change in entropy is denoted hy AS S n
°° , °^
tfechan•Ca Wor s done due to the absence of heat
engin e, whic h resu lts GW "

2
*
*°** *** -
^
12 16

If AO is the Quantity of heat absorbed hy the system at temperature T. Then

. * ^'
UnaVailfl 5 j|j 0 mecbaniral work. Hence, increase
| in entrop y mea ns (he Vterc*“^
s ^
fener&'
•
,
3

change in entropy ( sta» e variable ) of the system is,

, of the unive rse w,n - ^
Accord *

Principle of increase of entrop y, the entrop y

' hear
AS * —T^ ( for reversible process ) lncreases af ? mec hani cal work from heat . It wou ld be calle d

' ust like internal energyand potential energy it is change in entropy which is ^« th^ orp
lnS JP
,f therm al energy.
, H atrJ °
, °ftUniverse
^
more important than its absolute value . w»H
. ev ervtbm g
Sigh Convention
The change in entropy is positive (means t.ha:
ntropy mcre ^ scs ) when heat is
I^
^
n
at
o
° Py of universe will reac h at maxi
same t ernpGrature and there will be no way to
mum value
conv ert heat ^ usef
to ul

added to a system. *odcand it ls caHed heat death.

•

Change of entropy is negative ( means that

entrop decreases ) when heat is
taken out of this system.
Unit
The Si unit of change of entropy or enfc - oy
is joule/ Kelvin ( JK ’)

, 4«
Q.16 Describe environmental crisis as entropy crisis.

ilOf,
Environmental Crisis As Entropy Crisis
Diesel fuei
siov^tybeca
• ,'v»Pontt

According to 2nd law of thermodynamics, every real process causes to incr it contains
ease
the disorder or entropy of the universe. Any increase in the disorder of a system ^'toon itomj n , ffiore

produces and even greater increase in the disorder of the environment, than gasoline does
which is
typically C9H20.
( gasoline ,
called "environmental crisis. while desei
con sta nt / gas k
The disorder producing activities due to all industries may result a '* typ«caHy C 14H
30) goltx^ 30 ' S
N?
increases of disorder which affect the overall life support system.
great It takes lessttfjnjQg
to criatt 0nstant
per mo lec ule
£
.
gay __
diesel fuel Which IS
Our mechanical energy producing processes are not efficient. For exam
ple petrol
Why U|#(
* J Temperature of T =. —
< - mv > *

*
to be cheaper than
engine has its efficiency about 30% and diesel engine' s about
40%. Hence most
Qa»oltn« l 3K 2
Diesel fuel has
of energy is transferred into the environment in form of heat, which cau W = PAV
ses to drniiry than gasokne Work done
increase the entropy of it.
•*•' »9«. t gallon (3 8 L)
4
On
First law of y Q=AU+W Q = (Ua - U,) + W
The second law of thermodynamics impose limit on the efficiency of
energy produces by engines, which says that thermal pollution
mechanical
is an inevitable
-
a escI fuel contam
thermodynamic
Q =W
approximately 155 106 >oula
* Isothermal pr cess
°
result of second law of thermodynamics. Due to the thermal pollution
in ( 147.000 BTU). white 1 gallon * W =-AU ( expansion) -W = AU ( compression )
environment, temperature change may occur . But a small change
of
Adiabatic process
in gasotne 9
environment may serious effects on metabolic rate in plants and anim
als. This 132x 106 joules ( 125.000 BTU)
contain
* Relation between and Cp C C R =
? CV*
may disturb ecological balance. Thts. comtyned wth tha
and Cv
The imperative from thermodynamics is that whenever you do any mproved efficiency of desei Effidency of heat engin
thing. you
,

should be sure about its present and future impact on your environmen . engines , explains why dese 1

t This is
an ecological imperative that we must keep in view now if we are to eng nes get better mileage tta'
Efficiency of carnot' s
prevent a
strong degradation of life on our beautiful but fragile earth. equivalent gasolme engines
 «04 Xi (Subjective)
pHySlCS - 409
The

Multiple Choice Questions (3)

Only kin etic
and par tly potent ial
( b)
(d )
Only potential
partly kin etic None of these
flow of heat between two bodies is determined by:
-
fW r nn.Vr mm.ru m v cjurk am/ cment art given below. Tick
'

the correct » 0> fl* directio of

n
internal energy b) Kinetic energy
ene rgy w •spheric pressure
1. ~>e a ««rage soeed
Zero
0*' • - —
'e gas o- ecu es in a co~ * ainer is: (C
Which
Total
0f the
foll ow ing is a bes t con tain er for gas during itic process?
(b ) 273 1 ( bj TheSjos flask
Wood vessel
'CO
• d nfir, te
(a ) ( <$) -
GlaSs vessel
-
e -nea* CE. 0 a gas s ze o at 10 -

^
* “
' *

Wb lowing pro ces s, the sys tem aiw ays return to orig ina l ther mod yna mic stat e?
or the
- oX ( b; -273 C *
a in wh
K
ich i
"
l«>b3ric
|& ) Adiabatic
: VO < (a ) i (d ) isothermal
b
( ri)
* x>°C
3. -
3as c^ec.kes exerts pressure or the w Is of
* container because they:
(c) Cyclic
engine has
of 50% when its sink tempera ture is at 27°C The tem pera ture of

s ii A carnot
Collide with o r e another source is:
: Cai ce •- > (b) 32/ C
•
'd Hone of these M
- - «5 )
f

4. * s creased r point 273 C

'

of ice: 373sC
- (c)
cepo int
i ,and stea m poin t. Its effic ienc y wi be: »
fb ) frtcreases Acamrt engine works between
-- "
^ ' c ar • /d ) Uocte of These (a ) 85.42%
(b 71.23% >
zn mr&*
a
:r
C'/s?ar
- esrper* v-e.
'

-
? z pressure
-
s a sedtfcer ft* vo* um*
;i
Wf
if the
53
tem
%
per
-^
ature of sin k is absolute ze r,
( di 26.81%
efficiency of heat eng ine sho uld be:

^
V

'SV
Id) fioub d (a; .00%
- ^ id ) infinity
f

* tecc
-
« -
rrr Vr' ’SS1 . e*
-- *r

fb #
^PA^
xe
gasst
1
K o
/rtven the tem per atur e dif fer enc e bet we en source a nd Sin k Inc rea ses, the efficiency •*"
of heat « «

esc v . e -- ' ec "'/* c. ' i'/ e c»f •'

ece
wll:
(& J Decrease
' rsr> Ar - (a )
(c)
Increase
s not effected
)
sub stance
. up tfor v ng
tCi Veers' v.
S'
(dj > 3 / increase /
/ decrea te d * P* nd 0
"
»
-
•

4 / ' vlo «r - ? V
*

V fir c«
<
The internal energy of » n W *** 8
"
(b) Remaps constant
^ •

fa , Keeps ©rt Changing

r
-- VaC
te) Zero
ioneoftrese ‘
£ w • ,
'4
) r V tfif c
^ < Al &
J
,/ 7. « S. d \.
9 b 10*
. ^ 2. b 4. • 5d . U, a \ **• » 20. b
<X V /
' ' 7/ ' /
)< f
14 . i 111 16 .b 17 . d
f# 12. a 13« »
>S*
^ =
* rj * >i
V/ -
yf /
V '
^ ‘
‘‘I sf .'S> « / C /
of 4 >
>"
...
A.
,4f, «r ewtnW
^

-—
rt

fC V^/ir *
it , »/ ' *’ y

te.
fe

'' >
^
IA r

r n -
 410 - XI (Subjective) 411
Chapter 11 [Hear
* Th IT ^ ou £
Short Questions of Exercise t t
Q.11.1 Why the average velocity of the molecules in a gas container is zero but
the ave|,age
velocities is not zero? of the
squareo| —t («
V
V —* V —>
( Fsd 2005, Rwp 2006,
.
D.G Kh an 2
06, Lhr Flfl 1 13 )
F
*
M 1316) F10.11.1Kc )
Ans.
.

Reason ° 201
Average velocity of the molecules inte rnal ener gy of the syste m is zero in all cases
The change in
The motion of gas molecules is random . So if a molecule is moving
in one direction another
Aftf - Reason
moving in opposite direction. Thus the vector sum of these velocitie will be the returns to its initia l state after each cycle. Henc e, the
s is zero. all the pro cesses are cyclic. So syste m

- - As
energy of the system does not change.

^ o
.e
i
M internal
Average of the square of velocities pres sure than spec ific heat at cons tant volum e . Why ?

As the square of negative velocity is positive , so the average of

,,
Q 5 specific
heat of a gas at cons tant is grea ter
(Mtn 2003, Lhr 2003, Rwp 2004, D.G.khan 2005 .
square of velocities is not equa
l to zero. Fsd 2008, Bwp 2007 2008, Mir Pur 2009, Lhr 2010- 2011)
-
i.e
v 2
+ (-v) 2
0
2 * Ans . Reason
When gas is heated at cons tant pres sure then ;
Q.11.2 Why does the pressure of gas in a car tyre increase when it is (i) a part of heat is used to do work on piston
driven trough some distance? temp eratu throu gh 1K
is used to incre ase the re
( Mir Pur 2004- 2009, Mtn 2006, Bwp 2007-2008, Fsd 2008, (ii) rest of heat
Grw 2009- 2011)
heat abso rbed is used to increase temperature
Ans. Reason When gas is heated at constant volu me then all the
This is due to the work done against friction between road and tyre. through 1K. spec ific heat at constant
onst pres sure is grea ter than mola r
This work done appears as heat That is why the molar specific heat at c ant
This heat is absorbed by the gas molecule. volume. (Cp > Cy) . transferred to or from the syst em but the
0,11.6 Give an example of a process In whi ch no heat Is

.
It Increases the average kinetic energy of molecules.
temperature of the syst«m changes.
.
As pressure P oc <K ,E > ,so pressure of gas is increased
(Grw 1009» 1009)

. „
„„„no heatMn ims«» ““ '“ •»
“ * S
.
Q 11.3 A system undergoes from state P,V, to state P, as shown In fig. What will be the change In Internal
energy?
Va * changes .
.
Q B At/ + ^
Ans The change In Internal energy of the system Is taro . For adiabatic process 0

•
Reason
It Is clear from figure that temperature of system Is constant
It means that Internal energy Is also constant as It depends upon
Pi

t
Mt\

Con ®l«n1
ftrnpofiUtf
So O
- ACZ + W'
( adiabatic
compres
exp
sion
ans
)
ion )
* At/ -W ( adiabatic
temperature
P
(M
So
Or
energy Is converted Into hea t ener gy .
So; there will be no change In Internal energy Pf
1
4! ^
Samples
doing so whole mechinlcel

.
Q 114 Verletlon of volume by pressure Is given In .
FIR
A to A. what will be the change In Internal ene
,
11.13. ! * ti tin # ong
rgy?
•• ^ ABCDA, < .* * "* ’
* Bunturn flf ilr
cioud ffnatipn th itmo|ph
^ * * "
1kurl
**
rt
*
vri
[h which sound WIVI Is pissing,

.. »
.*
»
^
(O O khan Is It pouibli to eon
wort Inti rnil inir y W
*** *** .
»««» Hiloowool. v two.
 412

Ans. Yes , it is possible to convert internal energy into mechanical energ

y
Example en tropY of a sYstem increases or decreases due to
Does friction?
When a gas is allowed to expand adiabatically, the gas does work (Mtn 2004-2005,Bwp
2006,D.G.Khan 2006, Sgd 2005, Ihr
on the 2006- 200«, Rwp 2008)
energy, due to which its internal energy decreases i.e W ,\ U surrounding by the entropy of the system increases due to friction.
= , usingil y 5
%n Hfli-
Gases cam be liquefied by this process .
* Reason
Q.11.8 Is it possible to construct a heat engine that will not Since T
expel heat into the
atmosphere ? so me me ch an ical energy is converted into heat (i.e heat is added up into
Due to fri ct io n , the system )
Ans. ISgd 2004, Mtn of 5 stem
No , it is not possible . the ent rop y
Reason
2004, Gr
* 200S| which inc re as es *
If it is possible , then it w , ll be violation of second low Gi ve an example of a natural process that Involves an increase in entropy?
of thermodynamics
winch st ties Q. -
1 1 13 (Sgd 2005, Grw 2005, Lhr 2006, Bwp 2006, Ihr 2009,Grw2011)
possible to construct a heat engine that will
change on the working substance ,
not expel heat into atmosphere
with our i - , v|r
' ga
Snt
ny ' '' " tha t ent rop y is me as ur ed by following equation.
' Ans. We kn ow
AQ
AS = T
Q.11.9 A thermos flask containing milk, as a system
is shaken rapidly. Does the temperature of milk
rise? Examples
Ans . { Lhr 2005, Fsd 200S, surrounding and
Yes , the temperature of the milk rises . Mir Pur 2009) in ent rop y . Ice ab so rbs the he at fro m its
The melting of ice involves the inc rea se
Reason . (i. e fro m so lid int o liquid ). Th us, entropy increases.
changes its state
Inv the of the sys tem inc rea ses .
All natural processes in which friction is olved
We know that , ent rop y

T «r < K . E >
When we rapidly shake the thermos flask we do
some work on it, this work done increases the K.E :: Q.11.1A An adiabatic change is the one in which
(b ) No ch ange of tem pe rat ure tak es pla ce ,
molecules of milk . Hence, the temperature of milk (a) No heat is added to or tak en ou t of a sys tem .
rises . .
(d) Pressure an d volum e remain s co ns tan t
Boyle' s law is applicable.
(c)
Q.11.10 What happens to the temperature of the
room, when an air conditioner is left running on a table I Ans. (a) No heat is added to or taken out of a system
the middle of the room?
. Q 11.15 Which one of the following process is irreversible?
( Bwp 2003, Fsd 2005, Mir Pur 2006- 2009, Lhr 2005 - 2006- 2009 , Grw 20101 (a ) Slow compressions of an elastic spring.
Ans. The temperature of the room will not decreas ve ss el
e even it increases slightly . I (b ) Slow evaporation of a substance in an iso lat ed .
Reason (d) A ch em ica l ex plo sio n .
(c) Slow compression of a ga s.
As air conditioner is running at th middle of room
it absorbs as well as rejects heat in the same r00
J
^ is irreversible.
Ans. (d) A ch em ica l ex plo sio n
the same rote . So temperature of the room
remains unchanged . But due to working of compre Q.11.16 An ideal reversibl heat engine has .
somee heat is produced due to friction. So temperature of e eff iciency
the room will increase sli gh tly. (b ) hig he st ,

(a ) 100% efficiency.
wo rki ng su bs tan ce .
Q.ll.ll Can the mechanical energy be conv (c ) an efficiency which de pe nd s on th e na tur e of
ex am ple -
erted completely Into heat energy ? If so give an i

- 20 06) ( d ) 20 06 ) ,
Ans. yes, it can be converted complet
( Mtn 2005, Grw L 20. 05 no ne of them.
Ans (b) highe effici. (Rwp 2004 S«d 2005 .
, fsd 2005, M n

ely into heat energy . st ency.

Reason
j
During isothermal compression work
done 'W ' on the system is converted into heat Q •
Q =AU +W
For isothermal process A U = 0
So co mp re ss ion all the
-Q = 0+ ( W ) - Ex am ple : Du rin g slo w
Q =W heat rej ec ted is us ed as
Or W =Q
So by doing so whole mech
anical energy is cor erted into heat energy.
r
414 Chapter 11 flj XI (Subjective)
£2iAThe£ <
2 Kjy
,
s PHYSICS 415
-
Solved Examples
3
x
32 10
m 6.022 xlO 23
W i l l Thus
N hat is the average translational Kinetic energy' of 32
Given Data.
' molecules in a gas at
temperature 27C
m 6.022 xlO 26
°? ~ 26
5.31 x 10 kg
Temperature = T = 27C° m
= 27 + 273 = 300 K in equ . ( 1 ) , we gel
putting values
To f ind .
<\b> =
Average translational kinetic energy = < K . E> < II ylttflfrX
=^
Calculation. 1130.22- x 103
<v > =
2
Where 5.31
A5 T= —3 K <K . E > 2> 212.84 x 10
< =
v *
2
Or < K . F .> = 3 A| <v > = 212840
'
KT
2 2
< v > = 461 ms
' 1

Where K = Boltzman constant = 1.38 x 10 23JK - I “

Or rm* =
Thus <K .E > *| X 1.38 X 10
“ X 300
'

of cross sectional -
area 0.10 m 2
. The pressure of

-
< K . E.> - x 1.38 x 10 x 3 x 102 ~1J
A gai
the gas
is enclosed
is
In
maintained
a container
at 8000
fitted
Nm
.
\
with
When
"
a piston
heat is slowly
the
transferred
system
, the
during
piston
the
is
expansion
pushed
, what
up
is

SEEfBEBDE
<K.E >
2
- 6.2 I
Find the average speed of oxygen molecule in
x 10 ~31 jj throu ';! a distance
the change In Internal
Given Data .
of 4.0 cm
energy
If
of
42
the
J heat
system
is
?
transferred to

. . 0.10 m
Given Data . the air at S T. P -
Cross erectional area of the piston •
2
A "

-
‘
Pressure of the gas P •8000 Nm
At ST. P. , wc have

-- - -
Temperature T 0°C 0 + 273 273 K
Pressure * P = 1.01 x 103 Nm 2
Distance moved by the piston
Heat supplied to the system Q * 42J
To Find.
Ay 4.0 cm “ 4 x 10 m

-
'

To Find.
Change in internal energy AU * ?
Average speed of oxygen molecules <v > ?
Calculation. - - Calculation.
As we know that
As T« work done by the gas “ W •PAV
- -
As AV AAy

-—
So W PAAy
Or <v*>

- m
Where k 1.38 x 10 ^ JK 1 *
(1 )
Putting values, we get
-
W 8000
W * 32J
x 0.10 x 4 x 10
- 2

To find mass m, of one molecule of oxygen

Or
-
m Molecular miss of oxygen
, we use the formula

Avogadro vnumher
Now A PPlying first law of thermodynamics

Or
o -- -
AU + W
AU Q W
m
-— M
~
_10
V/hCr
Crc.
PUf ,,n ** change in internal energy

Where
NA
Molecular mass of oxygen m 32g •32 a
.
)
kg
8 values, we get
AU -
42
u»
32 -
Tojl
^
and NA •Avogadro’i nurr oer •6.022 x 10 '

i
V
_ xi (Subjective)
416

QQESnZllEI
.
Chapter 11 rHea A T|
|

Exercise Problems
417

The turbine in a steam power plant takes steam from a boiler at

427°C and
.
temperature reservoir at 77°C What is the maximum possible
efficiency? exhausts into
i
ave rage spe ed of nitrogen molecules in air under standard conditions
Given Data . * lo* te the of pressure and
£stima
Temperature of hot body ( boiler ) = Tj = 427C° = 427 + 273 = 700 K
Temperature of cold body ( reservoir) = T2 = 77C° = 77 + 273 = 350
' Ucrature -
V •
K sta con diti ons
To Find. tinder nda rd
Efficiency = r| = ? Temperature = T = 0 °C = 0 + 273 = 273 /r
Calculation .
Pressure » P latm -
. 1.01 x 105 Pa
As

Putting values, we get

n =0 - £11
-)
foM 5 *

Average speed of nitro gen mo lecu les = <v > »7

350 Cilcutation:
*1 = 0 - ZTT
/1
Using the formula

-—
X
) /

700 2 < 1i mv ,3 >

1 T
3k 2 "
-
n =d - j )
3 kT« < mvJ >
i , 3kT
o = - = 0.5 <V >= (i )
m
%n = 0.5 x 100 con stan t = 1.38 x 10 ’ 23
JK - i
Where k = Boltzman ty is
I%r) ( )
= 50°/<J mo
Now the mass of one lecules of nitro gen
Molar mass
BfflBTTTE m=
Avogadro number
Calculate the entropy change when 1.0kg icc at 0 'C
melts into water at 0nC. Latent heat of »ion _ _
of icc Lf = 3.36 x l O ' J kg
Given Data.
- -
Mass of icc * m 1.0 kg
Temperature * T * 0°C 273 K
“
'

3 * l .
m=

38 *
i!i =
6.02 0

10
xl
2M
6.02 1023
u
Putting values in eqution (1 ), we 8el
23 x
273 ‘
M 65

^
0
*
. K| 0 “ kg

2
<v > =
Latent heat of fusion of icc * Lr = 3.36 x 105Jkg 4.65 x 10 “
To Find. 1.13022 x 1020
<v 2 > =
Change in entropy =* AS = ? 4.65 x 1026
Calculation . <v > = 2.43058x 10'
2

Change in entropy is given by v mu = V< v

*
3
> * 493 ms 11
i
cert ain
use s at a

Here
AS
— T 'U Show that rati
3onndCmpCnitUrC
o of the root mean
< ual t0 ,
thC 8quarc
different K

AQ Heat added to icc

C
'*
mLf
So

Putting values, wc get

AS
- mLf
T
CMc^Ut|0n:
V rms
i

3 rms
=?

x 3 , 36 x 10 * Using the formula

AS - L°

Or
AS
- 273
0.01230 x 10* JK. »

n \
 For first gas
1
T= —3k < —2 m v \ > . d)
1 or second gas

T= —3k < —2 m v / > .

•
(2)

Dividing equation ( i ) by ( ii )
2 odynamic system undergoes a process in which its internal energy decreases by 300,1. H a t
T — <—
, 3k 2
1
m1 1 >
v,. 2
*" Hciunc time 11 0 J of w or k 1» d y t. ®
^ ^
T
— —
3k 2
3
<m , , >
v
< m , v , 2
>
da
Given *t 1’ .
Decrease
Work done
in in
on
tern
th e
al
sy
en er
ste m
gy
= W
-A U
12
= 300 J
0
5« J
«

<m 2 v > , Tollndi j lent lost by the system

J,
< >5m
V '
,C ltul l0nl
<v )* > . m , " According to first la
Qs U+ W
w of th er m odynamics
v J
< , >
< vi >
^
. Putting the values , w gel

LLVL .ISLL Qs =* 300 120 -

Vlr„, |Q -
» 42QJ

This is the required proof . Negative sign shows the lost of heat.
11.3. A sample of gas is compressed to one half of Its In
itial volume at constant pressure of 1.25 x 10*
Nm \ During the compression , 100 J of work is done on the gas. Determ the final volume of the
*

ine
.
11.3 A carnot engine utilize* an ideal gas. Th
127°C. Find the eff ici ency of th e engin e. Al so
»
fin d
... is 227 ° C an d th e si nk
rC e an
te
d
m
he
pe
at
ra
re
tu
je
re \
ct ed
%

gas. to the sink when 10000 J of work is done .

Given data:
Given data:
Suppose initial volume of gas = V V 27 3 = 50 0 K
= Temperature of source =Tti = 227 ° C=227 + .

V _ T = 127 °C = 127 + 273 = 400K

Final volume of gas =V, - — Temperature of sink 2

Work done = W - 10000 J

Pressure =P = 1.25 x 10' Nm :
find:
To find :
= =
Work done W - 100 J
(i) Efficiency of Carnot engine n ?

Final volume of gas (ii ) Heal input = Q, -?

= Vf =? O2
Calculation: (hi ) Heat rejected to sink
As W = PAV Elation:
or w = P( Vf - v. ) © As wc know
W= P
( v
2
V
JI As V , =V and Vf = M
( V - 2V
w=p Putting the values , we get
2 « 122 xioo
.
f y^
- i 0O=* P
2 j
 5
- (Subjective )
» 421
XI
420 Chapter 11 fHeai JL
T||
T2
( ii) To find Qj
output work
n == 1 TM *

As efficiency =
input heat
W

Putting values, we get

n

20
"

lOOOO
100 Q,
Q,

_
”
0.268 =
100
—
Q .-
10000*100
20
T =
(
373.13
< K.
Q, =50000J
Q, » 5.0* 104 J Also
T,•Tj =100K
(iii ) To find Qj
As W = Q 1 - Q2
Or 373.13 T2 = 100
T2 =373.13 - 100
—
Or
Or
Putting values, we get
-
Ch Q r - W T, =273.13 K

Q2 = 50000 - 10000
02 = 40000 27° C claims to have
develops an e n g i n e, b C t W C C n 327 C and
°
fe = 4. 1 J
Q x Q 4
11,7 A mechanical engineer
correctly ? Explain .
efficieucy of 52 %. Does he claim
11.6 A reversible engine works between two temperatures whose difference is 100°C If it absorbs 746 J Chen d? la:
273-600 K
of heat from the source and rejects 546 J to the sink, calculate the temperature of the source and Temperature of source = =327 = C ° 327
Tl +
the sink. 273-300 K
Temperature of sink = T2 = 27 C° = 27 +
Given data:
Claimed efficiency = 52%
-
Temperature difference = T, T2 = 100Co = 100K To find:
Amount of heat absorbed = Q, = 746J
Actual efficiency = r}=?
Amount of heat rejected = Q2=546J ,
C l »UHon
Find data: ' :

Temperature of source = T, =? As
Temperature of sink = T2 =? T ,
Calculation: Putting values, we get
As „- - 4, i ~ 1~
300

Putting values, we get

Q ^ 600
1
m l~
n -— i-
546•
746
" l
2

^ *
2
= 0.5

-
746
*
Or n -
0.268 . (1) Ventage efficiency ^ 0.5 * 100

i
 422

" l - 50? ij
4
Chaptor 11 [ H
21* 1* *,. , PHYSICS XI (Subjective )

So the claim of 52 % efficiency is not correct . lution :

full
'11

To Find 7 /
1 1 .S. performs100 J of work and at the same time rejects 400 J 0 f| |(
A heat engine
resen olrs. NVhat is the efficiency of the engine? lCi cnc '
g> to
th c 0|,j
'
,
To Hud
%
n
-- n
o .5
A
5 0 % %V = 7 0%
-
V o .7
Ghen data :
work done W 100 J - - ,-
Heat rejected * Q 400J
Now

TT
"
T
Now
T
T
To Hndi

Calculation!
Efficiency •rj ?

A*
— ..W .
Q, Q J
«
tl

0.5 1
280
T
1.1*.
Putting values, w

-- 0 , 7* 1
Ti
Putting values, we get

-
280

- t
280
- 0.5
T/

—-
Q H' + f t « 1 280
r
* 9

Or Qi * 100 * 400
Q , S00J
J 280 . .
0n . 5
Ti
280 5 0 ,3
280 T,
Now

the nines
Htr
^
-Q *100 T,
T,
0.5
560 K
T/
T ,' »
- 280
0.3
93 3.33K
100
*4
500 —
xlOO Thus increase in temperature
Tl - T
1 = 933.3-560 = 373 K
4
:r = 0.2x100
T/ - Tl = 373K
% n = 20%
T/ - T. =373C °
11.9 A Carnot engine whose low temperature
reservoir is at 7 C has an efficiency of 50% It is dcs . ^ luo A steam engine has a boiler that operator at 450K. The heat change water to
«
steam,
'wh cbdnv«
to increase the efficiency to ” 0 %. BN how
manv degrees the t e m p e r a t u r e of t h e source be the pjston j e exhaust temperature of the outside a i r i s about 300 K. at maxi

•creased? ^
Gh « data: Given data:
of this steam engine?

Temperature of boiler (source ) T , 4 0K

_
.
1 espemre of lov resen. o n = T. =1C
-=
= 273 "
280 K
To Tind:
Temperature of outside air ( sink ) = T2 = 300K

.
efficiency =% r = 50%
Maximum =
efficiency * *1 ?
-
effioeacy = % ' = 70%
Calculation:
T# Fimd : 1
JjL
T;
. nc of sours* foe 50% efilcscocy T, =? 300
Temperature of source for "0% cfiicie y = T ? 450 rx
=
Then increase in temperstuve
-
T T *?

- . 5 ..
 -
aSrC ' f -

424 Chapter 11 jllvat

Ai)

f)
450
ISO ^ PHYSICS XI ( Subjective) 425

ip 0 , 33 Board Model paper

percentage cl Iideney ( ) , M loo ^ I ( 11». Class) Examination Session 2013-2014 and onward
Model Paper Physics Objective
nndlato Part -
lil - 33%| marks 17 Paper Code Time Allowed: 20 minutes
Tatal *

( A) (B ) (C) ( D)
'
QUESTIONS
Q.l.

. T i ? 1 J 7
K(jm Sec
.
11.11 336 J of energy Is required to inch 1 g of Icc at 0 C what is
the change In
entropy of 30 0 i. ThiTunU of pressure in bascT "
Kgm Sec Kgm Sec
Jfx 0
K jrn Sec
(

£F = 0 =o
at 0" C as it Is changed to Icc at 0° ( by a refrigerator
? R fHit# . The complete Equihbr u mjflMpdV jjfyjO
Given lulu ;
r 2
Implies that v 11= 0
-
(

Maximum Zero Minimum V, cos"

, Kid component
I lent of Atllon of Icc I f 336.1
* .
3 At highest point the vert

-
Mass of water m •30g of velocity of Projectile be
^.
< (i(
Linear

- - Energy Mass
Temperature T •0°C 273 K 4. Impulse has the s.»
' m * nmt •, th it of Force
Momentum
To find: Sun Moon Earth Mors
due gravitational
. to

- 5 The Tidal Energy is

Change in entropy A.V ? pull of the
A mi/ 1 /6 m / 1/8 rm/
The rotational K E. of a disc > s
Calculation; A mv
6. Inertia Radius of
Angular Angular
Since boat is transferred from the water to freeze it 7. Torque per unit Moment of Inertia is Gyration
into icc, therefore entropy of icc velocity Acceleration
denoted by negative sign decreases and ij Equivalent to
5.6 Km 11.2 Km 22. 4 Km 44.8 Km
8. Escape velocity on surface of earth is 11.2

-
1
sec' 1
sec* sec 1 '
sec
Change in entropy AS -~ -
km/ Sec 1. The escape velocity on the

1 lore
-
AQ heat energy token out of water
Thus
T

ml
mLr
Surface of another planet of same mass
as that of earth but of l/4 tlmes the
radius of earth is
The SI unit of flow rate of fluid is mJ sec ' 1
nrsec '1 2
m sec
' 2 3
M sec
1

AS x = x0 COS «X x = x0 sin' x = x0 cosJ

T For a spring mass system arranged x - xQ sin nX
aX
Putting values, we get horizontally . the instantaneous
aX

-
displacement Is 2A
30 * 336 A/4 A/ 2 A
AS - In the time required for the tuning fork to
273 make one complete vibration, :he wave
in air will travel a distance equal to
-
A S - 36.92JK -i
Velocity of sound is indepei of h Densil Pressure Medium

Two tuning forks of frequencies 40Hz and Zero r r '4'

243Hz respectively are sounded together,

THE END second is
the no. of beats produced md
In young' s Double slit experiment, the
position of Bright fringes are given by ~
AL
r ~ m~d
v

Rea! and
y„m = m —

Rea / and
Ad
L
r
- =
mT
Virtual and
Ld
-u
Y =

Virtual and
inverted
 m . v s , v

t
. >v - ! • i

426 ( Subjective ) 427

2. Write answers of any EIGHT questions. ( 8 x 2 = 16 )

Define dimension. Check the correctness of the equation v= f/. by the principle of Homogeneity
^^ l oardp PHYSICS
thrown with
XI

a speed of 30 m sec - 1 in a direction 309 above the horizontal . Determine the height to

..
•
{)
( i)
(u )
Briefly explain the two drawbacks to use the period of simple pendulum as a time standard.
Assess the total uncertainty in the final result of a timing experiment with the help of an
0 f H-
I1
*
A pall
Which
is
it rises
aregeo s
.
tationary orbits . Derive an express ion for orbital radius of a Geostationary orbit
3

vVhat 1+4
example. 6 j3 j
(rv ) Determine the dimensions of pressure and density .
is requir ed to accelerate
51
an electron ( m = 9.1 x 1CT kg ) from rest to a speed of 2 x10 msec
-i
’
Under what condition would a vector have components that are equal in magnitude . a force
( v) How large 5.0 cm
3
(£|
J distanc e of .
( vi) Justify the statement "A body cannot rotate about its centre of gravity under the action
of its o Wn through a ' s formula for speed of sound in air . How did Laplace correct it .
weight". the limitation of Newton
What is 1+4
( vii) If A . B = 0 , Can it be concluded that A and B are perpendicular to each other ? Suppo
rt your 7. (a) a place where g= 9.8 m sec
-2
frequen cy of vibratio n at
answer i»ij is 50cm long . What will be its
A simple pendulum
proof . 3
*
•

(bl \
(Viii) Why fog droplets appear to be suspended in air ?
and Magnifying power of a compo und microscope
(ix ) Discuss the sign of acceleration due to gravity for a cricket ball thrown upward, for the princip le , construction 1 + 2+ 2
its upward and Explain
do Wi 8.(3) ray diagram
motion. ^ - with the help of a
normally on a grating which has 2500 lines/ cm . comput e the wavele ngth of a spectra l line for
(x ) Can the velocity of an object reverse the direction when acceleration is constant ?
Justify with an exa A light is inciden t 3
( xi) It is advisable to fasten the seat belts during a fast drive . Why is it ? mple jb )
the deviat ion in 2 nd order is 15 ° T
2 + 3 = 5
which the efficienc y of a carnot heat engine .
( xii) Explain how would a bouncing ball behave in each of an elastic and inelastic Explain the carnot cycle and calcula te of lm sec
-1
. What should be the
collision with floor of room. 9.( a ) diamete r is 1 cm at a speed
through a hose whose interna l 3
3. Write answers of any EIGHT questions. ( 8 x 2 = 16 ) Water flows 1
<b| diameter of the nozzle if the water is to emerge at 21m sec .
"

(i) When a rocket enters the atmosphere , why does its nose cone become very hot ?
Where does this heater )
come from ? ^ SECTION III ( PRAC TICAL 4 x 2 = 8
( ii) State the work energy principle . Express it in equation. Note:* Give answers to any Four Questi ons . accurat ely .
measu re time of free fall
( iii) While calculating the Absolute Gravitational potential energy, why is the distance between 10.( a ) I
( ) How does the electr onic timer
cm by a vernier calliper having least count + 0.01
infinity and surfact the diamet er of cylinde r as 2.45
of earth is divided into very small steps. (II) - A student measu red and finds zero of the vernier scale lies to the
observ es a zero error in the instrum ent principal
cm. But later on he
scale faces any divisio n or the
( iv ) What is meant by moment of Inertia ? Give its significance. th divisio n of vernier
right of the zero of principal scale and
4
(v) How is artificial gravity created in an Artificial satellites . of diamete r of cylinde r . of
( vi ) scale . Find the correct value kg wt Includin g the hanger and resona nt length
Centripetal force and centrifugal reaction are equal in magnitude but opposite In direction. Why these forcesde is stretc hed with a load of 4
of the wire Is
( III) The wire of sonometer having frequen cy 512 Hz . If diamet er
not balance each other. tuning fork
wire is found to be 11cm by using a the same resonating length and same load .
( vii ) What happens to the period of simple pendulum if resona nt frequen cy of this wire for
doubled find the cm 100 cm 12 N 4 N 5 N
(a ) Its length Is doubled (Iv ) Find clockwise torque from diagram 0 .
10 cm 50 cm 70cm 90
M# ttr Rod
(b) Its suspended mass Is doubled .
-!
" •

( viii ) Show that in SHM, the acceleration Is zero when velocity is greatest and the velocity Is zero when l
acceleration is greatest ?
(lx ) Why can we not realize an Ideal simple pendulum . 4N 9N
(x) What features do longitudinal waves have in common with transverse waves .
angle of deviati on
12 N
vary with the angle of Incidence In case of prism .
( xi ) Why does sound travel faster in solids than in gases ? ( v) How does the the colour of light .
angle ofatranspa rent material varies with of Heat
(vl) critica l mech anica l equiva lent

.
( Xii ) Justify the statement "Velocity of sound In a gas is independent of pressure of the g a s ' Does the
perlmen tal determ ination of
of error during the ex
4. Write answers of any SIX questions. ( 6 x 2 = 12 ) ( Vii) What are the sources
by electrical metho d .
length by using the vlbr tlons In the
( I) Define coherent sources of light . How two light beams can be made coherent . atlons/ calcula tlons to prove the law of
young' 5 Design a table of observ
(li) How is the distance between Interference fringes is affected by the separation between the s
double shit experiment ?.
^ ( viii)
string of sonometer .
to show experim entally that time period of simple pen dulum is Indepen dent of
10.(b ) Write down the brief procedure
( Hi ) How would you distinguish between unpolarized light and plane polarized light .
amplitude . 3 OR
( iv ) Name and explain any two of major components of a fiber optic communication system . to determine
experim entally the focal length of a convex lens by displacement
( v) How the resolving power of a compound microscope can be increased . the Brief proced ure
( vi) What happens to the temperature of the room, when an air conditioner is left running on a table In the Write down
. of graph drawn below .
method on the basis
of the room. 10.(c) Answer the followin g Ouest lon
t0 fW 3 ter
( vii ) What is meant by tripple point of water . What is the value of Absolute temperature of tripple P °
( viii) Can the efficiency of a carnot engine be 100% ? Justify your answer with proof.
(ix ) Normal Human body temperature is 98.6 °F . Convert it into °C and K .
SECTIONII (EisayType) 2 4 )
(- 8 x 3 >
Note:- Attempt any three questions.
. .
compz jtam ent .ir1

-
5 ( a ) Define Rectangular component of a vector How two vectors can be added by Rectangular
1+4

C
 IMS

5
428
Paste XI ( Subjective ) 429
I .rhnlar 's PHYSICS
,

SECTION-1
Attempt any eight parts . 8 x 2 = 16
.Q NO-2 (i) Give the dra wb ac ks to use the pe rio d of a pe nd ulu m as a tim e sta nd ard .
of sim ple pe nd ulu m is measured by a stopwatch.
( ii) The period
of err ors are po ss ible in the time period?.
What type
ma ny se co nd s are the re in I year ?
(iii ) How ( ii ) Density
Write the dimensions of ( i) Pre ssu re
( iv ) r tha n the vec tor s magnitude ?
'
pon ent gre ate
( v) Can a vector have a com
d zer o a nu ll Op r ?
( vi )
( vii)
Can you
Can a body
ad

Can the velocity

rota te
of
to
ab
an
ou t
ob
its
jec
cen
t rev
^
tre
ers
of
e
gra
the
vity
dir
un
ect
de
ion
r the
wh en
act
acc
ion of its weight ?
ele rat ion is constant ?
( viii )
.
I
( ix )
( x)
If so. give an example
At what point or po
Find the velocity of
Derive a relation bet
ints
a
we
in
hea
en
^ its
vy
imp
bo
pa th
dy
uls e
doe
wh
an
en
d
s a
it
line
pro
ela
ar
jec tile
stic
mo
ally
me
ha ve
col
ntum
its
lide
.
mi
s
nim
wit h
um spe ed , its maximum speed?
a stationary light body.

( xi)
, how the sw ing is pro du ced in a fas t mo vin g cri cke t bal l ?
( xii ) Explain 8 x 2 = 16
Attempt any eight parts .
(J.No.3
( i) Calculate the work done in Kilo joul es in lifti ng a ma ss of I ()kg through a vertical height of 10m .
ILLlil IJiJ
cer tain he igh t , which breaks into pieces.

. fro m
' 4
( ii ) A girl dro ps a cup a

I What energy changes are involved ?

( iii ) What is Escape Velocity ?
(i) What can you conclude from the graph 1 ( iv ) What is meant by Mo me nt of Ine rtia ? Ex pla in its sig nifi can ce .
(ii) Find the value of "g" from the graph 2 (v) Show that orbital angular momentum L( ) = mvr .
(iii) Measure the length of second's pendulum from the graph 1
( Vi ) .
Explain Rotational K E of a Disc and a Hoop.
OR ( vii) Does frequency depend on amplitude for Harmonic Oscillators ?
Answer the following Question on the basis of graph drawn below. ( viii ) Can we realize an ideal simple pendulum?
- 4\
\
Along V -
t\.
. . | null vj - 11,001cm fix.) '
What is Phase ?
ng stri ng giv e rise to
jtxi | mjll Hj - u onion
(x) Is it possible for two identical waves travelling in the same direct ion alo a to

stationary waves?
( xi) Explain why sound travels faster in warm air than in cold air .
( xii ) Define Doppler Effect.
006
.
Q No.4 Attempt any six parts.
6 x 2 = 12
0.05 (>) State Huygen' s Principle . so urc es ?
( ii ) r
Unde what conditions two or more source s of ligh t beh ave as coh ere nt
0.04 ( iii ) Why the Polaroid Sunglasses are better than ordinary sunglasses? .
( iv ) How the light signal is transmitted through optical fibre ? is it for me d ?
ima ge and wh ere
i 0 03 ( v) When object lie within principal focus of convex lens what is the nature of
V ( vi ) Is it possible to convert energy into me cha nic al ene rgy ? Ex pla in wit h an exa mp le .
0 02
of the squ are of ve loc itie s is
rag e
001 X N
( vii) Why is the average
not zero?
vel oci ty of the mo lec ule s in a gas zer o but the ave

Ex »
( viii ) State Carnot’s Theorem. iJIk Do es the re of mi lk rise ?
A thermos fiusk is shaken which eo
ma tem per atu

^^ ^ ^
r
0
01 0 02 ( ix )
.
0
1/ p
0 03 0 04
>
(1.05 0 06

of the - following;
^
(i) What is value of "p" rresponding to 1
co / q = 0.5 cm'1 NOl E:- Attempt any three questions of a vec tor. How two vec tors can be add ed by rectan gular component
*
5 (a ) Define rectangular componen ts -1
.
^
sm

^ ^^
enafvalues of 1/p and 1/q from

M U LTAN 2013
evaluate focal length.
(b)
method?
A football is thr
must be the initial
ow n
sp
Wo
up
ee
rk
wa
d
-
of
rd
the
Energy
at an
ba ll
Pri
an
?
nc
gle

ipl e
of

.
30 wit h res
°
pec t to the ho rizo nta l To throu ii 4Om pass

« 6.( a ) State und ex pla in - IJ a

[ • * , , , ,
2013 (A) Roll No: : 3.1 turn ing rou nd a comer at I 0 m#
en
*ed b
*
>
*
the *"
pieman on rhe o 60 c
* * * **
TIME ALLOWED
cx
. hot
A j1000 kc cu r is be
PHYSICS PAPER-I (b )
pith « force must
jLf '
.-
larg e
(NEW COURSE) circular Is 10m * 4
Hours MncTmplc Pend ulu m un d de rive rel ' P
"**
SUBJECTIVE MAXIMUM MARKS: 83 the 7.( a )
NOTE:- Write same question nt mber ant its part number on answer book, as g ven
paper.
*
 • i

4 Jl) p«« 431

tB
- XI (Subjective )
2ardp ’s PHYSICS
.
A pipe has a length ol I m. Deleunmo the frequencies ol the fundamental and i| c , ®lar
(

.
N ( il
h)
pipc is .
i pen 11.holh ends, ( speed ol sound in

IVliiu* Simple Micioscope I md Ms Magnification

ail 140ms ’ )
( - si ha
" rm°nics ;
3
Sch Graph B
G r a p h b e t w e e n p+q a n d p x q
i
. i: n
In a double '‘In evpeniiienl he second oidei maximum occurs ai 0 - n. 2 Vf '|'|10 5 ill a mM -* i
i >

ii> )
tf
(
wavelength ;,s 65 11'
m
I Vieimmc Hie slu separation
«> m„ 4- m
T
adi
.
‘

< ". ^
) Ia I \ plain Isolheinul and \ diahaiic hocesscs Oi
' )
1 - \

hi .
\ wain hose with an iniem il diameiei ol .0 mm ai ihe oullei discharges 3 ( ) | p 5 i
I .- irri
ii

hill
(
i
^ waier . t
"
! J *
. lhe outlet . Assume the density ol water is 10( H ) ko/ m 3
f iU ulaie ihe waiei speed at .U .
ls n w
ISccundi ,
in / i>
H
—
SECTIQN-III ( PRACTICAL PART) issl v °
'
Ifi. • 11 J4 +H + - hr .—
. TTTT :
.
•
'
i
*
IO4 . V ) Write answers of any four parts TT
4 \ 2=8 :: gm -n
( it I low does the electrome timer measures time ol tree fall accurately ? n tT:: *
. .
» 1
• •
h
( »1
' Why a sv. 1 ew gauge is more iccui ite than a vernier callipers? m s I
;
f
j ;I ]
irl:u
- 1
( III) How the weight ol a metiv uni is loinul when u is suspended to two spring i1 - l :i '
I
balances? J - r
( IN » t he velocity ol sound at 0* V is VI2ms What is its velocity at 2>* V?
t he index ol ic fraction ol glass with respect to air is 3/ 2 .
* 4
:
Hi :

: ; N;
j
::
• t T"|
fi
FTTTTFTrm
r
: [ ri. : n i;
tSE
What 1 s the index ol retraction ohm with res|vet to glass? Ft :
Tn
t
at ; IM
'
1

( Ml \\ hat aie the conditions to I otal Internal Reflection?

pin
1
• M
( Mil What aie the sources ol enoi duimg the experimental verification of law of mass t •
[
• suing using 1 sonometer ?. of vihiatinn ' LC 1e
“
L

ffl
;
I
!* i

( \ m) Design a table ol observations to find acceleration due to gravity b \ oscillating

mass spring system t 1 * ihii •f
hr 1
-

tin Write down the brief procedure to find experimentally the unknown weight of body
vector addition of forces
OR
. by the method of
3 -
y±
« ri =
fl
. n 1 *
1» m
R *

W rite down the biicf procedure to find experimentally the refiactive index of
critical angle method.
the material of a prism by : _ .
a
i -

to Answer the follow ing questions on the basis of graph draw n below .
Graph A m r
SSSSSI
; J 44 M-
I
TT
XT '

!
,
i I!
T
5 :
n*
i.
: is
_ t
1

-Hi s -r
1
nm «h

tHi rail
- l
1
• : T
J T 1y r
.
» I:
1 • 1
• »
!
hm
LTJ
1
11
A 1

hi?
7t

P.ii
. 1
• i i
i
-
!
:
:
I
:; t
nn
. 4i
1
:

i
y
- f

From flie graph plotcd , ai

it

point " p"

T
_l 1
±h —
11 I
• :
•
h! hi I
: I.-Hi
•
1: ( i) Find iJ»o value o / -h;
‘
- uidh
ft* 4 • •
‘I 1 (ii ) Find ihe value of local length of
tens
‘1
l i t
. I,if l

i:l ;

J}
r r^

—- » . :
r 1; r :
GUJRANWALA, 2013
^ n CLAS»5>)
!R7 EAWCOURSEj 11

n\
rl
1
4
1
t

•
• hi
4 i
|
L

.T NOTE:
PHYSICS

-
PAPER-I

Write same question number

^^^
SUii
Hours
MAXIMUM MARKSjM
,
par number un

serve rvasiMiah/c umf ri

^ ^ ^^^
fix
TIME ALLOWED : 3.10

1(<>n

* *» 16
_
. winch eoald
T Attempt any eight parts occurring in nature and mole
'

Q.N0.2 ranee, kilogram

WNIT repetitive phenomenon amount 0 /|ifb*
~ I .. «1
* 1 | U \ Ml » CO Name several il useful to have two units
Why do we find
for

. ..
\ lI
L :l !i
' iS (ii)
Distinguish between
base and derived units
year are there ’
. .. . (iii)
nanoseconds in one
.OR
I I I W I Ml
*• Iwl lllini I
!
How many
.
n yyH | 'C
11 1 I ( iv)
" ' ll lit ' k il||k |l| 111
^
l ll
^ «tu l
'

Answer ihe following queslion on ihe buiis of graph drawn below: -

43? past B XI ( Subjective )

Define IIK tarns unit vector and position vector.

2?ra pS
*r , Scll « lar 's PHYSICS -

error ?
( v) *

do you know about zero

( vi ) ( an you add zero to a null vector? (i )
What SI . unit .
write its
( vii ) ( iive two conditions ol equilibrium.
with momentum .
‘
( iii ) Define
is
ieht
wetg
second
and
pendulum 9
impulse and give its relation What and a virtual image?
( viii )
( tx )
Define
Motion with constant velocity is a special case of motion with constant acv « * i, r. • .
al * on.|s
( iv )
( v ) What is the difference
angle .
between a real image

true ’ * ( vi ) Define critical to show experimental that time period of simple pendulum
the brief procedure
(x) Can velocity of an object reverse the direction when acceleration is constant? II s o , Ve un ( B) Write down
.
( XII Explain circumstances in which acceleration and velocity V p f a car
( b ) v is zero hut a is not zero
^ exanjp |c independent of amplitude
on convex lens experimentally .
(a) a is zero but v is not zero to find out the focal length
brief procedure
( xii ) Explain bow swing is produced in a fast moving cricket ball. Write down the
can you conclude from the graph ?
. .
Q No 3 Attempt any eight parts. « x 2
( CKO What
value of ‘g’ from the graph
girl drops a cup form certain height which breaks into pieces . What energy changes ' 16 Find the
(i) A arc involved?
( ii ) A boy uses a catapult to throw a stone which accidentally smashes a green house window.
possible energy changes . Li « Du
( iii ) What is escape velocity and its mathematical expression?
( iv ) When the mud Mies off ( he tyre of a moving bicycle , in what direction does it fly ?
(v) Why docs a diver Change his body position before and after diving in the pool?
9
( vi ) What are satellites and flow they move around the earth
( vii ) Name two characteristics of simple harmonic motion .
( viii ) Can we realize an ideal simple pendulum?
( ix ) Define the term resonance.
( ) x - Differentiate between longitudinal waves and transverse waves.
( xi ) Why docs sound travel faster In solids than in gases ?
( xii ) How arc beats useful in tuning the musical instruments?
. .
Q No 4 Attempt any six parts. 6 x 2 = 12
(i ) Define wave front and spherical wave front .
( ii ) How would you manage to get more orders of spectra using a diffraction grating? the graph ?
(I) What do you infer from
( iii ) Under what conditions two or more sources of light behave as coherent sources ? .
graph
length of a lens from the
( iv ) One can buy a cheap microscope for use by the children . The images seen in such a microscope ha *t (ii) Find out the focal Graph B
couloured edges. Why is this so?
(v ) Why would it be advantageous to use blue light with a compound microscope ?
^
fviK Derive Boyle s law from kinetic theory of gases.
’
( vii ) Define reversible process and irreversible process.
9
( viii ) Docs entropy of a system increase or decrease due to friction
( ix ) Why does the pressure of a gas in a car lyre increase when it is driven through some distance
SECTION 11 - 1.4
5 / a ) Define scalar product of two vectors and give its four characteristics. 1*
(
h i A football is thrown along an angle of 30^ with respect to horizontal to throw 40 m pass . Whaim *
3
the initial speed of the ball ? 5
6 ( a ) Describe work energy principle .
m Find nece * * )
.
centripetal force.
*
fb ) A 1000 kg car travc ling with a speed of 144 km IT round a curve of radius

7 ( a; What is drawback of Newton s formula for speed of sound in air? How Laplace correct
lOO
.1 9
3
^
j4

A simple pendulum is 50.0 cm long What will be its frequency of vibration at a P

ace where g s
* ^ BAHAWALPUR 2013
(b)

4/ a )
m/* ?
^
Describe the Michel son s experiment for calculation of speed of light.
3
5
650 «*®
-
INTERMEDIATECOURSE
(NEW
— ^— — — —
PAH I ^
=l (1 i in
)
TIME ALLOWED
j

:
sUH
Jr

PAPER -1
. /
velength is Hours
wa PHYSICS
. ,
the second Mcr ma imurr recurs at = 0.25 . The ° 3 MARKS : &3

..
fb > In a double sht experiment 0 MAXIMUM
.^ given in
,

Determine the slit separation. 5

ns
SUBJECTIVEUs part number on an
Z / a / Explain isothermal process and adiabatic procc o
* number and
( b) What gauge pressure is required in the city mains for a stream from a fire hose connc
c e d
NOTE:- Write same question
reach a vertical height of 15 0m? paper.
SECTION III (PI ACTICAL) 4x2
U A ) Writ* short answers to any four questi , n
(b What is vernier constant ?

\
t*
 434
lCS - Xl (Sub jec tive ) 435
lar ' s rH v*
SE CT ION 11
Rol l No . 808- Int cr ( Par t - I ) Ne w Ma rks Sc hem . De inCe Pro jec tile Mo tion . De riv e exp res sio n for Hei ght of Pro ject ile and Tim e of Flig ht . 5
Phy sic s ( Sub ject ive ) Inte r- A - 201 3 Ses sion ( 201 2- 14 ) Ma rks = S3 Tim e : 3. lo ,
5. ( a )
t ons of two aero plan es at any inst ant are repr esen ted by two poin ts A ( 2. 3. 4 ) and B ( 5. 6. 1 ) in

No te: It is com pul sor y lo atte mp t ( 8 ) par ts eac h fro m Q. No . 2 and 3 wh ile atte mp t
Ho urs
~
b
’ Tm . Ca lcu lat e
int erc
the
on ver
dis
sion
tan ce
of P
betw
H .
een
and
the two aero plan es.
K .. E . m
3

atte mp t any ( 03 que stio ns fro m Par t II . Wh ile atte mp t Pan III ( Pra cti cal pan
)
any 6 n - n lr m 6. (a ) Exp lainin
roll s dow n a hill of heic ht 10. 0 m . If the disc start s from rest at the lop of the hill.
° Q.Jyj '

A disc wit hou t slip pin g

-
) ( bl
ins tru ctio ns. accordin8 !o wha t is its spe ed at the bott om .
the gi rr.
Wr ite sam e que stio ns no . and us pa n no. as give n in the ques tion ' ,
Wh a is Do ppl er
'
s Eff ect Wh at ch an ge r Fre
* . que : y Receivi ng by obs erv er whe n sou rce is mov ing
ncy

^ A
pap er 7. ( a )
obs . Exp lain 5
awa y and tow ard s the erv e
SECTION I dro ppe d fro m heig ht ciC fl. SO ,
mop lo a spri ng of spri ng con stan t K = 196 0 N . nrf
A blo ck of ma ss 4 kg is it
Q. No.2 Att emp t any eig ht par ts . ( b)
w
I . find the ma xim um dist an thro ugh Jv hic h the spri ng will be .com pre ssed . 3
(i) Def ine Phy sics, sig nifi can t figu res Xx 2 l 6
( ii ) Def ine Rad ian . Stc rad ian .
= 8. ( a ) Wh at is Com pou nd Mic rosc Wri te dftw n iis wor kin g and mag nifi cati on . 5
( iii ) Can you add zero to a null vec tor ? (h) X -ray s of Wa v | _
th 0 J 50 nm a obs erv ed to und ergo
spa
a firs
of
t ord
the
er
refl
refl
ecti
ect
ng
ion
plan
at a Bra gg ang le of 13. 3°
es in the cry stal ?
, crys tal Wh a ; the inte rpla ner cin g
( iv ) Def ine Dis pla cem ent , ins tan tan eou s vel oci ty . fro ni a qua rt / ( Si 02 ) .

( v)
3
Sla te New ton ’ s Firs t and Thi rd Law of Mo tion.
( vi ) CA KN OT ’ s The orem. 5
Def ine Imp ulse and Iso late Sys tem. Exp lain CA RN slate

-
9. ( a )
, 1 ? Wha t sho uld be the

4r ^
( vii ) Wr ite the Dim ens ion of ( i ) Pre ssu re ( ii ) De nsi ty
( b)
vj fR ov hro ugh W who se Int ern al Dia me ter is 1 cm at a spe ed of '
1 ms
( viii ) Giv e the dra wb ack s to use the per iod of a pen dul um as a tim e stan dar 3
( ix ) Can ( lie ma gni tud e of a vec tor hav e a neg ativ e valu e ?
d
+"
( x) Can a vec tor hav e a com pon ent gre ater than the vec tor’ s mag 4 x 2=8
nitu de?
( xi ) At wh at poi nt or poi nts in its pat h doc s a pro ject ile bas e it min imu .
I0 ( A ) Write shor t answe rs to any -
four que stio ns :

.
Q No.3
( xii )

(i )
Wh y Fog dro ple ts app ear to be sus pen ded in air ’
Att emp t any eigh t par ts.
’
' m spe ed , its max imu m spe ed ?

Cal cul ate the wo rk don e in kilo joul es in lift ing a mas s of 10 kg thro ugh heig ht of 10 m. =
8 x 2 16
(i)

( ii )
( in i
( iv )
fine Vernier Constant .
How Acc urat e
.. is the Scr
Wh a is h e use of ins d e
ew
(
Gau
OR Upp .
ge 9

er ) jaw s and
Wh at fun ctio n of sou ndin g box ol son ome ter is ?
slid n g stnp m Vem e r .
Cal . . per ,

( ii ) -
Wh en a roc ket re ente rs the atm osp her e it s nos e con e bec om es scry hot '* Wh
’
ere doe s this hea it . (v ) Wh at kind of vib rati on is exe cut ed b\ Son ome ter ?
com es fro m ? ( vii Wh at is Prin cipa l axi s of a Len s ?
( iii ) Wh at is mea nt by Mo me nt of Ine rtia ? Exp lain its sign ific anc e? ( vii ) Define Refraction of Light .
( iv ) Exp lain the diff ere nce bet wee n Tan gen tial Vel oci ty and Ang ular Vel oci ty ( viii ) Wh en Zer o Erro r is pos itiv e and w hen it is nega tive ? is ind epe nde nt of
per iod of sim ple pen dul um
( v) Wh at are Geo-Sta tion ary Sat elli tes? ( B) Wri te dow n the pro ced ure to sho w exp erim ent ally that time

( vi ) Nam e two cha rac teri stic s of Sim ple I larm om c Mo tion . Am plit ude .
( vii )

.
Exp lain the term s No de and An tino de.
( viii )
( ix )
Dif fere ntia te bet wee n free and For ced Osc illa tion s .
Wh at is tota l dis tan ce trav elle d by an obj ect mo \ ing wit h SH M in a tim e equ al to its per iod if amp li
A?
A A \
^ 6
(C )
(i)
Wri te dow n the pro ced ure to

Ans wer the follo win g que stio ns h e bas is

Fin d the Ave ruge Vel ocit y at tin* t * .3 Sec
.of Dis plac eme n Tim e Gra ph .
(x) Wh at fea ture s do lon gitu din al wav es hav e in com mo n with tran - '. ers e wav es| ’ ( ii ) Wh ut this Gra ph infe r ?
( xi )
t
OR
Ho w astr ono mou rs use the Dop pler effe ct to cal cul ate the spe eds of diff ere nt star s?
( p x q ) unii answer the following questions .
( xii ) Ho w Pol luti on can be red uce d ? Gra ph betw een ( p + unJ
Gra ph -
. .
Q No 4 Att emp t any six part s. 6 X 2 12= (i)
( ii )
Find the Slop e of
Whal does Slope represent
.
(i ) Sta le Hu yge’ s Prin cip le 9
( ii ) Ho w the pow er is los t in Opt ical Fib re?
( iii )
( iv )
.
Und er wha t conditions two or more sou rce s ol ii jhi behave s C iierent Sources .
An oil film spr ead ing ove r a wet foo t th sho ws coh rs. Ho w doe s it hap pen 9
(v) Wh at is mea nt by Lin ear Ma gni fica tion and Ang ula r Ma gni fica tion ?
( vi ) Der ive Cha rles’ Law fro m Kin etic The ory of Ga ses. * '
( vii ) Is it pos sib le to con stru ct a hea t engine iha t wil l not exp ell hea t into the atmosphere ,

( viii ) Wh al hap pen to the tem pera te e of the is left runn ing
m whe n an air conditioner
mid dle of the roo m ?
( ix) Is it pos sibl e to con vert inte rna ner gy into Me cha nic al ene rgy Exp lain wit h exa mp
 Ampere James Watt

~ rr- .

1736-1819
1775-1836
1824 - 1907
1727 lM8 -1889 Stephen Salter
- Simon Laplace Christian Doppler
Pierre

'I
r
* I' - Amedeo Avogadro
Graph between p+q and p q
*
i rrt
-:
i
*
* •I •
; : : p+cr - 50: S3 62 ' 69 -
TIT.S :T6
nrzx :
“ -h, pxq | 504 |
0 645 5 'W.
-;J • *

-rrr » * T

-H •
zu-
•

rn rrH Tt 1776-1856
n±
I
)

*t 11 ' ; |* tj
ff = P
t -
i
Galileo Galilei

TT^m
TIT-t7-T. f • «
r:I
*I •i •i•
; Bb
i
WE& i
»

-tuua; 1564 - 1642